113 27 34MB
English Pages 691 Year 1999
s
English Grammar a generative perspective
oar i
_ Liliane Haegeman Jacqueline Guéron
English Grammar”
Cee
sities)
Litt
a Pod | Met
petgvet.i
A ban otal, seat
oth
sal Ls wittihagewt
salvarere
A
eaten?
tttipe
|
tas Crteygentt
oy itd
rie) wulser oe]
‘ben coed atttbiagail ot pestaghuriwh ed) noNopsA wyneegt
20 iG bie —snit
oa
Blackwell Textbooks in Linguistics —
Liliane Haegeman
Andrew Spencer Helen Goodluck Ronald Wardhaugh Martin Atkinson Diane Blakemore Michael Kenstowicz Deborah Schiffrin WD SW HNN WOON John Clark and
Colin Yallop Natsuko Tsujimura Robert D. Borsley Nigel Fabb Irene Heim and Angelika Kratzer Liliane Haegeman and Jacqueline Guéron Stephen Crain and Diane Lillo-Martin
Introduction to Government and Binding Theory (Second Edition) Morphological Theory Language Acquisition
Introduction to Sociolinguistics (Third Edition) Children’s Syntax Understanding Utterances Phonology in Generative Grammar Approaches to Discourse An Introduction to Phonetics and Phonology (Second Edition) An Introduction to Japanese Linguistics
Modern Phrase Structure Grammar Linguistics and Literature Semantics in Generative Grammar English Grammar: A Generative Perspective An Introduction to Linguistic Theory and Language Acquisition
English Grammar A Generative Perspective
Liliane Haegeman and
Jacqueline Guéron
,
BLACKWELL
TP bis hes
Copyright © Liliane Haegeman and Jacqueline Guéron, 1999 The right of Liliane Haegeman and Jacqueline Guéron to be identified as the authors of this work has been asserted in accordance with the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988 First published 1999
DANS ts MOY
YS 3h 1
Blackwell Publishers Ltd 108 Cowley Road Oxford OX4 1JF UK
Blackwell Publishers Inc. 350 Main Street
Malden, Massachusetts 02148 USA
All rights reserved. Except for the quotation of short passages for the purposes of criticism and review, no part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior permission of the publisher. Except in the United States of America, this book is sold subject to the condition that it shall not, by way of trade or otherwise, be lent, resold, hired out, or
otherwise circulated without the publisher’s prior consent in any form of binding or cover other than that in which it is published and without a similar condition including this condition being imposed on the subsequent purchaser. Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Haegeman, Liliane M. V. English grammar : a generative perspective / Liliane Haegeman and Jacqueline Guéron. p. cm. — (Blackwell textbooks in linguistics; 14) Includes bibliographical references (p. ) and index. ISBN 0-—631-18838-X
(hardback : alk. paper). — ISBN 0-631-18839-8
(paperback: alk. paper) 1. English language—Grammar, Generative. I Ditle weleeSeness PE1106.H27 425-dc21
I. Guéron, Jacqueline.
1999 98-7150 CIP
British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data
A CIP catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library Typeset in 10 on 12 pt Sabon by Graphicraft Limited, Hong Kong Printed in Great Britain by T.J. International, Padstow, Cornwall
This book is printed on acid-free paper
Contents
Acknowledgements Introduction 1
THE STRUCTURE
0
1
2
OF ENGLISH
SENTENCES
Preliminaries: knowledge of language and grammar 0.1 Grammaticality 0.2 The aim of this book 0.3 Aim and scope of this chapter The meaning of sentences: argument structure 1.1 The components of the clause: thematic structure 1.1.1 Verbs and their arguments 1.1.2 The theta-criterion 1.1.3 Adjuncts 1.1.4 Theta-roles and clause structure 1.2 Locality and thematic structure 1.3. Implicit arguments 1.4 Do all verbs assign theta-roles? 1.5 Do only verbs assign theta-roles? 1.6 Do all noun phrases receive theta-roles? 1.6.1 NPs as adjuncts 1.6.2 Expletive subjects 1.6.3 Weather verbs 1.7 Summary: argument structure Phrase structure 2.1 Structure: clauses and constituents 2.1.1 The semantic criterion 2.1.2 Substitution 2.1.3. Movement 2.1.4 Questions: substitution and movement 2.1.5 Deletion 2.1.6 Focalizing a constituent
Contents
V1
2.1.7
Further evidence for separating the verb and the auxiliary
2.1.8
Summary
2.1.9
2.2
Further evidence for structure: rightward movement of constituents Words and categories 2.2.1
Duden 2.2.3 2.2.4
2.3
2.4
2.5
Nouns
eVELS Adjectives Adverbs
2.2.5
Prepositions
2.2.6 2.2.7
Lexical categories Functional categories
2.2.8
Summary
Phrases 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5
Noun Phrases or NPs Prepositional Phrases or PPs Verb Phrases or VPs Adjective Phrases or APs Summary: lexical categories and phrasal categories Layering 2.4.1 VP-layers 2.4.2 NP-layers 2.4.3 AP, AdvP and PP 2.4.4 The X-bar format of phrase structure 2.4.5 The X-bar format and adjunction Functional projections 2.5.1 S, binary branching and AUX 2.5.2 Lexical verbs and auxiliaries 2;5.3 5 9 as a projectionion) 2.5.4 Tas AGR and T (i) 2-5
1Psand CP
2.5.6 Adjunction to the clause 2.5.7 Functional heads and lexical heads 2.5.8 Selection and locality 2.5.9 Small clauses Grammatical functions and case 3.1 The subject NP 3.2 Non-overt subjects 3.3 Non-NP subjects 3.3.1 Clausal subjects 3.3.2 PP subjects 3.3.3 Small clause subjects 3.4 Expletive subjects 2ieod Gad 3.4.2 Existential there 3.4.3 The subject of weather verbs
Contents
3.5
3.6 3.4
The object Seduad NP objects Sead. Speculations on the double object construction in English = eee Non-NP objects The subject requirement Case 3.aet 3. AZ 37.3 3.7.4 ore 3.7.6
Pronouns and morphological case The distribution of nominative and accusative case The Case-Filter Locality and case-assignment Case-assigners Summary
Summary Exercises
Bibliographical notes
2
MOVEMENT AND LOCALITY 0 Aim and scope of this chapter 1
Movement
1.1
‘iy
4.3
Questions teil Preliminary description The status of whether and if Pb Movement and locality 1,3 1.1.4 Extracting the subject EA.5 Adjunct extraction 1.1.6 Islands L.1,2 Summary: wh-movement Relative clauses
Preliminary description Analysis Evidence for the movement analysis Further examples Infinitival relatives Subject relatives with that Double movement Summary: relative clauses and interrogative clauses Passivization and raising £3.34 Argument structure of active and passive 43-2 Raising Passivization and raising: movement to subject 433 position 1.3.4 NP-movement is case-driven 433 NP-movement as a Last Resort and the Principle of Economy 1.3.6 The category of the moved constituent NP-movement: summary 1d
vil
Contents
Vill
1.4
Movement in English 1.4.1 Survey 1.4.2 C-command 1.4.3 Locality 1.4.4 Two types of XP-movement 1.4.5
2
3
A-movement and A’-movement: the identification
of movement types The canonical subject position and the VP-internal subject hypothesis aed| Floating quantifiers pegp Movement of the subject NP ee Locality and the VP-internal subject hypothesis Transitives, intransitives and unaccusatives (ergatives)
One-argument verbs and the base-position of the subject oe The existential construction 3.2.1 English 3.2.2 The existential construction and post-verbal subjects in French Movement and case Unaccusative verbs in English Summary: two kinds of one-argument verbs Head-movement, prepositions and particles 4.1 Head-movement in English: a survey 4.2 The verb-particle construction in English 4.2.1 Introduction 4.2.2 The PP 4.2.3 The particle 4.3 Passivization and particles 4.3.1 Verb-particles and passive 4.3.2 Passive and preposition stranding 4.4 Summary: particles Summary Exercises Bibliographical notes 3.1
4
3
DEVELOPMENTS IN THE ANALYSIS OF THE CLAUSE 0 Aim and scope of this chapter 1 Subjects across categories and be as a raising verb Deak Copular sentences 1.1.1 Copular sentences: a first analysis 1.1.2 Beas a one-argument verb 1.1.3 Subject positions 1.1.4 Functional projections and adjectives 1.1.5 Be as a raising verb Progressive be Passive be Some speculations on perfect have Summary: be as a raising verb
Contents
2
Functional projections and the Split-INFL hypothesis 2.1 Finite clauses 2.2 Non-finite clauses 2.3
2.4
2.5
V-movement across adverbs 2.3.1 V-movement across adverbs in finite clauses 2.3.2 V-movement across adverbs in non-finite clauses The Split-INFL hypothesis: I as AGR and T (ii) 2.4.1 Two landing sites of the verb 2.4.2 Negative sentences in French 2.4.3. Morphological evidence Further considerations on the structure of English clauses
2.5.1 The Split-INFL in English 2.5.2 A note on subject movement 2.5.3 NegP in English: not versus n’t 2.5.4 Speculations on copula be and possessive have 2.6 Speculations on the subjunctive in English Extended projection 3.1 VP as the semantic core of the clause 3.2 Extended projection and subjunctive selection The Split-CP hypothesis 4.1 Head-movement and locality 4.2 The structure of CP 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4
4.3
Topic and focus 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3.
4.4
Negative inversion Topicalization Negative inversion and topicalization More functional projections in CP Operator versus non-operator Hungarian focalization Wh-movement in embedded clauses in English
Conclusion: the split CP
Summary Exercises
Bibliographical notes
4
ASPECTS OF THE SYNTAX OF NOUN PHRASES 0 Aim and scope of this chapter 1
Binding 1.1 The interpretation of reflexives 1.1.1 Antecedents 1.1.2 C-command and binding 1.1.3 A-binding 1.1.4 Locality conditions on binding: the binding domain 1.1.5 Reflexives as subjects 1.1.6 Reflexives contained within subjects
1.2 1.3 1.4
1.1.7. Summary: reflexives and binding Anaphors: reflexives and reciprocals
Pronouns R-expressions
Contents
1.8
Summary: the Binding Theory Binding and movement: A-binding and A’-binding Consequences of the VP-internal subject hypothesis for binding 1.7.1 Binding relations 1.7.2 Movement Summary: binding relations 1.8.1 A-binding 1.8.2 A’-binding
Empty categories: an overview Deh Traces: a recapitulation 2.1.1 Wh-movement 2.1.2 NP-movement 2.1.3 Properties of traces 252 Non-overt arguments in the base 2.2.1 Non-overt subjects in non-finite clauses 2.2.2 Non-overt subjects are not traces 2.2.3. The null subject in Italian 23 Some reasons for postulating non-overt arguments 2.3.1 The subject requirement 2.3.2 Argument structure 2.3.3 Paraphrases 2.3.4 Arguments based on locality: binding 2.4 The typology of non-overt elements 2.4.1 Base generation or movement 2.4.2 Identification of empty categories Des Some further speculations on base-generated
non-overt arguments Qi5elepro
25 nePRO 2.0 Summary: the typology of non-overt elements Speculations on the functional structure of the nominal projection: NP as DP ool Lexical heads versus functional heads: a recapitulation
The nominal projection The specifier of NP NP and clause 3.4.1
325i
3.6
Argument structure
3.4.2 ‘Passivization’ in the NP 3.4.3 Subject of NP 3.4.4 Referential dependencies: binding and control 3.4.5 Summary: NP and clause Functional projections in the NP 32e1 SNP2asyDP 3.5.2 [P-type projections in DP Demonstratives and DP 3.6.1 3.6.2
Demonstratives in [Spec,DP] Demonstratives as maximal projections
Contents
3.7
3.6.3 Some further speculations on demonstratives 3.6.4 Final remarks Pre-nominal adjectival modifiers 3.7.1 Adjectives and APs: three proposals 3.7.2 The adjective is a head selecting an NP complement 3.7.3 Problems for the adjunction analysis of APs 3.7.4 Speculations on adverbial modifiers and clause structure 3.7.5. Summary and further discussion
Summary Exercises
Bibliographical notes 5
FROM STRUCTURE TO INTERPRETATION 0 Aim and scope of this chapter 1 Introduction: syntax and interpretation 1.1 1.2 1.3
Interpretation and semantics Structure and interpretation Compositionality 1.3.1 The interpretation of the sentence is a function of its parts
1.4
Economy and interpretation 1.4.1 Full interpretation 1.4.2 Questions concerning the application of the
1.3.2
2
Idioms
1.4.3.
Principle of Full Interpretation Case and AGR
1.4.4 1.4.5
Expletive constructions Full Interpretation and empty categories
1.5 1.6
Predication Locality and interpretation
1.7
Summary
The functional layers 2.1 CP and discourse connections: a first survey 2.1.1 Illocutionary force and CP: a first illustration 2.1.2
2.2
Discourse connections: focalization, topicalization and scene-setting
Illocutionary force 2.2.1 Embedded questions 2.2.2 Root questions 2.2.3 Do-insertion in negative sentences 2.3. Tense and C 2.3.1 Some examples 2.3.2 Embedded tenses 2.3.3 Locality and tense interpretation 2.4 Summary
Xl
Contents
Xil
3
6
Logical Form 3.1 Quantifiers 3.1.1 The interpretation of quantifiers 3.1.2 The syntactic representation of quantifier interpretation and Logical Form 3.1.3 Bound pronouns 3.2 Wh-phrases and LF movement 3.2.1 Wh-phrases as operators 3.2.2. Wh-raising 3.3 Reconstruction 3.3.1 The Binding Theory and reconstruction 3.3.2 VP fronting and reconstruction 3.4 Expletive replacement and Full Interpretation 3.4.1 Existential sentences and there 3.4.2 Do-insertion 3.5 Consequences for language typology 3.5.1 V-movement revisited 3.5.2 Checking Theory 3.5.3 Movement and language typology 3.6 Conclusion 3.7 Summary Summary Exercises Bibliographical notes
THE NEW
0 1
COMPARATIVE
SYNTAX
Aim and scope of this chapter Introduction 1.1 The comparative approach 1.2
Principles and parameters in syntactic theory
1.2.1 Grammar and knowledge of language 1.2.2 Acquisition of linguistic knowledge Parameters and word-order variation 2.1 Verb movement to AGR 2.2 2.3
N-to-AGR movement SOV languages versus SVO languages 2.3.1 The head parameter 2.3.2 The universal base and object shift
2.3.3 Diachronic developments Summary: principles and parameters 2.4.1 Principles 2.4.2 Parameters 2.4.3 The interaction of parameters and principles Parametric variation between languages: the pro-drop parameter 3.1 Non-overt subjects in finite clauses 3.2 Relating the properties 3.2.1 The identification of pro and rich AGRs 3.2.2 Expletives 3.2.3 Post-verbal subjects and non-overt expletives
2.4
Contents
3.2.4
3.3 3.4
4
Extraction of the subject across an overt declarative complementizer 3.2.5 The clustering of properties Syntax is driven by morphology Speculations on post-verbal non-overt pronouns 3.4.1 The parameter 3.4.2 The non-overt object is syntactically active 3.4.3 Non-overt subjects in small clauses 3.4.4 Two types of post-verbal pro 3.4.5 Object pro and diachronic development
Register variation
4.1
Non-overt subjects in abbreviated English 4.1.1 The data 4.1.2 Arguments for non-overt subjects 4.1.3 4.1.4
4.1.5 4.1.6
4.2
Constraints on non-overt subjects Arguments against the pro-drop analysis The CP level and the identification of non-overt subjects Summary
4.1.7 Some further data The delimitation of movement and complex styles 4.2.1. Recapitulation: movement and locality 4.2.2 Extraction from adjunct clauses 4.2.3 Complex sentences 4.2.4 Movement in English and in Italian 4.2.5 The Latinate style 4.2.6 Stylistic variation and parametric variation Summary: core grammars and peripheral grammars
4.3 Summary Exercises , Bibliographical notes References Index
Xl
Acknowledgements
This book was not written in a vacuum. Its starting point was a need we felt among our own students of English for a book which, while being theory-based, would retain a focus on the empirical data of the English language in all its varieties. We wrote this book for our students, and we thank our students in Paris, in Geneva, and in Sarajevo in the summer of 1996, for their willingness to try out preceding versions. Their contributions helped us to improve the book considerably. Special thanks are due to William Rutherford and to the late Herman Wekker for detailed comments on a previous version of the text. Thanks also to Nadia Golaz, Daniela Russi and Manuela Schoenenberger for useful comments, to Margaret Aherne for the copy-editing, and to Katrien Geers and Johan Haegeman for compiling the index. Jacqueline Guéron Paris
Liliane Haegeman Geneva 15 December 1997
Introduction —————
rr
ae
ae
This book offers an introduction to the study of English grammar from the perspective of generative grammar. We wrote this book primarily with the undergraduate student of English in mind; it will also be useful for the undergraduate student of linguistics who is particularly interested in the structure of English. The title of our book reflects its dual purpose: we analyse important grammatical phenomena of English; we also offer an introduction to a theoretical approach to language study based on the generative point of view. To satisfy the first aim, the book covers a wide range of empirical data. It does not attempt to offer an exhaustive survey of the grammatical phenomena of English, however, as would be the case in the excellent tradition of grammarians such as Otto Jespersen or Randolph Quirk, to name but two. Our aim is to provide the reader with a coherent and systematic approach to the structure of English. This aim informs our discussion of basic grammatical constructions, such as passivization, and interrogative and relative clause formation. The specific analyses of empirical data do not consider these data in isolation but rather as part of an overall analysis of English and of natural language in general. Also, we do not conceive of the grammar of English as a collection of individual constructions, each with its specific properties; rather, in the tradition of generative grammar, founded by Noam Chomsky in the late 1950s, we consider language to be a rule-governed system. The individual constructions of English discussed in this book result from the interaction of various components of the underlying language system. We try to make explicit the underlying system of rules, and attempt to formulate an explicit, coherent grammar of English in which the specific constructions which we discuss are described and analysed in the most economical way. We show how a restricted set of principles, a grammar, can account for a wide range of phenomena of a language, here English. As mentioned, the title of the book reflects its dual aim. Each of the two goals of this book informs and enriches the other. This book does not claim to offer an exhaustive description of English, nor is it an introduction to one specific theory. What we want to do is to show the reader how English can be studied in a systematic theoretical approach. We show that such an approach allows us not
only to analyse a wide range of empirical data of English, but also to discover
2,
Introduction
new phenomena of the language, and to understand why other, readily imaginable, phenomena never occur. To make the goals of the book more concrete, we will outline its major areas of enquiry. The book contains six chapters, five of which concentrate mainly, though not exclusively, on English. The last chapter enlarges the discussion by introducing issues of comparative syntax. This comparative approach is not accidental. One important way that this book differs from more traditional grammars of English is that we do not consider the grammar of English to be an isolated idiosyncratic entity. Rather, we assume throughout the book that the grammatical principles we introduce to account for English data are valid for other languages as well. Ideally, these principles are valid universally. To study English is to investigate both what English has in common with other languages, and how it differs from them. Those readers who may have thought that languages can vary indefinitely, so that there can exist languages which have nothing at all in common, will no doubt be (pleasantly) surprised to discover how many properties languages share. In the discussion we will often use comparative arguments in order to uncover some hitherto unsuspected property of English, or to support a hypothesis about English and about language in general. Following the generative tradition, we concentrate on sentence grammar, that is, on principles that distinguish possible English sentences from impossible ones. We will only rarely refer to grammatical relations involving an element outside the sentence. This is not because we think that relations between sentences within a discourse are not interesting. But we assume that the study of discourse phenomena presupposes the grammar of the sentence, so it is logical to begin with the study of the sentence. The structure of the sentence (or clause, to use a technical term) is thus the object of our enquiry. In chapter 1 we try to identify the principles which determine the way a sentence is built up from words and morphemes. We assume that the sentence and all the units which constitute the sentence, i.e. its constituents, have the same internal organization. We adopt the X-bar theory of phrase structure which stipulates that all syntactic constituents are organized around a head, X. The head, X, is a simple syntactic constituent drawn from the lexicon and consisting of any word or morpheme category. X is expanded by the addition of a complement to form a larger unit, X’ (X-bar), which in turn combines with a specifier to form XP, the maximal projection of X. The complement ZP and the specifier YP in (la) have an internal structure identical to that of XP itself, as shown
n (1b).
Go ie
XP
specifier
x’ xX
YA
complement ZP
Introduction
b.
3
XP ee
specifier
YP sib thse pee “0
Xx’ gibson audi rane X
ry.”
heacinthetrnee LP
complement
¥
KP
syectmmatlas Spec
es nh
Ze
ee yas eee NP
In keeping with a long-standing tradition in the study of grammar, the constituent structure of a sentence is taken to be the product of the interaction of two types of information: (i) lexical information encoded on lexical heads such as nouns or verbs, and (ii) functional information encoded on functional categories such as inflectional morphemes or conjunctions, called complementizers. The distinction between lexical information and functional information is crucial for the grammar of sentences. For instance, verbs are either lexical, like run or know, or functional, like the modal auxiliaries (will, shall, can, may, must), the aspectual auxiliaries have and be, and the auxiliary do. The order of constituents in English negative sentences depends on the type of tensed verb, as illustrated in (2) and (3). If the verb is lexical, like sing in (2), it is found to the right of the negative adverbial moz; if it is functional, like be in (3), it is placed to the left of not. The alternative orderings are ungrammatical, as indicated by the asterisk (*).
(2)
*Thelma sings not. & 7. Thelma does not sing.
(3)
a. b.
*Louise does not be happy. Louise is not happy.
Moreover, only a functional verb may invert with the subject in an interrogative sentence in English; a lexical verb cannot move past the subject. We will see in this book that the data in (4) follow from those in (2) and (3).
(4)
a. b. c. d.
Did you see John last night? Have you seen John already? Are you seeing John tonight? *See you John tonight?
is The existence of functional categories reveals that the structure of a sentence a contain may sentence A tions. considera not determined purely by semantic nouns, unlike that in meaning, lexical no have number of constituents which
event, they do not denote a person or thing, unlike verbs, they do not denote an
4
Introduction
and unlike adjectives, they do not denote a property. Yet these apparently contentless elements are obligatory components of the sentence. They may even require the presence of other apparently contentless constituents in their context. For instance, verbs have agreement features of [person] and [number], which in themselves contribute nothing to the meaning of the verb itself and which, at the level of sentence interpretation, merely duplicate the number and person features of the subject. In (5), for example, the third person singular morpheme -s on the verb sings does not add anything to the interpretation of the sentence. The third person singular nature of the subject is encoded independently in the subject noun phrase: the teacher is singular, the teachers would be plural. The teacher is third person; I or you would be first or second person, respectively. (5)
The teacher sings a song in the shower every day.
Every finite sentence in English must have a subject whose agreement features match those of the verb. The subject is required even if there is no semantic justification for its presence. In (6a) the subject lacks semantic content: it is an expletive or dummy pronoun. Its only function seems to be to occupy the subject position to provide grammatical features ([third person, singular]) which agree with those of the verb. Absence of the meaningless expletive pronoun renders the sentence ungrammatical. (6)
a.
It is raining.
b.
*Is raining.
Whether or not a meaningless element is overtly present in the sentence structure depends on the morphosyntax of the language in question. Elements which are obligatorily present in English may be obligatorily absent, and implicit, in other languages. For instance, in Italian, the analogue of (6b) is grammatical, while that of (6a) is ungrammatical. (7)
av
~ Piovel rain-pres-3sg
b.
*Cio piove. it/that rain-pres-3sg
Conversely, a constituent which is optional in English may be obligatory in some other language. For example, in English, the complementizer that is optional in certain embedded clauses (8) and in certain relative clauses (9), but the analogous complementizer que is always obligatory in French (10)—(11).
(8)
a. b.
I know that Louise is determined to change her lifestyle. I know Louise is determined to change her lifestyle.
(9)
a. b.
The man that I like best is Harry. The man I like best is Harry.
Introduction (10)
a. b.
Je sais que Louise veut changer de vie. *Je sais Louise veut changer de vie.
(11)
a b.
Lhomme que je préfére est Harold. *ULhomme je préfére est Harold.
5
Chapter 1 introduces the principles which determine what kind of components the sentence minimally contains. We will see that the predicate of a sentence (verb or adjective) is its semantic core: it determines the number and types of arguments that a sentence must contain, its argument structure. A verb like give refers to an activity which crucially involves three participants: the agent, the one who gives; the theme, the object of the transaction of giving; and the goal, the one who receives the theme argument. A sentence containing the verb give requires that these three lexical arguments be realized by three different constituents of the sentence. As we propose that every sentence contains a subject, one of the arguments of the predicate can always be realized by the subject. In our example, the agent argument of give is realized as the subject. The remaining arguments are realized by constituents contained in the projection of the verb, the VP: the goal argument is realized by the indirect object and the theme argument is realized by the direct object (12a). When one of the arguments of the predicate is missing, the sentence becomes ungrammatical (12b).
(12)
a.
b.
Thelma [yp gave Louise a book]. AGENT GOAL THEME *Thelma [yp gave Louise]. AGENT GOAL
The verb see has only two arguments, the perceiver and the thing perceived. We continue to assume that one argument of the verb is always realized by the subject; the perceiver argument of see is realized by the subject. The second argument of see is realized inside the VP (13a). Since see has only two lexical arguments, a sentence based on see containing three arguments is ungrammatical (13b).
(13)
a. b.
Thelma [yp saw the book]. *Thelma [yp saw Louise the book].
Chapter 1 also offers a discussion of the distribution of the case-marked
feminine proforms of the noun phrase. In (14), for instance, the third person form her. noun takes two forms: the nominative form she and the accusative the accusatThe nominative form functions as the subject of the sentence, while ive form is the direct object.
(14)
a.
She met her in the park.
however. This is We cannot identify nominative case with the subject function, functions as the shown in (14b) and (14c), in which the accusative form her subject of the non-finite verb.
6
(14)
Introduction
b. c.
Iexpect her to meet Louise in the park. For her to meet Louise in the park was surprising.
We will see in this book that noun phrases may also contain subjects. In (14d) and (14), the subject function is realized inside the noun phrase by the possess-
ive pronoun and by genitive case-marking on the noun phrase, respectively. (14)
d. e.
Her analysis of the situation was controversial. Louise’s analysis of the situation was controversial.
Following the discussion of the principles which determine the major constituents of the sentence in chapter 1, chapter 2 introduces the syntactic mechanism of movement. This mechanism links one constituent of a sentence to two or more syntactic positions within it. Consider the sentences in (15): (15)
a. b. c.
I will see ten friends at the party. How many friends will you see at the party? How many friends I will see at the party!
The verb see has two arguments. One is realized by the subject, I in (15a) and (15c), and you in (15b). The second argument of see is realized by the direct object. In (15a), the direct object ten friends occupies the canonical post-verbal object position. In (15b) and (15c), however, the direct object how many friends occupies a sentence-initial position. We know that the noun phrase in initial position is related in some way to the post-verbal direct object position, for no other phrase may appear in that position.
(15)
d. e.
*How many friends will you see them/the boys/Jack at the party? “How many friends I will see them/the boys/Jack at the party!
In order to relate the sentence-initial constituent in (15b) and (15c) to the canonical direct object position, we propose that the word-order in (15b) and in (15c) is derived by movement. Both (15b) and (15c) are formed — or, to use a technical term, generated — by the leftward movement of the direct object from its canonical post-verbal position (15a) to the initial position of the sentence. The auxiliary will may also move. From its original position to the right of the subject, the auxiliary moves past the subject to a position between the fronted object and the subject in (15b). (15b’) and (15c’) illustrate the derivation of (15b) and (15c) respectively.
(15)
b’.
How many friends will you ——
c’.
How many friends I will see ——
see ——
at the party?
at the party!
Introduction
7
Postulating the existence of operations which move constituents allows us to account for the parallelism of structure and meaning among the sentences in (15). Movement is a powerful grammatical tool. If syntactic movement were completely unconstrained, we could generate many sentences which are in fact ungrammatical, such as (16a) and (16b).
(16)
a. b.
*Ten friends will I meet at the party. *I will meet how many friends at the party.
In (16a), both the direct object and the auxiliary have undergone leftward move-
ment; this results in an ungrammatical sentence. In (16b), the object and the auxiliary have not moved leftward, and the sentence is also ungrammatical. In order for the grammar to successfully distinguish grammatical from ungrammatical sentences, it must restrict the constituents which can undergo movement,
the positions to which they can move, called the landing site, and the distance which a single element can cover. In chapter 2, we propose a number of principles which constrain movement operations. These principles can be defined positively and negatively. Certain principles make it obligatory to move some constituent in a structure, as is the case of the direct object in (15b) and (15c). Other principles disallow movement in a particular structure; for*instance, the auxiliary may not move in (16a).
In chapter 2 we identify the constituents of the sentence which undergo movement. The examples in (15) suggest, for instance, that in English, a constituent such as how many friends in (15b) and (15c) must undergo leftward movement, while a constituent such as ten friends in (15a) must not. The constituents which undergo movement in (15b) and (15c) are said to be operators; they determine the illocutionary force of the sentence, i.e. the fact, for example, that (15b) is interrogative and (15c) is exclamative, while (15a) is a declarative sentence. A constituent like how many friends must occupy a position which allows it to have scope over the entire sentence it relates to. This position can be the initial position in the sentence. The distance an element can move must also be constrained. One might conclude, on the basis of examples such as (17a), that leftward movement of the operator is unbounded. In (17a), the direct object has moved out of the most deeply embedded sentence into the first position of the highest clause:
(17)
a.
[How many friends did you say [that Mary thought [that I would see
at the party]]]?
In fact, movement is highly restricted. (17b), for instance, in which the operator has moved out of the most deeply embedded clause and has crossed over an intervening operator, is ungrammatical (signalled by the asterisk) or highly degraded (signalled by the asterisk plus the question mark):
(17)
b.
*2?{How many friends did you say [that Mary wondered [where I would see
Hl?
the ultimate The ungrammatical or degraded status of (17b) is not due to far from its landing site, the initial position of the highest sentence, being too
8
Introduction
original position. The landing site of how many friends in (17b) is no further away from its original position than in (17a). The contrast is due to an overriding principle which constrains syntactic movement: locality. In order for the object of the most deeply embedded sentence to raise to the initial position of the highest sentence, it must first pass through the initial positions of the intervening sentences on its way, as (17a’) illustrates for (17a):
(17)
a’.
[How many friends did you say [ that Mary thought [ that I would see
at the party]]]?
The iterative local movement displayed in (17a) is impossible in (17b), however. As shown in (17b’), the position to the left of the subject of the most deeply embedded sentence is occupied by the operator where. This means that one of the positions through which the operator how many friends would have to move in order to reach the higher landing site to the left of the subject of the highest clause is blocked.
(17)
b’.
[How many friends did you say [ that Mary wondered +
[where I would see
eae
It thus turns out that an operator may move out of an embedded declarative sentence, as in (17a), but not out of an indirect question, as in (17b).
(17) shows how locality plays a role in determining the movement of an entire phrase, or an XP constituent, from its original position to a higher position in the sentence. Locality also constrains movement of a single head, X, to a higher position. (18a) shows that the auxiliary verb have can move from its original position which follows the subject in a declarative sentence to a position preceding the subject in an interrogative sentence. (18)
a. b.
You have done it. Have you done it?
Similarly, in (19b) the modal auxiliary could inverts with the subject and the result is grammatical. (19)
a. b.
You could have done it. Could you have done it?
(19c) is ungrammatical, however.
(19)
c.
*Have you could ——
done it?
Introduction
9
In (19), the auxiliary have has raised to a position to the left of the subject, bypassing the auxiliary could. This is an illegitimate move. (19c) violates the
locality conditions on movement. The move of the auxiliary could to the initial
position in (19b) is shorter than the move of have to the same position in (19c). The grammar requires that every syntactic movement be the shortest one poss-
ible. This makes (19b) the only grammatical outcome of a verb movement operation applying to (19a). So just as locality conditions prevent an operator from crossing over another operator, an auxiliary cannot cross over another auxiliary. In general, no constituent can move over another constituent of the same type which is itself closer to the landing site. In the grammar, the shortest move pre-empts all others. In this book, we show that in addition to restricting movement, considerations of locality play an important role in other areas of the grammar. We will repeatedly make use of the pervasive grammatical constraint of locality. In chapter 3, we return to the discussion of clause structure. We show that functional projections, that is, projections headed by a functional head such as Inflection, must be decomposed into discrete, hierarchically organized, elementary projections. The projection headed by the verbal inflection is decomposed into two separate projections, one headed by the agreement morpheme of the verb, and one headed by its tense morpheme. The domain occupied by the subordinating conjunction (or the complementizer) links the embedded clause to the immediately higher clause and the main clause to the discourse context. This domain, called the C(omplementizer) domain, will, like Inflection, be decomposed into a number of elementary projections. CP, the highest projection of the clause, can be divided into specialized projections which encode illocutionary force (declarative, interrogative), focus and topic. Chapter 4 is concerned with the form and the interpretation of projections of a noun. In the first part of the chapter, we examine interpretive dependencies between noun phrases. In (20a), for instance, the reflexive object, herself, refers to the same individual as the subject, Louise.
(20)
a.
Louise criticized herself severely.
We say that the NP Louise is the antecedent of the reflexive, or that it binds the reflexive. The dependency between a reflexive element and its antecedent is subject to locality constraints. In (20b) and (20c), the reflexive herself must be bound by the noun phrase Louise, the subject of the lower clause. It cannot be bound outside of the embedded clause. Thelma, the subject of the higher clause, is not
a suitable antecedent. The closest antecedent pre-empts all other antecedents. (20)
b. c.
Thelma says that Louise criticized herself. Thelma does not expect Louise to criticize herself.
Binding relations can also be established inside a noun phrase. (20)
d.
Thelma disapproved of Louise’s severe criticism of herself.
l Data such as (20d) suggest that there are similarities between the structura the examine we When relations in the clause and those inside the noun phrase.
not just structure of the noun phrase more closely, we see that a noun phrase is
Introduction
10
a noun preceded by a specifier and followed by a complement. Rather, the noun
projects an articulated structure, with a lexical nucleus headed by the noun itself, and higher functional projections. The structure of the noun phrase thus resembles that of the clause, which consists of a lexical nucleus headed by the verb and augmented with functional projections. Chapter 5 discusses the interpretation of the sentence. Sentence interpretation is compositional: the meaning of the sentence corresponds to the sum of its parts. More precisely, the interpretation of a sentence is calculated on the basis of the combination of the lexical meaning that each constituent contributes, and the meaning contributed by the structure itself. For instance, the leftward movement of the modal will in (21a) does not alter the number of constituents contained in the sentence, nor the meaning which these constituents contribute to the sentence. But the very fact that will is moved into the functional C domain to the left of the subject assigns interrogative force to the sentence. (21b), in which the auxiliary has not been raised to a position to the left of the subject, is assigned declarative force. (21)
a. b.
Will Louise meet her friends at the party? Louise will meet her friends at the party.
A similar contrast holds between (15b) and (15c) above: (15b) is an interrogat-
ive sentence, by virtue of the combined movement of the operator and the auxiliary verb, while (15c), in which the operator how many friends has moved leftward and the auxiliary remains in the position to the right of the subject, is not interrogative but exclamative. Movement operations do not alter the relation between a verb and its arguments: in (15b) and (15c), for instance, how many friends, though preposed,
remains an argument of the verb see. The leftward movement of the operator encodes the illocutionary force of the sentence. Movement operations may have an effect on the meaning of the sentence beyond encoding illocutionary force, however. This is shown by the following example: (22)
a. b.
Louise says that Jane intends to sell this picture of herself. This picture of herself, Louise says that Jane intends to sell.
In (22a) the direct object this picture of herself follows the verb sell which
selects it. The reflexive herself in (22a) is bound by Jane, the subject of the embedded clause. It cannot be interpreted as being bound by Louise, the subject of the higher clause. In (22b), the direct object this picture of herself has been fronted to the left of the subject of the higher clause. Despite this leftward movement, the noun phrase this picture of herself is still construed as an argument of the verb sell in the lower clause. However, in (22b) the reflexive pro-
noun herself can enter into two interpretative relations: it may be bound either
by Jane, as in (22a), or else by Louise, an interpretation which is impossible in
(22a). Fronting of the object of sell to the initial position of the higher clause has thus added one possible interpretation to the sentence. In discussing the importance of sentence structure for sentence meaning, we will make crucial use of examples like (23):
(23)
When did you go where?
Introduction Sentences like (23) are interesting because they contain an operator
11 (where)
which, surprisingly in the light of the data in (15), has not moved to the C domain to the left of the subject. Nevertheless, the interpretation of the sentence
links where to the operator when which precedes the subject. Paradoxically,
although the operator where has not been moved, it is interpreted as if it had undergone movement. To solve this paradox, we introduce into the grammar
an abstract level of representation, called Logical Form. We will propose that at the level of Logical Form, the interpretation of where in (23) is linked to that of when. As mentioned, chapters 1 to 5 focus on English. Throughout the discussion, however, we show that in order to describe some particular point of English grammar, it is useful to turn to a comparison with other languages. In the final chapter of the book, we explicitly adopt the comparative approach. If we assume, with linguists working in the generative tradition, that all human languages share the same basic principles, such as X-bar theory, movement mechanisms, locality conditions on movement, etc., then the similarities between languages are not surprising at all. On the contrary, the challenge becomes how to account for cross-linguistic differences. How can languages differ while still being based on the same set of universal principles? How does a child acquire his or her language? How does he or she know what is particular to his or her language? How does the English child learn that the contentless expletive subject must be present in (6a) and the Italian child learn that he or she must omit the same contentless subject in (7b)? In chapter 6, we try to account for both linguistic universals and linguistic variation. In addition to invariant general principles, such as X-bar theory, movement, locality, etc., we postulate that there are dimensions, or parameters, along which languages can differ. These parameters are responsible for linguistic variation. One parameter is that which regulates the need for a subject in a finite sentence. In English, as shown by (6a-b), the contentless expletive subject may not be omitted. In Italian, as shown by (7a—b), omission of the expletive subject is obligatory. The data in (6) and (7) illustrate the presence versus absence of ‘contentless’ expletive subjects. (24)-(25) show that the same variation applies to subjects with lexical content. (24)
a. b.
She is happy *Is happy
(25 )ecdun
.Lei-é-felice she is happy é felice
b.
In our discussion we show that cross-linguistic variation of the type illustrated here can fundamentally be related to differences in the morphology of languages. This leads to the general hypothesis that syntax is driven by morphology. This hypothesis allows us to understand how a child learns his or her language. Morphological elements which are phonetically encoded in the lin-
guistic data to which the child is exposed in his environment suffice to enable him to identify the value of a given parameter in his language.
12
Introduction
We judged (24b) as ungrammatical in English, and so it is. Yet, who has not
read diaries or other English texts which contain subjectless sentences like those in (26a):
(26)
a.
%Got up early. Took a shower. Went to the office.
The sentences in (26a) belong to a special register, as signalled by the diacritic %. For instance, sentences such as (26a) can be found in diaries. What distinguishes diary sentences such as those in (26a) from the ungrammatical (24b)? Is the language used in diaries characterized by a breakdown of the grammatical system? Is diary language a language in which ‘anything goes’? Further observation of the data reveals that it is not the case that anything goes in diaries. While we may come across sentences such as (26a), we are much less likely to find sentences like (26b). (26)
b.
*I think that will get up early.
On the whole, diary sentences without subjects tend not to be embedded sentences. We assume that (26b) is also ungrammatical in the diary register. In chapter 6 we explore register variation such as that illustrated in (26). We show that the variation encountered is in fact constrained by general principles which characterize the sub-grammar of diaries. Throughout the book we adopt the following strategy. First, we formulate a hypothesis about the structure of English sentences based on a restricted set of data. Subsequently, we review the initial hypothesis in the light of additional data of increasing complexity. This confrontation with new data may lead us to modify the hypothesis we have developed, or to formulate additional hypotheses. Throughout the book, references to relevant earlier or later discussion are signalled by footnotes; footnotes will be used exclusively for the purpose of cross-referencing. An important consideration in evaluating the hypotheses we formulate is that of the internal consistency of the resulting system. When we propose a hypothesis to account for a set of data, this hypothesis must fit in with those previously formulated. We must work out the consequences of new hypotheses for the analyses elaborated in previous sections. As already mentioned, we try to devise a restrictive system, with a limited number of rules and principles. One general principle which accounts for a wide range of empirical data is preferable to several specialized principles which have only limited scope. Both the specialized principles and the general principle may provide a description of the data, but general principles go beyond mere description; they bring us closer to an explanation of the data. s Two kinds of arguments will be advanced in support of an analysis: (i) empirical arguments, drawn directly from the data, and (ii) theoretical or conceptual arguments, which focus on the internal consistency of the system and its restrictiveness. The reader will see that there is a constant interplay between the empirical arguments and the conceptual arguments.
The development in this book bears witness to the progress made in linguistic
research over the past years. Proposals which at first seem adequate turn out to
require further modification. It is important to emphasize that this constant need for revision does not detract from the value of even the very first hypo-
thesis. Early hypotheses reflect our understanding of the grammar at some stage;
Introduction
13
they constitute a stepping stone, often a necessary one, towards a later, better
understanding. We may say that the main goal of this book, even beyond the light it sheds on the structure of English sentences, is to demonstrate how arguments are constructed in linguistics, how linguistic research is carried out, and how theories of grammar are elaborated. As said before, our purpose is not to provide a final exhaustive grammar of English. Indeed, for most of the issues we will deal with here, this book does not offer a definitive analysis, even if we do think it offers the best analysis available at an introductory level. Each hypothesis which we formulate may give rise to new questions. We hope that the approach presented here will give the reader the desire to pursue his or her study of English beyond the bounds of our book. As readers who are already familiar with the generative literature will discover, the system we develop integrates concepts borrowed from the so-called Government and Binding framework with concepts from the more recent Minimalist approaches. Given the empirical starting point of the book, our main concern has been to elaborate an explicit proposal which allows us to account for a broad range of phenomena within a coherent and economical system. The chapters of this book are all relatively long. Each chapter explores in depth and breadth a number of different aspects of one central theme, and contains three or four major sections which to some extent constitute selfcontained units. At the end of each chapter the reader will find a summary, organized according to the major sections of the chapter. We also offer numerous exercises at the end of each chapter, partly organized again in terms of its major sections. Readers working with this book may decide to work through a full chapter and then turn to the exercises, or they may prefer to organize their work in terms of the major sections of the chapter, turning to the relevant
exercises after each section. The exercises are of different types. Some are relatively straightforward and simply require the reader to apply what he or she has learnt in the chapter. Other exercises are more adventurous; they serve to broaden the reader’s perspective on both the empirical and the theoretical level of language study. One type of exercise invites the reader to evaluate some aspect of the theory elaborated in the light of new data. This type of exercise may well lead the reader to the conclusion that the system of principles set out in the related chapter is not yet able to account for all the data and that further modifications are required. Often, the necessary modifications will turn out to be the subject matter of a later section. Sometimes the problems raised in the exercises are too complex and far-reaching to be treated in an introductory book; in those cases we refer to the literature. A further type of exercise serves to broaden the data base with which we are working. These exercises invite the reader to apply the concepts he or she has mastered in the chapter to new material drawn from diachronic developments, from regional variation, or register-based variation. The aim of such exercises is to make the reader more attentive to variations in language. The latter type of exercise should enhance the reader’s general linguistic awareness and may also contribute to developing his or her analytic skills in other domains of inquiry such as, for instance, stylistic analysis. At the end of each chapter we provide a short list of references. These references are grouped in full at the end of the book.
1
0 0.1
The Structure of English Sentences
Preliminaries: knowledge of language and grammar Grammaticality
In this book we will be considering the question of what it is that constitutes knowledge of language. Specifically, we ask the question: if you know English, what is it that you know? The starting point of the discussion is the native speaker’s knowledge of English. Consider, for instance, the paired sentences in (1)-(4). Every native speaker of English is able to evaluate these sentences. He or she knows that the (a)-sentences are well-formed sentences of English and that the (b)-sentences are not. The (a)-sentences are acceptable sentences of English; the (b)-sentences are not: they are unacceptable. If a sentence is not well-formed,
we signal this by an asterisk (*). To the native speaker of English, judgements on the sentences in (1)-(4) come quite naturally; native speakers have intuitions about their language. Non-native speakers of English may not be able to make the judgements as easily. While some may have the same intuitions as the native speaker, others may find some of the sentences below hard to judge. French speakers, for instance, might think that the (b)-sentences are acceptable and they might themselves produce such sentences. (1)
a. b.
Thelma often meets her university friends. *Thelma meets often her university friends.
(2)
a. b.
Thelma will do some exercises every day. *Thelma will do every day some exercises.
(3)
a. b.
The agreement allowed one to work independently. *The agreement allowed to work independently.
(4)
a. b.
Thelma found it strange that Louise should call. *Thelma found strange that Louise should call.
The unacceptability of (1b) is due to the position of the time adverb often. In the English sentences in (1), the verb meets cannot be separated from its direct object her university friends; the verb is next to or, to introduce a technical
The Structure of English Sentences
15
term, adjacent to its direct object. Likewise, in (2b) there is a problem of wordorder: the verb do is separated from its object some. exercises by the time specification every day. The non-adjacency of the verb and the object gives rise to unacceptability.’* (3b) is unacceptable because an element is missing. In order to render (3b) acceptable, we can, for instance, add the pronoun one, as in (3a) Similarly, in (4b) we have to insert the pronoun it to save the sentence. The (b)-sentences above are not well-formed in English, but their analogues might well be well-formed in other languages. French presents us with a different array of judgements: (5)
a.
b.
*Thelma souvent Thelma often
rencontre ses amis de l’université. meets her friends of the university
Thelma rencontre souvent
ses amis de |’université.
‘Thelma often meets her university friends.’
(6)
a.
Thelma fera un peu d’exercice chaque jour. Thelma will do a little of exercise each day ‘Thelma will do some exercises every day.’
b.
Thelma fera
(yiuvawd
oVaccord
chaque jour un peu d’exercice. nous permettait de travailler de maniére indépendente.
the agreement us allowed to work of fashion independent ‘The agreement allowed us to work independently.’ beeLaccord permettait de travailler de maniére indépendente. ‘The agreement allowed one to work independently.’ (8)
a.
Thelma trouvait cela bizarre que Louise ait téléphoné. Thelma found that strange that Louise had called ‘Thelma found it strange that Louise should have called.’
b.
Thelma trouvait bizarre que Louise ait téléphoné.
We conclude that the well-formedness of a sentence depends to some extent at least on the properties of the specific language we are considering. The sentences in (1)/(5) and in (2)/(6) illustrate cross-linguistic word-order differences. In the English sentences, the direct object cannot be separated from the verb (1b, 2b); in French there seems to be no such adjacency requirement (Sb, 6b). Sentences (3)/(7) and (4)/(8) show that while an element may be obligatory in a certain position in one language, it may be optional in the same context in another language. In English, for instance, the direct object cannot be dropped in (3b) while in French this is perfectly natural (7b). ' Regularly, discussions in later chapters will reconsider hypotheses developed in earlier in chapters. Footnotes will be reserved for cross-references to related earlier or later sections the book. 2 But see also section 2.1.9 and chapter 2, section 1.4.5.1.
16
The Structure of English Sentences
Native speakers of the language in question — English or French in our examples — intuitively know which of the sentences illustrated above are well-formed or acceptable and which are not well-formed or unacceptable. The question arises on what basis native speakers can evaluate sentences of their language. Clearly, it is not the case that native speakers have access to a sort of exhaustive list of all possible sentences of the language, and that they then match the example sentence with the list. Sentences are not pre-existing static objects. Human language is creative: new sentences are formed and interpreted every day, at all kinds of opportunities, and there is no predetermined total number of sentences. Rather, there seems to be potentially an infinite number of sentences for any given language. The native speaker is able to form acceptable sentences at every moment and to evaluate and interpret any new sentence of the language when confronted with it. In order to reconcile the hypothesis that there is an infinite number of sentences, actual used sentences and potential sentences which are still to be formed, and the fact that the native speaker’s cognitive capacities are limited (we have finite memories, for instance), we postulate that native speakers do not have all the possible sentences of a language stocked in their memory. Rather, we postulate that native speakers have at their disposal an internal system of rules and principles which enables them to produce well-formed sentences, and also to evaluate the sentences they are confronted with, and to replace an unacceptable sentence by an acceptable variant. Such a system of rules and principles which is at the basis of all sentences of a language is called a grammar of the language. Knowing a language means knowing its grammar.
Non-native speakers are also able to form sentences in their second or third language, and evaluate and interpret them. So they too must have at their disposal the type of knowledge which we refer to as a grammar. However, the non-native grammar may be partly influenced by the grammar of the first language. French speakers, for instance, who might consider English (1b) acceptable, base their judgements ultimately on the grammar governing their first language. They transfer their knowledge of their first language onto the second one. Native speakers are also able to interpret a sentence of their language, i.e. to relate the form of a sentence to its meaning. Consider (9). Both sentences in (9) are undoubtedly well-formed: (9)
a.
Louise has invited Thelma.
b.
Thelma has invited Louise.
Both sentences contain exactly the same words: Louise, Thelma, has, invited. Knowledge of English implies knowing that the interpretation of (9a) differs from that of (9b): in (9a) the AGENT of the activity of inviting is Louise, and Thelma is the receiver of the invitation. In (9b) the relations are reversed: Thelma extends the invitation and Louise receives it. The difference between (9a) and (9b) is due to the realization of the grammatical functions.’ In (9a) Louise is the subject of the sentence, in (9b) it is the object. Apparently, the grammatical functions of the elements of a sentence determine its interpretation: in (9), for * See section 3 of this chapter.
The Structure of English Sentences
17
instance, subjecthood seems to be associated with agency. Consider the sentence in (10), which again is a well-formed sentence:
(10)
a.
Louise saw the girl with the binoculars.
(10a) is ambiguous: it has two interpretations, depending on the internal relations between the words in the sentence or on its structure. Either what Louise saw was ‘the girl with the binoculars’; or, alternatively, Louise saw the girl and Louise used binoculars to that purpose. In the former case, the binoculars are associated with the girl; in the latter case they are associated with Louise’s perception. (10a) illustrates a structural ambiguity: the two interpretations of the sentence can be related to two different structures for the sentence. In the first interpretation of the sentence, the string the girl with the binoculars is one syntactic unit, a constituent. We will represent constituents by means of square brackets as in (10b): (10)
b.
Louise saw [the girl with the binoculars].
In the second interpretation of the sentence, the strings the girl and with the binoculars constitute two constituents:
(10)
c.
Louise saw [the girl] [with the binoculars].
Native speakers are aware of structural relations between the components of the sentence and of the repercussions that structure may have on interpretation. The awareness of structural relations between components of a sentence and the awareness of the link between the form and the interpretation of the sentence are also established via the internal system of principles and rules that we refer ‘to as the grammar. The main body of our book in fact concentrates on formal properties of sentences; the first section of this chapter and chapter 5 focus on the relation between the form of the sentence and its interpretation. At this point, one proviso is important. For most native speakers, the knowledge of the grammar of his or her language is largely unconscious. Native speakers may not be able to describe why a sentence is unacceptable, or what determines its interpretation. They may not be able to use technical terms such as subject, object, and so on. Only those native speakers who have studied the linguistic system in some detail can make that knowledge explicit and formulate the principles that compose the grammar. It is the task of the linguist to make the native speaker’s knowledge explicit, to provide a representation of the tacit knowledge of language. In this book we will attempt to formulate part of the grammar of English. In order to do so we will have to deploy concepts such as subject, object and structure, and we will formulate a number of principles and constraints governing the organization of the sentence. In chapter 6,‘ we will also briefly consider the question of how the native speaker has acquired the knowledge of his or her language. Anticipating the discussion there, we will show that although exposure to the language in question - plays an essential role in triggering the acquisition process, it would be incorrect to assume that language can be acquired simply on the basis of exposure. 4 Section 1.2.
The Structure of English Sentences
18
Whenever a sentence is formed according to the rules of the internal grammar of the speaker of the language, it is grammatical; a sentence which is not formed
according to the rules of the grammar is ungrammatical. Grammaticality and acceptability are closely related notions. But grammaticality and acceptability are not identical. Acceptability refers to the native speaker’s intuition: a native speaker knows intuitively whether a sentence is acceptable or not. The native speaker has unconscious knowledge of his language, which is reflected in his intuitions, but, as mentioned before, the native speaker may not be able to formulate this knowledge explicitly. Grammaticality refers to the linguistic explanation of a phenomenon: it relates the native speaker’s intuitive judgements to an explicit representation of the native speaker’s unconscious knowledge of his language. In the syntax literature, the term ‘grammar’ is used in a number of different ways. On the one hand, the term is used to refer to the native speaker’s unconscious knowledge of the rules and principles that determine his language, his ‘internal grammar’. Alternatively, the term is used to refer to the explicit representation of this knowledge as it is formulated by the linguist. Native speakers’ intuitions about acceptability and (un)grammaticality do not always coincide. It is possible for a sentence to be formed according to the rules of the grammar of English, i.e. to be grammatical, and yet for it to be felt not acceptable by the native speaker. The unacceptability of a grammatical sentence may be due to the fact that the sentence is hard to process. Consider, for instance, (11):
(11)
a. b. c.
This is the house which Bill is going to buy. Bill is the man who married Jane last week. Jane is the woman you met at the party yesterday.
All the sentences in (11) are grammatical and will be judged acceptable by native speakers. We can make more complex sentences by combining the sentences in (11). For instance, we can combine (11a) and (11b) into (12a).
(12)
a.
This is the house which the man who married Jane last week is going to buy.
Starting from (11a), we replace Bill by the string the man who married Jane last week. We conclude that we can replace a unit, or, to use the technical term, a constituent, like Bill by a more complex unit without loss of grammaticality. By an exactly analogous process of substitution (11b) and (11c) can combine into (12b). Jane is replaced by the woman you met at the party yesterday:
(12)
b.
Bill is the man who married the woman you met at the party yesterday last week.
But though (12b) is formed exactly like (12a), (12b) will be felt by most native speakers to be rather poor. The trouble is that it ends with two adjuncts of time, yesterday and last week. Yesterday modifies the verb met; last week modifies married. The sequence in (12b) is hard to process. Observe, though, that to form
(12b) we have simply applied the substitution process which we had already
used to form, or, to use the technical term, to generate, the acceptable sentence (12a). (12b) is therefore ‘grammatical’; it is formed according to the principles
of English grammar. The same principles also govern the formation of (12a). For
The Structure of English Sentences
19
many speakers, (12b) is only marginally acceptable or unacceptable because of the processing problem associated with the two adjacent sentence-final time
specifications, yesterday and last week. We can change the position of one of
these to eliminate this problem:
(12)
c.
Bill is the man who last week married the woman party yesterday.
you met at the
The native speaker who evaluates sentences can only make evaluations of acceptability. The native speaker (unless she/he is a linguist) does not have an explicitly formulated system of principles at his or her disposal to determine why a sentence is unacceptable. It may be that an unacceptable sentence violates some principle of the grammar of English: in this case we say that the sentence is ungrammatical. It may also be that a sentence is unacceptable because of processing complexity: in this case it is grammatical, though unacceptable. It is the task of the linguist to determine what is the cause of the degradation in judgement of a sentence, whether this is due to a grammatical principle or to other factors. Our aim in this book is to formulate some of the principles and rules of the grammar of English. We are essentially concerned with grammaticality judgements, and rather less so with acceptability. The reader should bear in mind that we are only interested in the linguistic principles which are at the basis of language use. There are obviously other considerations which also govern the use of language. For instance, the contrast between (13a) and (13b) is not one of grammar, but of plausibility:
(13)
a. b.
The woman was attacked by a rat. The woman was attacked by a dinosaur.
Given that dinosaurs about the real world. (13b) will be entirely observation applies to
(13)
c. d. e.
are extinct, (13b) is unlikely to express a proposition This does not make the sentence ungrammatical. In fact appropriate in fairy tale or film contexts. And the same the following sentences:
The woman was attacked by a toothbrush. The woman was attacked by a green rabbit. The woman was attacked by a transparent tree.
The sentences (13b-e) are just as grammatical as (13a). They are incompatible with the state of the actual world as we perceive it in 1998, but they are all compatible with different worlds such as the world of dreams, of fairy tales or of films. In this book we are interested in grammaticality; we are not interested in the degree of plausibility of the state of affairs which our sentences express. However, to avoid obscuring the issue, our example sentences will usually represent situations which we think are compatible with the world as we perceive it.
0.2
The aim of this book
that is, to The aim of this book is to formulate a partial grammar of English: nts that constrai and es spell out or make explicit some of the major principl
20
The Structure of English Sentences
govern the formation and interpretation of sentences in English and to show how these apply to particular language phenomena. In the first chapter we provide the reader with some of the concepts and analytical tools needed for analysing language, more specifically English. Using these concepts and tools we will outline the basic principles of sentence structure in English. This chapter thus will formulate a first set of hypotheses about the grammar of English. These first hypotheses about the structure of English sentences will be based on a small set of data. In the following sections of the book, we test our initial hypotheses in the light of new data of increasing complexity and we will revise our hypotheses accordingly. Very often, then, a first proposal for some structure will later have to be reconsidered and replaced by more complex proposals. . The hypotheses which we formulate are intended to be part of the grammar of English. A grammar is a coherent system. This means that we have to bear in mind the need for internal consistency in the system we are elaborating. It will be important that any hypothesis which we formulate should fit in with the system formed by the hypotheses already elaborated. We also try to devise a restrictive system, with a limited number of rules and principles. One general principle which accounts for a wide range of empirical data is preferable to two or more specialized principles which have only limited scope. Considerations of restrictiveness and internal consistency imply that our analysis is not merely based on empirical arguments, that is, arguments drawn directly from the data. While empirical:arguments play an important role, we must also take into account theoretical or conceptual arguments, arguments based on the internal consistency of the system and its restrictiveness. In our discussion there will be a constant interplay between empirical and conceptual arguments. The present chapter discusses the structure of the clause and attempts to reveal the basic principles that underlie this structure. Chapter 2 shows that within the well-defined bounds of the sentence, operations may apply which move the constituents of the sentence. We will examine the various types of movement in detail. Chapter 3 reconsiders the results of chapters 1 and 2 and modifies some of the earlier findings. Using the tools and principles elaborated in the first three chapters, chapter 4 discusses the structure and the interpretation of nominal groups such as the man, John, a student of English. In chapter 5 we will examine the relation between the structure of the sentence as elaborated in chapters 1, 2 and 3, and its interpretation. In the final chapter of the book we will consider how to account for linguistic variation.
0.3
Aim and scope of this chapter
In this chapter we provide a first analysis of the sentence. In section 1, we will see how the basic building blocks of the sentence are determined by its predicate, which takes one or more arguments. In section 2, we consider the structural
properties of the sentence and its constituents. We conclude that the sentence
and its constituents are endocentric; they are organized around a central unit,
the head. We will also make a distinction between lexical elements and functional elements. The former are items such as nouns (John, woman), verbs (sleep, eat), adjectives (big, happy), adverbs (quickly) and prepositions (in, under). Lexical elements contribute to the descriptive content of the sentence.
The Structure of English Sentences
21
Functional elements are elements such as modal auxiliaries (will, shall), articles
(the, a) and conjunctions (that, if, for). They do not contribute to the descriptive content of the sentence. In section 3, we re-examine the traditional notions of subject and object in the light of the system we are elaborating.
1
The meaning of sentences: argument structure
1.1
1.1.1.
The components of the clause: thematic structure
Verbs and their arguments
In this section we will see how the composition of a sentence depends on the type of verb it contains. Consider the following sets of sentences: (14)
Louise abandoned the project.
*Louise *Louise Louise ono op *Louise
abandoned. abandoned after the project. abandoned the book. abandoned the project the book.
From the examples in (14) we can draw the provisional conclusion that the verb abandon must be accompanied by a constituent of a certain type, here, the project. As we will see below’ a constituent like the project is called a noun phrase (abbreviated as NP): its main component is a noun, project. If the verb abandon is not associated with a noun phrase, then the sentence in which it ~ occurs is not well-formed. In (14b), the absence of the noun phrase renders the sentence ill-formed. Similarly, in (14c) abandon is followed by the constituent after the project. After the project is not a noun phrase; it is a constituent introduced by the preposition after, and is referred to as a prepositional phrase (PP).° Clearly, the presence of the prepositional phrase to the right of abandon fails to make the sentence well-formed. We will say that to complete a sentence which contains the verb abandon, we need a complement of the category noun phrase. Observe that only one such complement is possible, as shown by (14d)/ (14e). The verb abandon may take as a complement the noun phrase the book (14d); it cannot be followed by both the noun phrase the project and the noun phrase the book (14e). The traditional treatment of the data in (14) is to say that the verb abandon is a transitive verb; the complement noun phrase is its direct object.’ (14a) and (14d) are grammatical: the transitive verb is accompanied by a direct object. is (14b) is ungrammatical because the transitive verb lacks a complement; (14c) approprithe of nt compleme a ungrammatical because the transitive verb lacks many. ate type; (14e) is ungrammatical because there is one complement too Pa SECHON 2.3.1; . ® See also section 2.3.2. extensively in discussed be will object direct and subject as such functions 7 Grammatical section 3 below.
The Structure of English Sentences
22
Not all verbs are transitive like abandon. Sentence (15a) contains the verb smile. Unlike abandon, smile does not require the presence of a noun phrase; indeed, as shown by (15b), smile is incompatible with such a noun phrase: (15)
a. b.
Louise smiled. *Louise smiled her friend.
Traditionally, the verb smile is said to be intransitive. This means that it cannot be followed by an NP like her friend. (15b) is ungrammatical because the intransitive verb is associated with an object NP. Other types of verbs must be followed by a complement, but the complement is a constituent other than a noun phrase. We will say that a verb selects a complement of a specific kind. Abandon selects a noun phrase. The verb live selects a prepositional phrase in (16a): (16)
a.
Thelma lives in an apartment. *Thelma lives.
c.
*Thelma lives an apartment.
Still other verbs select a sentence as their complement: (17)
a b. c.
Mary wondered [whether Bill would leave]. *Mary wondered [Bill’s departure]. *Mary wondered.
In (17a) the verb wonder selects the complement whether Bill would leave, which is itself a sentence. A sentence which contains another sentence as one of
its components is a complex sentence. In traditional grammar, the clause is defined in terms of a predication relation between a subject and the property related to — or predicated of — the subject, the predicate.’ The clause Mary wondered whether Bill would leave says something about the subject Mary, namely: ‘that she wondered whether Bill would leave’. Or, to put it differently, the property of wondering whether Bill would leave is predicated of Mary. Mary is the subject of the predication. (17a) contains two clauses: (i) the clause whether Bill would leave, and (ii) the clause Mary wondered whether Bill would leave. To differentiate between the clauses in a complex structure, we refer to a clause which is a constituent of another sentence, such as whether Bill would leave in (17a), as an embedded clause, a subordinate clause or a lower clause. Fhe clause of which the subordinate clause is a constituent, such as Mary wondered whether Bill would leave in (17a), is referred to as the higher clause or the matrix clause. The topmost clause in a complex structure is the main clause, or the root clause. The verb of the matrix clause can be referred to as the matrix verb; the subject of the matrix clause can be referred to as the matrix subject. In (17a) wondered is the matrix verb and Mary is the matrix subject. The verb of the embedded clause can be referred to as the embedded verb; the subject of the embedded clause can be referred to as * For discussion of grammatical functions see also section 3 below. For the notions ‘predication’ and ‘subject of predication’ we also refer to chapter 5, section 1.5.
The Structure of English Sentences
23
the embedded subject. In (17a) leave is the embedded verb and Bill is the embedded subject. In traditional grammar, the term sentence is reserved for a
root clause, an independent, free-standing clause which is NOT embedded in another clause. In (17a) Mary wondered whether Bill would leave would be a
sentence, but whether Bill would leave would not be a sentence. Following this rigid distinction, the term ‘embedded sentence’ would be contradictory. In the generative literature, the rigid terminological distinction between clause and sentence is not always maintained so sharply. The terms ‘sentence’ and ‘clause’ are sometimes used more or less interchangeably. Thus, whether Bill would leave in (17a) might be referred to as an ‘embedded sentence’. The matrix verb wonder selects a clausal or sentential complement in (17a).
The noun phrase Bill’s departure, which is interpretatively similar to the clause whether Bill would leave, is inadequate as a complement of wondered in (17b). Alternatively, wonder may select a prepositional phrase (17d): (17)
d.
Mary wondered [about Bill’s departure].
Announce is like wonder in that it may select a clausal complement, but unlike wonder in that it may also select a noun phrase complement: (17)
e. f.
Mary announced [Louise’s departure]. Mary announced [that Louise was leaving].
(14e) above noun phrases. certain English are referred to _ complements. (18)
a.
was ill-formed because the verb abandon was followed by two This does not mean that verbs never have two complements; verbs must be followed by two complements. Traditionally, they as ditransitive. In (18a) the verb hand takes two noun phrase
Thelma handed Louise the text.
The complements of hand may also be realized by a noun phrase and a prepositional phrase: (18)
b.
Thelma handed the text to Louise.
(18c) and (18d), in which hand has only one complement, are ungrammatical. Similarly, (18e), in which the verb has three complements, is ungrammatical.
(18)
c. d. e.
*Thelma handed Louise. *Thelma handed the text. *Thelma handed Louise the text the lecture.
phrase. Put The verb put requires the presence of an NP and a prepositional be followed by is not of the same type as hand, though. Unlike hand, put cannot two noun phrases: (19)
a.
Thelma put the text on the desk. *Thelma put the text. *Thelma put on the desk.
is a *Thelma put the text the desk.
24
The Structure of English Sentences
The verbs discussed above do not exhaustively exemplify all the types of English verbs. However, they suffice to make the point that the presence of a certain verb in a sentence determines the form of the remainder of the sentence in that it may require or disallow the presence of other constituents. For instance, with abandon, we expect there to be a direct object noun phrase; with smile, we cannot have a complement; with put we expect to find both a noun phrase and a prepositional phrase, and so on. We say that a verb selects one or more complements, or that it subcategorizes for one or more complements of a certain type. Abandon, for instance, selects/subcategorizes for an NP, while put selects/subcategorizes for an NP and a PP. Sentences must contain all the units required by the selectional or subcategorizational properties of the verb. As a first approximation, we can say that the composition of a sentence is determined by the selectional requirements of its verb. Native speakers of English are able to give acceptability judgements for sentences (14)-(19). This means that their internal grammar contains information
concerning the impact of selectional restrictions on sentence formation. Information about selectional requirements is part of the linguist’s representation of the speaker’s knowledge. But knowledge of selectional restrictions is not just part of the grammar of English. The principle that the presence of a certain verb imposes certain requirements on the sentence is not English-specific. The same observation applies to French. Just like its English counterpart announce (17e, f), French annoncer selects either a noun phrase or a clause. (20)
a.
Jean annonce [le départ de Marie]. Jean announces the departure of Marie ‘Jean announces Marie’s departure.’
b.
Jean annonce [que Marie va partir]. Jean announces that Marie goes leave ‘Jean announces that Marie is going to leave.’
The specific realization of the complements selected by a verb may differ from one language to another, though. While English ditransitive verbs may be followed by two noun phrases (18a), or by a noun phrase and a prepositional phrase (18b), only the latter option obtains in French: ditransitive verbs are followed by a noun phrase and a prepositional phrase. The alternation between (21a) and (21b) is not replicated in French. Only the equivalent of (21b) is grammatical. (21)
(22)
a.
Thelma gave Louise the manuscript.
b.
Thelma gave the manuscript to Louise.
a.
*Thelma a donné Louise le manuscrit. Thelma has given Louise the manuscript
b.
Thelma a donné le manuscrit 4 Louise. Thelma has given the manuscript to Louise ‘Thelma gave the manuscript to Louise.’
The Structure of English Sentences
25
To some extent, the structure of a sentence in a particular language is determined by principles which are universal. It is a universal property of human language that the selectional properties of the verb determine the composition of the sentence. The structure of a sentence in a given language is subject, in addition, to language-specific properties. For instance, the double noun phrase construction is available in English and Dutch, but not in French or Italian. (23)
(24)
a.
Thelma gaf Louise het manuscript. Thelma gave Louise the manuscript
b.
Thelma gaf het manuscript aan Louise. Thelma gave the manuscript to Louise
a.
b.
1.1.2
*Thelma Thelma Thelma Thelma
ha dato Luisa il testo. has given Luisa the text ha dato il testo a Luisa. has given the text to Luisa
The theta-criterion
The reader will no doubt have observed that the selectional requirements of the verb are closely related to its meaning. The verb abandon, for instance, refers to an activity involving two participants: the one who abandons and the person or thing that is abandoned. It is hard to think of the activity of abandon without also thinking of these two participants. On the other hand, the verb smile does not express a situation which necessarily relates two participants. Depending on the meaning of the verb, then, one or more elements will be required in the ~ sentence. It is as if each verb sets the scene for some type of action or state: the verb requires a number of participants to engage in a certain state of affairs. We will say that a verb has an argument structure. When a verb is introduced in a sentence its argument structure is activated. Abandon, for instance, has two arguments: (25)
a.
abandon:
1: 2:
b.
Thelma abandoned the project. 1 2
Argument 1 is the acenT of the activity. It is realized by the NP which precedes the verb in (25a) and which will be labelled the subject of the sentence. Argument 2 refers to the element which undergoes the activity; this argument is often referred to as the PATIENT. The distinct participant roles attributed to the argu1 ments of the clause are referred to as thematic roles or theta-roles. Argument of role thematic the receives the thematic role of AGENT. Argument 2 receives PATIENT; this argument is realized by the NP which follows the verb and which refer will be referred to as the direct object. The terms ‘subject’ and ‘object’
realized as to grammatical functions. Smile has only one argument, the AGENT,
the subject.
The Structure of English Sentences
26 (26)%
aisle: b.
Louise smiled. 1
Finally, a verb such as give has three arguments: the AGENT, the BENEFICIARY, and the element which is transferred, the THEME. (Qed wrAisin tgOIC
ewek* 3
b.
Thelma gave Louise the text. 1 p) 3
c.
Thelma gave the text to Louise. 1 . z
We will not be concerned very often with specific semantic labels associated with the arguments of the verb, such as AGENT or PATIENT. For the reader’s information we give a list of the labels which have been used in the literature to refer to thematic roles or theta-roles (see Haegeman 1994). (28)
AGENT/ACTOR: the one who intentionally initiates the action. PATIENT: the person or thing undergoing the action. THEME (1): the person or thing moved by the action. EXPERIENCER: the entity that experiences some (psychological) state. BENEFACTIVE/BENEFICIARY: the entity that benefits from the action. GOAL: the entity towards which the activity is directed. SOURCE: the entity from which something is moved as a result of the activity.
Te AO TrMMO LOCATION:
the place in which the action or state is situated.
Sometimes the roles of PATIENT and THEME (1) are grouped into a single role THEME: (28)
i.
THEME (2): the entity affected by the action.
In the following sentences we exemplify the distribution of thematic roles: (29)
a.
‘Thelma abandoned
the project.
AGENT
PATIENT/THEME (2)
b.
Thelma handed AGENT
Louise the text. BENEFICIARY THEME (1)/THEME (2)
c.
Thelma liked EXPERIENCER
the text. THEME
The identification of thematic roles is not always easy. For instance, the subject Thelma in (30a) seems to express both the AGENT of the action aia the THEME (1); in (30b) the prepositional phrase to Louise could be argued to express —_ the BENEFICIARY of the action or its GOAL.
The Structure of English Sentences (30)
a.
Thelma went AGENT?/THEME
b.
Lu
to Rome. (1)?
‘Thelma handed AGENT
GOAL the manuscript THEME
to Louise. BENEFICIARY ?/GOAL?
In this book we will often simply refer to argument 1, argument 2, and leave aside the discussion of theta-role labels. The number of arguments is more relevant for our purposes than the type of argument. However, the identification of the specific thematic roles has been argued to play a role in determining sentence structure. For instance, it seems to be a cross-linguistic generalization that in active sentences, the AGENT theta-role is structurally more prominent than the other thematic roles. Observe, by way of illustration, that in all the sentences above, the AGENT is realized as the subject.
All the theta-roles which are associated with a verb must be realized in the sentence, i.e. the verb must have a sufficient number of arguments to be able to assign its theta-roles. There is a one-to-one relation between theta-roles and arguments. For instance, a verb cannot assign one theta-role to two different arguments (cf. (14e)): (31)
a.
*Thelma abandoned the project the book. 1 2 2
We can make (31a) grammatical by creating one argument out of the two noun phrases the project and the book. This is achieved by means of the process of co-ordination. Co-ordination conjoins, or co-ordinates, two constituents of the same type by the conjunction and or or and creates a single constituent from ‘ them. In (31b) the single co-ordinated constituent the project and the book coordinates the two noun phrases the project and the book. This constituent is itself also a noun phrase and is able to receive the second theta-role of the verb
abandon: (31)
b.
Thelma abandoned [the project and the book]. y) 1
Similarly, one argument cannot be assigned two theta-roles. The verb invite takes two arguments in (32a); we infer that it assigns two thematic roles (32b): (32)
a.
‘Thelma invites Louise. 1 2
b.
invite
1: 2:
invite (32c) is ungrammatical. In this example, both theta-roles associated with
are assigned to the same argument, Thelma: (32)
c.
*Thelma invites. 1+2
The Structure of English Sentences
28
If the aGENT of the invitation and the THEME both happen to be Thelma, the sentence can take the following form: (32)
d.
Thelma invites herself.’ 1
pi
The one-to-one relation between thematic roles and arguments is referred to as the theta-criterion. (33)
Theta-criterion
a. b.
Each argument must be associated with one and only one theta-role. Each theta-role must be associated with one and only one argument.
There is a difference between the concept of subcategorization and that of thematic structure or argument structure. Subcategorization frames associated with verbs only refer to the complement(s) of the verbs, i.e. the constituents which follow the verb in the unmarked case. Surprisingly perhaps, subcategorization frames do not include any reference to the subject; this is because all verbs can (and indeed must) have a subject. Verbs are not divided into sub-classes with respect to the need for a subject. A two-argument verb such as abandon is said to subcategorize for ONE NP; on the other hand, the argument structure of abandon specifies that the verb takes Two arguments, i.e. it assigns Two thematic roles. There is no contradiction between the two formalisms. When a verb assigns two thematic roles, say AGENT and PATIENT, this will mean that there must be two arguments in the clause. One argument can always be realized as the subject of the sentence. In the case of abandon, the AGENT of abandon is realized as the subject and the PaTIENT is the NP to the right of the verb, the direct object; abandon is hence subcategorized for one NP complement.’
1.1.3
Adjuncts
The argument structures associated with a verb determine to some extent the number of components of a grammatical sentence: abandon, for instance, requires two arguments and no more; smile requires only one argument. However,
the argument structure does not exhaustively determine the content of the sentence; a sentence may contain other material in addition to the arguments of the verb: (34)
Louise abandoned the project on a Sunday. Thelma quickly handed Louise the text. Because it was too heavy, Louise put the parcel on the desk. Thelma gave Louise the money in the living room. Thelma probably put the parcel on the desk. mono oe Because it was too heavy, Thelma probably put the parcel on the desk
last night.
” Herself is called a reflexive. In chapter 4, section 1, we will consider the distribution of reflexives. " For further discussion of the special position of the subject in the structure of = clause see section 3.1 below.
The Structure of English Sentences
29
The sentences in (34) contain more material than the minimum required by the
argument structure of the verb. In (34a) we have added the prepositional phrase"
on a Sunday, which specifies the time at which the action took place. The addition of this particular time specification does not alter the nature of the activity expressed by the verb abandon: in (34a) abandon expresses an activity involving two participants, the AGENT and the PATIENT. All the prepositional phrase on a Sunday does is to add information concerning the time of this activity. We refer to components which provide information about time, manner, reason, place, modality, and so on, of the event or state of affairs expressed in the sentence as adjuncts. In (34b) the verb hand takes three arguments, Thelma,
Louise and the text; hand subcategorizes for two complements, Louise and the text. The adjunct of manner, the adverb quickly, is added to the sentence. In addition to the obligatory arguments, Louise, the parcel and on the desk, (34c) contains an adjunct of reason, the clause because it was too heavy. (34d) contains an adjunct of place, in the living room. (34e) contains a modal adjunct, probably.
Finally, as shown by (34f), more than one adjunct may be inserted in a clause. Adjuncts are not arguments of a verb. They are not subcategorized for or selected; their relation to the verb is less direct than that of the arguments which have a thematic link with the verb. The meaning of the verb determines the number and types of theta-roles it will assign and hence the number of arguments required in the sentence; the verb is thus the semantic nucleus of the sentence.
1.1.4
Theta-roles and clause structure
Let us consider the implications of the theta-criterion for our analysis of sentences by considering some slightly more complex sentences. We will see that the theta-criterion functions as a tool for syntactic analysis in that it guides us in ~ determining the structural relations in a sentence. Consider the simple examples im (35): (35)
a.
Thelma believes this story. 1 2
b.
Thelma believes Louise. il y4
In both the above examples, the verb believe selects two arguments, the argument realized by the subject NP Thelma, and a second argument. In (35a), the second argument is this story; in (35b), it is Louise. There is a slight difference in the interpretation of believe depending on the type of object it takes. In (35a), believe this story means something like ‘give credence to the content of the story, think that the story is true’, while in (35b), believe Louise means, roughly, ‘give credence to the content of Louise’s words, think that Louise is speaking the we truth’. In the following sentence believe takes a clausal complement, which ed: underlin _ have bracketed and (35)
c.
Thelma believes[that Louise has abandoned her husband].
1 Cf. section 2.3.2.
30
The Structure of English Sentences
The interpretation of the verb believe in (35c) is similar to its interpretation in (35a), i.e. the sentence means something like ‘Thelma thinks that it is true that Louise has abandoned her husband’. In (35c) just as in (35a) believe assigns two thematic roles: one to Thelma, another to the complement, the clause that
Louise has abandoned her husband. Within the complement clause, abandoned assigns two thematic roles: one to Louise and one to her husband: (35)
c’.
Thelma believes
[that Louise has abandoned her husband].
1
2
[
1
2
]
Observe that in this particular example, the NP Louise is an argument of abandon and not of believe. Now consider (35d). (35)
d.
Thelma believes Louise to have abandoned her husband.
Here believes is followed directly by the NP Louise. At first glance, one might be tempted to propose that in this sentence believe takes the NP Lowise as an argument and that the verb has the interpretation it has in (35b), but this conclusion would be too rash. Semantically, (35d) is very close in interpretation to (35c), in which believe takes a clausal complement and in which Louise is an
argument of abandoned. Abandon has two arguments: in (35d) these arguments are Louise and her husband. If Louise is an argument of abandoned, then it cannot at the same time be an argument of believe. Recall that there is a biunique relation between arguments and theta-roles: each argument is assigned one and only one theta-role (cf. (33)). In (35d) the verb believe also has two thematic roles, as before, and these are assigned to its subject Thelma, and to its complement, the bracketed string Louise to have abandoned her husband.'* (35)
d’.
Thelma believes
[Louise to have abandoned her husband].
1
2
[oer c’.
Thelma believes 1
2
]
[that Louise has abandoned her husband]. 2
[
1
2
]
The discussion of the examples in (35) illustrates how the theta-criterion can guide us in assigning structure to a sentence.
As a first step in the construction of sentences we may imagine that we pick a verb from the lexicon of the language we are working with. This verb is-associated with one or more thematic roles. The associated roles have to be realized, so we will have to create the argument(s) that will go with the verb. This
provides us with the first building blocks of the sentence: the verb and its argument(s). In what follows we will see how this semantic core of the sentence is then extended and associated with additional elements. '* We return to the nature of the bracketed string in section 2.5.5.
The Structure of English Sentences
1.2
|
Locality and thematic structure
When we consider the composition of complex sentences, we see that the argu-
ments required by a verb tend to be realized in the vicinity of that particular verb. To use the technical term, there is a locality requirement on the realization
of the argument structure: (36)
a.
[Mary] showed [her sister] [why [Louise] had destroyed [the painting]. 1 ps 3 1 2
b.
*[Mary] showed [her sister] [the painting] [why Louise had destroyed]. 1 2 3) ? 1 2?
(36a) is a complex sentence: it contains an embedded clause why Louise had destroyed the painting. The verb show is associated with three thematic roles, realized in (36a) by (1) the NP Mary, (2) the NP her sister, and (3) the clause why Louise had destroyed the painting. Within the embedded clause, the NP Louise and the NP the painting are the arguments of destroyed. (36b) is ungrammatical: if the NP the painting is interpreted as the object of showed, the verb destroyed no longer has two arguments. There is a locality constraint on the realization of arguments: as a first approximation we can say that the arguments of a verb must appear in the same clause as the verb. The locality condition on argument structure may be defined in terms of minimality. Take example (36). The verb show will assign its thematic roles to the closest available arguments: in (36a) these are the NP her sister _ and the clause why Louise had destroyed the painting. Destroy can assign its thematic roles to Louise and to the painting. In (36b) the NP the painting is closer to showed than the clause is, and it will be interpreted as the argument of showed. The clause why Louise had destroyed is no longer an argument of showed: showed only assigns three thematic roles and these are satisfied. Within the embedded clause itself, the verb destroy, which assigns two thematic roles, now lacks one argument. The NP the painting is no longer available: it is outside the clause containing the verb destroyed. Hence the sentence is ungrammatical. Schematically we can represent the locality relations as in (37). We define the locality relation (R) in terms of minimality. The verb (X) always assigns a thematic role to the closest available argument (here Y); the verb cannot ignore a closer argument (Y) and assign a thematic role to a more remote argument in the structure (here Z).
(37)
Locality and minimality
X showed OK 4
m6 the painting R———
Z why Louise had destroyed
Rmi i———_
a thematic Putting things differently, because the verb showed (X) can assign argument and it will role to the NP the painting (Y), it will select that NP as its
o2.
The Structure of English Sentences
not assign a thematic role to the clause why Louise had destroyed not as close to it. The locality condition on the realization of arguments may appear to be violated quite generally. In (38) it seems as if one destroyed is not in the same sentence as the verb itself and yet the acceptable:
(38)
a. b.
(Z), which is
at first sight argument of examples are
Which painting did Mary say that Louise had destroyed? Who did Mary say had destroyed the painting?
On the basis of the data in (38) we will not conclude that the locality requirement summarized in (37) is invalid, but rather that arguments of a verb have a certain mobility. Apparently, arguments can move away from the verb which assigns them a theta-role, the theta-assigner, to positions outside the sentence in which the theta-assigner appears. In (38a) which painting occurs to the extreme left of the sentence; it is closer to the verb say than to the verb destroyed. Yet which painting is the THEME argument of destroyed. It would not be possible to insert another element to the right of the verb destroyed:
(38)
c.
*Which painting did Mary say that Louise had destroyed her book?
The same observation applies to (38b): we cannot insert another element to the left of the verb: (38)
d.
*Who did Mary say Louise had destroyed the painting?
As a first approximation, we can formulate the following hypothesis. A verb has an argument structure associated with it. The arguments are either realized in the same sentence as the verb with which they are associated or else they are moved away from the verb, leaving an open slot. In (38a) the direct object of destroyed, which painting, is extracted from the embedded clause; in (38b) the
subject of the embedded clause is extracted. The position from which a constituent moves is called its extraction site; the position to which a constituent moves is called its landing site. In (39) we provisionally mark the extraction site of the (boldface) moved constituents by [ ]. : (39)
a. .
c.
Mary said [that Louise had destroyed the painting]. Which painting did Mary say [that Louise had destroyed [——]]? Who did Mary say [[ ] had destroyed the painting]?
Arguments cannot be moved randomly, however. (36b), repeated here for the reader’s convenience as (39d), is unacceptable because one argument of destroyed occurs in the wrong position. The painting has been extracted from the
embedded clause and moved to an inappropriate landing site.! (39)
d.
“Mary showed [her sister] [the painting] [why [Louise] had destroyed
lel: © In chapter 2, section 1, we examine some of the mechanisms which determine the landing sites of moved elements. In chapter 2, section 1.4.3, we reconsider the role of locality and
minimality in constraining syntactic movement.
:
The Structure of English Sentences
33
Adjuncts can also be realized in a position outside the sentence to which they bear a direct semantic relation. (40)
a.
Why did Mary say that Susan had resigned?
In (40a) the adjunct why occupies a sentence-initial position. The sentence is ambiguous: it has two interpretations. The adjunct why relates either to say or to resigned. In the first case the adjunct asks for the reason for Mary’s saying something; in the second case, it asks for the reason for Susan’s resignation. In the first case, why has been extracted from the main clause; in the latter case, why has been extracted from the embedded clause. In (40b) and (40c) the symbol [——] marks the extraction site. (40)
b. c.
Why did Mary say [——] [that Susan had resigned]? Why did Mary say [that Susan had resigned [ ]]?
In this book, we shall discover that locality restrictions are pervasive in the grammar of English. Again and again, we will see how grammatical relations
are constrained to local domains.'*
1.3
Implicit arguments
Our tacit assumption so far has been that the arguments of the verb are always realized explicitly or overtly. This hypothesis is also supported by the data in
(41): (41)
She trusted Bill.
ao se
*Trusted Bill. Thelma was wondering whether she should trust Bill. *Thelma was wondering whether should trust Bill.
(41a) is a grammatical sentence. (41b) shows that we cannot omit the first argument of trust. We deduce that trust is a verb that requires two arguments, realized as indicated in (41e):
(41)
e.
trust
1: she 2: Bill
(41c) is a complex sentence. The verb wonder takes two arguments, one realized as Thelma, the subject, the other as an embedded clause whether she should and Bill. trust Bill, the complement. In (41c) the arguments of trust are she bears argument each (41d) shows that she cannot be omitted. As seen before,
one theta-role; in (41d), therefore, the NP, ize an argument of trust and an argument argument of wonder, it cannot at the same let us turn to (41f). We concentrate on the
Thelma, cannot simultaneously realof wonder. If Thelma in (41d) is an time be an argument of trust. Now argument structure of the embedded
clause.
(41)
f.
Thelma was wondering [whether to trust Bill].
that the movement possibilities of 14 We will also discover in chapter 2, section 1.1.5, adjuncts are more restricted than those of arguments.
34
The Structure of English Sentences
In (41f) trust appears inside the embedded clause. (41f) differs from (41c) in one
crucial way: trust in (41f) is an infinitive. The clause in which trust appears does not contain a verb inflected for tense or agreement. Verbs inflected for tense or agreement are finite; non-inflected verb forms, such as infinitives, are non-finite. In (41f) wonder takes an infinitival clause or a non-finite clause as its complement. In (41f), as in (41c), the verb trust selects the NP Bill as one of its
arguments. The sentence is grammatical even though one argument of trust seems to be missing. On the basis of the interpretation of (41f), we would like to say that the second argument of trust is implicit: it is Thelma. We are now faced with an apparent contradiction. In our discussion of (41d) above we concluded that one NP can only serve as the argument of one verb; Thelma could not act as an argument of both wonder and trust. In (41f) we would like to say that somehow Thelma is an argument of trust. In order to get around this problem we postulate that in some sense the verb trust in (41f) DoES have two arguments: one is overtly realized as Bill; the other is understood or non-overt. The argument is present in the abstract representation of the sentence which determines its interpretation, but it is not present in the phonetic string. The understood argument of trust is not associated with phonetic content. Such abstract or non-overt arguments can be presented by the symbol ec (empty category). (41)
g.
Thelma; was wondering 1
[whether
ec; to trust Bill]. sey)
[1
2]
Representation (41g) is meant to show that trust has one overt argument (Bill) and one non-overt one (ec). For its interpretation, the non-overt element ‘ec’ is
referentially dependent on Thelma, the overt argument. This dependency is represented by a subscript; Thelma and ec are co-indexed. We say that the NP Thelma controls the interpretation of the non-overt subject of trust. In the examples below we illustrate further instances of non-overt elements being controlled by overt ones. Consider first (42): (42)
a.
b.
Ipromised John
1
2
Ipromised 1
John 2
| a new bicycle.
3 [that I would buy a new bicycle]. 3
[1
2]
In (42a) the verb promise has three arguments: (1) the aGENT I, (2) the BENEFICIARY or GOAL John, and (3) the THEME, a new bicycle. In (42b) the verb promise also has three arguments: I, John and the clause that I would buy a new bicycle. Within the embedded clause, buy has two arguments, I and-a new bicycle. Now consider (43a), which is accepted by most speakers of English. We concentrate on the embedded clause: (43)
a.
I promised John [to buy a new bicycle].
This sentence is very close in meaning to (42b). Ideally we would like to keep the argument structure associated with the verbs promise and buy constant. Specifically, the argument John in (43a) is the BENEFICIARY/GOAL of promise,
The Structure of English Sentences
on
just as was the case in (42a) and in (42b). Thus J and John are arguments of promise. Since we know that promise has three arguments, the non-finite clause to buy a new bicycle must be the third argument. Now let us turn to the verb buy: we expect buy to have two arguments. In (42b) the two arguments are I and a new bicycle. In (43a), though, the first argument seems to be missing. But as before, we cannot say that the argument I in the main clause has two thematic roles. Rather, we will say that as was the case in (41f) the infinitival clause in (43a) contains a non-overt subject, which is controlled by I: (43)
b.
J; promised John 1 2
[ec, to buy a new bicycle]. y 3
[1
2]
An interesting development in speakers’ intuitions is to be observed concerning the use of a non-finite complement with the verb promise. Younger speakers of British English often reject (43a). For them, the verb promise can only take an infinitival complement if the BENEFICIARY/GOAL argument is not expressed: (43)
c.
I; promised [ec; to buy a new bicycle].
To express the BENEFICIARY/GOAL argument of promise in the presence of a clausal complement, these speakers will use a sentence with a finite complement (42b). Let us speculate for a moment on the basis for these differences in the judgements of (43a). For speakers who reject (43a), the control relation between the matrix subject J; and the implicit subject ec, in the embedded clause can apparently not be established across the BENEFICIARY/GOAL argument. They do allow -acontrol relation to be established with the subject of promise, as long as there is nO BENEFICIARY/GOAL argument (43c). Why should this be? For speakers who reject (43a) the presence of the BENEFICIARY/GOAL argument seems to block the control relation. We have already seen that theta-role assignment is subject to a locality constraint (37). Let us tentatively propose that the locality constraint applies to control relations. In terms of (37), X is the controller, the matrix subject I. A control relation has to be established between X and Z, the nonovert embedded subject ec;. But this relation crosses Y, the BENEFICIARY/GOAL argument John. For speakers who reject the example, the control relation in (43a) violates the locality constraint on control relations. We propose that for speakers who accept (43a) an intervening non-subject (John in (43a)) does not suffice to block a control relation between a matrix subject and an embedded subject. The sentences in (44) also illustrate the need for postulating non-overt subjects. (44)
a.
LIasked 1
John 4
a_question. 3
b.
Iasked
John
[if he would buy a new bicycle].
2
3
1
[1 c.
LIasked
John
to buy a new bicycle.
2]
36
The Structure of English Sentences
In (44a) ask has three arguments, I, John, a question. In (44b) the third argu-
ment is clausal, if he would buy a new bicycle. Within the embedded clause, the verb buy, as before, has two arguments, he and a new bicycle. In (44c) the third argument of ask is a non-finite clause, to buy a new bicycle. Again, if we wish to maintain that buy has two theta-roles to assign in (44c), we can postulate that one of them is realized as an implicit argument (‘ec’). In (44c) the empty category which functions as an argument of buy is controlled by the object NP John. (44)
c’.
Iasked 1
John, [ec, to buy a new bicycle]. 2 ; 3 1 2
In the infinitival clause in (44c), the subject is a non-overt argument.’’ The nonovert subject of buy is controlled by I, the subject of promise, in (43b); it is controlled by John, the object of ask, in (44c). Non-overt subjects of infinitives are not always controlled by another argument in the sentence, however:
(45)
a.
[ec to buy a bicycle now] is very important.
In (45a) the non-finite clause has a non-overt subject, represented as ec, but
there is no controlling element. The interpretation of the non-finite clause in (45a) is similar to that of the non-finite clause in (45b):
(45)
b.
[For us/you/people to buy a bicycle now] is very important.
The non-overt subject of buy in (45a) is understood either as having arbitrary reference (‘people in general’) or as referring to a contextually salient referent (‘us’, ‘you’).
An important property of the non-overt elements introduced in our discussion so far is that they are subjects of non-finite clauses. To buy is a non-finite form
of the verb buy: it is not inflected for tense. The ec cannot serve as the argument of a finite verb. This was shown by the ungrammaticality of (41d), repeated here for the reader’s convenience as (46a):
(46)
a.
*Thelma was wondering [whether should trust Bill].
If the non-overt subject ec could be introduced as a subject of a finite clause, (46a) would be grammatical with the representation (46b), where ec stands for a non-overt subject of finite should. (46)
b.
*Thelma, was wondering [whether ec; should trust Bill].
As a first approximation,’ we propose that finite sentences in English must have an overt subject. 'S We turn to a definition of the notion ‘subject’ in section 3. '© To be modified in chapter 2, section 1.1.4, in chapter 4, section 2, and in chapter 6,
section 4.1.
:
The Structure of English Sentences
a7
Not all languages are like English in this respect. Consider the following Italian sentences: (47)
a.
Luisa compra un libro. Luisa buys a “book
b.
Leicompra She buys
c.
Compra un libro.
un libro. a book
In Italian (47), the overt argument (Luisa or lei (‘she’)) alternates with a nonovert one. (47c) is often more natural than (47b) with the overt pronoun. In Italian, the subject pronoun, /ei in (47b), is regularly dropped. In English, this is not possible:'’ a subject pronoun must be overtly realized. A language which allows pronominal subjects to be dropped in finite clauses is called a pro-drop language. In (47a) and (47b) compra (‘buy’) has two arguments; we conclude that the verb assigns two thematic roles. Following the reasoning developed above, we will propose that in Italian (47c) one of the arguments is non-overt:'*
(47)
d.
ec compra un libro.
1.4
Do all verbs assign theta-roles?
So far we have established that the content of a sentence, i.e. the constituents
which it contains, is determined by the argument structure of the verb. Verbs " like buy, or destroy, for instance, assign two theta-roles and when they are used in a sentence we expect two arguments to be associated with these verbs. Consider now the examples in (48). (48)
Thelma bought a new bicycle.
Thelma has bought a new bicycle. Thelma is buying a new bicycle. oe Thelma will buy a new bicycle. es In (48a) the verb buy is associated with two arguments: Thelma and a new bicycle. We assume, then, that buy has two theta-roles to assign: (49)
a.
buy
1: 2:
Thelma anew bicycle
b.
Thelma bought a new bicycle. 2, 1
17 Cf. chapter 6, section 4.1, though.
et
chapter 4, section 2. We return 18 We discuss the properties of non-overt subjects in detail in Spanish, Catalan, Hungarian, (also to the contrast between pro-drop languages like Italian 6, section 3. chapter in French) (and English like etc.) and non-pro-drop languages
38
The Structure of English Sentences
In (48b) the same verb buy is used, but it is realized as a past participle, bought, preceded by the verb has.'? The addition of have apparently does not change the argument structure of the clause: as before, there are two arguments in the clause — Thelma and a new bicycle, the arguments of buy. We conclude that the insertion of the verb have in (48b) does not have any impact on the argument structure of the clause. As a first approximation, we could say that a verb like have does not assign any thematic roles. The function of have in (48b) is not that of introducing a participant in the event of buying; rather, have is used to form what is traditionally called the present perfect. The present perfect is formed of the element have (itself in the present tense) associated with the past participle. It is a form which indicates that the action of buying precedes the present moment and bears some connection to it.”° In a way, the role of the element have is like that of a tense inflection, and
indeed, in some languages, the present perfect is expressed by means inflectional morpheme. Latin is a case in point: (50)
a.
of an
amo
love-1singular ‘T love’ b.
ama-vi love-perfect-1singular ‘T have loved’
A verb like have in (48b) which appears not to contribute to the argument structure of the clause is referred to as an auxiliary verb. Verbs which carry their own thematic roles and describe events or states of affairs are called lexical verbs. The observations made concerning (48b) extend to the remaining examples in (48): in each case there is an additional (boldfaced) verbal element in the clause, but this element does not entail the insertion of additional arguments. In each sentence, the verbal element introduces some temporal or modal dimension to the activity: the auxiliary be is associated with the present participle and expresses a progressive activity; the auxiliary will is associated with the infinitive of the verb and expresses futurity. Finally, consider the set of examples in (51): (51)
a. b. c. d. e. f.
John bought a new bicycle. John did not buy a new bicycle. *John bought not a new bicycle. *John not bought a new bicycle. Did John buy a new bicycle? *Bought John a new bicycle?
If we wish to negate (51a), we need to resort to a structure with the verbal element do. Without do, we cannot negate the sentence (51c, 51d). Again, the ’° For arguments that have is a verb we refer to section 2.2 below. * For some discussion of Tense interpretation in English we refer the reader to chapter 5,
section 2.3.
'
The Structure of English Sentences
39
insertion of do does not modify the thematic structure of the clause. For question formation in English we also need do (51e, 51f). As before, we say that do
is an auxiliary.”!
1.5
Do only verbs assign theta-roles?
So far we have discussed the impact of the verb on the structure of the clause. We have seen that lexical verbs assign a number of theta-roles and that these theta-roles require the presence of corresponding arguments. It might appear as if only verbs are theta-role assigners, but this is not correct. Consider, for instance, (52):
(52)
a.
They announced
[that Louise has arrived].
1
)
[ b.
They announced 1
1
]
[Louise’s arrival]. 2
Le od
]
In (52a) the verb announce has two arguments, they and that Louise has arrived. Within the embedded clause Louise is an argument of the verb arrive. In (52b), the complement of announce is the noun phrase Louise’s arrival. Within this NP, Louise has a semantic relation to arrival which is parallel to the relation of Louise to arrived in (52a). We will assume that nouns may also have an argument structure.” In the examples below the noun which assigns the thematic roles within the bracketed NP is written in boldface; the arguments are - indicated by means of numerals: (53)
a.
Isaw [Rembrandt’s picture of Saskia].
[ b.
ye |
1
[Caesar’s invasion of Belgium] was memorable.
le. fel c.
[John’s fear of his sister] was incomprehensible.
bart d.
2s] Jae
1
[The students of English] have arrived.
[
Deel
Consider the following set of sentences.
(54)
a. b.
I consider [that his reply is inadequate]. Iconsider [his reply inadequate].
questions and in negative 21 For an extensive discussion of the mechanism of do-insertion in ation of do in such interpret the For 2.2.3. and 2.2.2 sections 5, chapter to sentences we refer examples we refer to chapter 5, section 3.4.2. in chapter 4, section 3.4. 22 We return to the assignment of thematic roles by nouns
40
The Structure of English Sentences
In (54a), consider takes two arguments, realized by the subject NP I and by the clausal complement that his reply is inadequate. The embedded clause contains the NP his reply. The question arises if this NP is an argument, and if so, what it is the argument of. Two candidates emerge: (i) the verb be, or (ii) the adjective inadequate. The same question arises for (54b), which is a paraphrase of (54a). In (54b) the verb be is absent from the complement, but semantically the interpretation of (54b) is similar to that of (54a). In (54b), consider again has two arguments: I and the constituent his reply inadequate, which is a reduced version of that his reply is inadequate in (54a). Within the string his reply inadequate the only element capable of assigning a theta-role to his reply is the adjective inadequate. We are thus led to conclude that adjectives can also assign thematic roles. If inadequate assigns a theta-role to his reply in (54b) then the verb be in (54a) does not assign a theta-role. Be in these examples is said to function as a
copular verb or a copula: it establishes a predicative relation between the predicate, inadequate, and the subject his reply. Like progressive be (48c), copular be does not assign any thematic roles. Below”’ we will show that the distributional properties of progressive be extend to the copula be. We conclude that like progressive be, copula be is an auxiliary. Finally, consider the following examples: (55)
a. b.
Louise entered the room. Louise is in the room.
In (55a) Louise and the room are arguments of enter. (55b) contains the verb be, here in its copular use, and the sentence contains the NPs Louise and the room. If we continue to assume that be does not assign a thematic role, and based on the semantic parallelism between (55a) and (55b), we suggest that in (55b) the thematic roles are assigned by the preposition in. That be does not play a role in setting up the argument structure of (55b) is confirmed by the following set of
sentences: (56)
I expect [that you will be in my office at four]. I expect [you to be in my office at four]. aosI expect [you in my office at four].
As before, the omission of be in ($6c) does not affect the semantic interpretation of the sentence. From the examples above we are led'to conclude that verbs, nouns, adjectives
and prepositions can assign thematic roles.”*
1.6
Do all noun phrases receive theta-roles?
The discussion so far has related noun phrases to the argument structure of the clause. The question arises whether a noun phrase must always have a thematic 3 Section 2.5.2. 4 We return to the syntax of the verb be in chapter 3, section 1.
The Structure of English Sentences
at
role, i.e. whether noun phrases are always arguments. The answer to this question is negative. We will discuss three types of NPs which do not have a thematic role: NPs which function as adjuncts (1.6.1), expletive NPs (1.6.2) and
quasi-arguments (1.6.3).°
1.6.1
NPs as adjuncts
Consider the following example: (57)
a.
Louise abandoned her husband yesterday.
In (57a) the verb abandon takes two arguments, Louise and her husband. The sentence contains a further NP, yesterday. That yesterday is an NP is confirmed by the fact that, like other NPs, it may function as a subject: (57)
b.
Yesterday was a terrible day.
It may also have the genitive ’s inflection typically associated with NPs:*° (57)
c.
Yesterday’s paper is still on the desk.
In (57a) yesterday functions as an adjunct (cf. 1.1.3). In the following examples the boldface NPs also function as adjuncts: (57)
d.
Iwill see you tomorrow/next week/the day after tomorrow/the next
Ad
day. You should never abandon your job this way. Don’t speak that way.
f.
1.6.2
Expletive subjects
1.6.2.1
Expletive it
Consider the following pair: (58)
a.
[That Louise had abandoned the project] surprised Sean
[ b.
sc
1
It surprised everyone [that Louise had abandoned the project}. ?
1
;
ps
i
In (58a) the verb surprise takes two arguments: (1) the clause that Louise had s, abandoned the project, and (2) the NP everyone. Abandon has two argument 5, sections 1.4.3.1.4, 25 We will return to expletive NPs in section 3.4 below and in chapter : 1.4.4 and 3.4. 26 Cf. section 2.2 and also chapter 4, section 3.
42
The Structure of English Sentences
(1) Louise, and (2) the project. (58b) contains an additional NP, it. The question
arises if it is an argument. The interpretation of the verb surprise in (58b) is no different from that in (58a): surprise has only two arguments in (58b), everyone and the clause that Louise had abandoned the project. In (58b) the clause is shifted to the right and the subject position is occupied by it. Observe that if we retain the prosodic pattern of (58b) we cannot insert any other element in the place of it. (58)
c. d.
*That surprised everyone that Louise had abandoned the project. *This surprised everyone that Louise had abandoned the project.
In (58b) it is not used as a referential element: it does not pick out or refer to an entity in the discourse. It does not have a referent. A non-referential element like it in (58b), which seems to function as a mere filler for the subject position and which fails to contribute to the semantics of the sentence, is called an expletive. That it does not make any semantic contribution to the sentence is suggested by the fact that, unlike a subject which receives a thematic role (59a, 59b), it in (58b) cannot be questioned.
(59)
a.
Who has abandoned the project? Louise has.
b.
What surprised everyone? That Louise had abandoned the project.
c.
*What surprised everyone that Louise has abandoned the project?
Observe that it is not always non-referential. Compare the following examples: (60)
a.
I like this book. It interested me very much.
b.
It is surprising that Louise should have abandoned the project.
In (60a) it is referential: it picks up a referent in the discourse; it refers to the object this book. It is an argument of interested. In (60b) it is not referential: it does not refer to any particular referent in the discourse. Rather, it anticipates the clause that Louise should have abandoned the project. In the literature, it in (60b) is sometimes referred to as the anticipatory subject, as the grammatical subject or a dummy subject; the clause which is related to it is sometimes referred to as the logical subject or as the real subject. We also say that it is in construction with a clause.
1.6.2.2
Expletive there
The element there may be used referentially, in which case it functions, for instance, as a complement to the verb (61a) or as an adjunct (61b).
(61)
a. b.
I put the bread there. I will meet my friend there after lunch.
The Structure of English Sentences
43
In (61a) and in (61b) the function of there is parallel to that of a PP:
(61)
c. d.
I put the bread on the table. I will meet my friend in the local gallery after lunch.
In the examples above there can be questioned: (61)
e. f.
Where did you put the bread? Where will you meet your friend?
There. There.
(62a) and (62b) differ minimally from each other in that the first does not
contain the element there and the logical or semantic subject occupies the initial position, while in the second, there occupies the subject position and the logical or semantic subject three women appears to its right. The thematic structure of work in (62a) is the same as that in (62b). There in (62b) does not receive a
thematic role. (62)
a. b.
Three women are working in the office. There are three women working in the office.
In (62b) there cannot be questioned: (62)
c.
*Where are three women working in the office?
There:
We will conclude that in (62b) the function of there is similar to the function of it discussed in the previous section. There is also an expletive subject. Expletive there functions as the grammatical subject of a sentence whose logical or ~ semantic subject is an NP (three women in our example). We can say that there is in construction with a noun phrase.”” The noun phrase is also called the
associate of the expletive.
1.6.3
Weather verbs
In the following sentences the subject is realized by it: (63)
a. b.
It is raining. It is snowing.
In these examples the subject it seems to have no particular semantic content. It cannot be replaced by any other element. It does not refer to any entity; it is non-referential. (64)
a. b. c.
*That is raining. *This is raining. *The weather is raining.
this chapter. For 27 For additional discussion of expletive subjects we refer to section 3.4 of 5, sections chapter to refer we structure the of the role of there in the semantic interpretation 1.4.4 and 3.4.1.
The Structure of English Sentences
44
In (63) the subject it cannot be questioned:
(65)
a. b.
*What is raining? *What is snowing?
It. It.
Weather verbs such as rain or snow do not take genuine arguments; they take a fixed subject it, which does not seem to refer to anything. One option is to say that such verbs fail to assign any theta-roles and hence that they fail to take any arguments. Alternatively, the pronoun it associated with weather verbs is called a quasi-argument. Consider (66a): (66)
a.
It is cold.
(66a) is ambiguous: either it is interpreted as a referential NP which picks up some entity which is established in the discourse: (66)
b.
Idon’t like this soup. It is cold.
Or the sentence refers to the atmospheric conditions: (66)
c.
Put ona sweater. It is cold.
In the latter interpretation, it does not refer to any particular entity: it is a quasiargument.
1.7
Summary: argument structure
In this section we have seen how the meaning of the verb determines the composition of the sentence. Depending on their meaning, verbs assign one, two or
three thematic roles or theta-roles, which must be associated with arguments in the clause. The theta-criterion establishes that there must be a one-to-one correlation between arguments and thematic roles. The arguments of the verb are the subject and the complements. In addition to the verb and its arguments, a sentence may also contain adjuncts. Thematic roles are assigned locally, i.e. to arguments which occur in the clause which contains the verb. Sometimes arguments may move away from the thetaassigner towards specific landing sites, such as sentence-initial position. Some verbs (auxiliaries) fail to assign thematic roles. On the other hand, not only verbs assign thematic roles: adjectives, nouns and prepositions may also do this. Finally, we have seen that in certain situations, noun phrases, which typically function as arguments in the clause, do not carry a thematic role. This is the case for a class of noun phrases which function as adjuncts and also for the socalled expletive and quasi-argument pronouns, it and there.
The Structure of English Sentences
2
49
Phrase structure
——
2.1
Structure: clauses_and constituents
Sentences, or clauses, to use the technical term, are not simply strings of words; they are hierarchically organized in units of different levels. Clauses have a structure. (67a) is an English sentence consisting of thirteen words, but some of these words are more closely connected to each other than others. Intuitively, we may
want to demarcate the following units: the young linguist, his friend, in the local gallery, and after lunch. Square brackets ([.. . ]) demarcate a unit of structure or a constituent. (67)
a.
[The young linguist] will meet [after lunch].
[his friend] [in the local gallery]
In this section, we examine the structure of clauses in more detail. First we shall try to formulate some diagnostic tests (‘constituency tests’) to establish the units of a clause. Then, on the basis of these tests, we examine the structural components of an English sentence. Our discussion starts from the word level and will lead to the level of the sentence.
2.1.1
The semantic criterion
In (67a) we
proposed
a first, rather intuitive, demarcation
of constituents.
-This demarcation is based on the interpretation of the units. There is a tighter semantic connection between the words that compose the strings the young linguist or his friend than there is between the words friend in the. If we consider the meaning of the sentence, we see that young modifies linguist, his relates to friend, in goes with the local gallery. It is not immediately obvious how to deal with will and meet. One might suggest that they form a single unit in a structure like (67b):
(67)
b.
[The young linguist] ?[will meet] [his friend] [in the local gallery] [after lunch].
Alternatively, it might be argued that meet assigns a thematic role to the NP his friend and hence is more closely associated with his friend than with will, suggesting the bracketing in (67c). (67)
c.
[The young linguist] ?[will] [meet [his friend]] [in the local gallery] [after lunch].
bracketings ’ The semantic criterion is hard to apply in this case, because both for us to useful be would (67b) and (67c) correspond to a semantic intuition. It — in sentence given a to have some diagnostic tests which apply unambiguously words which to as ns this case (67a) — and give sharper results than our intuitio
46
The Structure of English Sentences
‘go together’. Such diagnostic tests are referred to as constituency tests: they are used to determine which elements in a sentence form a syntactic unit or a constituent.
Before we discuss constituency tests, let us introduce some terminology. We are trying to describe the way words are put together into sentences, that is, we are interested in the structure of sentences. Sentences are ultimately divisible into words, which are therefore units that make up sentences, that is constituents; words are the ultimate constituents of sentences. We want to distinguish levels of structure between the level of the words, the ultimate constituents, and the level of the sentence. So we will identify phrases, i.e. constituents which may contain more than one word. The string his friend in (67a) is a phrase: his friend is a constituent consisting of two words, his and friend. The purpose of this section is to show what tests enable us to identify the constituents of a sentence.
2.1.2
Substitution
To identify the constituent his friend in (67a), we have relied essentially on a semantic criterion: his modifies friend and not, say, gallery: ‘the friend is his’. His friend also behaves as a unit in the structure. For example, we can replace the string his friend by the pronoun him: (68)
a.
[The young linguist] will meet [him] [in the local gallery] [after lunch].
Similarly, we can replace in the local gallery by there, the young linguist by he and after lunch by afterwards. These substitutions are compatible with the informal structure which we have assigned to (67a): (68)
b.
2.1.3
[He] will meet [him] [there] [afterwards].
Movement
The substitution test illustrated in section 2.1.2 provides us with one type of support for assigning a constituent structure to the sentence. Movement operations applied to sentences provide a second type of support. The strings which we have identified as constituents can sometimes be moved around in the sentence. In (69a) we have moved the string after lunch to the beginning of the sentence; in (69b) we have moved in the local gallery to the end of the sentence:
(69) (69)
a. b.
2.1.4 2.1.4.1
[After lunch] the young linguist will meet his friend in the local gallery. The young linguist will meet his friend after lunch [in the local gallery].
Questions: substitution and movement Movement and question formation
In some cases substitution and movement
following examples:
combine. This is illustrated in the
The Structure of English Sentences
(70)
a. b. c.
47
Whom will the young linguist meet in the local gallery after lunch? Where will the young linguist meet his friend after lunch? When will the young linguist meet his friend in the local gallery ——?
In (70a) the pronominal question word whom replaces his friend and it is also moved to the beginning of the sentence. In (70b) where replaces in the local gallery and is also moved leftward; in (70c) after lunch is replaced by when which, again, moves to the left.”* 2.1.4.2.
Some notes on wh-in-situ
Question formation in English usually requires leftward movement of an interrogative constituent. In the absence of leftward movement of this constituent, the sentence is not a genuine question.
(70)
d. e. f.
*The young linguist will meet whom in the local gallery after lunch? *The young linguist will meet his friend where after lunch? *The young linguist will meet his friend in the local gallery when?
Sentences like (70d-f) can be used only as echoic questions or echo-questions; they repeat a previous utterance and the question word replaces a constituent which the speaker might not have understood. In the non-echoic question a question word moves to a sentence-initial position. The leftward movement of the interrogative constituent is also required in embedded questions: (70)
g.
I wonder [whom the young linguist will meet in the local gallery after lunch].
h.
*I wonder [the young linguist will meet whom in the local gallery after lunch].
Observe that the interrogative element is a constituent consisting of one or several words: (70)
i.
I wonder [[which friend] the young linguist will meet after lunch].
Because interrogative constituents in English often consist of or contain a word beginning with wh- (who, what, when, where, why, which friend), we often refer to them as wh-phrases. Movement of a wh-phrase is referred to as whmovement. Wh-movement is not a universal property of question formation, however: in languages like Chinese and Japanese, wh-movement does not take
place. (71a—d) are examples from Chinese (data from Aoun and Li 1989): (71)
a.
Zhangsan kandao shenme?
Zhangsan saw what ‘What did Zhangsan see?’ among others in the 28 We return to question formation at many points in this book, 5, sections 2.2 and chapter and 4, following sections: chapter 2, section 1.1, chapter 3, section Bani
The Structure of English Sentences
48
b.
Zhangsan zai nar kandao ni? Zhangsan at where saw you ‘Where did Zhangsan see you?’
c.
Ta xiang-zhidao ni maile shenme? he wonder you bought what ‘He wonders what you bought.’
d.
Ta renwei ni maile shenme? he think you bought what ‘What does he think you bought?’
(71a) and (71b) illustrate root clauses containing the interrogative phrases shenme
(‘what’) and nar (‘where’). By analogy with English, we also refer to these interrogative phrases as wh-phrases. Observe that in Chinese, wh-phrases do not move to a peripheral position in the clause; they occupy the positions which would have been occupied by the corresponding non-interrogative phrases. (71c) and (71d) contain embedded clauses. The wh-phrase shenme (‘what’) is the complement of the embedded verb maile (‘bought’). The wh-phrase in the embedded clause has not been moved. As suggested by the English translations, the wh-phrase in (71c) is associated with the embedded clause: (71c) contains an embedded question. The interrogative phrase in (71d) is associated with the matrix clause: (71d) is interpreted as a root question; yet, once again, the whphrase remains inside the embedded clause. French seems to have a mixed situation. It is similar to English in that embedded question formation requires wh-movement: (72)
a.
Je me demande ou le jeune homme rencontrera son ami. I myself ask where the young man will meet his friend
b.
*Je me demande le jeune homme rencontrera son ami ou.
But wh-movement is not obligatory in independent questions: (73)
a.
Il rencontrera son ami ou?
He will meet his friend where b.
Ow rencontrera-t-il son ami?
where will-meet-he his friend
When a question word has not moved to the sentence-initial position it is said to be im situ, which is a Latin expression meaning ‘in place’. If a question in English contains one wh-phrase, it cannot remain in situ; in Chinese, wh-phrases
must remain in situ. There are also instances of ‘wh-in-sitw’ in English. If a question in English contains two wh-phrases, then only one of them can move leftward; the other will remain in situ: (74)
a.
I wonder who will do what.
b. c.
*I wonder what who will do. *I wonder who what will do.
The Structure of English Sentences
a
For the interpretation of (74a) the moved wh-phrase, who, and the wh-phrase
which remains in situ, what, are linked. For such a question one might expect an answer such as ‘John will plant the flowers, and Mary will buy the records’.2’
2.1.5
Deletion
Another criterion of time structure
property of constituents is that they can sometimes be omitted. This must be handled with care: only optional constituents, such as adjuncts and place, can be omitted. Constituents which realize the argument of the verb cannot be omitted because of the theta-criterion.*°
(75)
a. b. c.
2.1.6
The young linguist will meet his friend [ ] after lunch. The young linguist will meet his friend in the local gallery [ ]. *The young linguist will meet [ ] in the local gallery after lunch.
Focalizing a constituent
2.1.6.1
The cleft sentence
The constituents which we have identified so far on the basis of a semantic
intuition (section 2.1.1) and on the basis of the formal tests discussed above can also become the focal element of a sentence:
(76)
a.
It is the young linguist who will meet his friend in the local gallery after lunch.
b.
It is his friend that the young linguist will meet in the local gallery after lunch.
c.
It is in the local gallery that the young linguist will meet his friend after lunch.
d.
It is after lunch that the young linguist will meet his friend in the local gallery.
Sentences (76a-d) are paraphrases of (67a) in which one constituent XP is inserted in a string of the type: (76)
e.
it is [XP] who/that...
Structures like those in (76) are referred to as cleft sentences. In a cleft sentence, senwe cut (‘cleave’) one constituent (represented as [XP] in (76e)) out of the in and stress ve contrasti receive will it which tence and place it in a position in offers test sentence cleft The focus. ve which it will function as a contrasti
nt. “another means for identifying which groups of words form a constitue 3.2.2.1. 2° We return to the problem of wh-in-situ in chapter 5, section 30 See (33) in section 1.1.2.
The Structure of English Sentences
50
2.1.6.2
The pseudo-cleft sentence
Our diagnostic tests have confirmed the existence of the structural units, Le. constituents, which we had first identified on the basis of a fairly intuitive semantic approach. But the tests have not shed any light on the question of how to analyse will and meet. There is one type of paraphrase the function of which is to focalize on a constituent and which enables us to discard the proposal that will and meet form one constituent: (77)
a.
What the young linguist will do is [meet his friend in the local gallery after lunch].
b.
[Meet his friend in the local gallery after lunch] is what the young linguist will do.
In the two paraphrases in (77), we also cleave the sentence in two parts: the bracketed string meet his friend in the local gallery after lunch gets contrastive stress. This paraphrase separates will from the string meet... after lunch. The type of sentence illustrated in (77) is called a pseudo-cleft sentence. The pseudocleft sentence allows us to isolate the constituent containing the verb. Consider now the following pair of sentences:
(78)
a.
What the young linguist will do after lunch is [meet his friend in the local gallery].
b.
[Meet his friend in the local gallery] is what the young linguist will do after lunch.
If pseudo-clefting is a diagnostic for constituent structure, then not only do we have to assume that the string meet his friend in the local gallery after lunch is a constituent but the same conclusion applies to the string meet his friend in the
local gallery. We will return to this point later.*!
2.1.7
Further evidence for separating the verb and the auxiliary
On the basis of pseudo-clefting, we have reached the conclusion that in sentence (67a) the auxiliary will should be separated from the verb meet. These two words do not form one independent constituent. This conclusion is confirmed by another substitution test, illustrated in (79):
(79)
a.
The young linguist will meet his friend in the local gallery after lunch and his brother will do so too.
In (79a) do so too replaces the string meet his friend in the local gallery after lunch, confirming the approach suggested by the pseudo-cleft test above. Sim-
ilarly, we see in (79b) that the constituent meet his friend in the local gallery
after lunch can be fronted. We argued before* that movement of a string of 31 Tn section 2.4.1. 22 Section 2.1.3.
The Structure of English Sentences
54
words suggests that these words form a constituent. So once again, it seems that will and meet are not part of the same constituent. (79)
b.
Meet his friend in the local gallery after lunch, he will.
In (79c) the string meet his friend in the local gallery after lunch is deleted. Again the deletion does not affect the auxiliary will: (79)
c.
The young linguist will meet his friend in the local gallery after lunch. Will he?
The tests discussed above provide support for postulating a constituent containing the verb, its complement and adjuncts, which does not include the auxiliary will.
2.1.8
Summary
Our discussion of constituent structure has established that our example sentence (67a) must be decomposed at least into the following units: (80)
a.
[The young linguist] will [meet [his friend] [in the local gallery] [after lunch]].
The word is one type of constituent of the sentence. We have also identified constituents consisting of more than one word, phrases. (80a) can also be represented by means of the tree diagram in (80b).
(80) b.
S
the young linguist
will
meet
his friend
in the local gallery
after lunch
S is the symbol used for ‘sentence’ or ‘clause’. The sentence is composed of three immediate constituents:
(81)
a. b. c.
the young linguist will meet his friend in the local gallery after lunch
In order to refer to the geometry of the trees we use the following technical terms: the lines of the tree are called branches; the points where branches meet
to are called nodes; these nodes may be labelled (e.g. S). Node A will be said
dominate node B if you can go from node A to node B along a downward sentence. The branch. S, for instance, dominates all the constituents of the (80b), for material exhaustively dominated by one node is a constituent. In exhaustinstance, the string the young linguist is a constituent as it is dominated same the by d dominate material l additiona no is there ively by one node and
a2
The Structure of English Sentences
node. A node in which two branches meet is said to be binary branching; a node in which three branches meet is ternary branching. In (80b), S is ternary branching: it dominates three constituents. In (80b) there are no binary branching nodes. Structure (80b) is provisional, though; below,” we will discover the importance of binary branching in the structure.
2.1.9 Further evidence for structure: rightward movement of constituents In this section we illustrate some additional rearrangements of the sentence which can be used to demonstrate that a string of words forms a constituent. These concern rearrangements of a sentence in which a constituent is moved rightward. Consider the following examples. The bracketed string on the right edge of the clause functions as the argument of two verbs. (82)
a. b.
Louise writes, and Thelma recites, [epic poetry]. Thelma suspects, though she cannot assert, [that this message was sent from abroad].
In (82a) the noun phrase epic poetry counts as an argument of both write and recite. It is as if the constituent has been lifted, or ‘raised’, out of the two parallel object positions and functions as an argument for both of them. In (82b) the clause that this message was sent from abroad seems to be an argument both of the verb suspects and of the verb assert. Sentences such as those in (82) have a specific prosodic pattern. In (82a), for instance, there is a contrastive stress on the elements Louise and Thelma on the one hand, and on writes and recites, on the other, and there is also stress on the element that is common to
the two co-ordinated constituents, epic poetry. The construction exemplified in (82) is called Right Node Raising (RNR). Right Node Raising also helps identify a constituent. Another type of rightward movement is found in extraposition structures such as (83) and (84): (83)
a. b.
A woman [who sold second-hand books] came here yesterday. A woman came here yesterday [who sold second-hand books].
(84)
a b.
Thelma published a review [of Spielberg’s new movie] last week. Thelma published a review last week [of Spielberg’s new movie].
In (83a) a woman who sold second-hand books is a constituent: it can be replaced by the pronoun she and it can be clefted:
(83)
c. d.
She came here yesterday. It was a woman who sold second-hand books that came here yesterday.
In (83b), the NP constituent a woman who sold second-hand books is broken up: a part of this constituent has been moved rightward; the string who sold second-hand books is a constituent on its own. Constituents which have been 33 In sections 2.4 and 2.5.
The Structure of English Sentences
53
broken up are sometimes called discontinuous constituents. Similarly, in (84a),
the prepositional phrase of Spielberg’s new movie can be detached from the containing constituent a review of Spielberg’s new movie. The rightward movement of the constituents in (83b) and (84b) is referred to as extraposition. Rightward movement sometimes affects the direct object. This is illustrated in
the following example: (85)
a.
You should proof-read [three complete pages of your original text] every night.
b.
You should proof-read every night [three complete pages of your original text].
In (85a) the verb proof-read takes two arguments: you and three complete pages of your original text. In (85b) the second argument occupies the rightmost position of the clause. It is separated from the verb by the adjunct every night. In English a noun phrase complement cannot easily be separated from the verb by an adjunct. This was illustrated in examples (1b) and (2b) in section 0.1. It is also shown by the following examples. As we can see, the verb and the complement must be adjacent; non-adjacency of the verb and its complement leads to ungrammaticality. (86)
a.
a’. b. b’. c. c’.td
*You should proof-read every night [three pages].
You *You You *You You
should should should should should
proof-read proof-read proof-read proof-read proof-read
[three pages] every night. every night [these]. [these] every night. every night [them]. [them] every night.
Only noun phrase complements which are relatively long, such as that in (85), can be moved rightward across an adjunct. Short objects, and especially pronominal objects such as those in (86b, 86c), resist such separation. The rightward movement of ‘heavy’ objects is referred to as heavy NP shift (i.e. heavy ‘noun phrase’ shift).** That the string three complete pages of your original text in (85b) can undergo rightward movement suggests that it is a single constituent. In conclusion we can see that the rightward mobility of a string of words can be used to support its constituent status.
2.2
Words and categories
Sentences consist of constituents. We have distinguished two levels of constituents: (i) words, and (ii) phrases. In this section, we consider word-level constituents. We will distinguish different categories of words. It is also That sentences are made up of words is presumably uncontroversial. order. Though clear that the words that make up the sentence occur in a certain by no means there may be variation in the order of words, word-order is completely free. 34 We return to the phenomenon in chapter 2, section 1.4.5.1.
The Structure of English Sentences
54
Let us return to our sentence (67a) and the structure we assigned to it in (80b), repeated here as (87a). We cannot randomly change the order of the words, neither within the sentence as a whole (87b), nor within each constituent (87c):
(87)
a.
S
the young linguist . c.
will
meet
his friend
in the local gallery
after lunch
*[The meet gallery will his in friend linguist the local lunch young after]. *[Linguist the young] will [meet [friend his] [local in the gallery] {lunch after]].
There are constraints on the position of words in a sentence. In order to understand these constraints we will distinguish types or categories of words from each other.
Doe
iaiNouns
Consider for instance the words linguist, friend, gallery and lunch. In spite of their clear semantic differences, these words share many properties. Words belonging to the same category share morphological properties. For instance, the words linguist, friend, gallery and lunch are all singular words whose plural can be formed by adding -(e)s: (88)
a. b. c. d.
a a a a
linguist friend gallery lunch
two two two two
linguists friends galleries lunches
Words such as linguist, friend, gallery and lunch are called nouns. Another morphological property of nouns is that they can often be associated with a genitive morpheme:
(89)
a. b. c.
the linguist’s job the friend’s name the gallery’s owner
Words belonging to the same category also have a similar distribution: they appear in similar positions in the sentence. For instance, nouns can be preceded immediately by the article the or by the possessive pronoun his: (90)
a. b.
the linguist — the friend — the gallery — the lunch his linguist — his friend — his gallery — his lunch
Other words that belong to the lexical category of nouns are listed in (91): (91)
a. b. c.
mother, daughter, teacher, girl, door, window, writer, soldier, bomb love, hatred, justice, friendship, faith, hope, charity, horror information, water, food, milk, flour, sugar, cream, mud, blood, gas
The Structure of English Sentences
SS
As the reader will observe, there are differences between nouns. For instance, (91a) contrasts with (91b) semantically: (91a) lists nouns which refer to concrete
entities, objects or persons, while the nouns in (91b) refer to abstract entities. Nevertheless, by virtue of their distribution the words in (91b) are nouns: (92)a"a-
the/my love; the/my hatred; the/my justice; the/my friendship; the/my faith; the/my hope; the/my charity; the/my horror
Note, though, that the sequence the + noun in (91b) cannot always easily be used as such as a constituent in English. It must be modified by further material: (92)
b.
c.
*The love is wonderful.
The love for his country which inspired his actions moved everyone.
If they have no modifier, abstract words such as Jove are used without the article: (92)
d.
Love makes the world go round.
Several of the words in (91b) also do not easily allow for plural morphology: (92)
e.
*hatreds; *justices
The absence of a plural for words like hatred or justice derives from their meaning: such words indicate abstract entities which are not discrete and therefore not countable. These words are compatible with plural morphology when they are given an additional, countable, reading:
(92)
f. g. h.
The friendships and loves of members of the royal family always interest the public. Ihave supported several charities in my life. We should never allow mankind to forget the horrors of the First World War.
The words listed in (91c) are also usually incompatible with plural morphology: (93)
a.
*informations, *waters, *foods, *milks, *flours, *sugars, “creams, *muds, *bloods
entities; Again, the concepts expressed by these words are not concrete discrete
in (91c) are mass rather, these words refer to non-discrete quantities. The words nouns; they are not countable. (93)
b.
*an/one information; *a/one water; *a/one food; etc.
category: nouns. We have so far identified one class of words, or one lexical by a possessive and (the) Nouns can be immediately preceded by an article pronoun (my, your, etc.).
56
The Structure of English Sentences
2.2.2
Verbs
Another word class that is easily identified at an intuitive level are verbs. In our original example (67) meet is a verb. Adopting the type of criteria developed for the identification of the noun in section 2.2.1, let us try to characterize verbs formally, by using morphological and distributional properties. Verbs are identified by their inflectional morphology. In the present tense, English verbs display agreement morphology: verbs have the third person singular ending -s which attaches to the base or root of the verb. For regular verbs, the past tense form is composed of the stem of the verb followed by the morpheme -ed; for irregular verbs — the verb meet is a case in point — there is an alternative past tense form.** Verbs may also end in -ing; this form is referred to as the present participle or the gerund. Verbs may appear in the past participle form which is formed by affixation of -ed or -en to the stem. Irregular verbs form their past tenses and their participles differently. (94) contains some examples of regular (work, wait) and irregular (show, meet, go) verbs. (94)
Verb forms
infinitive work wait show meet go
present tense 3person singular work-s wait-s show-s meet-s goe-s
past tense work-ed wait-ed show-ed met went
present participle gerund work-ing wait-ing show-ing meet-ing go-ing
past participle work-ed wait-ed show-n met gone
Distributionally, the infinitival form of the verb can be preceded by elements such as will, can and must, which we call modal auxiliaries, or by the element
to, which signals the infinitival form. We return to the status of these elements below. (95)
Thelma will meet Louise in the local gallery after lunch. Thelma can meet Louise in the local gallery after lunch. Thelma must meet Louise in the local gallery after lunch.
an oP It was important for Thelma to meet Louise in the local gallery after lunch.
2.2.3
Adjectives
Adjectives such as young form a third class of words. With respect to their morphology, a subgroup of adjectives can be associated with the affixes -er and -est to express the notion of degree. The form in -er is the comparative form; the form in -est is the superlative form. For other adjectives, the same type of meaning is expressed by means of the degree words more/most: * We return to the interpretation of tense morphology in chapter 5, section 2.3.
The Structure of English Sentences (96)
a
Adjectives: comparative and superlative
adjective young kind attractive important
comparative younger kinder more attractive more important
superlative youngest kindest most attractive most important
The co-occurrence with degree words such as more and most is one distributional property of adjectives. Other degree words preceding adjectives are very, so, too, quite, rather, that, and the interrogative how: (97)
very young so young too young quite young rather young that young etree We OP how young HL
very kind so kind too kind quite kind rather kind that kind howkind
very attractive very important so attractive so important too attractive too important quite attractive quite important rather attractive rather important that attractive — that important how attractive how important
Adjectives may occupy the blank space in the following context: (98)
2.2.4
a. b.
the my/your/his/her/our/your/their/
my the the the my his
young friend young linguist local gallery new church favourite recipe red shirt
— —
noun noun
Adverbs
Just like adjectives, adverbs such as carefully can be modified by degree words: (99)
She painted the windows very carefully. She paints more carefully than her husband does. She painted so carefully that no one noticed the difference. She paints too carefully. She painted the windows quite carefully. She painted the windows rather carefully. She need not paint that carefully. How carefully have you painted the windows? aos. remo
Still, adverbs do not have exactly the same distribution as adjectives; they can- not be inserted in the same position: (100)
a.
b.
Her careful answer surprised him.
*Her carefully answer surprised him.
58
The Structure of English Sentences
The category of adverbs contains a number of distinct elements, and it is hard to give it a unified treatment. Some adverbs, such as carefully above, are morphologically related to adjectives (101a); others, such as Jong, are formally identical
to adjectives (101b); another group may be semantically related to adjectives but is formally different (the adverb well as opposed to the adjective good in (101c)). Degree words such as very, so, too, quite, rather, and so on, which modify adjectives as in (97) or adverbs as in (99), are themselves also often labelled adverbs. (101)
2.2.5
a. b. c.
She carefully prepared the dinner. The food took too long to prepare. He did not prepare it well enough.
cf. A careful preparation A long preparation A good preparation
Prepositions
A final class of words which is easily identified contains words like in and after. These words are prepositions. Morphologically, they are invariant. With respect to their distribution we observe that they can be followed by the string the + noun: (102)
a. b.
after [the party] in [the gallery]
Some prepositions also take clausal complements:*° (102)
2.2.6
c. d.
after [they left] before [I talk to him again]
Lexical categories
So far, we have identified five word classes or lexical categories: (103) a. b. c. d. €.
category noun verb adjective adverb preposition
abbreviation N Vv A Adv P n
examples friend, soldier, war, mud work, wait, show, meet, go young, local, careful, quick carefully, quickly, well, too, so in, after, before, since
In what follows we will only very occasionally refer to adverbs, as they constitute a class which needs to be more closely examined.
2.2.7
Functional categories
In our sample sentence (67), the following words remain to be identified: the, his, will. We turn to these elements in this section. °° We compare prepositions and so-called particles in chapter 2, section 4.
The Structure of English Sentences
2.2.7.1
59
Article, demonstrative and possessive
The word the is called the both singular nouns (104c).
is an article; it is characteristically associated with a noun. The definite article. In English, it is invariant and associated with
(104a) and plural (104b) countable nouns, as well as with mass For singular countable nouns, the definite article has an indefinite counterpart, a, the indefinite article. With plural nouns and with mass nouns, the definite article is the; for the indefinite variant we use either some or no article at all. In the latter case we will assume that the syntactic position occupied by the article is still available and that a non-overt or zero variant of the indefinite
article occupies this position. (104)
a. b.
singular plural
ror
definite article the woman the women
the water
indefinite article a woman some women 0 women some water 0 water
Nouns may also be preceded by words such as this/these and that/those, which are traditionally called demonstrative pronouns. This and that are the singular forms of the demonstrative pronoun; these and those are the plural forms.
(105) a. b.
singular plural
this
that
this woman these women
that woman those women
In English, nouns can be preceded either by an article or by a demonstrative but not by both. Articles and demonstratives are said to be in complementary distribution. (105)
*this the woman *the this woman *these the women
*that the woman “the that woman “those the women
*the these women
*the those women
c. d. e f.
demonstrative + definite
g. h. i i
demonstrative + indefinite *this a woman *a this woman *these some women *some these women
*that a woman *a that woman *those some women *some those women
and One way to account for the complementary distribution of demonstratives
articles is to propose that they actually occupy the same position.”” d by a Unlike the article, the demonstrative pronoun need not be followe noun:
(106)
a.
— This is a nice house. *The is a nice house.
this chapter, but we modify it in 37 We will adopt this view provisionally in section 2.3.1 of chapter 4, section 3.6.
The Structure of English Sentences
60 b.
I don’t like this/that. *T don’t like the.
Possessive pronouns (my/your/his/her/our/your/their) also precede the noun (107a). They are invariant for number. As was the case for demonstratives, English possessive pronouns do not co-occur with the article (107b); possessive pronouns and articles are in complementary distribution. As before, we can account for this by proposing provisionally that the article and the possessive occupy the same pre-nominal position. (107)
a. b. c.
her house *the her house *her the house
On the basis of the empirical data we have formulated two hypotheses: (i) the article and the demonstrative occupy the same position, ruling out (105c-4), and (ii) the article and the possessive occupy the same position, ruling out (107b-c). Taking these two hypotheses as our premises, we can deduce (iii) that demonstratives and possessives also occupy the same position. (107d) summarizes the reasoning: (107)
d.
(i)
(ii) (iii)
Premise
Premise Conclusion
Articles and demonstratives occupy the same position Articles and possessives occupy the same position Demonstratives and possessives occupy the same position
We are led to a new hypothesis (iii), simply by considering the hypotheses which we have developed. The conclusion itself is not directly based on any empirical evidence. We will check the validity of the conclusion (iii) by returning to the data. The empirical consequence of (iii) is that demonstratives and possessives do not co-occur: this prediction is borne out.** The data in (107e) are thus
evidence for the hypothesis (iii). (107)
e.
*this her house *her this house
At this point it is important to review the reasoning which we have developed. In the above discussion we have used both induction and deduction. In inductive types of reasoning we formulate a hypothesis on the basis of the empirical evidence; in deductive approaches we develop a hypothesis on the basis of the hypotheses already available. (i) and (ii) in (107d) are elaborated by induction; (iii) is the result of deduction. (iii) is in fact the conclusion which is forced upon us by the system which we have developed.
2.2.7.2
Functional categories
To refer to the set of words comprising the articles (definite and indefinite) and the demonstrative pronouns we use the more general label Determiner (Det). 58
: i re : j We will return to the distribution of possessive pronouns in chapter 4, section 3.5.
The Structure of English Sentences
61
The class Det differs from the classes N, V, A, Adv, and (to some extent) P in
several ways.
First, it is possible to list all the elements that belong to Det, while it would be well nigh impossible to list all English verbs. One can create new verbs quite easily when they are needed to express new notions. But the class of determiners is fixed. The categories N, V, A, Adv, and P constitute open classes, while the class Det constitutes a closed class. Prepositions are perhaps marginal in this respect. It is true that there is a relatively restricted number of prepositions and that new prepositions are not created every day. So in a sense, the class of prepositions is relatively closed. However, consider the following: suppose that it becomes important to be able to refer to a relation in which an element X is three centimetres to the right of an element Y. One might invent the preposition agrip for this, and it would not be unnatural to say The book is agrip the box. There is an important semantic contrast between words from the categories N, V, A, Adv, and P, and words belonging to the class of Determiners. Elements of the categories N, V, A, Adv, and P have a lot of lexical content. The difference between (108a) and (108b) is due to the choice of verb and the events described in these sentences are quite distinct:
(108)
a.
The woman met the president.
b.
The woman hit the president.
On the other hand, the choice of the versus a in (108) does not give rise to a
change in the state of affairs depicted by the sentence. Rather, the choice of the means that the referent of the woman is already salient in the things we are talking about, the universe of discourse, whereas the referent of a woman
is
newly introduced. _(108)
c.
A woman met the president.
Similarly, replacing an article by a demonstrative determiner does not alter the descriptive content of the sentence; rather, it relates the referent of the noun directly to the speaker. That contrasts with this: that N denotes a referent which is relatively removed from the speaker; this N denotes a referent which is relatively near the speaker. Demonstrative determiners, which relate the utterance to the speaker context, are deictic elements.
d.
(108)
This/that woman met the president.
The following examples show that replacing nouns (109a), prepositions (109b), adjectives (109c) and adverbs (109d) does have an impact on the type of event depicted by the sentence: (109) a. The woman/man/sailor met the president/doctor/butcher. b. I met Georgina on/under/behind the railway bridge. c. Louise is a brave/ambitious/generous/sexy woman. ly. d. Thelma corrected the text painstakingly/carefully/ quickly/generous content; the eleNouns, verbs, prepositions, adjectives and adverbs have lexical
are lexical ments belonging to the class Det have functional content. The former ies. categor nal functio categories; the latter are .
.
.
39
in chapter 4, section 3, 39 We will return in detail to the distribution of the determiners
where we will modify our analysis considerably.
The Structure of English Sentences
62
The members of functional categories are often phonetically reduced. In French, for instance, one characteristic property of the definite article is that it often forms a phonetic word with the word to its immediate right (110a) or to its immediate left (110b): (110)
a.
le + armoire
— > [armoire
the + cupboard b.
2.2.7.3
a+legarcon to + the boy
—>
au garcon
Auxiliaries
Finally, let us turn to will. Formally, it has some of the properties of a verb in that it is inflected for tense: will is in the present tense, would is in the past tense. On the other hand, elements like willivould are not associated with thematic structure and they do not influence the type of event expressed by a sentence. As mentioned
before, verbs like will are similar to inflectional ele-
ments. In (111a) will expresses that the event depicted by the sentence will take place in the future time-sphere. In other languages (French, for instance), futurity is expressed by verbal inflection: (111)
“a. b.
Thelma Thelma Thelma
will meet the president. rencontrera_ le président. meet + future the president.
While English future time is expressed by means of the auxiliary will, past time is expressed by a verbal inflection: (111)
c.
John walk-ed to the station. walk + PAST
The auxiliary will does not express the type of semantic content which is associated with lexical verbs, but rather that associated with functional elements. As a first approximation, we can label it AUX (for auxiliary) or we can label it modal. The latter term highlights the semantic function of will, which refers to a future world, or to a possible world. The category Auxiliary is like the category Det: it is a closed class. Only a restricted number of elements belong to the class of auxiliaries, illustrated in the following examples.
(111)
d. Thelma may meet the president. Thelma Thelma Thelma Thelma
must meet the president. can meet the president. should meet the president. has met the president.
Thelma is meeting the president. so The president is met by Thelma. =Soy
Auxiliaries do not depict situations; rather, they express certain modifications of time, mood or aspect, with respect to the type of situation expressed by the verb and its arguments. The category auxiliary is a functional category.
The Structure of English Sentences
63
Recall that one of the properties of functional words is that they may be
phonetically reduced. This also applies to auxiliaries:*° (111)
2.2.8
a’. h’. i’. J.
She'll meet the president. She’s met the president. She’s meeting the president. He’s met by Thelma.
Summary
On the basis of this first informal discussion we can label the terminal (lowest) nodes in our tree diagram as follows:
S
(112)
Pee
=
[oe
NE
NUK
eV
Dele
wIN
rs Deen
IN
Po
ele Pelt pe Rr eee ee ee
the young linguist will meet his friend in the local gallery after lunch There remain a number of problems with the labelling in (112), which we shall tackle presently. An obvious point, which we correct immediately, is that while the young linguist, a sequence Det-A-N, is considered a constituent, the formally analogous sequence the local gallery is not. In (112) it looks as if the elements the, local and gallery all have the same relationship to the preposition
_in. This clearly is not correct: the local gallery behaves as one constituent, just like the young linguist. Observe, for instance, that it can be substituted for by one word, there:
(113)
The young linguist will meet his friend in there after lunch.
We will treat the string the local gallery on a par with the string the young linguist and replace (112) by (114):
S
(114)
Derek
ON
AUR
Der
Ne Fe pete sa
N
PR,
N
e e e inth 1 in the local gallery after lunch friend his meet will linguist the young , i.e. constituents In the next section we examine the internal structure of phrases
_»
after lunch, in the such as the young linguist, meet his friend in the local gallery local gallery, etc. section 2.5.2. 40 We return to the discussion of auxiliaries in
The Structure of English Sentences
64
2.3 2.3.1.
Phrases Noun Phrases or NPs
We have already suggested that the strings the young linguist and the local gallery have something in common. For one thing, they contain the same components: Det-A-N. This is also true of the following strings: (115)
a.
determiner the the this those these
adjective young smart old pink fine
noun linguist teacher car T-shirts paintings
an
important
step
As possessive pronouns were seen to be in complementary distribution with the article and the demonstrative, we might provisionally classify them with determiners: (115)
b.
determiner
adjective
noun
my his
smart old
teacher car.
A property of the sequences in (115a) and in (115b) is that they can be replaced by pronouns, as shown in (115c):
(115)
c.
The young linguist He/she
is ill.
The smart teacher He/she
has written a novel.
His old car It
was badly damaged.
Those pink T-shirts They
have faded.
These fine paintings They An important step It
| were badly damaged. has been taken.
Pronouns such as he/she/they/it typically replace strings containing at least an N element. Within the constituent the young linguist, it is intuitively clear that some of the component elements are more important than others. From the semantic
point of view, it is the element linguist that is the most important. First of all, we cannot leave it out without radically altering the meaning of this phrase: the string the young refers to young people in general. It has no more relation with
The Structure of English Sentences
65
young linguists than with young architects. When we replace the N linguist by the N architect as in the young architect the reference of the string changes entirely. If we remove the adjective young, the resulting string, the linguist, can still refer to the same entity as the string the young linguist. As mentioned before, the substitution of a for the does not affect the descriptive content of the string. In (116a) the string a young linguist introduces a referent which is later referred to by the string the young linguist in (116b): (116)
a. b.
A young linguist went to the door and talked to a policeman. The young linguist looked very nervous.
Let us propose a first analysis.*! Based on semantic considerations, we propose
that the most important element of the string the young linguist is the N linguist. We label the entire string a noun phrase (NP). The noun determines the category of the constituent. We say that the N linguist heads the NP the young linguist; the N linguist is the head of the NP. Another way of expressing the relation between the phrase and its head is to say that the entire phrase (in our example a noun phrase) is a projection of its head (here a noun). (hb
arta:
NP [projection/phrase] Det
the
A
N [head]
young _ linguist
The same analysis will apply, by analogy, to the other strings in (115a) and (115b). One problem with this analysis is that it does not account for the fact that Det is often a non-omissible component of the NP, suggesting that it too determines
the nature of the phrase:* (117)
b.
*Young linguist arrives tomorrow.
For the time being we leave aside the central role of the Det and focus on the other components of the NP. imply The discussion leading up to diagram (117a) should not be taken to propThe . that NPs are invariably composed of exactly the sequence Det—A-N is ent constitu the erties which we single out as diagnostics of NP are (i) that this Under . headed by an N and (ii) that it can be replaced by a pronoun characterization the following strings are also NPs: (107);
‘ce >[hy [xp [yp [yp
thé*teacher] the daughters of the butcher] the teachers from France] the angry young women]
[wp Some young women]
[yp the two women with cowboy hats]
3. 41 To be revised considerably in chapter 4, section 3. section 4, r chapte in point this “2 We return to
66
The Structure of English Sentences
Consider, for example, the string the daughters of the butcher. In (118a) the string is the argument of the verb come. As shown by (118b) the string is a constituent: it can be replaced by the pronoun they. We postulate that when a constituent can be replaced by a pronoun it is a noun phrase (NP). (118)
a. b.
[yp The daughters of the butcher] are coming to the party. They are coming to the party.
What is the head of the NP the daughters of the butcher? The head of an NP is by definition a noun; the string contains two nouns: the plural noun daughters and the singular noun butcher. Semantically speaking, daughters functions as the head of the NP in that it determines the referent of the NP. The string refers to girls or women whose father is a butcher. Moreover, the N daughters determines the properties of the full constituent. For instance, we replace the string by a plural pronoun, they, which picks up the plurality of daughters, and not by a singular pronoun he, which would pick up the singular number of butcher: (118)
c.
*He are coming to the party.
The NP the daughters of the butcher gives rise to plural agreement on the verb be (are), again corresponding to the number of daughters rather than that of butcher. We propose that it is daughters which is the head of the NP: (118)
d.
[yp The daughters of the butcher] are/*is coming to the party.
If we replace plural daughters by singular daughter, the entire NP is replaced by the singular pronoun she and triggers singular agreement:
(118)
e. f.
[yp The daughter of the butcher] is/*are coming to the party. She is coming to the party.
We conclude that while the NP the daughters of the butcher contains two nouns, daughters and butcher, it is the head noun, daughters, which determines the number of the full noun phrase. The singular N butcher, which is also contained in the bracketed NP, does not influence the number of the NP because
it is not the head of the NP. The features of the head project up to the maximal projection:
(118) g.
NP [a sg] Det
N’
N
[a sg]
where @ is + or —; +sg = singular; —sg = plural. Sometimes, an NP consists of just one overt element:
(119)
a.
[yp Women] are very ambitious. They often compete with [jp men].
The Structure of English Sentences
67
In1 (119a) women is a noun phrase: : it can be replaced b a pro ( they). Similarly men in (119a) is a noun phrase. 4 ‘gala ad In our initial example (67) there was one NP which consists of just a bare N. The N lunch can be replaced by a pronoun such as it or that (119b). It can also be part of a bigger NP (119¢): (119)
b. c.
The young linguist will meet his friend in the local gallery after that. The young linguist will meet his friend in the local gallery after a late lunch.
We assume that the nouns women and men in (119a) and the noun lunch in (67) head NPs with non-overt determiners:
(119)
d.
NP Det
N
* 0
lunch women
If we say that NPs are constituents that can be replaced by pronouns, this amounts to saying that pronouns share the relevant properties of NPs and should themselves be categorized as NPs. (119)
2.3.2
e.
[yp IJ have met [yp them].
Prepositional Phrases or PPs
In our example (67) we encountered two sequences consisting of a preposition (P) followed by a noun phrase (NP): (120)
a. b.
in the local gallery after lunch
The string in the local gallery is to be distinguished from the string the local gallery. The two tend not to occur in the same syntactic position, as illustrated by (121). An asterisk inside parentheses (121a, c) means that the insertion of the material in the parentheses leads to ungrammaticality; an asterisk outside parentheses (121b, d) means that the material in the parentheses must be inserted for the clause to be grammatical. In (121a), for instance, the insertion of in leads to 1c) ungrammaticality, whereas in (121b) a preposition is required. Similarly, in (12 be. must it 121d) ( lunch cannot be accompanied by a preposition, whereas in
* (121)
a. b. c. d.
(*In) the local gallery is having a special menu for Christmas. I always meet my friend *(in) the local gallery. Iam having (*after) lunch with Louise. Iam meeting Thelma *(after) lunch.
The Structure of English Sentences
68
The sequence P + NP is thus distinct from NP. The preposition characterizes the nature of the string. P heads the string P + NP. We refer to constituents introduced by a preposition as prepositional phrases or PPs:
end
cgi
P
NP
in after before
the local gallery lunch her departure
Some prepositions may also select a finite or a non-finite*’ clause:
(122)
b.
tage aor: P after
before
S they had had lunch ec having had lunch she left ec leaving
Prepositions may also themselves select a PP complement: (120)
2.3.3.
Tas.dameiae 0 P
PP
for
after the party
from
before the war
Verb Phrases or VPs
We have still not provided any label for the string consisting of the V meet, the NP his friend and the PPs in the local gallery and after lunch. This constituent is central in the sentence because it contains the verb (V) the argument structure
of which determines the minimal components of the sentence.** Because -V determines the obligatory components of the string under examination and because it is also in a sense semantically central in determining what kind of event is
depicted, we consider V the head of the constituent. We then label the whole string verb phrase, VP. * The subject of the non-finite clause is non-overt. Cf. section 1.3 above.
* See section 1 of this chapter.
The Structure of English Sentences
69
Certain constituents in the string labelled VP are not obligatory. For instance, the PPs in our example are not obligatory: (123)
a.
The young linguist will meet his friend.
In (123a) the VP is meet his friend. It can be replaced by do so, and it can be the focus of a pseudo-cleft sentence: (123)
b. c.
The old linguist will do so too. What the young linguist will do is meet his friend.
It is not the case that a VP must obligatorily contain an NP complement: (124)
a. b. c.
The young linguists will assemble in the local gallery after lunch. The old linguists will do so too. What the young linguists will do is assemble in the local gallery after lunch.
In both (123) and (124) do so substitution and pseudo-clefting identify the strings meet his friend and assemble in the local gallery as constituents, and in both it is the V that heads the phrase. There are also VPs which contain just a V: (125)
a. b. c.
The young linguists will resign. The old linguists will do so too. What the young linguists will do is resign.
We conclude that the VP minimally contains a V-head, and that sometimes a VP contains just the V-head. (126) provides a representation for some of the VPs discussed above:
V
NP
PP
PP
meet
his friend
in the local gallery
after lunch
che
(123a)
VP
b. Vv
NP
meet
his friend
(124a)
VP
. Vv
PP
ye
assemble
in the local gallery
after lunch
70
The Structure of English Sentences d.
(125a)
VP
resign
VP is a constituent at the phrasal level headed by V. As a diagnostic for VPhood, we can use the do so substitution test or the pseudo-clefting test.
2.3.4
Adjective Phrases or APs
So far, we have identified three constituents of the phrasal type: NP, PP, VP.
(127) illustrates the fourth type: (l27\s
a b. c.
d
the *the the the
rather talented linguist rather linguist talented linguist rather shy/brave/old/rich linguist
In (127a) we have added the string rather talented to the NP the linguist. The adjective talented is the head of the string rather talented: the adverb rather modifies the adjective talented. We cannot insert the degree adverb rather unless there is an adjective inside the NP (127b), while the adjective talented may be inserted without the degree adverb (127c). Rather and talented form one constituent, headed by the adjective talented. Such a constituent is an adjective phrase or AP. The structure of the NP in (127a) is given in (127e):
(137)
NP Det
AP Deg
the
A
rather talented _ linguist
But if rather talented in (127a) is an AP, talented in (127c) is the same type of constituent, the only difference being that this time the phrase consists of just the head talented. Analogously to NPs and VPs, we allow for APs to contain just a head A:
(427) of.
NP
melee fivuetat die cesar Det
AP
N
the
ait young shy
linguist
:
The Structure of English Sentences
7
Consider now (128): (128)
a.
John is rather intelligent.
b.
John is rather proud of the results.
In (128a) the adjective phrase rather intelligent is a constituent, witness the fact that it can be deleted (129a) and that it can be substituted for by so (129b).
The same criteria will also identify rather proud of the results in (128b) as a constituent. (129)
John is rather intelligent. ats nee So is Mary.
a, b.
John is rather proud of the results. Is he? So is Mary.
In (128a) the adjective phrase rather inteiligent functions as the predicate of the sentence. It expresses a property of the subject NP John, to which it is linked by the copula be. The same is true for rather proud of the results in (128b). In the last example, the adjective phrase contains the head, proud, the adverbial modifier rather, and in addition it contains the PP of the results. This PP functions as the complement of the adjective. The structure of the AP in (128b) is as follows:
(130)
AP a Deg
ae A
PE
Paks P NP pe ae
proud
rather
of
Det
N
i
ai
When adjectives function as the heads of predicates, they can be accompanied by a complement. When they are modifiers of the noun phrase a contrast emerges between pre-nominal (131a) and post-nominal (131b) adjectives: (131)
a.
b.
*A proud of his children man would not do this.
A man proud of his children would not do this.
a Pre-nominal adjectives cannot take any complements. Adjectives which modify noun and take a complement must occur in post-nominal position. Analogously to APs, headed by adjectives, we can also postulate AdvPs, headed
by adverbs: - (132)
a. b. c. d
John John John John
writes [,q,p quite elegantly]. ; writes [,qp quite well]. [,qp rather quickly] realized what was going on. got the message [avr rather too late].
AQ.
The Structure of English Sentences
Adverbs modifying a verb tend not to take complements, even when they are morphologically related to complement-taking adjectives. In (133a), for instance, proudly is related to proud, but unlike the adjective, the adverb cannot take a complement:
(133)
a.
John refused the offer proudly (*of his work).
b.
John proudly (*of his work) refused the offer.
Some adjective-based adverbs do take complements, however. Independently is one example: (133)
c.
d.
2.3.5
Independently of all other considerations, the fact remains that we are short of cash. She acted quite independently of any personal considerations.
Summary: lexical categories and phrasal categories
Let us summarize section 2.3. On the basis of a number of constituency tests and of a typology of words we have identified five categories of phrasal constituents corresponding closely to the lexical categories which head them: (134)
a.
An NP
isa constituent headed by N. is a projection of N.
Dasa Ve
is a constituent headed by V. is a projection of V.
Cea PP
is a constituent headed by P. is a projection of P.
d.
An AP
isa constituent headed by A. is a projection of A.
e.
An AdvP is a constituent headed by Adv. is a projection of Adv.
The five statements in (134) can be collapsed. We can formulate a more general principle, a generalization:
(134)
f.
An XP
isa constituent headed by X. is a projection of X.
The same information can be represented in tree diagram format:
(134) g.
XP X
In (134g) X is the head of XP. The head X can be preceded or followed by further material. In NPs, for instance, the Determiner occupies a position to the left of the head, and in VPs V may be followed by NPs and/or by PPs. On the basis of the analysis of individual phrases we have developed the hypothesis that
The Structure of English Sentences
vi)
each lexical head heads a corresponding phrase. The tree diagram in (135)
summarizes our analysis of the sentence we started out with. Each node exhaustively dominates one constituent. For instance, the string the young linguist is a constituent, but the string the young is not. NP does not dominate the young exhaustively. Some nodes in the tree are binary branching: two branches spring from the one node. This is the case, for instance, for the _ PPs, and also for the NP node dominating his friend. The node S is ternary branching: three branches spring from that node. In the next section we will see
that we can reduce all branching nodes to binary branching nodes.
S
(135)
Dever
os
Ne
hUX
P
pe Det
in
the
Sa A
lunch
N
local gallery
A lexical category, such as N, heads a phrase (NP). NP, VP, AP, AdvP, and PP are constituents organized around a head: they are endocentric. A question that will arise is whether functional heads such as AUX (will) and Det (the) can also
head phrases.*°
2.4
Layering
2.4.1
VP-layers
for On the basis of the substitution test, we have arrived at structure (135) this In nce. convenie reader’s the for sentence (67), repeated here as (136a) friend), and representation, the verb phrase consists of a verb (meet), an NP (his
two
that PPs, in the local gallery and after lunch. Further empirical data suggest
er in relation to the NP in 45 We discuss AUX in section 2.5.2 and we return to the determin
.
chapter 4, section 3.
The Structure of English Sentences
74
our analysis above is not adequate and that we need a more articulated structure for the VP.
(136)
The young lunch. He will do He will do He will do
a. . c. d.
linguist will meet his friend in the local gallery after so indeed. so before lunch. so at the university before class.
In (136) we use substitution by do so to replace the following strings: (137)
a.
meet his friend in the local gallery after lunch
b. c.
meet his friend in the local gallery meet his friend
This means that each of the strings in (137) must be a constituent. But this conclusion is incompatible with representation in (135). In (135) VP does not exhaustively dominate the strings meet his friend in the local gallery (137b) and meet his friend (137c). According to (135), only (137a) qualifies as a constituent. We conclude that the VP structure represented in (135) must be decomposed into separate constituents:
VP
(138)
V
NP
[Ae AGE his friend
meet
P
Recepatiemal
NP
after
lunch
in the local gallery
In (138) we decompose the VP into distinct layers. The structure in (138) represents a hierarchical organization in which the V meet and the NP his friend form a constituent, meet his friend. The constituent is headed by the verb, but it
is not the full VP. We label it V’. This constituent combines in turn with the PP in the local gallery to form another V’, meet his friend in the local gallery, which finally combines with after lunch. The highest projection of V is labelled VP. VP is called the maximal projection of V; V is the head of the projection. The V’ constituents are also projections of V since their head is V, but they are not maximal projections: they are intermediate projections. The intermediate projections display a semantic hierarchy: the lowest V’ is composed of V and one of its arguments; a higher V’ is composed of V’ and an
optional element.*
P * In ; : 4 : ; section 2.4.5, we will propose an alternative analysis of the relation of the adjunct
to VP.
:
The Structure of English Sentences
75
An argument dominated by V’ is an internal argument. The term direct object is also used to refer to the NP in the lowest V’ with the head V. His friend is the internal argument or the direct object of the V meet. The argument of the verb that is realized outside the VP is called the external argument; in sentence (136a)
the NP the young linguist is the external argument.” The question arises how to analyse the structure of the following VPs with _ respect to the layered structure elaborated here: (139)
a.
Louise will abandon her husband.
b. c.
Thelma will dance after lunch. Louise will dance.
In (139a) the V abandon has two arguments, one internal (her husband) and one external (Louise). The sentence contains no adjuncts. In (139b) there is only an external argument (Thelma); there is no internal argument, but there is an adjunct (after lunch). In (139c) there is an external argument (Louise), but there is no internal argument or adjunct. We propose to maintain the layered structure for VPs. For (139a) we propose that the V’ level dominates V and its internal argument her husband. For (139b) we propose that the lowest V’ is non-branching: it simply dominates V, and the adjunct after lunch is attached to a higher projection. For (139c) we propose that again V’ and VP are non-branching. (140)
VP
a.
Vv’
Bd NP (eaten abandon her husband V
Co
VP
b. Ve
rr
VE, Vv’
| nnn Pta NP V Dakowhewdance Pserelt werupchre lunch dance after V
The representations in (140) show that abandon has an internal argument, while dance does not. The bare V in (139c) is dominated by VP because it behaves like aNP:
(141)
a. b.
What I won’t do is dance after lunch. What I won’t do is dance.
Given the parallelisms between VP and the other phrasal categories, we may wonder whether the layering of the VP proposed in (140) can be extended to the other phrasal categories, NP, AP, AdvP and pp,**
2.4.2
NP-layers
Consider the bracketed NP in (142a):
(142)
a.
Yesterday, I met [xp the students of English from Paris].
47 See also chapter 2, sections 2 and 3. . We return to NPs in 48 In this section we provide a preliminary discussion of this question
_
will be formulated. chapter 4, section 3, where a more complex proposal
76
The Structure of English Sentences
Adopting our first analysis of the NP we might propose the structure in (142b):
(142)
NP
b.
ee, AO gE Det
N
PP.
PP
the
students
of English
from Paris
But the substitutions in (142c) and (142d) suggest that this structure is inadequate: (142)
c. d.
Ihad met [xp the ones from Paris] before. I had met [yp the new ones] at a party.
In (142c) ones replaces students of English, and in (142d) ones substitutes for students of English from Paris. If substitution tests can give us indications as to constituency, then the one-substitutions suggest that the string students of English is a constituent. This is incompatible with structure (142b): the material students of English is not exhaustively dominated by one node. The NP the students of English from Paris must be decomposed into a more articulate structure: (142)
NP Det
N’
N’
ite
ae N
EP.
P the
students
|
NP
i
ee
ae
NP =
We conclude that, just like the VP, the NP can be assigned a layered structure. The layering shows that the N students has a closer relation with the PP of English than with the PP from Paris. This is not surprising; the relation between students and of English closely resembles that between the V study and the direct object English in (143a). The VP in (143a) would have the structure in (143b):
(143) a. Thelma will study Englishin Paris. b. VP NG
pala | ue study
English
PP.
in Paris
The Structure of English Sentences
ad
Just as English is an argument of the V study in (143a), of English is an argument of the N students in (142e).” Consider also the following noun phrase, in which we have already bracketed the intermediate projection N’: (144)
a.
[yp the [y Queen of England]]
One pronominalization confirms that the string Queen of England, containing the head N of the NP, but not containing the determiner, is a constituent: (144)
b.
The first Queen of England was a spinster, the second one wasn’t.
There are a number of additional arguments for the existence of the N’ node. In certain contexts the constituent N’ may appear in isolation. N’ may function as a predicate of a copula: (144)
c.
Elizabeth is [Queen of England].
d.
Elizabeth became [Queen of England] when she was very young.
A constituent N’ can be co-ordinated with another constituent:
(144)
e. f.
Victoria became [Queen of England] and [Empress of India]. The [prisoner’s boyfriend] and [father of her child] is in prison for dishonesty.
Right node raising further confirms the intuition that the string Queen of England is a constituent separately from the determiner:
(144)
g.
She is the youngest, and possibly the last, Queen of England.
‘As was the case for VPs, NPs are assigned a layered structure even when they are realized as a bare N: (145)
2.4.3
a.
c.
Ihave met students.
I have bought wine.
Det
N’
ne
0
N students
0
)
N wine
AP, AdvP and PP
We have pointed out the similarity in structure between NP, VP, AP each case we have a lexical head projecting a phrase. We have also more articulate structure can be imposed on the VP and the NP. As this modification, all the branching nodes dominated by VP and
and PP: in seen that a a result of by NP are
and that of the noun 49 For further comparisons between the argument structure of the verb
see also chapter 4, section 3.4.1.
The Structure of English Sentences
78
binary branching. The same type of layering can be imposed on the structure of AP, AdvP and PP, thus reducing all branching to binary branching:
(146)
a.
AP ot
aa
Deg
A’
oo) grit Selec A quite
hae
b.
of any other considerations
AdvP Deg
quite
ly
Adv’
art So AES
independently
(3
— of any other considerations
PP. ee
ee
Deg
Pi ee
P
right
2.4.4
ste PE
en
NP
peetheByspotSE
‘
The X-bar format of phrase structure
The result of adopting such layered structures is that we obtain a more elegant and economic way of dealing with phrasal projections: all projections can be represented in terms of a single binary branching system. The schema in (147a) summarizes the format for lexical projections. (1a)
ea:
XP
specifier
2» Xx
complement
(147a) is the blueprint for all structures in English (and in other languages). Phrases are endocentric. The phrase is a projection of a head with the structure in (147a). The hypothesis summarized in (147a) is referred to as X-bar theory or
X’-theory. X or X’ is the head of the projection. XP is the maximal projection
The Structure of English Sentences
pe)
(the topmost projection of X); X’ is an intermediate projection. X’ dominates
the head X and the complement; the maximal projection XP dominates an intermediate projection X’ and the specifier. The specifier of XP is sometimes abbreviated as [Spec,XP]. X’-theory defines the local relations of a head, X. Every head bears two local
relations: the head is locally related to its complement and to the specifier of its projection. The locality constraint on grammatical relations®’ restricts poss‘ible syntactic relations: it allows a constituent A to enter into a grammatical relation with a constituent B provided A bears a local relation to B. We will see that locality restrictions play a role throughout the grammar. Notably, local-
ity has an impact on selection,’' on case-assignment,* on movement,’ and on interpretation.” The relation between a head and its complement is also characterized in terms of the traditional notion of government. We say that the head governs the complement.
2.4.5.
The X-bar format and adjunction
A complication to of sentence-medial ated by AUX, and often and the verb (148)
a.
the X-bar format above arises when we consider the position adverbials such as often or always. In (148a) will is dominthe verb buy is inside the VP. We see that will precedes very follows it:
Louise [yx will] very often [yp buy novels].
What is the position of the adverb phrase very often in the structure of the sentence? We propose that the adverb is associated with the verb phrase, buy novels, which it quantifies:
(148)
b.
S NP
VP2
INFL
VW
Louise
will
Vv
NP
|
pattie
buy
_ © Cf. section 1.2 above for a first discussion. 5! Section 2.5.8. %2 Section 3.7.
8 Chapter 2, section 1.4.3, chapter 6, section 4.2. 54 Chapter 5, sections 1.6 and 2.3.3.
novels
80
The Structure of English Sentences
The adverb phrase headed by the adverb often combines with the lowest maximal projection, VP1, also called the minimal maximal projection, to form the higher maximal projection VP2. The labels VP1 and VP2 do not have any theoretical significance; they simply serve to distinguish the two maximal projections or segments. The complete VP is the combination of the segments VP1 and VP2. The structure resulting from this attachment is called an adjunction structure: the adverb phrase is adjoined to the VP or VP-adjoined. Adjunction structures allow us to expand an already existing maximal projection by adding an additional level. The general format for adjunction is given in (147b); the left-hand representation illustrates left-adjunction, the right-hand representation rightadjunction. As before, the numbers associated with the labels XP1 and XP2 merely serve to identify the segments of XP; they have no theoretical significance. XP1 is the minimal maximal projection.
(147)
b.
XP2
3
XP2
ee
ZP.
ae
XP1
XP1
ie mole
Kk ah orm
Spec
x’
Spec
Le.
x’
a aes x
complement
xX
complement
In sentence (148c) two AdvPs separate the auxiliary from the verb. This sentence illustrates a case of multiple adjunction. (148d) is a partial structure: (148)
c.
Mary will probably always remember this story.
d
VP ae
ee
AdvP
VP pene
lie
AdvP
VP
f
ce
View probably
always a
NP vas
If we assume that the sentence-medial adverb phrase in (148a) is VP-adjoined, then the question arises whether we ought not to modify our analysis of the VP outlined before, and assume that post-verbal adjuncts are also VP-adjoined. Whereas our initial account of VP-layering (2.4.1) would have led us to structure (149b) for the VP of (149a), a generalization of the adjunction account leads us to posit (149c).
The Structure of English Sentences (149)
a.
81
Mary will read this book very often.
b.
VP
Debate von Ne vile eas Weal. |
]
AdvP
NP
read
PN
c
very often
VP2 i
VP1
AdvP
I
Tae
V
“Ke
NP a
very often
Obviously, if we take this step for the VP-structure, we should also consider it for the other phrases. Post-nominal modifiers would then be NP-adjoined, for
instance.°° Analysing all adjuncts in terms of adjoined structures restricts the content of the lower maximal projection (“XP1’) to just the arguments of the head; adjuncts are adjoined to that projection, giving rise to (recursive) additional segments.”° So far, we have elaborated the X’-format for VPs, NPs, APs, AdvPs and PPs. Clauses (S) seem not to be determined by the general format, and this for two reasons. (i) S is ternary branching; the sentence has three immediate constituents: NP, AUX and VP; (ii) we have not yet identified a head for S.”’
2.5
2.5.1
Functional projections
S, binary branching and AUX
We have described projections of lexical heads and we have established that their structure can be represented in the X’-format. Phrases are endocentric: they are built up around a nucleus, a head. The structure of S was left outside this system. Consider the following examples: 55 We return to this point in chapter 2, section 1.2. we will extend them 56 We will return to adjunction structures in chapter 3, section 1, where
n in the NP and to all categories. In chapter 4, section 3.7, we reconsider the role of adjunctio
n structures in the “in the clause. In chapter 5, section 3, we turn to the role of adjunctio
representation of the interpretation of a sentence. with an opportunity 57 We turn to these questions in the next section. They will provide us AUX. labelled position the of to reconsider the syntax
The Structure of English Sentences
82 (150)
a. b.
The teacher will invite the student after lunch. The teacher invited the student after lunch.
In (150a) we find the pattern that we have already come across. The sentence divides into three immediate constituents: the NP the teacher, the auxiliary will, and the VP invite the student after lunch: (TL50)
ia ae
c
ag
S
VP
AUX
NP
Lae
| will
the teacher
invite the student after lunch
At first sight, representation (150c) cannot apply to sentence (150b), which does not contain any auxiliaries. However, there are arguments for isolating an AUX node in this example too. Consider the following sentences. The sentences in (151) correspond to (150a), and those in (152) to (150b).
(151)
a.
What the teacher will do is invite the student after lunch. Invite the student after lunch is what he will do. Invite the student after lunch, he will.
c.
(152)
a. . c.
What the teacher did was invite the student after lunch. Invite the student after lunch is what he did. Invite the student after lunch, he did.
Consider first pseudo-clefting in the (a) sentences. In (151a) the VP invite the student after lunch is separated from the auxiliary will. In (152a), in exactly parallel fashion, the VP is isolated and the past tense inflection associated with the verb in (150b) is now associated with the auxiliary do. These sentences provide a first motivation for assuming that the tense inflection of the verb has
an auxiliary-like status. Recall that will itself is also inflected for tense: it is the present tense form, would being the past tense form. In (151b) the VP is fronted, stranding the modal auxiliary will. Similarly, in (152b) the VP is fronted and the past tense morpheme is stranded and realized on did, the past tense form of the auxiliary do. We conclude that the past tense inflection on the verb in (150b) is parallel to the auxiliary will in (150a). In order to express the syntactic parallelism between will and the past tense morpheme, we assign the same structure to sentences (150a) and (150b), locating the past tense morpheme -ed in the same position as the auxiliary will. Will is inflected for present tense; its past form is would. From this point of view, what is common to will and the -ed past tense morphology is that both realize tense
inflection. We represent this by relabelling the AUX node INFL for Inflection. (150)
d.
S NP f; the teacher
ix
a i, -ed
invite...
The Structure of English Sentences
83
INFL not only encodes tense properties of the verb, it also dominates person morphology, as can be seen from the following examples: (153)
a.
What the teacher does is invite the student after lunch.
b.
Invite the student after lunch is what he does.
c.
Invite the student after lunch, he does.
INFL dominates the tense and agreement (AGR) inflection of the verb. (150)
e.
S NP
the teacher
INFL [Tense] [AGR] will -ed
VP | invite...
-S
The INFL node can be seen to dominate either free morphemes such as will or bound morphemes or affixes such as -ed, -s. If INFL dominates a bound morpheme then this bound morpheme will have to be united with a lexical stem. Bound morphemes, by definition, must be associated with another morpheme: they cannot remain independent in the structure. (150)
f. g.
*The teacher -ed invite the student after lunch. *The teacher -s invite the student after lunch.
In language there is a general prohibition on leaving bound morphemes or affixes stranded in the structure. This ban will mark as ungrammatical all strings which contain a bound morpheme or affix which is unattached. The ban on unattached or stray affixes is not just confined to English, as shown by the following examples: (154)
a.
French
Jean rencontrait |’étudiant a Paris. Jean met the student in Paris
a’.
b.
by:
*Jean -ait rencontre |’étudiant a Paris. Jean -past meet the student in Paris
Dutch
*Jan -te ontmoet de student in Parijs. Jan -past meet the student in Paris
Jan ontmoette de student in Parijs. Jan met the student in Paris
eme unites with V in We will examine the process by which the bound morph English in the next section.
84
The Structure of English Sentences
2.5.2
Lexical verbs and auxiliaries
2.5.2.1.
Lexical verbs remain inside the VP
2.5.2.1.1 SENTENCE-MEDIAL ADVERBS AND VERB POSITIONS We have already pointed out that representation (150e) cannot correspond to the surface string of the sentence: the stray affixes in (150f) and (150g) lead to ungrammaticality. (150e) is an abstract representation which gives us the underlying structure or the base structure of the sentence. The affixes and will originate in the same position in the sentence. The original position which an element occupies in the structure will be called its underlying position or its base-position. As we have already seen,** constituents may be moved away from their base-position. The set of all the base-positions of the elements in the sentence is the underlying structure of the sentence, the deep or the D-structure. The structure obtained after various movements have rearranged elements is the derived or surface structure, S-structure. The inflectional morpheme of the verb is a bound morpheme or affix, which must be united with a verb stem. In order to derive the surface string for (150b) we have to unite V with its tense and agreement morpheme. This could be achieved either (i) by lowering the affix onto the V as in (15Sa), or (ii) by raising the V towards the affix as in (155b):
(iss)
ba NP
atell INFL
VP
[Tense] [AGR] the teacher
—
invite-d
a
invite-s
bidunnhle7
b.
S NP
INFL [Tense]
LAGR |e the teacher
VP
$2
_invite-d — socia bellies invite-s
In order to choose between the lowering analysis and the raising analysis, we must look at the distribution of inflected verbs with respect to elements that are located between I and VP. If V moves to I then V will cross such elements and %8 Section 1.2.
The Structure of English Sentences
85
end up to their left. If INFL lowers onto V, then V remains to the right of the constituents which sit between I and V. One type of element that intervenes between I and V are sentence-medial
adverbs such as often, always, already. We proposed above” that such adverbs are VP-adjoined: (156)
a.
S NP
INFL
VP2
AdvP
VP1 | ee .V
NP
| Louise
will
often
a
read
this book
Modal auxiliaries always precede sentence-medial adverbs. Such auxiliaries are always tensed: for example, can is present tense, could is past tense. We propose that modal auxiliaries are inherently tensed and must be inserted under INFL. In what follows we will use the position of sentence-medial adverbs such as often as signposts to determine the position of the verb with respect to INFL. Consider the sentence in (156b):
(156)
b.
Thelma will already have read the book.
In (156b) will precedes already. We assume, as before, that it is located under INEL. The VP contains two verbs, have and read. Given X’-theory, the presence of the two verb heads leads to the creation of two VPs, one VP headed by the auxiliary have, the second one headed by the participle of the lexical verb read. The sentence-medial adverb precedes have. We assume that it is adjoined to the VP:
S
(156) c. NP
VP
INFL
VP
AdvP
F
ae ee
Thelma 59 Section 2.4.5.
will
already
have
Vy’
Vv
NP
Ais
the book
86
The Structure of English Sentences
In (156b) have is not a finite verb; it does not carry agreement or tense inflection. It is a verbal root. Its complement is the VP headed by the participle read, another non-finite form. Let us now consider (157a): (157)
a.
Thelma has already read the book.
In (157a) there are again two verbs, has and read. Again, by analogy with (156b), we propose that there are two VPs in the structure: that headed by have,
and that headed by read. The tense and agreement affix associated with have is inserted under the designated node INFL. The D-structure or the underlying structure of (157a) is as in (157b):
(1577) tub.
S NP
INFL
[present] [3sg]
aol AdvP
t WE
ee
Foe
V
VP
|
Wig
ee
V
Thelma
-s_
already
have
VP
|
Oa
read
the book
But we know that the bound morpheme -s cannot remain stranded under INFL: it must associate with the verb have. In (157a) has precedes already. This we will take to mean that in this sentence have has united with INFL by moving up and incorporating into INFL. The affix and the verb thus form one word: (157)
ee
S NP
INFL have + -s
VP AdvP
VP
| Vv’
V
VP
|
ee ees V
Thelma
has
already
cae
—— ol
— read
NP
the book
The Structure of English Sentences
87
On the basis of its distribution with respect to the adverb already we conclude that the auxiliary have moves up to INFL to unite with the inflection. The same reasoning applies to the boldfaced auxiliaries in (158): (158a) contains progressive be, (158b) contains passive be. : ail (158) Now
a. b.
Thelma is already reading the novel. Thelma is often invited to parties.
consider (159a). In this example there is only one verb, read, a lexical
verb. The sentence will contain only one VP, headed by read. (159)
a.
Louise often reads novels.
b.
S NP
INFL
VP2
[present]
[3s]
advp
VP1
a
Louise
often
-S
V
NP
read
novels
How does the verb read unite with the inflectional affix -s? If the verb were to - move to INFL, we predict that we would end up with a sentence in which the verb precedes the adverb: (159)
c.
*Louise reads often novels.
The resulting string is ungrammatical. Apparently, a lexical verb like read canVPnot escape from the VP to move to its inflection. Rather, the verb remains ed, unattach left being avoid to order internal, i.e. to the right of the adverb. In INFL lowers onto the lexical verb:
(159) d.
S NP
INFL
VP2
AdvP
VP1
|
ee
V
| Logice
set
olten fread + :S
NP
|
novels
88
The Structure of English Sentences
The discussion so far has revealed a number of important points about the distribution of verbs in English. Let us summarize our findings: 1
2
3
Modal auxiliaries such as will, may, can, and so on precede VP-adjoined
sentence-medial adverbs. We assume that they are dominated by INFL. Modal auxiliaries are always inflected for tense; we assume that they are inherently associated with tense and must be inserted under INFL. Auxiliaries such as have and be follow VP-adjoined sentence-medial adverbs when they are non-finite, but they precede them when finite. We propose that to unite with their finite inflection, they move to INFL. Lexical verbs such as read always follow VP-adjoined sentence-medial adverbs. We propose that they are not able to move out of the VP; INFL lowers onto them. If we adopt a distributional analysis of the contrast between auxiliaries and
lexical verbs, then we are led to conclude that copula be in (160a) behaves like an auxiliary in terms of its distribution.
(160)
a.
Louise is already bored.
In (160a) the verb under analysis is not followed by any other verb. It is the only verb of the sentence. Nevertheless, since it precedes the sentence-medial adverb, we conclude that, like auxiliaries, it must be able to leave the VP. The same conclusion applies to the status of have in sentences such as (160b) which are sometimes accepted in formal British English. The symbol % is intended to mean that the judgement is not shared by all the speakers of the language. (160)
b.
%Thelma has already enough money.
Let us consider the distribution of the verb be in (160a) in more detail. In (160a) be functions as a copula: it relates a predicate, an AP, to the subject NP. (160c) shows the base-position of be in (160a). Be moves out of its baseposition and raises to INFL (160d), producing (160a). (160)
c.
. NP
S
“INEL [Tense]
[3s8]_
VP
Advp
VP Vv’
Vv
AP INS
A
Louise
-s_
already
be
bored
The Structure of English Sentences d.
89
S NP
INFL [Tense]
[3se]
Adv
VP
.
ear St (toe gn
be +s
Vv
AP
l
!
Louise
is
already
——
lg
The same analysis would apply to possessive have for those speakers who accept (160b). Again, the fact that have may precede the adverb shows that it can leave the VP and move to INFL. However, note that (160b) is unacceptable in many varieties of English in which (160e) is the only option:
(160)
e.
Thelma already has enough money.
~ In (160e), possessive have is a lexical verb and remains inside the VP. 2.5.2.1.2 NEGATION The difference between auxiliaries and lexical verbs is also clear when we con-
sider their distribution with respect to the negative marker not: (161)
Thelma Thelma Thelma Thelma Thelma moao op Thelma
will not write any books. may not write any books. could not write any books. has not written any books. is not writing any books. is not bored.
ed as auxiliarIn the examples in (161a-f) the boldfaced verbs, which we classifi
sentence-medial ies on the basis of the fact that they precede a VP-adjoined In contrast, lexical adverb, also precede the marker of sentential negation not. verbs cannot precede negation:
(161)
g.
*Thelma writes not any books.
ial adverbs, the inflection Interestingly, in contrast to sentences with sentence-med
: cannot lower across not onto the verb either
(161)
h.
*Thelma not writes any books.
90
The Structure of English Sentences
In order for the bound morpheme of the inflection to survive, the verb do is inserted: (161)
i. | Thelma does not write any books.
Do is inserted in (161i) as a last resort operation to enable the sentence to survive. The inflectional morpheme must not remain isolated; the lexical verb cannot move up to it, nor can the inflection lower onto the verb. So do, which functions as an auxiliary here, is inserted to support the bound morpheme.”
2.5.2.1.3 LEXICAL VERBS VERSUS AUXILIARIES AND STRENGTH OF INFLECTION On the basis of their distribution with respect to sentence-medial adverbs such as often, already, etc., and with respect to the marker of sentential negation not, we have distinguished two kinds of verbs. English lexical verbs cannot precede either VP-adjoined sentence-medial adverbs such as often or the negation marker not. We concluded that lexical verbs must remain inside the VP. When INFL is adjacent to the verb, or when only an adverb intervenes, the inflectional morpheme is lowered onto the verb. In sentences which contain a negation marker
not between INFL and the VP, the lowering of the tense morpheme is blocked and do is inserted under INFL to carry the tense morpheme. Finite forms of auxiliary verbs such as have and be precede sentence-medial adverbs and the negative marker not. They can move to INFL, where they unite with tense and agreement inflection. Copular be behaves like an auxiliary. Possessive have usually behaves like a lexical verb, though it may behave like an auxiliary or like a lexical verb in some formal varieties of British English. Modal auxiliaries such as will and may are inherently tensed and are inserted under INFL. They always precede sentence-medial adverbs and the negation marker not. While we offer an account for the fact that modals are invariably inserted under INFL in the structure, the question arises why it is that the finite forms of the auxiliaries have and be move to INFL to pick up the finite inflection, while lexical verbs must remain VP-internal. In order to answer this question we will briefly look at the distribution of the verb in another language, French. In French, lexical verbs systematically leave the VP and unite with the inflection in INFL. This is shown by the fact that lexical verbs in French precede sentencemedial adverbs such as souvent (‘often’) or toujours (‘always’) and the negation marker pas: (162)
a.
b.
Louise mange toujours du pain. Louise eats always bread *Louise toujours mange du pain.
Louise ne mange pas de pain. Louise ne eats pas (‘not’) any bread *Louise ne pas mange de pain.
°° For more careful discussion of do-insertion and its role in the interpretation, of the sentence see also chapter 5, section 3.4.2.
The Structure of English Sentences
91
(162a) has the structure in (162c):
(162)
c.
S NP
INFL
VP2 AdvP
VP1
xsoircane hae i
| Louise
ROY
mang-e
toujours
NP
ae du pain
What property distinguishes the grammar of French from that of English? The answer to this question might be related to the nature of the verb or else to that of the inflectional morpheme. One important contrast between English and French is that English verb morphology is relatively impoverished compared to its French counterpart. Column (163a) is the present tense paradigm of the English verb finish, (163b) that of the French verb finir (‘finish’): (163)
a. English finish
1sg 2sg 3sg Ipl 2pl 3pl
I finish you finish he/she finishes we finish you finish they finish
b. French finir (‘finish’) je finis tu finis il/elle finit nous finissons vous finissez
ils/elles finissent
The present tense paradigm for French finir has four different forms (the forms finis and finit are not distinct phonetically), while that for English finish has two forms. These distinct forms reflect agreement (AGR) properties of the verb: finissons, for instance, is the first person plural; finissez is the second person a plural. We will formulate the hypothesis that an inflectional paradigm with and ‘strong’ as zed substantive number of distinct forms of agreement is characteri forms to that strong inflection can attract the verb. A paradigm with few distinct verb.°’ lexical the mark agreement is ‘weak’ and weak inflection cannot attract English. in ies auxiliar Let us return to the contrast between lexical verbs and are, is, was, were), The finite paradigms of be contain several distinct forms (am,
The present which we might invoke to account for the movement of be to INFL. forms, just two only s tense paradigm of the auxiliary have, however, contain points in the book. In chapter 5, 61 We return to the notions ‘weak’ and ‘strong’ at various contrast between strong and the f o s etation section 3.5, we will discuss some recent interpr weak inflection and its role in grammar.
92
The Structure of English Sentences
like a lexical verb. So why is it that perfective have can move to INFL while the lexical verb cannot do so? The answer to this question may well rest in the interpretation of the auxiliary have. Recall” that there is a semantic difference between lexical verbs and auxiliaries: lexical verbs assign thematic roles, auxiliaries such as have do not assign thematic roles. Interpretively speaking, auxiliary verbs are ‘lighter’ than lexical verbs. We might say that the weak inflection of English may not be strong enough to attract the lexical verb but that it is strong enough to attract the lighter auxiliaries. The movement of be to INFL would also be accounted for in terms of its semantic lightness.
2.5.2.2
Auxiliaries and question formation
The analysis proposed above also allows us to account for inversion phenomena in English. Consider the data in (164). (164)
a.
Is Louise writing anything?
b. c.
Has Louise written anything? May Louise write anything?
d.
Must Louise write anything?
In the above examples the auxiliary precedes the subject NP. As a first approximation, we propose that questions such as those in (164) are formed by moving INFL to the left of the subject. Since the auxiliaries can move into INFL, they are carried along by movement: (164)
e.
base structure NP
(AUX) + INFL VP
f. question formation (AUX + INFL) NP
VP
Lexical verbs cannot move to INFL. When INFL inverts with the subject as in (164f) it is expected that the lexical verb will not be able to be carried along by that movement, since the lexical verb remains in the VP. The data in (165) confirm this prediction: (165)
a.
*Writes Louise anything? Does Louise write anything?
b.
*Has Louise to write anything? Does Louise have to write anything?
c.
*Got Thelma invited?
Did Thelma get invited?
In the grammatical sentences in (165) the subject is preceded by an inflected form of the auxiliary do. Here again, the INFL-node has inverted with the © Section 1.4.
The Structure of English Sentences
93
subject in order to form a question. The lexical verbs cannot move out of the VP to carry the inflection. INFL itself must not lower onto V, since that would destroy the question configuration. As was the case in negative sentences, we insert do to carry the stray INFL affix. (165)
d.
base structure
Thelma e.
see anything
Thelma
see anything
Thelma
see anything
question formation
linri-S] f.
do-insertion or do-support
line. Do-es]
2.5.3
Liei-S]
S asa projection of I
After having established more clearly the relation between the node INFL and the verb, let us return to the question we asked earlier:** can the structure of clauses be integrated into the X-bar format in (147b)? We outlined an analysis of sentences in which every S has an INFL node dominating tense and agreement inflection.® We discussed the difference in the distribution of lexical verbs and auxiliaries. The main point of the latter discussion was that lexical verbs cannot leave the VP: hence they cannot precede adverbs such as already or the negative marker not, and they cannot precede the subject in questions. The reader will recall that the sentence structure which we have been developing differs from the X-bar format proposed for phrasal categories in (147b) in that S is not binary branching. Nor does the structure at first sight seem to have a head. In this section we adapt the structure we have proposed to the binary branching format and we show that S is endocentric. Lexical projections such as NP and VP are endocentric: they are projections of the head. It is the head which determines the properties of the projection. NPs are headed by N: the category of the head determines the category of the phrase. The same observation applies to VP, AP and PP. We also saw®’ that other properties of the head determine those of the projection. (166), for instance,” shows that the number of the NP is determined by the number of its head: the bracketed NP in (166a) is singular (cf. the singular verb is), while that in (166b)
is plural. (166)
a. b.
[yp The daughter of the butcher] is/*are coming too. [xp The daughters of the butcher] are/*is coming too.
later sections of this 63 We will return to aspects of the formation of questions in various of do-insertion we on discussi the For 3.2. and 2.2 2.1.1, book, especially in chapter 5, sections refer to chapter 2, section 1.1 and chapter 5, section 2.2.3.
Towards the end of section 2.4.5. In section 2.5.1. In section 2.5.2. In section 2.3.1. 68 Already discussed in section 2.3.1.
64 6° 6 67
94
The Structure of English Sentences
If we want to harmonize the structure of the sentence with the endocentric structure of NPs or VPs we have to identify its head. Consider the following pair of sentences, focusing at this point on the bracketed strings: (167)
a. b.
I hope that I hope for
[Thelma will dance after lunch]. [Thelma to dance after lunch].
In (167a) the bracketed string is a sentence. It consists of a sequence NP (Thelma), INFL (will), VP (dance after lunch). In (167b) the bracketed string is quite
similar to that in (167a), semantically as well as formally. We have already seen that will is inflected for tense; we say that will is finite. To has the same distribution as the auxiliaries but it is invariant for tense: to is a non-finite inflection which is associated with the infinitival form of the verb. The difference between the finite sentence Thelma will dance after lunch and the non-finite sentence Thelma to dance after lunch is determined by the INFL node: will is finite, while to is non-finite. The finite/non-finite contrast has an impact on the realization of the subject. First, when we replace Thelma by a pronoun we see that the choice of finite versus non-finite INFL determines the form of the subject pronoun: she is the nominative case and her is the accusative case of the third person singular feminine pronoun.” Regardless of their different morphology both pronouns, she and her, function as subjects of the bracketed clauses: (167)
a’. b’.
I hope that I hope for
[she will dance after lunch]. [her to dance after lunch].
Second, recall” that external arguments (i.e. the arguments realized as subjects) may sometimes be non-overt (represented by ec for empty category). Here again, the nature of INFL determines the nature of the subject; in English, non-overt subjects are restricted to non-finite clauses:
(168)
a.
*I hope
b.
Ihope
ae d.
Told -®lstold
that ec will dance after lunch.
ec to dance after lunch. him him
that he should dance. ec to dance.
In (168a) hope takes a finite clausal complement and the subject of the complement clause must be expressed overtly. In (168b) hope takes a non-finite clausal complement whose subject is non-overt (ec); the non-overt external argument of dance is controlled by I, the subject of hope. In (168c) tell takes three arguments, realized by the subject (I), the indirect object NP him, and the clausal apo: Ma that he should dance. In (168d) the clausal complement is nonfinite and its non-overt subject is controlled by him, the indirect object. Because the properties of a sentence (‘finite’/‘non-finite’) are a function of the features of its INFL, we propose that INFL heads the sentence. The sentence is a projection of I[NFL], IP The next question is whether we can represent the structure of the sentence in terms of the (binary branching) X-bar format developed for lexical projections. °° We return to the alternation she/her in section 3.7. 7 Section 1.3.
The Structure of English Sentences
95
INFL, the inflection, is the verbal inflectional morphology; it is primarily associated with V which heads VP. We abbreviate INFL as I. We will say that I selects VP with which it forms an intermediate projection, I’. I’ combines with the subject NP to form IP, the sentence. The structure with ternary branching in (169a) is now replaced by the structure with binary branching in (169b):
(169)
a
a.
S
NP
INFL
VP
the teacher
will -ed -§
invite...
he
ees hr
NP
ie
the teacher
I
VP
will -ed
invite...
-S
Tense and agreement inflection end up associated with the verb. This is reflected in (169b): the node I has a local relation with VP; I governs and selects VP. There is also a local relation between I and its specifier, the subject. As seen above, the nature of I influences the realization of the subject. In finite clauses, I agrees with the subject. While selectional restrictions are usually expressed in terms of head-complement relations, agreement relations tend to be expressed on the basis of specifier-head relations.
2.5.4
Las AGR and T (i)”
inflectional Clauses are projections of the inflection of the verb. In English the overt morphoovert only the work, like verb regular a morphology is impoverished. For -s singular person third the is m paradig logy associated with the present tense
ending:
(170)
a.
I work you work he work-s we work
you work they work refine the structure of IP. 71 In chapter 3, section 2, we will further
96
The Structure of English Sentences
In the past tense paradigm, there is no morphological variation with respect to person and number of the subject. Only the tense ending is realized: (170)
b.
I work you work he work we work you work they work
-ed -ed -ed -ed -ed -ed
The inflection of the verb be is slightly stronger, with three distinct forms in the present tense and two in the past tense: (170)
c.
present tense
d.
past tense
Iam
I was
you are she is we are you are they are
you were she was we were you were they were
For finite tenses, we assume that the agreement features, abbreviated as AGR, are instantiated even if they have no morphological reflex. AGR features which are not overtly realized are abstract features. Similarly, even though in English only the past tense corresponds to a morphological ending, we will assume that abstract tense features are also instantiated in the present tense. I thus contains two components: AGR and tense. The question arises whether AGR and T should be amalgamated under I. If we turn to languages other than English we
see that they provide arguments for keeping T and AGR separate. For example, French verbs have the paradigm in (171): (171)
a. 1sg 2sg 3sg_ 1p! 2pl 3pl_
present tense je parl-e I speak tu parl-es il parl-e nous parl-ons vous parl-ez ils parl-ent
b.- past tense je parl-ai-s I spoke tu parl-ai-s il parl-ai-t nous parl-i-ons vous parl-i-ez ils parl-ai-ent
c.
future tense je parl-er-ai I will speak tu parl-er-as il parl-er-a nous parl-er-ons vous parl-er-ez ils parl-er-ont
In the paradigm of the verb parler (‘speak’) in (171) we can systematically isolate tense morphemes and AGR morphemes. For instance, the first person plural forms of the present tense, the past tense and the future tense all terminate in -ons. Past is apparently encoded by the -i- element attached to the root parl-, future tense by -er-. We could decompose the verb forms into a root, the tense morphology and the agreement morphology: (17:1),
adaeroot
nous parl nous parl nous parl
tense
AGR
i er
ons ons ons
The Structure of English Sentences
97
A closer look at the inflectional categories suggests that we should not just postulate one head I, an amalgamation of T and AGR, but rather two separate
heads, AGR and T. If AGR and T constitute separate functional heads, then each will head its own projection. On the basis of the discussion above, IP would
then also be decomposed into AGRP and TP. This hypothesis has come to be known as the Split-INFL hypothesis.” For the time being we continue to use the label I, but the reader should bear in mind that this is a first approximation.” 2.5.5
IP and CP
The bracketed sentences in (172) are constituents of a larger clause: they are subordinate clauses or embedded clauses.
(172)
a. b.
I expect [that [she will dance after lunch]]. [For [her to dance after lunch]] would be surprising.
In (172a) the clause she will dance after lunch is part of the sentence I expect that she will dance after lunch. The finite subordinate clause she will dance after lunch is introduced by that, a word of the category complementizer. In the traditional literature complementizers are referred to as subordinating conjunctions; that introduces finite subordinate clauses. In (172b) the infinitival subordinate clause her to dance after lunch is introduced by for, a preposition which here functions as the complementizer associated with non-finite clauses. In order to represent the structure of the sentence we must include the complementizer, which we abbreviate as C. A complementizer selects a clause, an IP, as its complement. If we adopt the binary branching hypothesis for syntactic structure we represent the relation complementizer-embedded clause as in (173):
(173)
Ce C
IP ee
NP
ee aoe
ie
that for
she her
I’ ee
I
VP
will to
dance after lunch dance after lunch
we offer additional empirical 7 We will elaborate it in detail in chapter 3, section 2, where , arguments for the decomposition of I. of the etation interpr the in tense of role the 73 In chapter 5, section 2.3, we return to sentence.
98
The Structure of English Sentences
C’ is a projection of C. Question formation provides us with additional evidence that there must be a head position to the left of the subject: (174)
a. b.
The teacher will the teacher
Will
invite the student after lunch. invite the student after lunch?
(174a) is a declarative sentence; the auxiliary will is dominated by INFL, a head. In (174b) will has moved to a position to the left of the subject. Let us assume that heads move to other head positions:”* this means that in (174b) will occu-
pies a head position to the left of the subject. In (173) there is a head position to the left of the subject: C. An obvious option is to say that will moves to C. Under this assumption, we predict that the complementizer and the auxiliary to the left of the subject are in complementary distribution. The co-occurrence of a complementizer and an auxiliary to the left of the subject NP should be excluded, as both would have to occupy the same position, C. This prediction is borne out: (174)
cc. d.
*I wonder that will the teacher invite the student. *I wonder will that the teacher invite the student.
Embedded clauses introduced by the complementizers that and for, and questions such as (174b), provide evidence for postulating a head position to the left of the subject. Once we postulate that C is available, X’-theory forces us to postulate a projection, comprising the intermediate level C’, which dominates C and IP, and also the level of the maximal projection, CP. The maximal projection CP would dominate C’ and a specifier, [Spec,CP]. (174e) offers support for the full instantiation of the projection CP. (174)
e.
At what time will the teacher invite the student?
In (174e) the fronted auxiliary will is preceded by the PP at what time. We have to provide a position for the PP. The CP projection associated with the head C will provide such a position: (175
Jena:
Cr ee
ee
PP
C’ a
pants
ee
C
IP pe
ee eee
NP
if oe
I will
the teacher
”* We return to movement in chapter 2, section 1.
ey
VP invite the student
The Structure of English Sentences
99
As was the case for the other projections, the maximal projection, CP, is assumed, even if there is no overt filler in [Spec,CP].
(175)
b.
CP
i
ae Soa
sess0
€
IP divest
NP
odWi
y Vee
that
the teacher
I
VP
will
invite the student after lunch
If C is the head of the clause, then, by analogy with the other structures already discussed (IP, NP, AP, AdvP, VP, PP), the properties of C should determine the properties of the clause. Consider the fillers of C in (176): (176)
I hope [cp that [Thelma will dance after lunch]]. I hope [cp for [Thelma to dance after lunch]]. I wonder [¢p whether [Thelma will dance after lunch]]. I wonder [¢p whether [ec to dance after lunch]]. > elo 2 I wonder [cp if [Thelma will dance after lunch]].
The bracketed CP is an embedded or subordinate clause. That means that it is a clause which is a constituent of another sentence. The embedded clauses in (176) are complements of the verbs of the higher clauses. Recall that the lower clause is embedded in the higher clause, the matrix CP. The verb of the matrix clause is called the matrix verb. The choice of complementizer is related to the type of embedded clause. There (ii) are two dimensions along which complementizers vary: (i) finiteness and complethe , dimension first the to illocutionary force or mood. With respect mentizers that and if introduce finite clauses, while for introduces non-finite in that it (infinitival) clauses. Whether takes a special position in the system to illorespect With clauses.” l) introduces both finite and non-finite (infinitiva and if whether while clauses, e cutionary force, that and for introduce declarativ the of type the s determine ntizer introduce interrogative clauses. The compleme embedded clause. Consider (177a) and (177b):
(177)
a. b.
Iexpect [that Mary will dance after lunch]. I expect [Mary will dance after lunch].
clause, introduced by The embedded clause in (177a) is a finite declarative is not present. As that but , same interpretation as (177a)
that. (177b) has the ative, and as it is parallel in the embedded clause in (177b) is also a declar n 1.1.2. 75 We return to this point in chapter 2, sectio
100
The Structure of English Sentences
interpretation to that in (177a), we will propose that the CP level is projected in (177b) but that the complementizer of the embedded clause is non-overt. (177)
c.
Iexpect [cp 0 [jp Mary will dance after lunch]].
The non-overt declarative complementizer cannot freely alternate with its overt counterpart. If we front the complement clause of (177c) then the complementizer has to be overt: (177)
d.
[cp That /*0 [pp Mary will dance after lunch]] I don’t expect.
The complementizer that cannot easily be non-overt when it heads the complement of a noun (177e): (177)
e.
Our expectation [¢p that /*0 [pp Mary will dance after lunch]].
As a first approximation, we can say that the omission of that is dependent on the presence of a verb to its left.” In the matrix clauses of (176) above there is no overt evidence for the CP projection: neither C nor [Spec,CP] are overtly realized. However, if we assume that the illocutionary force of the clause is always encoded by the C position, then we will be led to conclude that declarative clauses also have a CP projection. We will assume that in matrix clauses declarative C is non-overt. Under this assumption, the sentences in (176) have the structure in (176f): CLS
ae
CEI Cll eal
D5
(Gil
IP lt Sas
NP
l’ as
I
VP
| Vv’
ee
ae
V
CP2
embedded clause
| C2 es
ee
@))
IP olan
NP
l’ —~Saney te
I
I
pres
hope
that
wonder
for if whether
VP
| Thelma
will
Thelma to Thelma _ will ec to
dance after lunch 7 w y!
’° We return to a more precise formulation of the dependency between the verb and the null complementizer in chapter 4, section 3.5.2.4.2. In chapter 6, section 1.2.2, we will consider the question of how the speaker of English learns the distribution of the null complementizer.
The Structure of English Sentences
101
In (176f) we identify the clauses by numbering them. CP2 is embedded in CP1. Recall that a clause which is not embedded in any other clause is called the root clause. Root clause and matrix clause are two terms which refer to the same
thing, the highest clause in the structure. A verb may select a CP complement: certain verbs select an interrogative complement clause (wonder, enquire), others select a declarative (think, hope). For the sake of completeness note that while finite clauses are assumed always
to be dominated by CP,” the CP level is not always present in infinitival clauses. Consider the sentences in (178):
(178)
a. I believe [
"Before breakfast would suit me fine.
the following: There are some speakers who would also admit (217)
d.
e.
attention. %Under the chair attracted the cat’s
. %ln capital letters will have the best effect
are generally judged ungrammatical: On the other hand, the examples below (217766
g.
*Under the chair pleases the cat.
*Under the table surprised the cat.
120
The Structure of English Sentences
3.3.3
Small clause subjects
In the following sentences a small clause functions as a subject:
(219)
a. b. c. d.
Workers angry campaign was Workers angry 45) Mandela free
about the pay is just the sort of situation that the ad destined to avoid. (Safir 1983) about the pay displeases the government. (Aarts 1992:
would pose a greater threat than Mandela behind bars. (Aarts 1992: 45) Mandela behind bars would undoubtedly suit the government.
Note that in (219a) the subject small clause triggers singular agreement on the verb (is versus *are), confirming that the subject of the sentence is not the plural NP workers but rather the small clause workers angry about the pay. The NP workers is the subject of the small clause.
3.4 3.4.1
Expletive subjects It
Above”? we discussed the expletive subject it construed with an extraposed clause.
(220)
a. b.
That Louise resigned surprised everyone. It surprised everyone [that Louise resigned].
In (220a) the external argument of surprise is a clause, a CP. The internal argument is an NP. Compared to (220a), (220b) might at first sight appear to have one additional argument. The pronoun it occupies the canonical subject position and the clause that Louise resigned is extraposed. A consideration of further examples reveals that the clause must be the rightmost element, as it follows arguments and adjuncts:
(220)
c.
It surprised everyone last week that Louise resigned.
We will assume that the extraposed clause is right-adjoined to IP. The expletive subject it functions as the grammatical subject; it is involved in SAI: (220)
d.
Did it surprise everyone last week that Louise resigned?
It fills the subject position but since it has no semantic contribution to make, we call it an expletive element or a dummy. The expletive is a place-holder-for the clausal subject; it is construed with or given content by the extraposed clause. As in the case of the preposed clauses of the Dutch examples in (215), the relation between the expletive and the extraposed clause is indicated by coindexation. (220)
e.
It; surprised everyone [p; that Louise resigned].
* Tn section 1.6.2.1.
The Structure of English Sentences
121
In (221) expletive it is the subject of an embedded clause: in (221a) the sale clause is finite, in (221b) it is non-finite, and in (221c) it is a small clause:
(221)
3.4.2
a. b. c.
Iconsider that {it, is a pity [that she has resigned]]. I consider [it; to be a pity [p; that she has resigned]]. I consider [it; a pity [cp, that she has resigned]].
Existential there
In (222) we illustrate the use of expletive there.”' (222)
a. b.
A woman is working in the garden. There; is a woman, working in the garden.
In (222b) there is the grammatical subject of the clause, as can be seen by the fact that it inverts with the finite auxiliary in (222c): (222)
c.
Is there a woman working in the garden?
There does not play an important role in the interpretation of the sentence. There is not assigned a theta-role; rather, it functions as a place-holder for the logical subject, a woman. The co-indexation between there and the NP shows that there anticipates the NP. We say that expletive there is in construction with an NP; the NP is also referred to as its associate.” There occurs as the subject of a restricted class of verbs expressing existence or coming into existence: (223)
a. b.
*There live three students in that flat. *There work three women in the garden.
For many speakers be is the only verb which can be used with this kind of construction. Some speakers also admit other verbs:
(223)
c. d. e.
There exist several solutions to this problem. There arose a terrible outcry. There appeared a new journal on the market.
on, the Sentences with there introduce an entity into the domain under discussi und universe of discourse. Because such sentences assert or bring to the foregro s. sentence al the existence of certain entities they are often labelled existenti is there pronoun When used as the dummy subject in existential sentences, the often referred to as existential there. the verb. ComThe post-verbal subject in the existential sentence agrees with pare (222b) and (223c) with the following:
(222) (223)
b’. There are two women working in the garden. c’. There exists one major problem.
1 Cf. section 1.6.2.2.
(see section 3.4.1). * Expletive it is in construction with a clause
122
The Structure of English Sentences
The post-verbal subject co-indexed with existential there is usually indefinite:
(224)
a. b.
*There; are the two women, working in the garden. *There; arose the violent storm,.
Definite subjects are possible in list contexts, however:” (224)
3.4.3
There, were [Thelma, Louise, Patsy and Edina], working in the garden.
c.
The subject of weather verbs
We have already™ discussed the use of the pronoun it in the following type of examples: (225)
a.
It is snowing in Norway.
b. c.
It is raining all the time. It is bitterly cold.
In these examples the subject does not contribute much to the description of the event and it can only be realized by the pronoun it. On the basis of subject— auxiliary inversion in the questions in (226) we infer that it is the grammatical subject of these sentences: (226)
a.
Is it snowing in Norway?
b. c.
Is it raining all the time? Is it bitterly cold?
When used as the subject of weather verbs, it is sometimes called a quasiargument. In this use, the pronoun is referred to as weather it or atmospheric it.
3.5 3.5.1
The object NP objects
In the traditional literature on sentence structure, subjects are distinguished from objects. In (227a) Thelma is the subject and Louise is the object: (227)
a.
Thelma invited Louise.
«
In our representation of the sentence Thelma is the NP which is immediately dominated by IP, [Spec,IP]. The object in (227a) is the NP which combines with V to form V’ as in (227b). Recall that we say that the subject is the external argument of the V, realized outside the VP; the object is the internal argument, realized inside the VP. * For further discussion of existential sentences see also chapter 2, section 3.2, and chapter
5, sections 1.4.4 and 3.4.1.
** Section 1.6.3.
The Structure of English Sentences
(227)
b.
123
VP
eet V
NP
V and the direct object have a close relation. A verb assigns a thematic role to its complement. In passive sentences the arguments of the verb are reorganized: the internal argument of the verb occupies the canonical subject position. In the active (227a) Louise is the object, while in the passive (227c) it has become the subject. In passive sentences the external argument may appear optionally in a PP adjunct. In (227c) the verb invited does not govern the NP Louise.” (227)
3.5.2
c.
Louise was invited (by Thelma).
Speculations on the double object construction in English
Consider now the following sentences. (228)
a. b.
Thelma gave the draft to Louise. The draft was given to Louise.
In (228a) the NP the draft functions as the object: it combines with V to form V’. The V’ projection combines in turn with the PP to Louise:
.
(228) c.
Wi
Vv’
give
PP
the draft
to
Louise
d by another NP, In (229a), on the other hand, the NP the draft is precede Louise. (229)
sal
b. c.
Thelma gave Louise the draft.
Louise/she was given the draft. *?The draft was given Louise/her.
chapter 2, section 1.3. °5 We discuss the process of passivization in detail in
124
The Structure of English Sentences
Semantically, and also structurally, (229a) is very close to (228a). If the draft is the object of the verb in (228a) one would like to say that it has the same function in (229a). The draft must be a complement of the verb, for it cannot be omitted:
(229)
d.
*Thelma gave Louise.
If the NP the draft in (229a) can be argued to be an object, on the basis of the parallelism between (229a) and (228a), the NP Louise in (229a) also has object-
like properties: it becomes the subject of a passive sentence (229b) — an option which is less obvious for the NP the draft (229c) — and the NP Louise also occupies the position adjacent to V. Sentences like (229a) are often referred to as double object sentences: one could argue that both the draft and Louise are objects. In the literature, the NP the draft in such structures is called the direct object and the NP Louise is called
the indirect object. This suggests that the NP the draft is more closely (‘directly’) related to the verb than the NP Louise (‘the indirect object’). One representation for the VP in (229a) is that in which Louise occupies the position immediately dominated by the lower V’, and the draft occupies a higher position. (23)
€,
VP
I
we
We Pgh
NP
aise
Vv
NP
a
a
the draft
(229e), however, fails to express the intuition that the draft is the direct object of give, i.e. that it has a closer relation with give than does the indirect object Louise. This intuition leads us to expect that the direct object, as its name suggests, should be governed directly by V, which is not the case in (229e). Conversely, we might perhaps expect that the indirect object should not be directly governed by V, which it is in (229e). An alternative representation has been gaining ground in the recent literature. This proposal tries to capture the intuition expressed in the term ‘double object construction’, that is, the notion that both the NP the draft and the NP Louise are objects of the lexical verb give. Suppose we pursue this path. If we continue to assume that an object must be governed by a verb, then we would be led to the conclusion that a single VP will not be able to accommodate two objects: one head V will govern only the constituent in its governing domain, V’. On this basis one might propose a more complex structure of the VP along the following lines:
The Structure of English Sentences (229
ast
125
VP1 v'1 cdin widen
v1
VP2 ae
Spec
V2 cnet
Ears
v2 Louise
NP
ue
a
In this analysis it is proposed that the verb give projects a double VP: the lower VP is headed by the lexical verb give, the higher VP is headed by an abstract V (V1). The two VPs projected by give are referred to as VP-shells. The VP2-shell contains the verb give, the direct object the draft (in the complement position) and the indirect object Louise (in the specifier position). If we assume that an object is a constituent which is governed by the verb, then in our structure the verb give would have to govern both its objects: in (229f) give governs the object NP. In order to govern the NP Louise, give incorporates to V1:
(229)
g.
VP1 Val oi
eee
V1
VP2 Shean
t.
Spec
ota
Vi2 nihepsecailae- eA
V2 Loutse
|
NP pes
proposal In (229g) give governs Louise. It is important to note that in the
condeveloped here the constituents Louise and the draft in (229a) form one
stituent: the node VP2 exhaustively dominates both NPs.
3.5.3.
Non-NP objects
3.5.3.1
Clausal objects
Clauses can function as objects of V: it]]. (230) a. I expect [cp (that) [ip you will like first]]. there go to b. I prefer [cp (for) [p him
126
The Structure of English Sentences
We have already seen that when the complement clause is adjacent to the verb which selects it, the complementizer may be non-overt. However, when the complementizer is separated from the verb it can no longer be non-overt: (231)
a. b.
Iexpect very much [c *(that) [jp you will like it]. I prefer very much [cp *(for) [jp him to go there]].
We have seen” that verbs like believe can select an infinitival IP complement: (230)
c.
I believe (*for) Mary to be innocent.
In (230c) the insertion of the complementizer for leads to ungrammaticality. When the clausal complement cannot be introduced by the complementizer it must be adjacent to the verb which selects it: (231)
c.
3. 523.4
*I believe very much [jp Mary to be innocent].
DE ZOUseCTs
We saw above that PPs can function as subjects of a restricted class of verbs: (232)
a. b.
After four is a good time to meet. After four would suit me fine.
In (232c) and (232d) the PP is the subject of the clausal complement of consider: (232)
c. d.
They considered [[pp on foot] to be too slow]. I consider [[pp after four] the best time to meet].
For some speakers — hence the % — PPs also function as objects: (233)
a.
%They planned until Christmas in detail.
That the PP until Christmas functions as the object of planned is confirmed by the fact that speakers accepting (233a) also accept (233b) in which the PP becomes the subject of a passive sentence. As is to be expected, speakers rejecting (233a) also reject (233b). (233)
3.6
b.
%Until Christmas was planned in detail.
The subject requirement
We have tried to provide a systematic description of the English sentence, identifying constituents and distinguishing the grammatical functions subject and object. There is an important difference between these two functions, however. While not every sentence has an object, every sentence has a subject. While © Section 2.5.5.
The Structure of English Sentences
127
transitive sentences have both subject and object, intransitive sentences have only a subject. There are no sentences which have an object but no subject:
(234)
a. b. c.
Louise has bought the flat. Louise is dancing. *Has bought a flat.
If the constituent which realizes the external argument of the finite verb does not occupy the canonical subject position of the finite clause, this position is filled by an expletive, as in (235a) and (235b), or a non-overt element, as in (235c):”” (235)
a. b. c.
It, would surprise me [cp; that Louise should resign]. There; is [xp; a woman] working in the garden. [cp That Louise should resign] [ec,] would surprise me.
We have also seen that some non-finite clauses lack an overt subject; such clauses contain a non-overt subject. In (236a) the non-overt subject (ec) is identified or controlled by the matrix subject I. In (236b) there is no controller. We continue to assume that there is a non-overt subject which realizes the external argument of invite. Here, the non-overt subject receives an arbitrary interpretation. (236)
a. b.
I wonder [whether ec to go to the cinema]. [ec to invite Thelma] would be a smart move.
Generalizing the discussion, let us formulate the hypothesis that all sentences have a subject, or, to be more precise, that the position [Spec,IP] must be projected. We postulate a subject requirement: it is a property of the I node that it must be associated with a subject.
3.7
3.7.1
Case
Pronouns and morphological case
Consider the following sentences: (237)
a. b. c. d.
Thelma invites Louise. She invites Louise. Thelma invites her. She invites her.
NPs, Thelma and Louise In (237a) both subject and object are realized as full n, she. In (237c) the respectively. In (237b) the subject NP is realized as a pronou ar
third person singul object is realized as a pronoun, her. The form of the pronoun functions as the feminine pronoun differs depending on whether the ” Section 3.3.1.
The Structure of English Sentences
128
subject or as the object of a sentence: she is the subject, and her is the object. A similar contrast is found with the pronouns I, he, we and they: (237)
e.
Isaw him and he invited me.
f.
We saw them and they invited us.
The different forms of the pronoun are distinct case forms: the subject of the finite clause appears in the nominative case and the object in the accusative case. (238)
Case:
nominative I you
accusative me you
he she it we you they
him her it us you them
For the second person pronoun you and for the third person neuter it, nominative and accusative case are morphologically identical. This is called case syncretism.
3.7.2.
The distribution of nominative and accusative case
As a first approximation, we could say that the nominative case form is used for the subject NP and that the accusative case form is used for the object NP. Further data show that this generalization is not adequate, however. (239)
She/*her invites her/* she. I expect [,» her to invite Thelma]. [For [, her to invite Thelma]] was entirely unjustified. I consider [, her a good candidate for the job].
peo They talked
to her/*she.
In (239a) the nominative form she is used for the subject of the finite clause, and the accusative form her is the direct object. In (239b) the accusative form her functions as a subject of the non-finite complement of expect. In (239c) her is the subject of the infinitival subject clause, and in (239d) her is the subject of a small clause. In (239e) her is the complement of a preposition.
Let us try to determine the distribution of case forms of pronouns in terms of the syntactic structures in which these case forms appear. As a working hypothesis, we assume that all syntactic relations, including case relations, are expressed in terms of local relations such as that between the head of the projection and its complement, or between the head of the projection and its specifier.” All the sentences of (239) have a pronoun subject. The pronoun has a nominative form in (239a) (she), in the matrix clauses in (239b) and (239d) (I), and *8 Sections 2.4 and 2.5.6.
The Structure of English Sentences
129
in (239e) (they). It has an accusative form in the embedded clauses in (239b-—d)
(ber). In (239a), in the matrix clauses of (239b) and (239d), and in (239e), the nominative pronoun is the subject of a finite clause: the INFL of the clause is marked for agreement and tense. (239f) is the structure of (239a):
(239)
£.
IP NP
I’ ee
I
VP
i
| Fi
she
-S
V invite
a
NP her
There are two ways of expressing the interdependence of nominative case and finite inflection. One option is ‘dynamic’: we could assume that the AGR features of the finite inflection assign nominative case to the subject or that the finite inflection case-marks the subject by virtue of the presence of finite AGR features. Another way of looking at the distribution of case forms of NPs is to conceive of case realization not in terms of ‘dynamic’ assignment relations in which the head assigns case to the case-bearing element, but rather in terms of a more ‘static’ checking relation, in which a head checks or licenses the case of an NP. According to the latter option, the nominative case of the subject is licensed by virtue of the specifier—head relation between the NP in the canonical subject position, [Spec,IP], and the finite inflection. In this book we will take the dynamic view of case relations in terms of case-assignment.”’ Regardless of whether we adopt the case-assignment view or the case-checking view, the question remains of how we determine the distribution of accusative case. This case is realized on (i) the complement of a verb, (ii) the complement of a preposition, (iii) the subject of a non-finite clause, and (iv) the subject of a
small clause. Let us start with the object position, [NP,V’]. The case of the direct object is richer intimately linked with the verb. Readers familiar with languages with such in that know morphological case systems such as German or Latin will in instance, For languages the verb determines the case of the NP complement. (ihm, case dative the German the verb helfen (‘help’) selects a complement in in the accusat‘him’ in (240a)) while the verb sehen (‘see’) selects a complement ive case (ihn, ‘him’ in (240b)). (240)
a. b.
Er hilft ihm/*ihn.
‘he helps him DAT/*ACC Er seht ihn/*ihm. he sees him ACC/*DAT
the reader to chapter 5, section 3.5.2. For a brief discussion of Checking Theory we refer
130
The Structure of English Sentences
In the dynamic representation of case relations, the verb could be said to casemark its object NP. In the static checking approach, we can say that a transitive verb licenses the case of its object NP. The case-assignment or licensing relation between V and its object is a local relation: (240)
c.
(oleae
Spec
k
beondeaieen V
NP
helfsehinvite
ihm ihn her
In German, V assigns either dative or accusative. In English, only one case is assigned or licensed by the transitive V, which we refer to as accusative case. The case relation between a P and its complement is analogous to that between V and its object: P governs the complement and P case-marks — or licenses the case of — its complement. (241)
PP Pp’
P
NP
for
her
Let us now turn to the examples in (239b—d) in which accusative case is realized on subject NPs. We give a partial structure for these examples. (242)
a.
IP essi hayeS
penn etheneae
we
Siti ep Sa Vv IP sen
eae
Cor ae
‘es ea V her
to
| invite
NP
ioe Thelma
The Structure of English Sentences
131
IP
b
emmaaiary ohbytld PETeae l CP
ae ek
i
alae
IP
C
Ry
gs
He
ae
ah
oe
NP
lV
ees $8 eat a I
VP
gink-aaia ee le38 Vv
her (2
to
NP
a
An
IP eee NP
I’
shee I
ele VP
[
pecs olVi oy Vv
IP
pDaLk aitrs NP
l’ Blt I
I
consider
her
NP
a good candidate for the job
and Recall that accusative case is associated with either V or P. Let us call V (IP), clause a of subject the is pronoun ve P case-assigners. In (242a) the accusati which is the itself the complement of V. In (242b) it is the subject of a clause (IP)
accusative complement of the prepositional complementizer for. In (242c) the of V.'°° ent complem the itself clause, small a pronoun functions as the subject of 100 For arguments for (242c) see section 2.5.9.
132
The Structure of English Sentences
In each example, the accusative pronoun functions as the subject of an XP which is itself the complement of a case-assigner. We will say that this caseassigner, P or V, case-marks the subject of its complement. This means that the
case-assigner can govern into the maximal projection to reach the specifier position. We have to conclude that IP is transparent for the governing V in (242a) and for the governing P in (242b). To put it differently, the maximal projection IP does not constitute a barrier for case-assignment to its specifier. That government by a case-assigning head is essential for accusative caseassignment is seen in (242d): (242)
d.
*[cp [p she/her to invite Louise]] would be a smart move.
In (242d) the subject of the non-finite clause cannot be assigned case. It does not have a specifier—head relation with a finite I. On the one hand, she/her is not in the specifier position of would, the matrix I. On the other hand, she/her is the specifier of to; but to being non-finite, it cannot license the case of its subject. Nor is she/her governed by a case-assigner: there is no lexical head V or P which governs the specifier of the non-finite clause. (242d) is ungrammatical precisely because the subject NP of the non-finite clause is not in a position in which it can be assigned case. As soon as we insert a case-assigner the sentence becomes grammatical: (242)
e.
[c For [p her to invite Louise]] would be a smart move.
The complementizer for is a preposition and assigns accusative case to the specifier of the transparent IP.
3.7.3.
The Case-Filter
We have examined the case form of pronouns in which case is morphologically realized. The reader might infer that case is irrelevant for NPs. In (243) the NPs Thelma and the girl have the same form regardless of their position: (243)
Thelma has invited the girl. The girl invites Thelma.
For the girl to invite Thelma was unexpected. I expect the girl to invite Thelma. oe I consider the girl the best candidate. poo This conclusion would be too rash, however. If case were irrelevant for NPs, then (243f) would be grammatical with a full NP as the subject of the infinitive:
(243)
f.
*[cp [p The girl to invite Thelma]] would be a smart move.
But just like (242d), (243f) is ungrammatical. Like (242d), the sentence is res-
cued if we insert the case-assigner for: (243)
g.
[cp For [p the girl to invite Thelma]] would be a smart move.
(243f) can also be rescued if we eliminate the overt subject. Recall that the
subject position of a sentence must be projected but that non-finite sentences
The Structure of English Sentences
133
may have non-overt subjects.'*' In (243h) the subject of to invite Thelma is nonovert:
(243)
h.
[cp [p ec to invite Thelma]] would be a smart move.
Apparently, the non-overt subject is not constrained by the same conditions as its Overt counterpart, whether the latter be a pronoun with overt case morphology or an NP with no overt case-marking. Based on the observations above, we formulate the hypothesis that not only pronouns but all overt NPs must be assigned case. With respect to overt NPs, nominative and accusative case are abstract. They do not have any morphological reflex. Nominative case is assigned or licensed by specifier-head agreement with finite inflection; accusative case is assigned or licensed by a governing verb or preposition. We postulate that the grammar contains a Case-Filter which filters out all sentences which contain overt NPs (full NPs or pronouns) that lack
case. (244)
The Case-Filter *[NP —case] where NP is overt
Anticipating the discussion in chapter 5,'°* we can say that an NP can only
be interpreted if it is identified by case. Case renders the NP visible. Case is thus a way of licensing an NP: an NP can only function as an argument of V and saturate a theta-role if it has case. Consider the following examples: (245)
a. b. c.
I wonder whether [jp ec to invite Thelma]. *I wonder whether [jp I/me to invite Thelma]. *I wonder whether [,p Louise to invite Thelma].
In (245b) and (245c) the subject of the non-finite clause is overt. The sentences are ungrammatical because the subject NP cannot be assigned case. Whether is a complementizer, but unlike for, it is not a preposition, i.e. it is not a caseassigner. Hence, the subject position of the non-finite IP lacks case. This means
that the only way to render the sentence grammatical is to insert a non-overt NP say in the subject position: (245a) with a non-overt subject is grammatical. If we (245a) of lity grammatica the then NPs, overt to only that the Case-Filter applies subject follows. Observe, though, that we shall have to admit that a non-overt case.’” of lack its of spite in le like ec in (245a) is interpretab
3.7.4
Locality and case-assignment
subject to locality In this section we will show that case-assignment is also
considerations. '”
101 Sections 1.3 and 3.6 above. 102 Section 1.4.3.
in chapter 4, section 2 and in chapter 5, 103 We return to the nature of non-overt subjects section 1.4.3.1.2. we saw
instance, in section 1.2 14 T ocality relations play an important role in syntax. For saw that locality plays a role we locality on thematic structure; in section 2.5.8,
the impact of in selection.
The Structure of English Sentences
134
In (246a) a pen is an overt NP. By hypothesis, it needs case. The structure of the VP in (246a) is shown in (246b). (246)
a.
Louise writes with a pen.
b.
Hs Vv’ mse ag teeny V 1 ts
(et
Ns
a
Ve
es NP
|
wae a pen
with
The question arises whether it is V or P which assigns case to the NP a pen. Both P and V are case-assigners. P definitely governs the NP; we now have to determine whether V also governs the NP a pen. Recall the locality hypothesis
for selection:'°° a head selects the head of the projection which it governs, and a head cannot select at a distance. The locality condition on selection was interpreted in terms of a locality condition on government. If government of ZP by X
is blocked by the intervening YP in (247)'°° and if accusative case is assigned or licensed under government, then we predict that X cannot assign case to ZP.
(247)
XP x’ a
x
|
7 Y’
dee
on
X stands for V and Y stands for P in (247). X cannot assign case to Z because Y can also do so and Y is closer to Z in the structure. We must consider this minimality condition on government more carefully,
however, in the light of the data on case-assignment. Recall'”’ that expect casemarks her in (248a): (248)
a.
I expect [jp her to invite Thelma].
105 Section 2.5.8. 106 Cf. sections 1.2 and 2.5.8. 107 From section 3.7.2.
The Structure of English Sentences
135
In (248a) expect assigns case to the specifier of its complement, IP: (248)
b.
VP
|
ee
ee
pam
Vv
IP aie ie
NP
i fhe ith ae I VP
expect
her
I
Ores,
If accusative case-assignment is dependent on government, IP must be trans-
parent and V must be able to govern [Spec,IP]. Refining our hypothesis, we say that in (248b) X governs YP and also governs its specifier. This extension is not surprising. Consider a finite clause: there the subject NP is in [Spec,IP]. The subject agrees in its AGR features, person and number, with I. We can generalize the agreement relation between a specifier and the related head and extend it to all grammatical features, represented here as [F1, F2].
(249)
a.
+ xa
x
YP [F1, F2] Spec
fasten
uf
Oe | x
ZP
[F1, F2] Given the Let us assume that in (249a) the features of Y percolate to YP. with its features in agrees Y nt, hypothesis of generalized specifier-head agreeme of the features the share [YP] and YP] specifier. This means that ultimately [Spec,
specifier of head Y. If X governs and assigns case to YP, it can assign case to the and the specifier the of xation YP, which shares the features of Y. The co-inde l promaxima the of rency head may now be used to account for the transpa YP is of specifier the and X jection to case-assignment. The relation between ; still local. ZP. While X can In (249b) X takes a complement YP. The head of YP selects ZP: of er specifi the govern the specifier of YP, it does not govern
The Structure of English Sentences
136
(249) b
XP
Poe
Te
eee |
Spec
Xx’ S
«.
Xx
YP 2
ea
Spec
x? ee
y4
LE. a
Spec
a
Z
By agreement between [Spec,YP] and Y, the head of YP, the specifier and the projection YP share the same features; if X governs YP it can govern its specifier. But X does not govern ZP. The head Y is the closer potential governor of ZP and it is Y that governs ZP. Hence since X does not govern ZP, it does not
govern its specifier.'”® (249b) corresponds to the structure in (249c): in this example the matrix verb
believe cannot case-mark the subject of the finite IP-complement since C and the CP projection intervene:
(249) c.
vP Spec
Vv’ Pa
Pea
V
CP Ue
eee
Spec
C Pe
og
iG
IP ea
nL,
Spec
If pee
ale
ay
I
NP
:
the best candidate
a believe
3.7.5
0
he *him
Case-assigners
We have proposed that V and P assign accusative case. The other lexical categories, N and A, fail to assign case to their complement: (250)
a. b. c.
John envies Mary. John is envious *(of) Mary. John’s envy *(of) Mary.
'®*0 In chapter 2 we examine the impact of locality on movement; in chapter 5, sections 1.6 and 2.3.3 we discuss the impact of locality on interpretation.
The Structure of English Sentences
137
In (250a) the verb envy assigns accusative case to its complement Mary. In (250b) and (250c) the preposition of case-marks the NP Mary. If we omit the preposition the structure is ungrammatical. The preposition of has to be inserted
in order to guarantee that the complement of the N or of the A receives case.!” Note, though, that not all verbs assign case to their complement: (251)
a b.
(252)
She asked the time. She asked what time it was.
*She inquired the time. ae
She inquired what time it was.
In (251) the verb ask is compatible with either a clausal complement or an NP complement. We conclude that ask is a case-assigner (or a case licenser, if we use a checking approach). The semantically analogous inquire takes a clausal complement; it cannot select an NP complement. We may conclude that this is because inquire fails to case-mark its complement. This verb lacks a caseassigning feature in its lexical entry.
3.7.6
Summary
On the basis of the distribution of the nominative and accusative forms of pronouns we have proposed that the grammar of English contains a Case-Filter which regulates the distribution of overt NPs. Case is assigned — or licensed — locally, by virtue of the relation between a head and its specifier or its complement. Nominative case is assigned or licensed by an agreement relation between the subject of the finite clause and the AGR features in I, while accusative case is assigned or licensed by virtue of the government relation between the head and its complement. We have seen that non-overt subjects do not appear in the contexts in which overt NPs occur. As a first conclusion, we assume that they do not need case.
Summary nn
ee
This chapter provides a first survey of the factors determining the structure of the English sentence.
Section 1 The meaning of the predicate plays a major role in the composition of the sen-
nouns tence. Depending on their meaning, lexical heads such as verbs, adjectives, which es, and prepositions assign one, two or three thematic roles or theta-rol e relation are associated with arguments in the sentence (or clause). The one-to-on
terion. between thematic roles and arguments is referred to as the theta-cri
by the noun we refer to 109 For further discussion of the limitations on case-assignment chapter 4, section 3.4.
138 (1)
The Structure of English Sentences Theta-criterion
a. b.
Each argument must be associated with one and only one theta-role. Each theta-role must be associated with one and only one argument.
Theta-role assignment is subject to a locality condition: theta-roles are assigned to arguments in the minimal domain of the theta-role assigning head. As a first approximation, we propose in this chapter that the domain of theta-role assignment of a verb is the sentence. Arguments may undergo movement away from their thematic position, i.e. the position in which they receive their thetarole, towards a sentence-initial landing site. Though verbs are the prototypical theta-role assigners, not all verbs assign theta-roles. A distinction is made between lexical verbs and auxiliaries: the former assign one or more theta-roles; the latter do not assign theta-roles. Though NPs are the prototypical theta-role receivers, not all NPs receive thetaroles. Expletive and quasi-argument pronouns are not assigned a theta-role. To maintain the theta-criterion in its most general form we postulate that in the non-finite clause in (2a), the verb trust assigns its theta-role to a non-overt subject, represented as ec for empty category in (2b): (2)
a. b.
[To trust your friends] is important. [ec to trust your friends] is important.
In addition to the verb and its arguments, a sentence may also contain adjuncts (of time, place, manner, etc.), constituents which modify the clause but which do not receive a theta-role from the verb.
Section 2 The sentence and its constituents are endocentric: they are organized around a central unit, the head. Among potential heads of constituents, a distinction is made between lexical elements and functional elements. Lexical elements are nouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs and prepositions; they contribute to the descriptive content of the sentence. Functional elements, such as auxiliaries, articles and conjunctions, do not contribute to the descriptive content of the sentence. The properties of a constituent are determined by the properties of its head. Or, to put it differently, the features of the head percolate to its projection, the phrase. Thus, a head of the category V(erb) heads a projection of the category V(erb)P(hrase), an N heads a N(oun)P(hrase), and so on: (3)
a.
An XP is a constituent headed by X. is a projection of X.
This information can be represented in the tree diagram format: (3)
Dt
XP
Bir pees = Xx
The Structure of English Sentences
139
An examination of phrasal categories reveals that all projections can be represented in terms of a single binary branching system. The schema in (3c) summarizes the X-bar format for projections.
(S)hec
XP specifier
ae X
complement
(3c) is the blueprint for all structures in English (and in other languages). The phrase is a projection of a head. X is the head of the projection XP; XP is the maximal projection, X’ is an intermediate projection. X’ dominates the head X and the complement; the maximal projection XP dominates an intermediate projection X’ and the specifier. The specifier of XP is abbreviated as [Spec,XP]. Adjuncts or modifiers combine with — or adjoin to — the minimal maximal projection XP1 to form a higher maximal projection XP2. XP1 and XP2 are called segments. The complete XP is the combination of the segments XP1 and XP2. The structure resulting from the attachment of a modifier/adjunct to a maximal projection is called an adjunction structure: the modifier/adjunct is adjoined to XP or XP-adjoined. (3)
d.
sadjunct so XP2
specifier
ee xX
complement
The X-bar format defines the local relations of a head, X. Every head enters into two local relations: the head is locally related to its complement and to the specifier of its projection. The locality constraint on grammatical relations restricts possible syntactic relations: it allows a constituent A to enter into a grammatical relation with a constituent B provided A bears a local relation to B. The relation between a head and its complement is characterized in terms of the traditional notion of government: we say that the head governs the complement.
The X-bar format is common to both the lexical projections (NP, VP, AP, AdvP and PP) and the functional projections. Clauses are projections of V aug-
mented by two types of functional projections: IP and CP. The IP level is organized around the inflectional heads corresponding to the verbal morphology (tense and agreement); the CP level encodes the illocutionary force of the sentence (interrogative [+wH] versus declarative [-wH]).
not and Their distribution with respect to the marker of sentential negation
English auxiliaries sentence-medial adjuncts (often, always, never) reveals that
140
The Structure of English Sentences
and lexical verbs have a different distribution. The auxiliaries have, be and do move from their base-position V to I; modal auxiliaries (will, must, etc.) are always tensed and are inserted under I; lexical verbs do not leave the VP. The tree diagrams in (4) show how X-bar theory applies to the major sentence types. (4)
a.
Finite root declarative
Gr C4
G
IP NP
I’ I
VP Vv’
you you b.
will
j
NP
invite invited
Mary Mary
Finite root interrogative
CP Spec
Ce
C
iF NP
»
5 I
VP Vv’
poe to
when when
will did
you you
eae
V
NP
invite invite
Mary Mary
The Structure of English Sentences c.
ic
Finite embedded declarative
Ge
ees. Spec
Re
C’
Br
C
IP ee
ea
NP
I’ ee
ee
I
VP
eet
that that
d.
you you
will
re
Vv
NP
ah invited
Zs Mary
Finite embedded interrogative
CP no
cat
Spec
Ce pits
sg
C
IP ioses (Tete
NP
a
l’ Ba
ee
I
Le
when when
you you
will
[
VE
sh invited
ee
Mary Mary
The Structure of English Sentences
142 e.
Non-finite embedded declarative
GP Picci
adie
Spec
Cc
ie ie,
=
IP
oe
NP
I’ en
a
I
VP
t
bin
eee
V for
f.
you
to
NP
-e
a
Non-finite embedded interrogative
CP es
Spec
Cs neceegsiie
C
IP Laer
eae
NP
ii¢ i eg
[
I
VP
or
Vv when
ec
to
le
ee
NP ~
So-called small clauses, or verbless clauses or tenseless clauses, such as Mary clever in (Sa), are projections of the predicate (here an AP) augmented with a
functional projection of the predicate-related inflection:
The Structure of English Sentences (5)
a.
tas:
Iconsider Mary clever.
b
IP een
eres
NP
ile ie
I
AP
I
Mary
i
Section 3 The traditional notions of subject and object are not primitive notions of the grammar we are elaborating. They are derivative notions which are defined in configurational terms. The canonical subject position is the specifier position of IP; the canonical object position is the NP-position immediately dominated by V’. While the prototypical subject is an NP (cf. (4)), subjects may also be realized _as PPs (6a) or as small clauses (6b): (6)
a. b.
[pp After four] would suit me fine. [jp BBC journalists angry about pay] is the last thing we need.
Finite clauses functioning as subjects (7a) do not occupy the specifier position of IP. Rather, such clauses are IP-adjoined and co-indexed with a non-overt nominal in [Spec,IP]: (7)
a.
That John came surprised me.
b.
IP2
pick bem FLpaiass!23 CP
IP1
pashan NP
that John came;
é¢;
Tanah PE
big
cca
I
VP
-ed
surprise me
144
The Structure of English Sentences
Expletive subjects are pronouns in the canonical subject position which do not contribute to the descriptive content of the sentence. They are not assigned a theta-role by the predicate. We distinguish three types: (i) the existential expletive there, which is in construction with a logical subject (8a); (ii) the expletive pronoun it which is in construction with extraposed clauses (8b), and (iii) weather it, or quasi-argument it, the subject of atmospheric verbs (8c).
(8)
a. There are three women waiting in my office. b. It is strange that they should be there. Coaltsvcold:
The object of a verb may be realized as an NP (9a), a finite clause (9b), a nonfinite clause (9c), a small clause (9d) and — for some speakers — a PP (9e). (9)
I considered the issue seriously.
I consider that this is not a good solution. I consider this not to be a good solution. I consider this a good solution. % They planned until Christmas in detail. Oe While not all sentences have objects, all English sentences must have a subject. Because of the subject requirement, expletive subjects are inserted to fill the specifier of IP. The grammar of English contains a Case-Filter which regulates the distribution of overt NPs. All overt NPs must be assigned case. In English, case is realized morphologically on personal pronouns only: I is nominative case, me is accusative case, and so on. For lexical NPs, nominative
and accusative
case
do not have a morphological reflex; they are abstract cases. The Case-Filter rules out sentences which contain caseless overt NPs (full NPs or pronouns). (10)
The Case-Filter *[NP —case] where NP is overt
Case is assigned (or licensed) locally, by virtue of the relation between a head and its specifier or its complement. Nominative case is assigned by an agreement relation between the subject of the finite clause and the AGR features in I, while accusative case is assigned by virtue of the government relation between a verb or a preposition and its complement. The categories N and A do not assign case. In order to avoid a Case-Filter violation, the preposition of is inserted in their complements: (11)
a.
b. (12)
a. b.
“John’s envy Mary
John’s envy of Mary *John is envious Mary. John is envious of Mary.
The Structure of English Sentences
145
Non-overt subjects of non-finite clauses are in complementary distribution
with overt NPs, leading to the hypothesis that they do not need case. (13)
a. b.
For John to go back would be nice. *For ec to go back would be nice.
Se
*John to go back would be nice. ec To go back would be nice.
(14)
Exercises Section 1 Exercise 1.
Embedded
clauses
Identify the embedded clauses in the following sentences. Classify them according to whether they are finite clauses, non-finite clauses, or small clauses.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
That Louise should have left surprises everyone. The news that Louise has left surprises everyone. | consider Louise an impossible choice. | wonder when they will announce that Louise has left. | wonder whom | will meet at the party. | asked her what to do. The woman whom you will meet at the party is his sister. | need a knife to cut the bread with. | consider that Louise is the best choice. For Louise to have left surprised everyone. 1 consider Louise to be the best choice. When they had announced that Louise had left everyone was relieved. 1am not certain that Louise has already announced that she is going. They all expect for Jim to come back. They arranged for us to meet Bill at the cinema.
Exercise 2.
Arguments and non-arguments
Identify arguments and adjuncts in the following sentences. Sometimes you may not find the distinction easy to draw. Discuss problematic examples.
(1)
a. b.
John has abandoned his family. John and Mary have abandoned their family.
(2)
a. b. c.
John encountered Mary in the park. John met Mary in the park. John and Mary met in the park.
(3)
a. b.
Mary suddenly left the house at four thirty. After dinner, Mary left.
The Structure of English Sentences
146
Soon after her departure, Mary found a job. ae Mary found the job very interesting. Mary found her son another job. John called a taxi.
sed
They called him a taxi. John called him a thief.
Exercise 3.
Argument structure
Discuss the argument structure of the following sets of sentences: (lea: b.
| told John that he should buy the bicycle. | told John to buy the bicycle.
(2)
b.
| expect that John will return. | expect John to return.
a. b.
| want my coffee to be piping hot. | want my coffee piping hot.
a. b. C
| consider that it is rather surprising that Mary has left. | consider it to be rather surprising that Mary has left. | consider it rather surprising that Mary has left.
(3)
ima:
Exercise 4.
Non-overt arguments
Discuss the problems raised by the paired sentences below:
(a)
ras
b.
| have eaten a hot meal. | have eaten.
(2)
a. b.
She is smoking cigars. She is smoking.
(3)
ea: b.
She is writing a letter to her friends. She is writing to her friends.
(4)
a. b.
She is writing a novel. She is writing.
(5)
a.
She drinks a lot of wine. She drinks.
b.
In the above pairs of sentences we see that one argument of the verb apparently can be omitted. When the object is not overtly realized we still interpret the sentences as referring to an activity involving two arguments. For instance, if we omit the object of eat in (1b), we still understand the sentence to mean that ‘I ate something’. There is a relatively small class of verbs in English which allow the direct object to be omitted. Discuss the semantic effect of object omission in the sets of sentences below: (6)
a.
b.
She is expecting an important visitor. She is expecting.
The Structure of English Sentences (7)
a. b.
The teachers kissed the students. The teachers kissed.
(8)
a. b.
The children are washing their dolls. The children are washing.
(9)
a. b.
John and Mary met Jane in the park. John and Mary met in the park.
47
In examples (6)—(9), Semantic restrictions on the implicit object cannot be derived in any obvicus way from the structure. The omissibility of the object as such is not predictable: eat, for instance, allows for an understood object, while devour, which is closely similar in meaning, does not. Similarly, desert allows the omission of the object while abandon does not:
(10)
a. b.
Louise is eating. “Louise is devouring.
(11)
a. b.
Bill is deserting. *Bill is abandoning.
There is an important difference, then, between the implicit subjects of an English nonfinite clause, discussed in section 1.3, and the implicit objects which can be postulated in some examples. Non-overt subjects are not constrained by the lexical properties of the verbs whose arguments they are; the phenomenon is productive in English (and indeed in other languages): given the right configuration, a non-finite verb may have a non-overt subject. But implicit objects are lexically constrained. We will say that a lexical rule allows the object of a certain number of transitive verbs in English to be implicit, while syntactic rules require implicit subjects for non-finite sentences.
Section 2
Exercise 5.
Movement
of constituents
In the following sonnet by William Shakespeare, certain constituents have been moved from an underlying post-verbal position to a pre-verbal position. Identify these constituents. Are they arguments or adjuncts? Are these movements grammatical in modern
English?" Sonnet 12 William Shakespeare When | do count the clock that tells the time, And see the brave day sunk in hideous night; When | behold the violet past prime, And sable curls are silvered o’er with white; When lofty trees | see barren of leaves, Which erst from heat did canopy the herd, And summer’s green all girded up in sheaves, Borne on the bier with white and bristly beard;
English we refer the reader to 1 For some discussion of word-order patterns in earlier chapter 6, section 2.3.3.
148
The Structure of English Sentences
Then of thy beauty do | question make, That thou among the wastes of time must go, Since sweets and beauties do themselves forsake, And die as fast as they see others grow, And nothing ’gainst Time’s scythe can make defence, Save breed, to brave him when he takes thee hence.
Exercise 6.
The internal structure of phrases: VP
Use the do so test to reveal the structure of the VP in the following sentences. Which constituents may be either included in or left out of the VP replaced by do so? What does this tell us about how the do so substitution rule should be stated? ) ) ) ) ) )
John will go to Paris on Tuesday. Louise will write a letter tonight. Thelma will dance after lunch. Thelma will dance. John will speak about linguistics. John will talk to Mary in a few hours.
Exercise 7. X’-theory and the internal structure of the noun phrase Show the internal structure of each NP below by means of a tree diagram.”
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
The picture of John by a famous photographer The student with blue eyes The student of English This student A tall girl The girl with long hair in a mini-skirt The specialist in physics from Germany Their recent ban on shoes with metal tips in school The journey from Paris to Rome on Sunday That girl at the dance last week
Exercise 8.
Verb movement
How can we account for the contrasts below?
(1)
a. b.
Louise is not sleeping well. *Louise sleeps not well.
(2)
a. b.
Louise often sends material to Thelma. “Louise sends often material to Thelma.
(3)
a. b. c.
Women need not apply for this job. *Women need not to apply for this job. Women don’t need to apply for this job.
We examine the nature of the nominal projection again in chapter 4, section 3.
The Structure of English Sentences
(4) (5)
op a.
149
Thelma does not have to write a report. *Thelma has not to write a report.
Thelma did not have John fix the sink.
b.
*Thelma had not John fix the sink.
(6)
a. b.
Thelma did not get invited. “Thelma got not invited.
(7)
a. a
%Louise hasn’t enough money. (British) Louise does not have enough money. (American, British)
Exercise 9.
The structure of the clause
Explain why the following sentences are ungrammatical and modify them so that they become grammatical: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
*l wonder for John to come. *I think for John to come. *That John came. *That will John come? *I think that will John come. *I wonder will that the teacher interview the student. *l wonder if John to come. *l wonder whether John to come. *l want that he leaves immediately. *I believe for her to be the best choice.
| Exercise 10.
The structure of non-finite clauses
Discuss the structure of sentences (1)-(3). Explain why (4) and (5) are ungrammatical. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
| remember | remember | remember *Il remember *l remember
Exercise 11.
him going to school. him never going to school. him not talking to anyone. them talking not to anyone. them talking never to anyone.
Small clauses
es with an abstract IP. Conin the text we propose that all small clauses are sentenc sider the data below: (1)
a. b. c.
| want my coffee boiling hot. | want you in my office at four. *l want you the winner.
small clauses of a certain type: As can be seen in the examples, verbs may select predicate (1a) and with a PP AP an want, for instance, selects a small clause with with an NP predicate. What clause small a predicate (1b), but it does not select sion in the text? problems does this raise for our discus
150
The Structure of English Sentences
Section 3
Exercise 12.
Clause structure
Say why the sentences come grammatical. (1) (2) (3) (4)
below are ungrammatical and modify them so that they be-
*I think that that John is wrong is evident. *We wonder if for Mary to be invited would please you? *They found that she should leave unthinkable. *l consider for someone to leave a party early impolite towards the host.
Exercise 13.
Control
We have seen that a non-finite sentence may have a non-overt subject, ec. This subject is sometimes controlled or identified by another NP in the sentence. Alternatively, ec may have an indefinite or arbitrary interpretation. On the basis of the examples below, and using the concepts and terminology developed in this chapter, try to formulate some of the structural conditions which determine the interpretation of the empty
subject.° 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18)
| want [ec to go to the party]. | promised Bill [ec to go to the party]. | allowed Bill [ec to go to the party]. | threatened [ec not to go to the party]. | convinced Bill [ec not to go to the party]. [ec not to go to the party] would be impolite. [ec to go to the party] or [ec not to go to the party], which is worse? Bill thinks that [ec to go to the party] would annoy Susan. Bill said that Mary decided [ec not to go to the party]. That Mary decided [ec not to go to the party] annoys Bill. The director was urged [ec to obtain more funding]. We urged the director [ec to obtain more funding]. We need a book [ec to study syntax]. Mary arranged with Bill [ec to go to the party together]. | asked Mary [whether ec to go to the party]. | asked Mary [ec to go to the party]. Any attempt [ec to overthrow the government] is doomed to failure. The party’s attempt [ec to overthrow the government] failed.
Exercise 14.
The realization of arguments
In the discussion of the thematic structure of the clause we asked three questions: (1) (2) (3)
Do all verbs assign theta-roles? (1.4) Do only verbs assign theta-roles? (1.5) Do all noun phrases receive theta-roles? (1.6)
What would logically be the fourth question to ask? Discuss this issue in the light of sections 3.3 and 3.5.3. * For a discussion of empty subjects see chapter 4, section 2.
The Structure of English Sentences
Exercise 15.
iy
PP subjects
In section 3.3.2 we discussed sentences with PP subjects: (1)
a. b.
After four would suit me fine. After four would be a good time.
The types of verbs which admit such PP subjects are restricted; be and suit are the most natural: (2)
a. b.
*Before breakfast makes everyone happy. *After four would please everyone.
At first sight, the examples in (3) contradict the restriction imposed on the choice of verbs:
(3)
a. b. c.
After four appears to suit everyone. After four seems to suit everyone. Before breakfast turned out to be the best time for everyone.
Would examples such as (3) lead us to broaden the class of verbs subjects? In your answer you may take into account the examples in paraphrases of (3). What is the argument structure of the matrix verb of in (4)? What is the role of the subject pronoun it in these examples? boldface PP subject in the examples in (4) receive its thematic role?*
(4)
a. b. c.
admitting PP (4), which are the sentences How does the
It appears that after four suits everyone. It seems that after four suits everyone. It turned out that before breakfast was the best time for everyone.
The paraphrases in (4) show that the examples in (3) respect the restriction imposed of on the occurrence of PP subjects: the PP subjects in (3) are actually arguments the to extended be can reasoning this how Discuss (3c). be of or 3b) (3a, suit either following sentences:
(5)
a. b. c.
After four was believed to be the best time to meet. After four was thought to be an appropriate moment. After four was said to suit everyone.
Existential there
Exercise 16. In section 3.4.2 we verbs:
(1) a. b. c. d. e.
There There There *There *There
certain class of indicated that existential there is restricted to a
are three students working in the garden. were three students sick. ep. arrived three more candidates on my doorst . work three students in the garden talked three policemen to the crowd.
expletive subjects in chapter 2, section 3. 4 We will return to the class of verbs with
is2
The Structure of English Sentences
Consider the following examples in the light of the restriction:
(2)
There There There There aoop
appeared to be more people turned out to be a big crowd was believed to exist a need was thought to be no cause
than expected. at the theatre. for more discussion. for concern.
You may also take into consideration the discussion in exercise 153
Exercise 17.
/t as a subject
The pronoun it is ambiguous in the following examples. Discuss. (1)
a. b. c.
It is cold. It appeared to be too cold to drink. It turned out to be too cold to eat.
Consider the use of it in (2), distinguishing expletive it, atmospheric it and referential it (2)
It is very interesting. It is very interesting that she should want to go there at all. It is raining all the time. It seems to be raining. It turned out that John was leaving home at once. It is surprising that John won't stay. It is likely to rain all night. aoop amo
In (2c), (2d) and (2g) you will probably have identified it as atmospheric it. Does the fact that the matrix verb in (2d) and (2g) is not actually a weather verb raise any particular problem? When considering the answer to this question, you may wish to turn to the
discussion in exercises 15 and 16.°
Exercise 18.
Passive and the reorganization of arguments
In the text discussion we say that passivization implies a reorganization of the arguments of the sentence: the object becomes the subject and the subject becomes optional.
(1)
a. b.
The police have arrested John. John was arrested.
On the basis of the following examples discuss the question of whether passivization always implies that a direct object must become a subject:
(2)
a. b.
I believe that John is innocent. It is believed that John is innocent.
(3)
a.
| believe John to be innocent.
b.
John is believed to be innocent.
° For more discussion of the verb types in (2) see also chapter 2, section 3. ° For the class of verbs represented by (2d) and (2g) see also chapter 2, section 1.3.
The Structure of English Sentences (4)
a. b. c. d
153
| believe that John has already left. It is believed that John has already left. | believe John to have already left. John is believed to have already left.
The following sets of sentences seem to have some of the properties of active/passive
pairs: discuss.’ (5)
(6)
a.
It turned out that John was innocent.
b.
John turned out to be innocent.
a. b.
It seems that John has left. John seems to have left.
Exercise 19.
Modification of argument structure
Discuss the following sentences in the light of the discussion of passivization. (1)
a. b.
You should wash your shirt regularly. These shirts wash easily.
(2)
a. b. c.
The enemy sank the ship. The ship was sunk by the enemy. The ship sank.
(3)
a. b.
They rolled the stones down the hill. The stones rolled down the hill.
Exercise 20.
The realization of arguments
_ Discuss the following sentences: a. b. c. d.. e. f.
They *They They *They They *They
considered considered considered considered considered considered
Exercise 21.
seriously that in the garden is the best place to meet. seriously in the garden is the best place to meet. in the garden to be the best place to meet. seriously in the garden to be the best place to meet. in the garden the best place to meet. seriously in the garden the best place to meet.
The Case-Filter
NPs must have case. In our text, we propose that the Case-Filter requires that all overt examples: following the of light the in ter Case-Fil the of Discuss the formulation
(1)
‘*John to be the best candidate was amazing. For John to be the best candidate was amazing. *After lunch to suit everyone is remarkable. SF Ao For after lunch to suit everyone is remarkable. a.
Exercise 22.
NP complements and direct objects
problems they raise for our discusConsider the following sentences and discuss the the object to the subject position. sion of passivization as involving raising of related structures see chapter 2, section 1.3. 7 For more discussion of passivization and
154
The Structure of English Sentences
(1)
a. b.
Mary weighs fifty kilos. *Fifty kilos are weighed by Mary.
(2)
a. b.
This shirt costs fifty pounds. *Fifty pounds are cost by this shirt.
(3)
a. b.
Mary stayed a week at the seaside. *A week was stayed at the seaside by Mary.
(4)
a.
b. (5)
a. b.
Mary married John.
?John was married by Mary. Mary resembles John. *John is resembled by Mary.
Though a verb like weigh is followed by an NP in (1a) this NP does not become the subject in a passive sentence. It would seem that the NP fifty kilos does not function as an object of weigh: rather, it is a measure phrase. Compare (1) with (6): (6)
a. b.
Mary weighed the apples. The apples were weighed by Mary.
In (6) weigh is again followed by an NP, which, this time, becomes a subject in the passive. In (6) the NP the apples is the object of weigh. The NP the apples expresses the THEME of weigh, i.e. the element that undergoes the action or is affected by the action.
General exercises
Exercise 23. The subject of infinitival complements of believe In the text we assign to sentences in which a matrix verb selects an infinitival complement a structure as in (1): (1)
| believe [|p John to be the best candidate].
In (1) the subject of the infinitival clause is inside the IP complement of believe. We assume it can be case-marked by the verb believe. Consider the following examples: they are accepted by many, though not all, native speakers. Discuss the problems raised for the analysis of believe complements: (2)
| have found Bob recently to be morose. | suspect him strongly to be a liar. Amber believes Becky sincerely to be intelligent. | have wanted Mary for a long time to finish that chapter. Jane proved Bob unfortunately to be a werewolf. | believed Nixon incorrectly to be interested in ending the war. | can prove Bob easily to have outweighed Martha’s goat. emoaoop
In the sentences in (2) the subject of the embedded clause is followed by an adjunct with matrix scope. In (2a), for instance, recently may modify found, in (2b) strongly modifies suspect, and so on. To account for this pattern, Postal (1974) proposes that in
The Structure of English Sentences
155
the sentences in (2) the subject of the embedded non-finite clause moves into the object position, [NP,V’], of the matrix verb. This movement is called ‘Subject-to-Object
Raising’. Discuss the problems that such an approach raises for the theta-criterion. For discussion see also Kayne (1985), Wyngaerd (1987), Johnson (1991), Branigan (1992), Koizumi (1993). While some native speakers accept the sentences in (2), they all reject (3): (3)
“I’ve believed there for a long time now to be no solution to this problem.
ae can we differentiate the embedded subject in (3) from the embedded subjects in
Exercise 24.
Arguments for postulating non-overt subjects
Consider the following sentences. In the (a)-variant the non-finite clause has an overt subject; in the (b)-variant there is no overt subject. Consider how, for each paired set of sentences, the data in the (c)- and (d)-sentences may support postulating a non-overt subject. (1)
a. b. c. d.
For John to want his own To want one’s own office Mary wants her/*his own *For Mary to want his own
(2)
a. b. c. d.
For John to behave himself at the party was surprising. To behave oneself at a party is important. You should behave yourself/*himself. *For Bill to behave herself was surprising.
_Exercise 25.
office was surprising. is surprising. office. office was surprising.
The imperative
Consider the following sentences. What problems do they raise for the grammar we have developed so far?
(1)
a. b. c. d. e.
Behave yourself/*herself. Don't try to talk to me like that. Don't you try to talk to me like that. Don’t be too proud of yourself/*herself. Eat your own food.
Exercise 26.
Argument structure and lexical heads
differences between the Discuss the following examples, bringing out similarities and examples which we have grouped together.® (1)
a.
a
The Italians have invaded Albania. The Italian invasion of Albania was atrocious. The Italian invasion was atrocious. Albania was invaded by Italy. Albania was invaded.
Albania’s invasion by Italy was atrocious. Albania’s invasion was atrocious. invasion was unexpected.
samo ao The
NPs we refer to chapter 4, section 3. 8 Bor the difference between clauses and
156
(2)
The Structure of English Sentences The enemy destroyed the city. *The enemy destroyed. The city was destroyed. The city’s destruction The destruction was terrible. pa290p
Mary is conscious of the problem. ois Mary is conscious. John believes Mary. *John’s belief Mary is well-founded. John believes that Mary is innocent. John believes Mary to be innocent. John’s belief that Mary is innocent is well-founded. *John’s belief Mary to be innocent is well-founded. Mary is believed to be innocent. *oa0o0p sa *Mary’s belief to be innocent is well-founded.
Exercise 27.
Whether and if
In the text we adopt the hypothesis that both whether and if are complementizers. Discuss the relevance of the following data for this point:® (1)
a. ’.
| very much doubt whether he can come. Whether he can come, | very much doubt. | very much doubt if he can come. ~ *If he can come, | very much doubt. Tom
(2)
The question whether he can come remains unanswered. Sat *The question if he can come remains unanswered.
(3)
The main question is whether he will accept the offer. *The main question is if he will accept the offer.
(4)
We argued about whether he will come. *We argued about if he will come.
(5)
| wonder whether or not he will come.
Morte *| wonder if or not he will come. Mente er
Exercise 28.
The structure of the noun phrase
Discuss the problems raised by the following data for the text analysis of the structure
of the NP."
(1) Italian
il mio libro the my book
(2)
Italian
questo mio libro this my book
(3)
Early Modern English
this our ould friend
(4)
Early Modern English
these our gifts
” We return to the difference between whether and if in chapter 2, section 1.1.2. We also refer the reader to the discussion in chapter 3, section 2.5.3.1.2.
'© For discussion see chapter 4, section 3.
The Structure of English Sentences
Exercise 29.
157
The structure of the noun phrase
Discuss the problems raised by the following data for the text analysis of NPs." (1) (2) (3) (4)
How important a role will she play in the discussion? So vivid a picture did he draw of the situation that everyone agreed at once. That big a turnout | had not expected. This would be too easy a solution for the question.
Exercise 30.
Diachronic changes
The following are examples from Old English. Identify some of the differences between the syntax of Old English and that of present-day English:'? (1)
and heora an sona his swurd ateah (ASL, XXXI, 468) and of them one immediately his sword drew ‘and one of them instantly drew his sword’ (from van Kemenade 1987: 16, her (2c))
(2)
gif hie him pees rices upon (Parker 755) if they him the kingdom granted ‘if they would grant him the kingdom’ (from van Kemenade 1987: 16, her (2e))
(3)
pest hiera kyning fulwihte onfon wolde (A 878.21) that their king baptism receive would ‘that their king would receive baptism’ (from Bean 1983: 59, her (11))
Exercise 31.
Argument/non-argument asymmetries
Consider the following sentences: in each example a constituent is extracted from the lower clause (as suggested by the empty position [——]). However, the resulting sentences have different levels of acceptability. Using the concepts and terminology developed in this chapter, try to describe the factors that may influence the contrasts. which (Observe that where adjuncts are fronted, the intended reading is the one in reason the for asks why instance, for the adjunct modifies the embedded clause. In (4), consider for the invitation. For the ungrammatical sentence with adjunct extraction, from extracted is adjunct the assume we if better become would whether the sentences the main clause, for instance, if why in (4) bears on wonder."*)
(1) (2)
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Why did you say [that Mary had been invited [——]]? Whom
did you say [that Mary had invited [——]]?
??Whom did you wonder [whether Mary had invited [——-]]? [——]]? | *Why did you wonder [whether Mary had been invited [——]]? invited had Mary [that Whom did they not tell you [——]]? | *Why did they not tell you [that Mary had been invited [——]]? car the repair should [we that say you did How
section a0: \! For discussion of such examples see chapter 4,
,
in chapter 6, section 263938 12 We will consider some properties of these examples 1.1.5. nt/adjunct asymmetry illustrated here in chapter 2, section
13 We return to the argume
The Structure of English Sentences *How *How *Why *How *Why *Why How *How How *How
did you wonder [whether we should repair the car [——]]? did they not say [that we should repair the car [——]]? did no one say [that Mary had been invited [——]]? did no one say [that we should repair the car [——]]? did you tell no one [that Mary had been invited [——]]? did you never tell me [that | should repair the car [——]]? important do you think [that the decision will be [——]]? important do you wonder [whether the decision will be [——]]? quickly do you think [that they can change the wheel [——]]? quickly did you ask [when they will change the wheel [——]]?
Exercise 32.
Syntactic movement
Using the concepts and terminology developed in this chapter, describe the structure of the following sentences.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
This book, John does not like.
Not a single paper did he write during the term. To which university did you say that Mary was going? You should proof-read every night three complete pages of your original text. A letter arrived last night which had been posted two months ago. So vivid a description of the place | have never seen. So vividly did he describe the accident that we would always remember his account.
Exercise 33.
Word-order and word-order variation in English
Using the concepts and terminology introduced in this chapter, discuss the distribution of the underlined constituents in the following sentences.
(1)
Mr Gresham was now an embarrassed man and though the world did not know it, or at any rate, did not know that he was deeply embarrassed, he had not the heart to throw open his mansion and park . . . (Anthony Trollope (1858), Dr Thorne; Wordsworth Classics 1994, 7)
(2)
It can hardly be expected that anyone will consent to go through with a fiction that offers so little of allurement in its first pages; but twist it as | will | cannot do otherwise. (Anthony Trollope (1858), Dr Thorne; Wordsworth Classics 1994, 15)
(3)
Roger Scatcherd had also a reputation . . . (Anthony Trollope (1858), Dr Thorne; Wordsworth Classics 1994, 17)
(4)
Relations she would undoubtedly have had none, had she been left to live or die as a workhouse bastard. (Anthony Trollope (1858), Dr Thorne; Wordsworth Classics 1994, 22)
(5)
He had been before pure bachelor; not a room in his house had been comfortably furnished; he at first commenced in a makeshift sort of way, because he had not at his command the means of commencing otherwise . . . (Anthony Trollope (1 858), Dr Thorne; Wordsworth Classics 1994, 30)
(6)
Before the reader is introduced to the modest country medical practitioner who is to be the chief personage of the following tale, it will be well that he should be
The Structure of English Sentences
15?
made acquainted with some particulars as to the locality in which, and the neighbours among whom, our doctor followed his profession. (Anthony Trollope (1858), Dr Thorne; Wordsworth Classics 1994, 1) (7)
Child as she was, she-understood the joke. (Anthony Trollope (1858), Dr Thorne; Wordsworth Classics 1994, 35)
(8)
The characters and situations in this work are wholly fictional and imaginary, and do not portray and are not intended to portray any actual persons or parties.
(Raymond Chandler (1939), The Big Sleep; Penguin edn 1948, 5) (9)
| presume they both had, and still have, all the usual vices. (Raymond Chandler (1939), The Big Sleep; Penguin edn 1948, 18)
(10)
Genuine journalist he may be — but he is a phoney witness. (Colin Dexter (1996), Death is Now My Neighbour, Pan edn 1997, 126)
(11)
Whilst the guest night was still in progress, whilst still the port and Madeira were circulating in their time-honoured direction, an over-wearied Morse had decided to retire comparatively early to bed, where almost unprecedentedly he enjoyed a deep, unbroken slumber until 7.15 the following morning, when gladly would he have turned over and gone back to sleep. (Colin Dexter (1996), Death is Now My Neighbour, Pan edn 1997, 155)
Exercise 34.
Discontinuous constituents
in the discussion of extraposition in section 2.1.9 we showed that noun phrases may be broken up as a result of extraposition. In (1b) the subject is discontinuous.
(1)
a. b.
Awoman who sells second-hand books came here yesterday. A woman came here yesterday who sells second-hand books.
Describe the discontinuous constituents in the following examples:
(2)
a. b.
All the girls have bought the book. The girls have all bought the book.
(3)
a. b.
Both her sons died in the war. Her sons both died in the war.
up. The In (2b) and in (3b) the NPs all the girls and both her sons have been split This sons). (girls, modify they noun quantifiers all and both are separated from the floating are both and a// float; quantifier as literature phenomenon is referred to in the
quantifiers."
Exercise 35.
Syntax and register variation (1)
the author reproduces Consider the italicized sections in the following extracts in which ed in this chapter, develop s concept the and ogy terminol some dialogue. Using the extracts: the of es properti c syntacti discuss the
(1)
yet’. He patted a stomach ‘Sorry to keep you, need the workout, didn’t expect you
office with pictures of black that showed no signs of flab and led the way to a small
2.1. 14 We return to quantifier float in chapter 2, section
160
The Structure of English Sentences athletes round the walls. He was a well-set-up Afro-Caribbean, perhaps in his late thirties, handsome, a spring in his step, his manner easy. ‘Get you something? Soft drink, no alcohol here. Fine place, eh? Had to knock a few heads together before the council said yes to it. Who'll use it, some of ‘em said, but the youngsters, a lot of ‘em are in the pool every night, and we’ve had to put up an advance booking list for the ring. We got a Golden Gloves winner comin’ out of here, that'll shake ’em.’ (Julian Symons (1996), A Sort of Virtue; Pan edn 1997, 124-5)
(2)
Bannock’s nostrils widened, he gave an enormous snort. ‘Layman’s dead. Told you about him — doctor treated the Calendars — all the family — friendly with them. This is Layman’s brother, younger brother — several years younger — close to Layman — old man now but still got all his marbles —’ Allen Pitcombe found the irritation unbearable. ‘Bernard, I’m happy to know Dr Layman’s brother is sane, but what is the point you’re making?’ Bannock glared. ‘Happened in the sixties — doctor certified a young boy — mentally unstable — put in an institution — Surrey, a place near Guildford. Boy's name was Calendar.’ (Julian Symons (1996), A Sort of Virtue; Pan edn 1997, 140)
(3)
‘Tried to make it look like an accident, not much doubt it was deliberate. Just look at the back and side of the car, where it’s scraped, reckon he was pushed off the road.’ Catchpole dutifully looked, nodded. ‘Happened around nine thirty, just getting dark, nobody to see, reckon our client knew the area, picked his place. Drove on a yard or two after giving a nudge to this Ford Orion, then came back, mark up the road where he stopped. Might still have been an accident, you're saying? Afraid not. Victim’s badly shaken up,... Our client opens the passenger door, says, “Very sorry, went out of control didn’t you, not my fault, but let me help,” or something similar. Leans over, applies pressure to the right spot, carotid artery, does the trick. That's what our forensic god reckons happened. Client hops back into his car, probably stolen, goes off without saying good-bye.’ Three cars had passed while he was talking. (Julian Symons (1996), A Sort of Virtue; Pan edn 1997, 158)
(4)
‘Won't offer you a smoke. Or a drink for that matter. Know you don’t usually drink with suspects.’ He darted’a sharp glance at Dalgleish to see his reaction, but receiving no comment, he established his pipe with a few vigorous sucks and began to talk. ‘Won't waste your time saying what an appalling thing this is. Difficult to believe really. Still, someone killed her. Put his hand round her neck and throttled her. Terrible for Mrs. Maxie. For the girl, too, of course, but naturally | think of the living. Stephen called me in at about seven-thirty. No doubt the girl was dead, of course. Had been for seven hours, as far as | could judge. The police surgeon knows more about that than me. Girl wasn’t pregnant.’ (P. D. James (1962), Cover Her Face; Penguin edn 1989, 101)
As can be seen, the extracts above reproduce informal or casual language use. The register of casual informal English has some properties that set it apart from other types of usage or registers.
Exercise 36.
Syntax and register variation (2)
Using the concepts and terminology developed in this chapter, describe the syntactic properties which set the language of the following text apart from everyday English.
The Structure of English Sentences
161
Body Scrub exfoliating This fragrant body scrub has been specially formulated to help refine the skin’s texture and appearance. Exfoliating beads will help remove surface impurities and dead skin cells while seaweed extracts help tone. Leaves the skin feeling soft, smooth and revitalised. Directions Massage over your body in the shower or bath concentrating on problem areas.
Rinse well. Avoid contact with eyes. (The Boots Company plc, Nottingham, England)
The text illustrated above is an informative text found on a commercial product. The text belongs to a specific register, or specialized use of the language for a particular purpose. As can be observed, the grammar of special registers may differ from that of everyday language.
Exercise 37.
Syntax and register variation (3)
Selecting an English newspaper of your choice, discuss some of the syntactic properties of newspaper headlines. lf you have access to newspapers in other languages, compare their headlines with English newspaper headlines. Headlines belong to a specific register, or specialized use of the language for a . particular purpose. The register of headlines is sometimes referred to as ‘headlinese’ of that from differ may registers special of As you will no doubt observe, the grammar ‘everyday language. in chapter 6. We will discuss some aspects of register-related syntactic variation
Exercise 38.
Syntax and register variation (4)
es that set it off from Consider the following recipe text; identify the syntactic properti y everyda spoken English:
Moules escargot Ingredients per serving 1 mussel platter
100g/3+ oz butter 2 garlic cloves, crushed 1 tablespoon chopped fresh parsley splash of Pernod salt and pepper wedge of lemon, to serve e for in a bowl and leave at room temperatur Cut the butter into small pieces, place using her d and seasoning and mix toget 30 minutes. Add the garlic, parsley, Perno refrigerator and dot with the flavoured the from r a fork. Take the mussel platte a lemon for three minutes. Serve at once, with butter, then lace under a hot grill wedge.
The Structure of English Sentences
162
(From Denis Blais and André Plisnier (1996), Belgo Cookbook, London: Weidenfeld and Nicolson. Reproduced in Observer Sunday Review, ‘Close-up with the Mussel Men’, 2.3.1997, p. 45, col. 3)
Exercise 39.
Gapping and constituency
Consider the examples in (1), which illustrate the application of a rule of ellipsis referred to as gapping. (1)
a. b.
John reads The Independent and Sue reads The Guardian. John reads The Independent and Sue The Guardian.
Gapping involves the co-ordination of two constituents or conjuncts; the second conjunct contains an empty slot (a gap) corresponding to some element in the first constituent. In (1b) the gap in the second conjunct corresponds to the verb reads. (1)
c.
John reads The Independent and Sue [reads] The Guardian.
Identify the category of the gapped constituent in (2): (2)
Mary went to London in 1997 and George in 1994.
On the basis of (1b) and (2) we could argue that the gapped constituent projection of V. Would this assertion be compatible with the following data? answer this question you should first identify the gapped material and then whether it is a constituent, i.e. whether the gapped material is exhaustively by one node. 3) 4) 5) 6)
(7) (8) (9) (10)
is a V or In order to determine dominated
Mary will buy a Mercedes and George a Volkswagen Golf. Mary has bought The Guardian and Jane The Independent. John wants to try to write a play and Mary a short story. Paul Schachter has informed me that the basic order in Tagalog and related languages is VOS; Ives Goddard that the unmarked order in Algonkian is OVS; and Guy Carden that the basic order in Aleut is OSV. (from Ross 1970: 250) Time believes Agnew to have been guilty and Newsweek Nixon. (from Sag 1980: 274) Arizona elected Goldwater senator, and Pennsylvania Schweiker. (from Jackendoff 1971: 74) Jane sometimes beats her husband, and Ted his wife. (adapted from Jackendoff 1971: 23) Some Republicans want Ford to run for the Presidency in 1976, and others Reagan. (from Kuno 1976: 307)
Exercise 40.
Right node raising
Consider text example (82), repeated here as (1) for the reader’s convenience. In this example, the NP on the extreme right-hand edge of the sentence, epic poetry, functions as the object of two different verbs, writes and recites. (1)
Louise writes, and Thelma recites, [epic poetry].
Yet, the theta-criterion requires that each argument be associated with one and only one theta-role. If epic poetry is the object of both write and recite, isn’t the theta-criterion violated? How could the theory of empty categories enable us to avoid such a violation?
The Structure of English Sentences
Exercise 41.
Adjunction and the NP
In the discussion structure in (1b):
in section 2.4.2 we proposed
(1)
a.
these students of English from Paris
b
NP ae
touiins:
163
that an NP such as (1a) has the
Base
Spec
N’ RE
OE
TO
N’
PP
oe
N these
PP.
ley
—
from Paris
If we assume, though, as suggested in section 2.4.5, that all adjuncts are XP-adjoined, then we should replace (1b) by (1c).
NP2
(1) ¢. oy
al
ey
PP
NP1 Nile Thovata Spec
N’
re N these
mis
PP
aa
from Paris
What problems are raised for this representation by the following example?
(1)
d.
I like these students of English from Paris more than those ones.
In chapter 4 we reconsider the structure of the NP.
Exercise 42.
Noun phrases and adjunction
r such as quickly in (1) is a VPIn section 2.4.5 we proposed that a pre-verbal modifie adjoined constituent.
(1)
deterioration of the situation. The minister will quickly intervene to prevent a
reasonable that analogous preIf pre-verbal modifiers are VP-adjoined, then it seems of the following examples, basis the On nominal modifiers should also be NP-adjoined. which we elaborated in re structu NP the for matic show how this assumption is proble section 2.4.2.
164
The Structure of English Sentences
2 A quick intervention was desirable. 3 The minister’s quick intervention was unexpected. 4 A careful analysis of the data is needed. i) John’s careful analysis of the data revealed many problems. 6)ed This careful analysis of the data deserves praise. ~ aN On the basis of the examples above, and assuming that pre-nominal modifiers are NPadjoined, we must conclude that determiners, possessives and demonstratives cannot
occupy [Spec, NP]."°
Exercise 43.
Lexical verbs and auxiliaries
On the basis of their distributional properties discuss the status of the boldfaced verbs in the following examples: (1)
a. b. c. d.
| have to do this. Do | have to do this? | always have to do this. | don’t have to do this.
(2)
a. b. c. d.
| had my students write an essay on verbs. | didn’t have my students write an essay on verbs after all. Did you have your students write an essay on verbs? | always have my students write an essay on verbs.
In (1) have has an interpretation close to that of the modal auxiliary must. On the basis of the distributional criteria developed in this chapter, show that must in (3) is an auxiliary. (3)
| must do it.
Would this semantic resemblance between have in (1) and must in (3) justify treating have as an auxiliary? In (2) the interpretation of have is close to that of make in (4): (4)
| made my students write an essay on verbs.
Have in (2) and make in (4) are called causative verbs: their subject causes an event to take place (here ‘the students write an essay on verbs’). We concluded from the examples in (1) and (2) that verbs may have dual status in a given language. Perfective have in (5a) is an auxiliary; possessive have in (5b), modal have in (1) and causative have in (2) above are lexical verbs. (5)
a. b.
| haven't written any essays on verbs. | don’t have enough time.
What is the status of have in (6)? (6)
a. b om d.
We always have a great time. | never have a bath in the morning. | always have too much work to do. %A circle hasn't any corners. (formal British English)
'S We will reconsider the structure of the NP in chapter 4, section 3.
The Structure of English Sentences
165
In (7) the verb get is quite similar in meaning to be. On the basis of a comparison with the syntactic properties of have in the examples in (1) and (2), decide whether the semantic similarity between have and get justifies treating get as an auxiliary.
(7)
a. b. c. d.
John got arrested for theft when he was young. John often got arrested for theft when he was young. Did John get arrested for theft when he was young? John didn’t get arrested for theft.
Exercise 44.
Copulas: auxiliaries or lexical verbs?
The boldfaced verbs in the examples below are copular verbs; they relate a subject NP and a predicate. On the basis of examples of your own, decide whether these verbs have the status of lexical verbs or that of auxiliaries. (1) (2) (3) (4)
John John John John
seems very happy. got very worried. became very worried. appeared very reluctant to reply.
Exercise 45.
Small clauses
In the text we assigned to the small clause complement in (1a) the analysis in (1b):
(1)
a. b.
[heard him leaving the main building. [ip him [)] [ve leaving the main building]].
same structure be In this example, the verb hear takes an IP complement. Would the appropriate for the boldfaced string in (2)? (2)
| saw three books containing long bibliographies.
The following data may help you along in the discussion. 1 saw him leaving the main building. Did you see it too? you see them too? | saw three books containing long bibliographies. Did
(3)
a. b.
(4)
a b.
*It was him leaving the main building that | saw. that we saw. It was three books containing long bibliographies
(5)
a. b.
ia. *We got him leaving the building sent to Austral es sent to Australia. graphi biblio long ning contai We got three books
(6)
a b.
spectacle. Him leaving the building was/*were a terrible sold last night. were/*was bibliographies Three books containing long
l analysis is appropriate for the relevant You will probably conclude that while the clausa containing long
(2) the string three books string in (1a) it is less so for that in (2). In that the plural N books is its head and that ting bibliographies has NP properties, sugges is a post-nominal modifier like the PP in (7): the string containing long bibliographies (7)
hies. | saw three books with long bibliograp
there.) Felser (1995), and the references cited (See Akmajian (1977), Reuland (1983),
166
The Structure of English Sentences
Exercise 46.
Ellipsis
Consider the sentences in (1): (1)
a. b. c.
Jane will buy the book if Mary will. Jane didn’t go there but Mike did. Matt might be going to Australia and George might too.
In each of the examples in (1), the VP in the second clause is missing. It is interpreted as identical to the VP in the first clause: thus (1a) is interpreted as (1a’). The phenomenon illustrated in (1) is referred to as VP-ellipsis. (1)
a’.
Jane will buy the book if Mary will buy the book.
On the basis of examples (2)-(4) describe the syntactic environments in which VPellipsis is acceptable and those in which it is not. In the discussion you should focus your attention on the element which precedes the ellipsis site. For discussion see Napoli (1985), Lobeck (1995), Potsdam (1997).
(2)
a. b. c.
(3)
John has not written the text yet but he will. pe er John has not written the text yet but he definitely will. c. *John has not written the text yet but he will definitely.
(4)
a. b.
I'll try the “I'll try the I'll try the (adapted
soup soup soup from
if | must. if | must absolutely. if | absolutely must. Potsdam 1997: 534, his example (6))
John has not written the text yet but he probably will. *John has not written the text yet but he will probably.
Bibliographical notes Introductory texts The following textbooks offer more detailed discussion of the theoretical points developed in this chapter: theta theory, case theory and phrase structure theory.
Haegeman, Liliane (1994) Introduction to Government and Binding Theory, Oxford: . Blackwell. Ouhalla, Jamal (1994) Transformational Grammar, London: Arnold. Radford, Andrew (1988) Transformational Grammar, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Radford, Andrew (1997) Syntactic Theory and the Structure of English. A Minimalist Approach, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Riemsdijk, Henk Van and Edwin Williams (1986) Introduction to the Theory of Grammar, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Roberts, Ian (1997) Comparative Syntax, London: Arnold.
The Structure of English Sentences
167
Specialized articles and sources of examples Aarts, Bas (1992) Small Clauses in English, Amsterdam: De Gruyter. Akmajian, Adrian (1977) ‘The complement structure of perception verbs in an autonomous syntax framework’, in Peter Culicover, Tom Wasow and Adrian Akmajian (eds) Formal Syntax, New York: Academic Press, 427-60. ROH peed and Audrey Li (1989) ‘Scope and constituency’, Linguistic Inquiry, 20,
Baker, Carl L. (1971) ‘Stress level and auxiliary behavior in English’, Linguistic Inquiry, 2, 167-81. Baker,
Mark
(1997)
‘Thematic
is Elements of Grammar. -138. Baltin, Mark
(1984)
roles and
syntactic
structure’,
in Liliane
Haegeman
A Handbook of Generative Syntax, Dordrecht: Kluwer,
‘Extraposition
rules and discontinuous
constituents’,
Linguistic
Inquiry, 15, 157-63. Bean, Marian (1983) The Development of Word-Order Patterns in Old English, London:
Croom Helm. Branigan, Philip (1992) ‘Subjects and Complementizers’, Cambridge, MA: MIT dissertation. Bresnan, Joan (1970) ‘On complementizers: toward a syntactic theory of complement types’, Foundations of Language, 6, 297-321. Campbell, Richard (1991) ‘Tense and agreement in different tenses’, Linguistic Review, 8, 159-84. Chao, Wynn (1996) On Ellipsis, New York: Garland. Chomsky, Noam (1970) ‘Remarks on nominalizations’, in Roderick Jacobs and Peter Rosenbaum (eds) Readings in English Transformational Grammar, Waltham, MA: Ginn. (Also in Chomsky, Noam (1972) Studies on Semantics in Generative Grammar, The Hague: Mouton.) Emonds, Joseph (1970) ‘Root and Structure Preserving Transformations’, Cambridge, MA: MIT dissertation, distributed by Indiana University Linguistics Club. _ Felser, Claudia (1995) ‘The Syntax of Verbal Complements. A Study of Perception Verbs in English’, University of Géttingen: dissertation. Guéron, Jacqueline (1980) ‘On the syntax and semantics of PP extraposition’, Linguistic Inquiry, 11, 637-78. Linguistic Guéron, Jacqueline and Robert May (1984) ‘Extraposition and Logical Form’, Inquiry, 15, 1-31. 2, 21-35. Jackendoff, Ray (1971) ‘Gapping and related rules’, Linguistic Inquiry, ed by the distribut Mimeo, ntion, X’-Conve the to tion Jackendoff, Ray (1974) Introduc Club. cs Linguisti ty Indiana Universi , Cambridge, MA: MIT Jackendoff, Ray (1977) X’ Syntax: A Study of Phrase Structure Press. Journal of LinguisJaworska, Ewa (1986) ‘Prepositional phrases as subjects and objects’, re. tics, 22, 355-75. ge and Linguistic Theory, 9, Johnson, Kyle (1991) ‘Object positions’, Natural Langua : ' 577-636. Branching, Dordrecht: Foris. Kayne, Richard (1984) Connectedness and Binary , in Jacqueline Guéron, HansKayne, Richard (1985) ‘Principles of particle constructions’ tical Representation, Dordrecht: Georg Obenauer and Jean-Yves Pollock (eds) Gramma .
Foris, 101-40 Morphological Case in the History of ~ Kemenade, Ans van (1987) Syntactic Case and ze English, Dordrecht: Foris. hypothesis >in Jonathan VP split the and ent agreem ‘Object (1993) Koizumi, Masatoshi 18. Papers
Working Papers in Linguistics David Bobaljik and Colin Phillips (eds) MIT
MA: MIT, 99-148. on Case and Agreement 1, Cambridge,
168
The Structure of English Sentences
Kuno, Susumo (1976) ‘Gapping: a functional analysis’, Linguistic Inquiry, 7, 300-9. Larson, Richard (1988) ‘On the double object construction’, Linguistic Inquiry, 19, 335-91. Larson, Richard (1990) ‘Double objects revisited: reply to Jackendoff’, Linguistic Inquiry, 21, 589-632.
Lobeck, Anne (1995) Ellipsis: Functional Heads, Licensing, and Identification, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Muysken, Pieter (1981) ‘Parametrizing the notion head’, Journal of Linguistic Research, 2, 57-75. Napoli, Donna J. (1985) ‘Verb phrase deletion in English: a base-generated approach’, Journal of Linguistics, 21, 281-320. Postal, Paul (1974) On Raising, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Potsdam, Eric (1997) ‘NegP and subjunctive complements
in English’,
Linguistic
Inquiry, 28, 533-41.
Reuland, Eric (1983) ‘Governing ing’, Linguistic Inquiry, 14, 101-36. Ross, John (1970) ‘Gapping and the order of constituents’, in Manfred Bierwisch and Kurt Heidolph (eds) Progress in Linguistics, The Hague: Mouton, 249-59. Safir, Ken (1983) ‘On small clauses as constituents’, Linguistic Inquiry, 14, 730-5. Sag, Ivan (1980) Deletion and Logical Form, New York: Garland. Stowell, Tim (1981) ‘Origins of Phrase Structure’, Cambridge, MA: MIT dissertation. Stowell, Tim (1982) ‘Subjects across categories’, Linguistic Review, 2, 285-312. Stuurman, Frits (1985) X-bar and X-Plain. A Study of X-bar Theories of the Phrase Structure Component, Dordrecht: Foris. Stuurman, Frits (1991) ‘If and whether: questions and conditions’, Lingua, 83, 1-41. White, Lydia (1989) Universal Grammar and Second Language Acquisition, Amsterdam: Benjamins. Williams, Edwin (1983) ‘Against small clauses’, Linguistic Inquiry, 14, 287-308. Wyngaerd, Guido van den (1987) ‘Object shift as an A-movement rule’, MIT Working Papers in Linguistics 11, Cambridge, MA: MIT.
2
Movement and Locality
0
Aim and scope of this chapter
In this chapter we consider the distribution of the constituents of a sentence, concentrating on the fact that a constituent may occupy a number of distinct positions in the structure, depending on the type of sentence. For instance, while the direct object of an active verb may occupy a VP-internal position in a declarative sentence, it may also be shifted leftward to a position preceding the subject. In a passive sentence, the direct object seems to become the subject. We will examine the relations between the various positions that a constituent may occupy in a sentence. One principle that will again be shown to play a part in the distribution of syntactic elements is the principle of locality, which says that syntactic relations ~ must be established in terms of minimal local relations. We have already examined the impact of locality on the assignment of thematic roles, on selection”
and on case-assignment.**
1
Movement
e ee e ee e ee
1.1
Questions
1.1.1 1.1.1.1
Preliminary description Direct questions in English
only occasionSo far, we have mainly discussed declarative sentences and have structure ally referred to interrogative sentences. In this section we return to the s: example of English interrogative sentences. Consider the following Chapter 1, section 1.2. Chapter 1, section 2.5.8. 3 Chapter 1, section 3.7.4. 1
ps
locality on interpretation. In chapter 6, 4 In chapter 5 we will also discuss the impact of locality constraints on movement certain of section 4.2, we will show that the implementation
may vary cross-linguistically.
170
Movement and Locality
Cat b. c. d. (2)
Thelma will Will Thelma Thelma met Did Thelma
meet Louise meet Louise Louise after meet Louise
after lunch. after lunch? lunch. after lunch?
a.
Whom will Thelma meet after lunch?
b.
Whom is Thelma meeting after lunch?
c. d.
Whom has Thelma met after lunch? Whom did Thelma meet after lunch?
(1a) is a declarative root sentence.° (1b) is an interrogative root sentence; more precisely, it is a yes/no question: the answer to questions of this type is either yes or no. We have already discussed the formation of yes/no questions:° the inflected auxiliary is moved to the left of the subject (1b) or, if there is no auxiliary present (1c), the finite inflection moves to C and is supported by the auxiliary do (1d). In English, root interrogatives are characterized by I-to-C movement. (2) illustrates another type of question, often referred to as a constituent question or wh-question. English constituent questions begin with an interrogative constituent such as whom in (2). Other interrogative constituents are what, where, when, why, and so on. Recall that because the typical interrogative elements in English often begin with wh- we call them wh-constituents or whphrases. The answer to constituent questions provides information which completes the sentence; it replaces an interrogative phrase in the question by an informative constituent. For instance, an appropriate answer to each of the questions in (2) would be: Louise. This NP would provide the constituent corresponding to the sentence-initial interrogative constituent whom. In the examples in (2), one argument of the transitive verb meet is realized by the subject NP Thelma. The second argument of the verb is realized as the constituent whom, the interrogative element. This constituent occupies an initial position. In (2) the constituent whom is the internal argument of meet: we would therefore expect it to occupy the object position, i.e. the position dominated by V’, [NP,V’]. Let us propose that whom starts out as the object of meet: its base-position is [NP,V’]. Another way of phrasing this is to say that whom is base-generated in the [NP,V’] position. (2e) is the underlying structure, deep structure or D-structure of (2a). Note in passing that we adopt the hypothesis that adjuncts such as after lunch are VP-adjoined.’
> Cf. chapter 1, section 2.5.5. ° Cf. chapter 1, section 2.5.2.2. ” Chapter 1, section 2.4.5.
Movement and Locality (2)eates
171
GP eine eee Spec
{re
oy Rae
C
IP
ga NP
|W
tid
eon
I
VP
ate VP
| “om Ve
ieee Thelma
will
meet
whom
Boe Ie
| ax Pp’
nO) after lunch
(2e) cannot surface as such. In English root constituent questions, two conditions must be met: (i) the interrogative constituent must be in an initial position and (ii) the auxiliary must precede the subject:
- (2)
f.
*Thelma has met whom?
g.
*Has Thelma met whom?
h.
*Whom Thelma has met?
(2f-h) are ungrammatical; they are not well-formed questions. However, while (2f) is not acceptable as an ordinary question, it can be used as an echoquestion, i.e. when a speaker is simply echoing a previous utterance and substitutes a wh-phrase to ‘echo’ a constituent he may not have heard or understood. (2f) may echo (2f’): (2)
f£.
Thelma has met George.
Similarly, (2g) may echo (2g’):
(2)
g’.
Has Thelma met George?
take place: (i) the In the English root wh-questions in (2a-d), two movements
I-to-C movement occurs, wh-phrase moves to the position in front of C, (ii) giving rise to subject-auxiliary inversion (SAI). in English. It is a (2i) represents the structure of independent wh-questions spelt out as a sentence of derived structure: it is the structure which will be
e. English, the S-structure or the Spell-Out of the sentenc
Movement and Locality
172
(2) i
cP a NP
Ee
Bee C
IP
hgig NP
ak a It feceHose
I
V
VP
VP
are
whom,
will,
Thelma
¢,
He |
after lunch
Whom occupies the clause-initial position, [Spec,CP]. It also realizes the internal argument of meet. To reconcile its peripheral S-structure position with its VPinternal thematic role, we propose that whom starts out as the object of meet and moves to the initial position. The case form of the moved constituent, whom, offers support for its VPinternal base-position. Whom is the accusative form of who.*® The accusative case of whom is assigned by the verb meet. We signal in passing that for many speakers whom in (2) may be replaced by who, especially in informal English. When whom moves leftward, it leaves an empty category in its original or base-position, which we indicate by means of t for trace. A trace encodes the previous position of a moved constituent. The auxiliary will starts out under I and moves to C; it also leaves a t. In order to keep track of the relation of traces with the respective moved Agana we co-index them. The moved element iis called the antecedent of the trace.’
1.1.1.2
Direct questions in French
The mechanisms for direct question formation which we find in English are not identical in all human languages. French root wh-questions, for example, may be derived along the same lines (3a), but they may also pattern differently from their English counterparts. In (3b) neither the wh-phrase nor the auxiliary has undergone leftward movement; this example is the word-for-word French translation of the ungrammatical (2f) in English. It is a grammatical constituent * On the notion ‘case’, see chapter 1, section 3.7.
* For another, related use of the term ‘antecedent’, we refer the reader to chapter 4, section 1.
;
Movement and Locality
173
question in French provided the sentence has a rising intonation. As discussed already” the unmoved constituent in (3b) is referred to as wh-in-situ. French also admits (3c): the wh-constituent has undergone movement, but the auxiliary remains in the medial position and does not invert with the subject. The English equivalent of (3c), (2h), is ungrammatical. (3d), the French analogue of English
(2g), is also ungrammatical."! (3)
a.
Qui as-tu rencontré? who have you met
b.
Tuas rencontré qui?
c. d.
Qui tu as rencontré? *As-tu rencontré qui?
1.1.1.3
Indirect questions in English
In (4) we illustrate the formation of embedded questions. (4)
a. b. c. d.
I *I I I
think (that) Thelma will meet Louise after lunch. wonder that Thelma will meet Louise after lunch. wonder whether Thelma will meet Louise after lunch. wonder whom Thelma will meet after lunch.
In (4a) the main verb think selects a declarative finite clause introduced by that. As indicated by the parentheses, the complementizer that is optional. The matrix V of (4b), wonder, does not select a that clause: rather, it selects an interrogative clause, either a yes/no question (4c), or a wh-question (4d). As discussed before,
C is the head of CP and the properties of the head C percolate to — or are shared - by — the maximal projection, CP. An interrogative clause is headed by a C carrying a [+wu] feature and the head of a declarative clause is a C marked [—wu]. Interrogative sentences functioning as embedded clauses are indirect questions:
those functioning as main clauses are direct questions or root questions. There
are similarities and differences between direct and indirect questions. Let us first compare direct and indirect yes/no questions. Root yes/no questions are formed by I-to-C movement, giving rise to SAI. In indirect yes/no questions there is no I-to-C movement in standard English: (4)
e.
*I wonder will Thelma meet Louise after lunch.
as in Indirect or embedded yes/no questions are introduced either by whether, (4c), or by if:
(4)
£.
I wonder if Thelma will meet Louise after lunch.
overt maniAs a first approximation, we assume that whether and if are the spell out a C marked festations of the interrogative complementizer, that is, they
[+wH]. We will modify this view below.'* 1, section 2.1.4.2.
10 Chapter and interpretation of unmoved wh11 We return to a more detailed discussion of the syntax 3.2. constituents in chapter 5, section 1 Section 1.1.2.
174
Movement and Locality
(4d) contains an embedded or indirect wh-question. Once again, direct and
indirect wh-questions differ in that the former, though not the latter, are formed by I-to-C movement giving rise to SAI. On the other hand, in both root and embedded wh-questions a wh-phrase cannot remain in its sentence-internal base-position, but must move to the clause-initial [Spec,CP]. Observe that in embedded questions
the fronted wh-constituent is incompatible with an overt complementizer. We assume that the complementizer position in embedded wh-questions is non-overt. (4)
g.
*I wonder
[whom that Thelma will invite after lunch]. [whether that Thelma will invite Louise after lunch]. [if that Thelma will invite Louise after lunch].
Apparently there is a constraint on the spelling out of elements carrying the [+wH] feature. If a wh-phrase occupies the specifier of an embedded interrogative clause, then the head of that clause, C, which we assume carries the feature [+wH], is not spelt out. The S-structure of (4d) is as follows:
Josh
I
pres wonder whom;
Thelma
will
er of meet
¢
after lunch
'° We adopt the adjunction analysis for VP-modifiers; cf. chapter 1, section 2.4.5.
Movement and Locality
175
In the examples above, wh-movement applies to a finite embedded clause. Wh-movement may also extract a constituent from a non-finite clause: (4)
i.
I wonder whom to meet.
In ty the non-finite IP is headed by the infinitival marker to; the subject is nonovert’ and is controlled by the matrix subject I; the object of meet is the whconstituent whom, which has been preposed. The structure of (41) is as follows: (4)
j.
1.1.1.4
[wp I; [vp wonder [cp whom; [jp ec, to [yp meet t))]II.
Indirect questions in French
Whereas direct wh-questions in French need not be characterized by leftward movement of the wh-constituent, as we have seen,'* indirect wh-questions in French have the same derivation as their English counterparts, as illustrated by the following data: (5)
a.
b.
1.1.2
Je me demande qui tu as rencontré hier. I myself ask whom you have met yesterday ‘I wonder whom you met yesterday.’
*Je me demande tu as rencontré qui hier.
The status of whether and if
-Let us return to the status of whether and if. As a first approximation, we proposed that they are both the interrogative equivalents of the complementizer that. But there are important differences between the two. As discussed in chapter 1, the choice of complementizer varies along two dimensions: (i) finiteness, and (ii) illocutionary force. Finite declaratives are introduced by that, finite interrogatives by if, and non-finite clauses by for. Whether has a special status in that it introduces both finite and non-finite interrogatives.
(6)
a. a’.
I wonder [cp whether [jp I should go]]. I, wonder [cp whether [jp [ec] to go]].
whether Whether does not select a type of embedded clause. In this respect, on the impact an resembles preposed wh-constituents which also don’t have finiteness of the clause which they introduce: (6)
b. b’. c. c’.
I wonder I, wonder [wonder I, wonder
[cp whom [.p whom [cp where [cp where
'4 Chapter 1, section 1.3. 'S Section 1.1.1.2.
[p I should invite]]. [jp [ec] to invite]]. [pp I should go]]. [jp [ec] to gol].
176
Movement and Locality
Like wh-phrases such as whom and when, whether can introduce an infinitival clause with a non-overt subject. If, on the other hand, only selects finite clauses. Hence it cannot introduce an infinitival clause with a non-overt subject: (6)
d. d.’
I wonder [¢ if [p I should go]]. *I wonder [q if [p [ec] to go]].
We can exploit the parallelism in (6a—c) by assuming that whether occupies the same position as whom and when, i.e. [Spec,CP]. Based on the parallelism between (6d’) and (6e) we might argue that, like that, if is a complementizer and occupies the position under C. (6)
e.
*I expected [cp that [jp [ec] will go]].
The fact that whether, unlike if and that, does not impose selectional restrictions on the finiteness of the complement IP can be related to the fact that, unlike the complementizers mentioned, whether is not the head of CP but is a wh-phrase in the specifier of CP. Like other wh-phrases in [Spec,CP] it is compatible with
both finite and non-finite clauses.
1.1.3
Movement and locality
Interrogative sentences are formed by moving an interrogative wh-phrase, leftward to [Spec,CP]: in root questions, the relevant moved to the matrix [Spec,CP]; in embedded questions, it is embedded [Spec,CP]. The wh-constituent can move beyond the the clause in which it originates: (7)
a. b. c. d.
ITasked Iasked I asked I asked
[( whom [
ath
tear
up;
ip
NP
is
the letter
*4 Discussed in chapter 1, section 3.7.
Movement and Locality
261
The incorporation analysis developed here accounts for many of the facts characterizing verb—particle combinations; notably, it accounts for those data which suggest that the verb and the particle form a single unit. The incorporation analysis also leads us to expect that the verb and the incorporated particle are inseparable. As we have seen, the incorporation analysis allows us to rule out in a straightforward manner sentences in which the verb and the particle are separated by an adverb. It is clear, however, that the incorporation analysis is not able to account for those configurations in which the particle is separated from the verb by an intervening NP. In the absence of adjacency between V and Prt, there can be no So the data in (179), repeated here in (181), must receive a
incorporation.
different explanation: (181)
a. b.
John tore the letter up. John tore it up.
If we continue to assume that the base structure for V—particle combinations is the structure in (180a), then the data in (181) suggest that there must be a second way out of the case dilemma which arises in (180a). The second solution depends on the theory of phrase structure which we have elaborated. The projection of the particle (180a) is a maximal projection, just like any other XP. For any projection of a head, the theory of phrase structure developed in this book provides two positions for maximal projections: the complement position and the specifier position:
(182)
XP Spec
aed Xx
complement
The grammar thus allows for the projection of a specifier position within the maximal projection of the particle:
(180)
c.
VP
‘
sp AsGetien baled V
PrtP
Spec
Prt’
p< aqe A: Prt
|
tear
up
NP
YESS the letter
Movement and Locality
262
Recall that in (180c) the NP the letter is caseless, leading to an ungrammatical output. One way of saving the structure is by incorporating Prt to V, thus rendering the PrtP transparent for government (and case-marking) by the verb. As an alternative, the complement NP the letter may itself undergo movement to the specifier of the PrtP, leaving a trace in its base-position:
(180)
d.
vP
I
ec1B Lya aime V PrtP; PE
hs
Spec;
Prt;
omni Prt, NP tear
the letter;
|
In (180d) the verb tear governs the NP the letter: V governs PrtP, hence it governs its head Prt, and the specifier of Prt. Recall that the head of a projection and the specifier are in an agreement relation, expressed by co-indexation. Similarly, the features of the head project to the maximal projection. On the one hand, the NP the letter in the specifier position in (180d) is co-indexed with the Prt: here we use the index j. On the other hand, V governs PrtP and it also governs Prt, since the head and the maximal projection share their features. If V governs PrtP and Prt, it also governs the co-indexed NP the letter. The movement of the NP the letter in (180d) is an instantiation of NPmovement, which we described in more detail above.*®* The NP the letter moves to [Spec,PrtP] in order to be in a configuration in which it can receive case; the trace of the moved NP ¢; is caseless. This movement can be compared to the movement of the NP the letter in the following example: (183)
a. b.
*I believe [to have been sent the letter]. I believe [jp the letter; to have been sent t].
In (183a) the NP the letter is the complement of the passive verb sent. In the object position of sent the NP the letter remains caseless, as passive verbs do not assign (or license) case. In (183b) the NP the letter has moved to the specifier position of the embedded non-finite IP: in that position the NP can be casemarked by the verb believe. Recall that a verb can govern into the domain of a non-finite IP. At first sight one might raise an objection to the structure in (180d). It can be argued that in (180d) the PrtP the letter up is a constituent and should therefore be able to move in the structure. This prediction is not borne out. 85 Tn section 1.3.
Movement and Locality (184)
a.
b. Cs
263
*Up which letter did John tear?
*The letter up which John tore was important. *Up the letter, John tore.
In fact, it turns out that the verb tear must remain adjacent to the sequence NPparticle: (184)
d.
“John tore quickly the letter up.
The data in (184), however, are as expected given the analysis which we have
proposed. We hypothesized that the NP the letter occupies the specifier position of the PrtP complement of tear and that it receives its case from the verb tear in that position. (180d) is thus argued to be parallel to (183b). In (183b) the NP
the letter moves to the specifier of the IP complement of the matrix verb believe in order to be case-marked by the verb. In (183b) the verb believe must also remain adjacent to the NP the letter:
(185)
*I believe very much the letter to have already been sent.
One problem remains to be solved. We have seen that when a verb-particle combination takes an NP complement, two strategies are available to avoid the potential Case-Filter violation associated with base structures such as (180a), where we have assumed that Prt lacks case-assigning properties. One is that Prt incorporates to V, deriving a complex V* (186a). Another is that the NP complement of the particle moves to the specifier of the particle projection PrtP to receive case from the verb directly (186b):
(186)
a. b.
John tore up the letter. John tore the letter up.
The question that remains is why only the latter strategy is available when the complement of a particle is a pronoun: (187)
a. b.
*John tore up it. John tore it up.
We will not give a full analysis for this topic, which would require a detailed discussion of the properties of pronouns. We give an outline of the analysis. Like regular NPs or full NPs, pronouns can be governed by prepositions. In (188a) the complement of the preposition is a full NP, in (188b) it is a demonstrative pronoun, this, and in (188c) it is the personal pronoun ?t. (188)
a. b. c.
John talked about a house. John talked about this. John talked about it.
the The full NP can be stressed, so can the demonstrative pronoun this, but pronoun it cannot be stressed:
(189)
a. b. c.
John talked about THE HOUSE. John talked about THIS. *John talked about IT.
264
Movement and Locality
In addition, unlike full NPs or demonstrative pronouns, the pronoun 7¢ cannot be co-ordinated: (190)
a. b. G
John talked about the house and the garden. John talked about this and that. *John talked about it and that.
Unlike full NPs modifications: (191)
a. b. c.
and demonstratives,
the pronoun
it does
not
allow
for
John talked about the proposals from Jane. Mary talked about those from Bill. *I saw it from Jane.
Pronouns like it which cannot be stressed, which cannot be co-ordinated, and
which cannot be modified, are called weak pronouns. Pronouns like demonstrative this, which can be stressed, co-ordinated and modified, are called strong pronouns. Weak pronouns are deficient with respect to both full NPs and strong pronouns such as demonstratives. The deficiency of weak pronominal elements suggests that they are dependent in terms of structure. We may express this dependence in terms of case properties. We may take it to mean, for instance, that pronouns are syntactically dependent on their case-assigner. To try to make this intuition more precise, let us postulate tentatively that pronouns must be governed directly by their case-assigner. In example (188c), for instance, in which the pronoun it is the complement of a preposition, the pronoun is governed by the preposition. In a configuration such as (192a), in which the pronoun originates as a complement of the particle and in which the particle has subsequently incorporated to the verb, the pronoun is no longer governed directly by the particle. It is not governed directly by the verb either, but is separated from the verb by the trace of the particle: (192)
a.
[vp tear -up; [pap [pr 4] it]].
On the other hand, in the alternative configuration available to verb—particle constructions, in which the complement of the Prt itself moves to the specifier of PrtP, the pronoun is directly governed by V: (192)
b.
[yp tear [pup it; [p, up] 4].
The deficiency of weak pronouns and their direct dependency on their caseassigner thus accounts for their restricted distribution in the verb-particle construction. ::
4.3
4.3.1
Passivization and particles
Verb-particles and passive
To conclude the discussion of particles and prepositions in English, let us briefly return once more to passivization structures in English. We discussed passivization in detail above;*° (193) illustrates the phenomenon: 86 In section 1.3.
Movement and Locality (193)
a.
Thelma convinced Louise. Thelma convinced her.
b.
Louise was convinced by Thelma. She was convinced by Thelma.
265
While active transitive verbs such as convince in (193a) assign accusative case to their complements, passive verbs lose the Capacity to assign accusative case. In
addition, their external theta-role is licensed by the passive morphology and it is not associated with an NP argument. As a result, the subject position remains available. Being in a caseless position, the internal argument of a passive verb cannot remain VP-internally, but has to move to the subject position in which it can receive nominative case. (194a) illustrates a verb—particle construction. We have been assuming that in the verb—particle construction, the verb is ultimately responsible for the case properties of the object. This is achieved in one of two constructions for which (194b) and (194c) provide a partial representation:
(194)
a.
John tore the letter up.
b
VP a
Spec
Vi
Pe Bis
aa PrtP
Le,
tis rade ™saaas®
a + AjisPat
NP
t, c
the letter
VP
piper a SRO Spec |
ive
Scie PrtP
V
"
mpfr Vee
NP
ass
Prt’
pete N Ve
Prt
266
Movement and Locality
In (194b) the verb-particle combination case-marks the complement NP in its
base-position. We assume that by virtue of the incorporation of the particle the PrtP is transparent for government and case-marking by the verb. In (194c) the object NP moves to the specifier of the PrtP in which it can be case-marked by the selecting head. In (195) the verbal head of the verb-particle construction is passivized:
(195)
The letter was torn up.
Since the verb is ultimately responsible for the case of the complement of the particle, passivization of the verb will entail that the verb-particle combination cannot assign case to the NP and it will force the NP to move out of the particle projection. Neither the base-position of the complement of the particle (194b) nor the specifier position of the PrtP (194c) is a case-position when V itself is passive. The NP complement of the particle then moves to the subject position.
4.3.2
Passive and preposition stranding
Compare active (196a) with passive (196b):
(196)
a. b.
They talked about the boy. The boy was talked about.
In (196a) the active verb talk selects a PP complement headed by the preposition about. The NP the boy is case-marked by the preposition about. We normally expect passivization to affect transitive verbs, that is, verbs which take an NP complement. The passivization of sentence (196a) is unexpected. In the passive sentence (196b), the NP complement of the preposition, the boy, undergoes NPmovement; it moves to the canonical subject position, stranding the preposition. Following our discussion of case-assigners,*” the complement of the preposition about in (196a) is assigned accusative case. The pronominal variant of the subject in (196b) receives nominative case in the subject position:
(197)
a.
They talked about him.
b.
He was talked about.
The movement of the NP the boy in (196b) or of the pronominal NP he in (197b) seems to be identical to other instances of passivization discussed in this chapter. Passivized transitive verbs fail to assign case to their complements; in order to escape a Case-Filter violation, the complement NP of a passivized verb moves to a higher position in which it can receive case. But passivization in (196) and (197) ought not, at first sight, to affect the case properties of the NP complement of the preposition. In (196a) and (196b) the NP the boy is the complement of the preposition. Prepositions are case-assigners in their own right: hence in (196a), the case of the NP could be independently licensed by the preposition, not by the verb.
*” In chapter 1, section 3.7.5.
Movement and Locality
267
In order to account for this structure, we will slightly revise this view. We
propose tentatively that in sentences such as (196b) and (197b), in which the preposition is closely related to the verb, passivization affects the verb and the preposition together. That there is a close relation between the passive verb and
the preposition in (196b) and (197b) is supported by the fact that there seems to be an adjacency requirement: (196)
c. d.
(197)
c. d.
They talked often about the boy. *The boy was talked often about. They talked often about him. *He was talked often about.
This adjacency requirement is reminiscent of the pattern found in verb—particle combinations. We therefore tentatively suggest that in passive constructions with preposition stranding, the preposition incorporates into the verb.
4.4
Summary: particles
In this section we considered verb—particle combinations in English such as those in (198): (198)
a.
John tore up the letter. John gave away his money.
John sent out the manuscript. John turned down the offer.
b.
John John John John
tore the letter up. gave his money away. sent the manuscript out. turned the offer down.
In verb—particle combinations two situations may arise: (i) the verb is adjacent to the particle which in turn is adjacent to the complement NP (198a); or (ii) the verb is adjacent to the NP complement of the particle and the particle itself immediately follows its complement (198b). We account for these patterns by assuming that the particle heads a projection PrtP and selects the NP as its complement. Unlike prepositions, particles fail to assign case. In order to avoid a Case-Filter violation on the complement of the particle one of two strategies applies. The particle may incorporate to the govparticle, erning verb, forming a complex unit V* consisting of the verb and the
this which is able to govern the complement of the particle and assign it case:
nt of _ strategy results in the string V—Prt-NP (198a). Alternatively, the compleme
can be the particle moves to the specifier of the particle projection where it (198b). assigned case by the verb: this strategy results in the string V-NP-Prt
these must be The latter strategy is the only one available for pronouns as directly governed by their case-assigner.
Movement and Locality
268
We have also seen that in addition to particles, prepositions may also undergo incorporation to V, resulting in passivization patterns with preposition stranding: (199)
John was talked about a lot.
Summary Section 1 Maximal projections may undergo either A’-movement, movement to an A’position, illustrated in (1), or A-movement, movement to an A-position, illustrated in (2): (1)
a. b.
Whom; will they invite t; I wonder [.p whom; [}p they will invite £]].
(2)
a. b.
John, was invited t, by Mrs Robinson. Mrs Robinson; seems ¢, to have resigned.
(1) illustrates wh-movement: a wh-phrase moves from its base-position to [Spec,CP], an A’-position. (2) illustrates NP-movement: an NP moves from its base-position to [Spec,IP], an A-position. Wh-movement and NP-movement share a number of properties: — —
(3)
Movement leaves a trace in the extraction site of the moved constituent and in its intermediate landing sites (intermediate traces). The moved constituent c-commands its trace (cf. (3)), where c-command is defined as follows: C-command:
Node X c-commands node Y iff the first branching node dominating X also dominates Y.
—
(i)
Movement is subject to locality constraints: a moved constituent cannot cross a potential landing site.
A’-movement
Wh-movement is an instantiation of A’-movement. The landing site of A’-movement is either [Spec,CP] or an adjoined position. The extraction site of A’movement is a position to which case is assigned; the landing site of A’-movement is not a position to which case is assigned. Wh-movement is the prototypical example of A’-movement. Because of the locality conditions, the wh-phrase must move to the closest potential landing site; it cannot skip an intervening [Spec,CP].
Movement and Locality (4)
a.
269
??Whom; do you wonder whether Mary will invite t,?
Subject wh-phrases and adjunct wh-phrases are subject to additional constraints. Subject wh-phrases cannot be extracted across overt material in the adjacent C or [Spec,CP] (4b). Adjunct wh-phrases cannot be extracted across a wh-phrase in [Spec,CP], across the interrogative complementizer if, or across a negative constituent (4c).
(4)
b.
*Who; do you think that ¢, will invite Mary? Who; do you think ¢, will invite Mary? *Who, do you wonder whether ¢; will invite Mary?
c.
*Why, do you wonder whether Mary will invite Sue t,? *Why, did you wonder if Mary will invite Sue t,? *Why, did no one say that Mary will invite Sue ¢,?
Relative clauses are also derived by means of wh-movement. The relative pronoun moves to [Spec,CP]. The relative pronoun may be overt (Sa) or nonovert (Sb). (5)
a.
This is the lecturer whom, I think that Mary will invite ¢,.
b.
This is the lecturer ec; I think that Mary will invite t,.
The constraints which apply to movement apply to movement of relative pronouns. (6)
a.
of interrogative wh-phrases also
?2This is the lecturer whom, I wonder whether Mary will invite ¢;.
b.
*This is the lecturer who, I think that ¢, will invite Mary. *This is the lecturer who, I wonder whether ¢; will invite Mary.
c.
*This is the reason why; I wonder [whether Mary will invite Sue ¢)]. *This is the reason why; I wonder [if Mary will invite Sue ¢). *This is the reason why, no one said [that Mary would invite Sue ¢].
Topicalization (7a), the movement of the negative constituent to sentenceinitial position in negative inversion (7b), and heavy NP shift (7c) are instantiations of A’-movement:
(7)
(ii)
a. b. c.
[Beans], I don’t like. [Never in my life] will I go there again. I drink every night [three glasses of milk with a teaspoon of honey].
A-movement
2). The The landing site of A-movement is a subject position (see also section of Asite landing the position; extraction site of A-movement is a caseless en: case-driv is ent A-movem . movement is a position to which case is assigned
it is triggered by the Case-Filter, the requirement that all overt NPs be case-marked.
270
Movement and Locality
(2a) above illustrates a passive sentence, (2b) a raising sentence. In (2a) the
NP John is the internal argument of invited; it originates as the object of invited and moves to the canonical subject position. Passive verbs differ from their active counterparts in that they do not assign case, thus forcing the object to move.
In (2b) the NP Mrs Robinson
is the external argument
of resign, the
predicate of the non-finite clause. The NP cannot remain in the subject position of the lower clause because the lower [Spec,IP] is not a case position. The verb seem does not assign case. The leftward movement of the NP in (2) targets a subject position. Because of the locality constraint on movement, the moved NP may not skip an intervening landing site. Intervening A-positions ([Spec,IP]) block Amovement:
(8)
*Mrs Robinson; seems [jp it to be believed [, ¢, to have resigned]].
Section 2 The [Spec,IP] position is not the thematic position of the subject. [Spec,IP] is a derived subject position; the subject is base-generated VP-internally and moves to the [Spec,IP] position before S-structure or Spell-Out. Evidence for the VPinternal subject hypothesis comes from the distribution of the floating quantifier in (9): (9)
The girls have all finished their papers.
The VP-internal subject hypothesis implies that al] the arguments of the lexical verb have a VP-internal base-position. Both internal arguments (complements) and the external argument (subject) originate VP-internally. In their thematic positions, the arguments of a head are all locally related to the theta-role assigner: an argument of V is either a specifier of VP or a complement of V. The leftward movement of the subject NP from a VP-internal position to [Spec,IP] can be assimilated to other instantiations of A-movement: the NP moves to the subject position, [Spec,IP], an A-position. The moved NP c-commands its trace, with which it forms a chain. The VP-internal subject hypothesis, coupled with the locality conditions on movement, has further ramifications for syntactic representations: in (2a) above, for instance, the subject NP John must have transited through all the potential landing sites between its extraction site [NP,V’] and its landing site, [Spec, IP]. The successive landing sites are signalled by intermediate traces. (10)
[ip John; [; was, [yp ¢; [y t,] [vp & invited t, by Mrs Robinson]]]].
Section 3 While the thematic position of the subject of transitive verbs such as eat and of intransitive verbs such as telephone is [Spec,VP], the thematic position of unaccusative (or ergative) verbs such as arrive is the canonical object position,
Movement and Locality
271
[NP,V’]. Evidence for this classification of verbs derives from the observation that in both English and French the existential construction (with an expletive pronoun in the canonical subject position) is reserved to a subset of one-argument verbs. Further evidence comes from French en-extraction and auxiliary selection. Unaccusative verbs are one-argument verbs whose unique thematic position is the complement position, [NP,V’]. Such verbs lack an external argument and do not assign accusative case. The correlation between the absence of an external argument and the absence of accusative case follows from the theory. In line with locality considerations on movement, the subject of unaccusative verbs moves via the potential landing sites, the intermediate A-positions. Being a potential subject position, the specifier of VP is also a potential landing site. A-movement of the complement transits through [Spec,VP]. (11)
a.
John has arrived.
b.
[ip John; [; has, [yp & t, [vp #; arrived #]]]].
Section 4 In verb-particle constructions, two is adjacent to the particle which in or the lexical verb is adjacent to particle itself immediately follows (12)
a. b.
patterns are available. Either the lexical verb turn is adjacent to the complement NP (12a); the NP complement of the particle and the its complement (12b):
John tore up the letter. John tore the letter up.
The particle heads a projection PrtP; it selects the NP as its complement. Unlike prepositions, particles fail to assign case. In order to avoid a Case-Filter violation on the complement of the particle one of two strategies applies. The particle incorporates (into) the governing verb, forming a complex head consisting of the verb and the particle,’ which, by virtue of the presence of the particle, is able to govern the complement of the particle and, by virtue of the presence of the verb, assign it case. This strategy results in the string V—Prt—-NP (13a). Alternatively, the NP complement of the particle moves to the specifier position of the particle projection where it is case-marked by the governing verb. This strategy results in the string V-NP-Prt (13b). The latter strategy is the only one available for pronouns, as these must be directly governed by their case-assigner (14).
(13)
a. b.
(14)
a.
b.
John [yp [y« tore up] [pap #, the letter]]. John [yp [y tore] [pap the letter; up 4]. *John [yp [y- tore up] [pnp 4 it].
John [yp [y tore] [pnp it; up Zi].
head. ! The newly created V-particle complex is labelled V*; it is a complex
Movement and Locality
272,
Passivization patterns with preposition-stranding (15) are evidence for prepositionincorporation to V: (15)
John was talked about a lot.
Exercises Section 1
Exercise
1.
Wh-movement
Provide the syntactic representations for the following sentences. Which book did Mary buy? What did Mary buy? With which knife did Mary cut the bread? Which knife did Mary cut the bread with? The books that Mary bought are quite useless. Which books did Mary say that she will buy? Who did Mary say sold her the books? The books that Mary says that she will buy are quite useless. Which knife did Mary say that she cut the bread with? How did Mary say that she will solve this problem? ee Se a = eS. OOFRWN COON — — oa ia ee Nae eae eee ees eee, ae
Exercise 2.
Wh-movement
in infinitival clauses
Discuss the derivation of the following sentences:
1) | will ask which books | should buy. 2) | will ask which books to buy. 3) | wonder what to do: 4) | wonder what they expect me to do. 5) | wonder how to repair the situation. 6) | quite understand the reason why she has written the letter. Om en nnn
Exercise 3.
Constraints on movement
How can we account for the varying degrees sentences?
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
of ungrammaticality
of the following
*Which student do you wonder if will pass the test? *How do you wonder when Bill solved the problem? *Who do you wonder if will come back soon? *How important do you wonder whether John is? *How quickly do you wonder if Mary can sell the house?
Observe that in (4) extraction of a predicate from within a wh-island gives rise to the same kind of degradation as the extraction of an adjunct or of a subject. On the basis
Movement and Locality
273
of the following examples, try to determine if predicate-movement is to be treated on a par with subject extraction or with adjunct extraction: (6)
a. b.
How important do you think that this decision will be for the future? *How important do-you wonder whether Mary said that the decision will be?
Exercise 4.
Question formation
in the text? we propose that English ifis a head, while whether is a maximal projection. On the basis of the French examples below decide on the syntactic status of si in French: (1)
a.
Je ne sais pas si tu verras Marie. | ne know not if you will-see Marie ‘| don’t know if/whether you will see Marie.’
b.
Je ne sais pas comment lui parler. | ne know not how to-him talk-inf ‘| don’t know how to talk to him.’
c.
*Je ne sais pas si partir. | don’t know if leave-inf
Exercise 5.
Complement clauses and relative clauses
In the text we have discussed sentences such as (i) in which an NP is modified by a relative clause.
(i) a. b.
| have met the student that you mentioned last week. John made the proposal that they talked about during the meeting.
Provide the tree-diagram representation of (i). Consider now the data below, concentrating on the italicized clauses. Would these be assigned the same analysis as that of the relative clause in (i)?
(1)
a. b. c. d.
John made the claim that the rain was causing the accidents. Susan made the assumption that Mary would reject her offer. John made a guess that the river was to the east. They made the assertion that we would get a refund. (cf. Emonds 1976: 147)
For your analysis you may consider the argument structure of the embedded clause as a starting point. While relative clauses are typically characterized by the presence of a non-overt argument (the trace), there is no such trace in the italicized embedded clauses in (1). In the examples in (1), the complementizer that introduces a clause which functions as the complement of a noun. In (2) the same sentences are complements to a verb: (2)
a. b. c. d.
John claimed that the rain was causing the accidents. Susan assumed that Mary would reject her offer. John guessed that the river was to the east. They asserted that we would get a refund. (cf. Emonds 1976: 147)
2 Section 1.1.2.
Movement and Locality
274
(3) gives a partial structure for (1a):
(3)
VP
I
ean
V
NP i arsataaies elite Det N’ pe N
CP
eg
C
IP
i
the rain was causing the accidents
ots made
Exercise 6.
the
claim
iwon waned Pre
Topicalization
We have proposed that clauses are projections of CP, in which C is the head and its specifier hosts a preposed constituent. Consider the structure of the following sentences in the light of this hypothesis: (1)
During the holidays, | will write a paper. During which holidays will you write a paper? | wonder during which holidays he wrote that paper. | wonder why, during the holidays, | should do so much work.
This is the reason why, during the holidays, people should not work. ™“o2a900p During the holidays, why should anyone do any work? In (1a) we prepose an adjunct: The leftward referred to as topicalization.*
Exercise 7.
movement
of such constituents
was
NP-movement
Discuss the derivation of the following sentences: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Mary seems to have been bitten by a dog. Thelma appears to be telling the truth. Mary was thought to have been judged to be the best student. John is said to have seemed surprised by the results. Mary was expected to be believed to be telling the truth.
Exercise 8.
Wh-movement
and NP-movement
The following sentences combine the effect of NP-movement and that of wh-movement. Discuss their derivation:
* We will re-examine the structure of topicalization patterns in chapter 3, section 4.:
Movement and Locality (1) (2)
275
Which books did you say had been ordered? Which books did the teacher think would seem rather uninteresting?
Exercise 9.
The syntax of get
Discuss the derivation of the following sentences: (1)
a. b.
| got Patsy arrested for drunken behaviour. Patsy got arrested for drunken behaviour.
(2)
a. b.
This incident got Edina into a lot of trouble. Edina got into a lot of trouble.
(3)
a. b.
I never got John to understand the issue. John never got to understand the issue.
(4)
a. b.
1 got all my friends invited to the party. All my friends got invited to the party.
The use of get in the sentences above is discussed in Haegeman (1991).
Exercise 10.
Locality and topicalization
Discuss the problems which the following examples raise for the locality constraints on movement:
(1) (2)
During the holidays, why should anyone do any work? During the holidays, on no account should you do any work.
Exercise 11.
The licensing of parasitic gaps
In the text we saw that parasitic gaps in embedded clauses are licensed by virtue of the availability of movement in the matrix clause. Discuss this constraint on the basis of the following examples: (1)
a. b. c. d.
This is a This is a This is a *I sent off
text text text this
which | sent off without correcting. that | sent off without correcting. | sent off without correcting. text without correcting.
The question arises whether any type of movement at all can license parasitic gaps. The data in (2) throw light on this issue: discuss how.
(2)
a. b. c.
Which text did you send off without correcting? He sent off, without correcting, a text of twenty pages. *A text of twenty pages was sent off without correcting.
Section 2
Exercise 12.
Floating quantifiers
|
may raise for Discuss the derivation of the following sentences and the problems they chapter. this in d develope s the analysis of floating quantifier
276
Movement and Locality
(1)
a. b.
The students have both arrived on time. Both the students have arrived on time.
(2)
a. b.
The students have each received a reward. Each of the students has received a reward.
Exercise 13.
Floating quantifiers and passivization
In the text we proposed that passive sentences movement of the object, as represented in (1b). (1)
a. b.
such as (1a) are derived
by NP-
John was invited. John, was invited ft.
In the light of this analysis the following data pose problems. Why?
(2)
All the girls have been invited to the The girls have all been invited to the ??The girls have been all invited to the *The girls have been invited all to the Qoop
Exercise 14.
party. party. party. party.
Floating quantifiers
It is proposed in the text that (1a) and (1b) have the same underlying structure. Discuss their derivation. (1)
a. b.
All the girls have won a prize. The girls have all won a prize.
Discuss the problems for this analysis raised by the following data: (2)
a. b.
Thelma, Louise, Patsy and Eddy have all left for Paris. *All Thelma, Louise, Patsy and Eddy have left for Paris.
Exercise 15.
The base-position of the subject
Discuss the derivation of the following sentences: (1) (2) (3) (4)
The The The The
girls girls girls girls
have both bought a new coat. will all buy a new coat. may both have bought a new coat. may have both left at the same time.
Exercise 16.
Floating quantifiers and NP-movement
Discuss the significance of the position of the floating quantifier for the structure of the following sentences:
(1)
a.
The The The 200*The
girls girls girls girls
all will have been will all have been will have all been will have been all
invited. invited. invited. invited.
Movement and Locality (2).
a. b. ro d.
The The The ??The
girls girls girls girls
all will have been will all have been will have all been will have been all
working working working working
277
late. late. late. late.
Section 3
Exercise 17.
Floating quantifiers and unaccusative verbs
We propose that the subject of unaccusative verbs originates in the object position and is moved to [Spec,IP] for case reasons. The following data pose problems for this analysis: discuss why. (1) (2) (3)
*They have arrived all. *They have come all. *They are gone all.
Exercise 18.
Evidence for the VP-internal subject hypothesis
Discuss the alternation between the (a)-sentences and the (b)-sentences below. Discuss how the examples might provide evidence for the VP-internal subject hypothesis developed in this chapter. (1)
a. b.
There were three girls dancing in the square. Three girls were dancing in the square.
(2)
a. b.
There were already many students waiting in the office. Many students were already waiting in the office.
(3)
a. b.
There will be more students arriving in the afternoon. More students will be arriving in the afternoon.
Exercise 19.
Subject positions
Consider the distribution of the subject in the following sentences. If we assume that in (1a) the indefinite subject, some students, occupies its base-position, [Spec,VP], this leads us to assume that all thematic roles associated with V are assigned VP-internally. What conclusions can we draw with respect to the thematic properties of the verb be? (1)
a. b.
There were some students waiting in my office. Some students were waiting in my office.
Now examine the distribution of the subjects in the following examples in the light of the
analysis of (1) above.* (2)
There were three students sick. Three students were sick. The students were all sick. All the students were sick. aoo0p
(3)
There were three photographers arrested. Three photographers were arrested. The photographers were all arrested. All the photographers were arrested. 200
3, section 1. 4 We will return to examples such as those in (1)-(3) in chapter
278
Movement and Locality
Section 4
Exercise 20.
Inversion patterns and particles”
We have discussed subject—auxiliary inversion as illustrated in (i) and (ii): (i)
a. b.
When will you go there again? What will you do?
(ii)
a. b.
Under no circumstances will | go there again. Nota single page did | read.
Consider the examples in (1)—(3) and try to decide if the inversion pattern illustrated in these examples can be assimilated to that in (i) and (ii). The data are drawn from Emonds (1976: 29-30).
(1)
(3)
a. b.
John came in. In came John.
c.
*In was John coming.
a. b. c.
The baby carriage rolled down the street. Down the street rolled the baby carriage. “Down the street the baby carriage rolled.
a. b. c.
The wheel spun round and round. Round and round spun the wheel. *Round and round-has the wheel spun.
For discussion of the structures the reader is referred to Emonds (1976), Hoekstra and Mulder (1990), Bresnan (1994).
Exercise 21.
Floating quantifiers and particles
Discuss the derivation of the following sentences: (1)
a. b. c. d.
| called up all the students. | called all the students up. All the students were called up. The students were all called up.
Discuss the problems, if any, raised for the analyses of V—particle constructions and floating quantifiers by the following examples: (2)
*The students were called up all. *The students were called all up. *| called the students up all. | called the students all up. *I called up them all. | called them all up. *I called them up all. aemoaoop
° See also chapter 3, section 1.
Movement and Locality
Exercise 22.
29
Verb—preposition
The following sentence is ambiguous: (1)
They decided on the boat.
Under one interpretation, the sentence could be an answer to the question
(2)
Where did they decide?
Under the other interpretation, it is a response to
(3)
What did they decide on?
Discuss the structures associated with the two interpretations and provide syntactic arguments for the structures you postulate.
General exercises
Exercise 23.
Measure phrases and movement
Consider the question (1a), which has two answers, (1b) and (1c):
(1)
a. b. c.
How much did she weigh? She weighed 25 kilos. She weighed 2 kilos of apples.
In (1b) 25 kilos is a measure phrase which functions as the complement of the verb: -
(1)
d.
*She weighed.
In (1c) 2 kilos of apples is an NP which realizes an internal argument of weigh. In (1a), then, how much may be either a measure phrase or an argument. In the light of these data, discuss the interpretation of how much in (2):
(2)
a. b. c.
How much do you think that she will weigh? How much did you wonder whether she would weigh? How much did she not say that she weighed?
Exercise 24.
Raising predicates
wordIn the text we have examined raising patterns as triggered by verbs. Discuss the order alternation in the following examples:
(1)
a. b.
It is likely that Mrs Robinson has invited John. Mrs Robinson is likely to have invited John.
(2b): The relation between (1a) and (1b) is like that between (2a) and (2)
a. b.
It seems that Mrs Robinson has invited John. Mrs Robinson seems to have invited John.
We can refer to it as We conclude that the adjective likely gives rise to a raising pattern. a raising adjective.
280
Movement and Locality
Discuss the representation of the following sentences, bearing in mind the VPinternal subject hypothesis as well as the classification of verbs in section 3.
(3) (4) (5) (6)
| consider Mr Mrs Robinson Mrs Robinson Mrs Robinson
Exercise 25.
Robinson likely to abandon the project. is believed to be likely to resign. is likely to turn out to have been invited by John. is likely to arrive late for the funeral.
The NP and the clause
Consider (i): the (a)-example is a clause and the (b)-example is an NP with a parallel internal structure: (i)
a. b.
Rembrandt painted Saskia. Rembrandt's painting of Saskia
It is not the case, though, that each clause can be matched to an NP. The NPs in (1)— (6) are ungrammatical. On the basis of a comparison with a matching sentence with parallel argument structure which you will provide yourself, describe those contexts in which clauses cannot easily be matched to NPs.°
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
*Mary’s *John’s “John’s “John’s *Mary’s *Mary’s
knowledge by John fear by Mary consideration of Mary innocent consideration Mary innocent belief to be innocent announcement she is sick
Exercise 26.
Movement
Discuss the derivation of the following sentences: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
This proposal | think will not be expected to be talked about. Whom do you expect to be invited to the party? Who do you expect will turn out to be the best candidate? Which proposal do you expect to be talked about at the meeting? This proposal | don’t think has been decided on at the party.
Exercise 27.
The classification of verbs
In the text we suggested that verbs can be classified as transitive, intransitive or unaccusative. We implied that the classification was rigid. Discuss this implication in the light of the following examples:
) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
)
“There There *There There There “There There
walked a man with a dog. walked a man into the room. jumped a horse right at the queen’s arrival. jumped a horse over the fence. flew a mosquito into my eye. flew a plane at high speed. crawled an insect into my face.
(Examples taken or adapted from Hoekstra and Mulder (1990).)
* For a discussion of these NPs the reader is referred to chapter 4, section 3.
Movement and Locality
Exercise 28.
281
Wanna-contraction
Consider the examples in (i)—(iii): (i)
a. b.
| want to go there tomorrow. | wanna go there tomorrow.
(ii)
a. b.
You have to go there tomorrow. You hafta go there tomorrow.
(iii)
a. b.
| used to go to the pictures. | usedta go to the pictures.
The (b)-sentences above illustrate so-called to-contraction constructions, in which the infinitival marker to is contracted to the preceding verb. The sequence want+ to in (ia), for instance, is replaced by wanna in (ib). This phenomenon is called wannacontraction. To-contraction is not completely free. It is not the case that each sequence of want to, for instance, can be contracted to wanna. On the basis of the examples below, identify two of the constraints on wanna-contraction. Examples (1)—(2) provide the basis for postulating one constraint; examples (3)—(4) from Aoun and Lightfoot (1984) provide the basis for a second constraint. (1)
a. b.
(2)
a. b.
Whom do you want to invite Mary? *Whom do you wanna invite Mary?
(3)
a.
1 don’t want to flagellate oneself in public to become standard practice in this monastery. *I don’t wanna flagellate oneself in public to become standard practice in this
b.
Whom Whom
do you want to invite? do you wanna invite?
monastery.
(4)
a. b.
| don’t want anyone who continues to want to stop wanting. *I don’t want anyone who continues to wanna stop wanting.
How could we account for the contrast in (5)—(6)?
This is the car in which she used to go to the pictures. This is the car in which she usedta go to the pictures.
(5)
a. b.
(6)
This is the car which she used to go to the pictures. San *This is the car which she usedta go to the pictures.
Exercise 29.
Constituent structure and relative clauses
Consider the sentences
in (1) (from Tsimpli (in press: 246)). The italicized strings
contain a determiner, a noun and a non-finite clause.
(1)
a. b.
John bought a book for me to read. We should read the articles to use them in the analysis.
282
Movement and Locality
Does the non-finite clause function as a modifier of the noun, in which case it forms a constituent with the NP, or does it have an independent function in the clause? In order to resolve this question you should decide whether the italicized strings in (1a) and (1b) are constituents. You can use the constituency tests’ to settle this question.
Exercise 30.
Floating quantifiers in Irish English
Consider (1), in which moved (1)
a. b. c.
wh-constituents contain a quantifier:
What all did you get for Christmas? Who all did you meet when you were in Derry? Where all did they go for their holiday?
The West Ulster English examples in (2) are synonymous with those in (1). The whphrase is discontinuous: the quantifier is stranded in a lower position.
(2)
a. b. c.
%What did you get all for Christmas? %Who did you meet all when you were in Derry? %Where did they go all for their holiday?
How could we account for the distribution of the quantifier in (2)? Describe the distribution of a// in (3)-(10). Discuss the relevance of the data in (3)— (10) for the VP-internal subject hypothesis elaborated in this. chapter. (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
What happened all at the party last night? Who spoke all at the meeting last night? Who was fighting all at the party? Who was arrested all in Duke Street? What was said all at the meeting? Who'd like tea all? Who was throwin’ stones all? Who read it all this morning?
Discuss the distribution of the quantifiers in (11)—(13) in the light of the structures which we have been elaborating. (0:1)
wa b.
What all did he tell him that he wanted to buy? %What did he tell him all that he wanted to buy?
(12)
a. b.
Who all did you want your mother to meet at the party? %Who did you want your mother all to meet at the party?
(13)
a b.
Who all did you arrange for your mother to meet at the party? %Who did you arrange all for your mother to meet at the party?
(All data from McCloskey (1997a).) o If we maintain the view elaborated above that a quantifier is floated in an NP position, then the Irish English data above may well lead us to conclude that we should postulate additional NP positions in the clause.
Exercise 31.
Extraposition from subjects
In (1) we illustrate the rightward movement referred to as extraposition.® The subject in (1b) is discontinuous: the PP with green eyes is extraposed: ” Developed in chapter 1, section 2.1.
* Chapter 1, section 2.1.9.
Movement and Locality (1)
a. b.
283
Aman with green eyes appeared. Aman appeared with green eyes.
Not all sentences allow extraposition from subjects, as shown in (2)—(7). Discuss the restrictions on extraposition from subjects on the basis of these examples:
(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
A book appeared by Chomsky. Aman arrived from India. *A friend saw Mary from Italy. *A man hit Bill with blue eyes. A paper was presented on linguistics. Few people exist in our world with green hair.
On the basis of the data in (1)—(7), Coopmans and Roovers (1986), from whose work the examples are taken, conclude that PP-extraposition from subjects is possible with unaccusative verbs. The following example is problematic for this proposal: (8)
a. b.
A book by Chomsky is making the rounds. A book is making the rounds by Chomsky.
In order to account for the grammaticality of (8b), Coopmans and Roovers suggest that making the rounds is analysed as a complex verb, with only an internal argument: (8)
c.
[np; A book by Chomsky] is [yp [, making the rounds] {].
Exercise 32.
The status of whether
In the text discussion we considered the status of whether in sentences such as (1) and we proposed that it is a maximal projection located in [Spec,CP]:
(1)
a. b.
| wonder whether | ought to go to the funeral. | wonder whether to go to the funeral.
What kind of arguments did we advance to support the idea that whether is a maximal projection rather than a head? That whether is a maximal projection is not uncontroversial. Henry (1995) provides some arguments from Hiberno-English against this hypothesis. The following examples are taken from Belfast English: discuss why they provide evidence that whether is under C, rather than being in [Spec,CP].
(2)
| don’t know when that he is going. a. b. — It depends who that | see. c. *| don’t know whether that he’s going.
(3)
a. b. c.
(4)
| wonder did he get there on time. | asked him was he by himself. *| asked him whether was he by himself. | wonder what street does he live in.
= The man on the door asked her who had she come to see. c. *l wonder whether did he get there on time.
(Examples taken from Henry (1995: 287-8).)
284
Movement and Locality
Exercise 33. Floating quantifiers and the base-position of the subject We proposed that the distribution of the floating quantifier in (1) is evidence that the base-position of the subject is in the specifier of VP:
The girls all left after dinner.
(1)
What problems do the sentences below raise for this analysis?° (2) (3)
The girls are all patiently waiting for the music to stop. *The girls are patiently all waiting for the music to stop. ((3) is ungrammatical with patiently having a manner reading.)
Exercise 34.
The indefinite subject in existential constructions
Consider (1). In this sentence an expletive pronoun there occupies the canonical subject position and the logical subject remains lower in the structure. At first, basing ourselves on the VP-internal subject hypothesis, we might argue that three women occupies [Spec,VP], its thematic position. (1)
There are three women waiting in the corridor.
What problems do the following data raise for this account? (2) (3)
There are three women patiently waiting in the corridor. *There are patiently three women waiting in the corridor.
Assuming that the NP three women occupies an NP position in (2), and that this position is not the specifier position of the VP headed by waiting, what other analysis of
the sentence could we propose?"?
Exercise 35.
Incorporation and the syntax of NPs
Consider the following examples: in each case the (a)-example is a clause and the (b)example is an NP with a parallel argument structure: (1)
a. b.
Rembrandt painted Saskia. Rembrandt's picture of Saskia
(2)
a.
Mary gave a book.
b.
Mary’s gift of a book
(3)
a. b.
(4)
a. b.
3
Mary gave away her books. *Mary’s gift away of her books He talked about linguistics. His talk about linguistics
‘ ; We return to the VP-internal subject hypothesis' and the evidence from floating quantifiers in the next chapter, section 1. e ee ‘ ‘ ; : We return to the position of the indefinite subject of existential sentences in chapter 3, section 1.
Movement and Locality (5)
a. b.
285
John was talked about. “John’s talk about
What conclusions might we draw from the data above?"
Exercise 36.
Heavy NP shift and pronouns
In the text we discussed the contrast between the following examples (see (98)): (1) (2)
You should read with the greatest attention [yp all the instructions which you receive in the course of the day]. *You should read [pp with the greatest attention] it.
On the basis of the discussion of pronouns in section 3 of the chapter, how could we account for the ungrammaticality of (2)?
Bibliographical notes Introductory texts The following textbooks offer more detailed introduction to the theoretical points developed in this chapter: movement, subject in VP hypothesis, classification of verbs. Haegeman, Liliane (1994) Introduction to Government and Binding Theory, Oxford: Blackwell. Ouhalla, Jamal (1994) Transformational Grammar, London: Arnold. Radford, Andrew (1988) Transformational Grammar, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Radford, Andrew (1997) Syntactic Theory and the Structure of English. A Minimalist Approach, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Riemsdijk, Henk Van and Edwin Williams (1986) Introduction to the Theory of Grammar, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Roberts, Ian (1997) Comparative Syntax, London: Arnold.
Specialized articles and sources of examples Abney, Steven (1987) ‘The English Noun Phrase in its Sentential Aspects’, Cambridge, MA: MIT dissertation. Aoun, Joseph and David Lightfoot (1984) “Government and contraction’, Linguistic Inquiry, 15, 465-74.
Baker, Carl L. (1971) ‘Stress level and auxiliary behavior in English’, Linguistic Inquiry, 2, 167-81. Baker, Carl L. (1991) ‘The syntax of English vot: the limits of core grammar’, Linguistic Inquiry, 22, 387-429. Baker, Mark, Kyle Johnson and Ian Roberts (1989) ‘Passive arguments raised’, Linguistic Inquiry, 20, 219-51.
1 For discussion the reader is referred to chapter 4, section 3.
286
Movement and Locality
Baltin, Mark and Paul Postal (1996) ‘More on reanalysis hypotheses’, Linguistic Inquiry, 27, 127-45. Bresnan, Joan (1994) ‘Locative inversion and the architecture of universal grammar’, Language, 70, 72-131. Chao, Wynn (1996) On Ellipsis, New York: Garland. Coopmans, Peter and Irene Roovers (1986) ‘Reconsidering some syntactic properties of PP extraposition’, in Peter Coopmans, Yvonne Bordelois and B. Dotson Smith (eds) Formal Parameters of Generative Grammar, Going Romance 1986, Department of Linguistics, University of Utrecht, 21-35. Emonds, Joseph (1976) A Transformational Approach to English Syntax, New York: Academic Press. Emonds, Joseph (1978) ‘The verbal complex V’-V in French’, Linguistic Inquiry, 9, 151Ts. Ernst, Thomas (1992) ‘The phrase structure of English negation’, Linguistic Review, 9, 109-44. Guéron, Jacqueline (1980) ‘On the syntax and semantics of PP extraposition’, Linguistic Inquiry, 11, 637-78. Guéron, Jacqueline (1990) ‘Particles, prepositions and verbs’, in Joan Mascaro and Marina Nespor (eds) Grammar in Progress, Dordrecht: Foris, 153-66. Haegeman, Liliane (1991) ‘The get passive and Burzio’s generalisation’, Lingua, 66, 53Hie Henry, Alison (1995) ‘Infinitives in a for to dialect’, Natural Language and Linguistic
Theory, 10, 287-301. Hoekstra, Teun and René Mulder (1990) ‘Unergatives as copular verbs: locational and existential predication’, Linguistic Review, 7, 1-79. Kayne, Richard (1985) ‘Principles of particle constructions’, in Jacqueline Guéron, HansGeorg Obenauer, and Jean-Yves Pollock (eds) Grammatical Representation, Dordrecht: Foris, 101-40. Koopman, Hilda and Dominique Sportiche (1991) ‘The position of subjects’, Lingua, 85, 211-58. Kuroda, Shige-Yuki (1986) ‘Whether we agree or not: a comparative syntax of English and Japanese’, Linguisticae Investigationes, 12, 1-47. Lobeck, Anne (1995) Ellipsis: Functional Heads, Licensing, and Identification, Oxford: Oxford University Press. McCloskey, James (1997a) ‘Quantifier float and Wh-movement in Irish English’, Working Paper, Linguistics Research Center, Stevenson College, University of California at Santa Cruz, Linguistics Research Center, 97-02. McCloskey, James (1997b) ‘Subjecthood and subject positions’, in Liliane Haegeman (ed.) Elements of Grammar. A Handbook of Generative Syntax, Boston and Dordrecht: Kluwer, 197-235. Potsdam, Eric (1997) ‘NegP and subjunctive complements in English’, Linguistic Inquiry, 28, 533-41. o Quirk, Randolph and Charles Leslie Wrenn (1955) An Old English Grammar, London: Methuen. Roberts, Ian (1985) ‘Agreement parameters and the development of English modal auxiliaries’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory, 3, 21-58. Sportiche, Dominique (1988) ‘A theory of floating quantifiers and its corollaries for phrase structure’, Linguistic Inquiry, 19, 425-40. Stuurman, Frits (1991) ‘If and whether: questions and conditions’, Lingua, 83, 1-41. Tsimpli, Ianthi-Maria (in press) ‘Null operators, clitics and identification: a comparison between Greek and English’, in Artemis Alexiadou, Geoffrey Horrocks and Melita Stavrou (eds) Studies in Greek Syntax, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 241-63.
3
0
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
Aim and scope of this chapter
In this chapter, we will re-examine the structure of the clause elaborated in the first two chapters of this book. The main purpose of the chapter is to illustrate that syntactic theories are not static entities but are subject to development and change. In the light of the empirical data examined in terms of the argumentation developed in the first two chapters, we will come to the conclusion that the proposals made in chapters 1 and 2 must be revised. Notably, structures previously treated in terms of a single projection must be decomposed into a number of discrete projections. In this respect, three points will be examined: (i) sentences with be (section 1), (ii) the decomposition of the IP node (section 2), and (iii) the decomposition of the CP node (section 4). A general pattern will emerge from our discussion according to which lexical projections are augmented with functional projections. In order to describe this state of affairs we introduce the notion of extended projection in section 3; clauses, for instance, are extended projections of verbs. In the course of the discussion of clause structure, we will return to a number
of issues which were touched upon in earlier chapters. Notably, we examine the movement of the subject NP from [Spec,VP] to the specifier of the highest inflectional projection (section 2.5.2), the issue of sentential negation and the interaction of the negative markers with the extraction of adjuncts (section 2.5.3), the thematic structure of copula be and of possessive have (section 2.5.4) and the nature of the subjunctive mood in English (section 2.6).
In this chapter we will also illustrate the two basic kinds of arguments used in
linguistic analysis: (i) empirical arguments, 1.e. those in which an analysis is
based on language data, and (ii) theoretical arguments, which evaluate an analysis in terms of its compatibility with the theory.’
1 For the difference between induction and deduction see also chapter 1, section 2.2.7.1.
288
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
1
Subjects across categories and be as a raising verb
1.1
Copular sentences
1.1.1
Copular sentences: a first analysis
Consider the following examples: (1)
a. b.
The students were all sick. All the students were sick.
The quantifier all in (1a) has floated off the associated NP the students. If we
continue to assume that floating quantifiers mark a previous position of the associated NP,’ then we are led to conclude.that the NP the students in (1a)
originates in a lower NP position signalled by the floating quantifier all. If we also assume, given that they are semantically near-equivalent, that (1a) and (1b) have the same underlying structure, then it follows that the NP all the students in (1b) also originates in a lower position:
(1)
crs d.
[xp 1 he*students;)* were {5 all [Fee [xp All the students,] were ¢; sick.
[ssick
There is, then, a subject position to the immediate left of the adjective sick. By analogy with the VP-internal subject, we conclude that [Spec,IP] is not the thematic position of the subject; we postulate, as a first approximation,’ that [Spec,AP] is the thematic position of the subject. The AP-internal subject hypothesis is independently supported by a number of additional arguments. The first argument is an empirical-one: the AP-internal subject hypothesis will allow us to account for data previously left unaccounted for. Assuming an AP-internal subject position, by analogy with the VP-internal subject position, may allow us to account for the position of the subject in existential sentences with adjectival predicates. Consider the distribution of the subject NP three students in the sentences in (2): (2)
a.
Three students were sick.
b.
There were three students sick.
In (2a) the subject three students occupies the canonical subject position, [Spec, IP]. (2b) is an existential sentence.* In this example, [Spec,IP] is occupied by the expletive there, and the indefinite subject NP three students occupies a lower position. Given the AP-internal subject hypothesis, it would seem natural to * See chapter 2, section 2. > To be revised in section 1.1.4. * See chapter 1, section 3.4.2, chapter 2, section 3.2.
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
289
propose that the lower NP position occupied by the subject three students in (2b) is the same as the NP position postulated independently for (1c) and (1d), [Spec,AP]. (2c) is a provisional representation.»
(2)
c.
[p There [;- were] [yp [y #] [4p three students [,, sick]]]].
The second argument in favour of the AP-internal subject hypothesis is theoretical or conceptual. The AP-internal hypothesis allows us to simplify the grammar we are developing in that it unifies the mode of theta-role assignment across VP and AP. We have already introduced the VP-internal subject hypothesis.° We have proposed that all the thematic positions associated with V, including that of the external argument, are VP-internal. If we were to continue to assume that the base-position of the subject of an AP-predicate is [Spec,IP], then we would create an asymmetry in the mode of theta-role assignment between the two types of predicates. V would assign its external thematic role VP-internally; A would assign it AP-externally. Thus a verb such as envy and an adjective such as envious would employ radically different modes for theta-marking their external arguments. Such an asymmetry would call for an explanation. If, on the other hand, we admit that the thematic position of the external argument of APs is AP-internal, we simply generalize the VP-internal subject hypothesis’ to other lexical projections and the asymmetry dissolves. Like the external argument of V, the external argument of an adjective is base-generated in the specifier position of the AP. The surface [Spec,IP] position which it may — but need not, as shown by (2b) — eventually occupy is a derived position. As a first approximation, (1b) has a base structure like (1e) and a derived structure like (1f). All the students originates as the specifier of AP. In its base-position, [Spec,AP], it is theta-marked by sick. It then moves to [Spec,IP] in order to get nominative case. The movement of the subject targets a landing site which has a grammatical function associated with it; thus it is A-movement. (1)
e.
Base structure
f.
Derived structure (1) [,p All the students; [|- be, past, 3pl] [vp [v- #] Lap & sick]]].
(i — [1 past, 3pl] [yp be [4p All the students sick]]]
But the derivation in (1f) raises problems in the light of the system we have been elaborating. One issue raised concerns locality. If, according to the VPinternal subject hypothesis, the subject of a lexical verb originates in [Spec, VP], then [Spec,VP] is a subject position, an A-position. In representation (1f), the subject originates in [Spec,AP], and moves to [Spec,IP], an A-position: thus the subject undergoes A-movement. But in (1f), A-movement of the subject NP 5 To be modified in section 1.1.3. 6 Chapter 2, section 2. ? Chapter 2, section 2.
290
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
skips [Spec,VP], an A-position, i.e. a potential landing site. This move is in violation of the locality condition on movement. To ensure that the subject NP makes the shortest move possible we propose that it moves to [Spec,IP] via [Spec, VP]:° (1)
g.
Derived structure (i) [,p All the students; [,- be, past, 3pl] [yp & [y- t,] [ap & sick].
At this point, a general observation on the methodology we are pursuing is in order. The reader may object that representation (1g) is unduly complex for what appears to be a straightforward simple sentence. Observe, though, that while the analysis proposed does entail a more complex representation for sentences with copular be, the analysis does not complicate the system of grammar we are building up. The analysis leading to representation (1g) does not require any new principles in addition to those already argued for in the first two chapters of this book. The tools we are using for the analysis are not increased; we simply apply them more consistently to all the data available.
1.1.2
Be as a one-argument verb
The analysis of copular sentences with adjectival predicates developed in the preceding section implies that the copula be is treated like a raising verb, i.e. a verb which does not have an external argument or which does not assign an external theta-role. In copular sentences with AP predicates, the canonical subject position is filled by an NP theta-marked in the AP-internal subject position, [Spec,AP]. Raising verbs are already part of our system. The syntax of a sentence with copular be followed by an AP complement, such as (1g), can be compared to the syntax of (3), in which seem takes an AP complement. In (3) seem is a one-argument verb; the surface subject of seem, the NP Louise, originates in the specifier position of the AP. (3)
a.
Louise seems sick.
b.
Derived structure [ip Louise; [;- pres, 3sg] [vp #; [y- seem] [4p #; sick]]].
Following our analysis, be is a one-argument verb. In (1g), its internal complement is an AP. Recall that among one-argument verbs, we distinguish intransitive verbs from unaccusative verbs:? verbs which have only an internal argument are unaccusative verbs. With unaccusative verbs such as arrive, it is the OBJECT (the internal argument) which moves to the canonical subject position: (4)
a.
Three students arrived.
b.
Derived structure lp Three students; [;- past, 3pl] [yp ¢; [y- arrive] [yp é]]].
* Further important modifications to (1g) will be discussed in section 1.1.3. * Chapter 2, section 3.
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
27%
In (3c) and (4c), the verb inflection will also have to lower onto the verb.'° (S)ectiih
(4)
c.
he Louise; [}- t,] [vp ¢, [y- seem
+ [pres, 3sg],] [ap ¢, sick]]].
[p Three students,J,- t,] [yp t; [y- arrive + [past, 3pl],] [Np J].
With be (and with seem) it is the susyect of the clausal complement which
moves to the higher subject position. In (3) the subject of the complement of seem undergoes raising in order to get its nominative case licensed in [Spec, IP]. If, like seem, be is not an accusative case-assigner, the subject of its complement likewise moves to the [Spec,IP] position.
1.1.3.
Subject positions
In this section, we will see that while the empirical data discussed in section 1.1.1 are indeed evidence that [Spec,IP] is not the thematic subject position in copular sentences with AP predicates, they do not show conclusively, contrary to what was implied in the discussion above, that the thematic subject position is [Spec,AP]. However, while not constituting direct evidence for the AP-internal subject hypothesis, the data are compatible with the hypothesis. We therefore continue to adopt the AP-internal subject hypothesis, as it is favoured by theoretical considerations.
1.1.3.1
The position of degree adverbs
The AP-internal subject hypothesis has an immediate consequence for our earlier analysis of the structure of APs."' The revision of the structure of AP in turn has implications for the analysis of copular sentences. In the first discussion of APs,'* we assigned to an adjective phrase like very sick in (Sa) the structure in (Sb): (5)
a. b
All the students were very sick. AP
L f
Importantly for the present discussion, we proposed that degree words such as very occupy the specifier position of AP. Of course, if, as suggested in section 1.1.1, [Spec,AP] is the base-position of the subject all the students in (Sa), then © But see chapter 5, section 3.5 for an alternative.
"| In chapter 1, section 2.3.4. 2 In chapter 1, section 2.3.4.
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
292
it cannot at the same time host the degree word very. Drawing on the adjunction analysis of pre-verbal adverbials'? we modify our original analysis and propose that pre-adjectival modifiers are adjoined to AP. Thus (Sa) would have the structure in (Sc):
(5) c.
IP geiids ee ae NP
Y’
Siemens
I
VP Vv’ ‘ar SarBLE
Spec
Vv
AP
eal
es:
eid
all the students;
were,
ft,
ti
very
AP Spec
A’
i
oi
As before, the locality condition on movement requires that the NP all the students transit through the intermediate [Spec, VP], an A-position, on its way to [Spec, IP].
The proposal that degree adverbs such as very are AP-adjoined raises two problems for the data discussed in section 1.1.1 in support of the AP-internal subject hypothesis. One problem concerns the distribution of floating quantifiers; the other concerns the identification of the position occupied by the indefinite subject in existential constructions. We consider each in turn.
1.1.3.2
Floating quantifiers and degree adverbs
Recall that one argument for the AP-internal subject hypothesis was the position of the floating quantifier all in (1a), repeated here as (6a): (6)
a.
The students were all sick.
We proposed that the floating quantifier in (6a) marks the base-position of the subject, i.e. [Spec,AP]. If that were true, though, and if degree words such as very are AP-adjoined, then the prediction is that if a degree word co-occurs with a floating quantifier the former should be able to precede the latter, contrary to fact: 'S In chapter 1, section 2.4.5.
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause (6)
b.
293
*The students were very all sick.
If we maintain the idea that a floating quantifier signals an NP position, then the order all-very in (6c) suggests that there must be an NP position to the left of the AP-adjoined degree word. (6)
c.
The students were all very sick.
The question arises what kind of position this could be. The subject starts from an A-position, [Spec,AP], and ends up in another A-position, [Spec,IP].
The position of all in (6c) signals an intermediate landing site for the subject, i.e. another A-position. In the analysis which we have been developing, there is indeed an A-position lower than [Spec,IP]: by the VP-internal subject hypothesis, the specifier of VP is an A-position. We have already proposed that from its base-position to [Spec,IP] the subject transits through [Spec,VP]. It is then natural to assume that all is stranded not in the base-position of the subject, but in [Spec, VP]:
(6)
d.
IP ae) Sieg
Tortus
NP
it seca
ec
I
VP
Vv’ Spec
Signet
i
the students,
were,
isan
Q
NP
all
t;
eH,
tueetavery
t;
sick
If the floating quantifier occupies [Spec, VP], then we also correctly predict that it will follow VP-adjoined adverbs: (6)
e.
The students were often all very sick.
floating Summarizing this section, let us conclude that the distribution of the
the subject is not quantifier all does support the view that the base-position of
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
294
[Spec, IP], but that it does not provide direct evidence for the AP-internal subject hypothesis. It is compatible with this hypothesis, though.
1.1.3.3
Indefinite subjects and degree adverbs
In the discussion of example (2b) in section 1.1.1 we proposed that the lower indefinite subject in the existential construction occupies the specifier position of AP. However, if the degree adverb very occupies an AP-adjoined position and if the indefinite subject were in the specifier position of AP, then the prediction is that we will have a sequence in which the degree adverb precedes the APinternal subject, contrary to fact: (7)
a.
*There were very three students sick.
The indefinite subject in an existential sentence precedes the sequence degree adverb + adjective: (7)
b.
There were three students very sick.
If very is AP-adjoined, then we conclude that the indefinite subject three students cannot be occupying the AP-internal subject position, [Spec,AP], after all. We must abandon representation (2c). The question arises which position the NP occupies in (2b) and (7b). Let us assume that the AP-internal subject position hypothesis is correct and that the subject NP three students originates in [Spec,AP]. Then this means that in (7b) the subject NP has moved out of its thematic position, where it leaves a trace. The subject NP three students occupies an A-position to the left of the degree adverb and to the right of the I node occupied by were. Capitalizing on the analysis of the distribution of all in the preceding section, we propose that three students occupies the specifier of VP, an A-position: (7)
cc.
[p There [, were] [yp three students; t, [,p very [,p t; sick]]]].
In (7c) the verb were has moved to I; the subject three students originates in [Spec,AP] and undergoes A-movement to [Spec, VP]. As was the case in the previous section, we conclude that the distribution of the indefinite subject in existential sentences with AP predicate does support the view that the base-position of the subject is not [Spec,IP], but that it does not provide direct evidence for the AP-internal subject hypothesis. It is, once again, fully compatible with this hypothesis, though. We will retain the AP-internal subject hypothesis because of its theoretical advantages.
1.1.4 1.1.4.1
Functional projections and adjectives French
Recall our earlier discussion of small clauses.'* In the discussion, we extended the data base to include small clauses in French. We observed there that French In chapter 1, section 2.5.9.
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
295
adjectives are associated with inflectional morphology: this led us to postulate that a small clause complement such as that in (8a) must contain a functional projection to host the agreement features associated with the predicate. We assume that the degree adverbial is AP-adjoined. (8)
a.
Je considére [Thelma trés intelligente]. I consider Thelma very intelligent
b
IP NP
iif | [number]
AP Adv
[gender ]
AP era
Spec
gs
A’
A Thelma Thelma
-e
trés very
intelligent intelligent
We concluded in the discussion that the adjectival agreement must lower onto A. If intelligent were to raise to I, then it would precede the adverb tres:
(8)
c.
*Je considére Thelma intelligente tres.
Now consider (9):
(9)
a.
Toutes les filles sont intelligentes. all the girls are intelligent-fem-pl
b.
Les filles sont toutes intelligentes. the girls are all intelligent
By analogy with the discussion in the previous section, we assume that in French copular sentences, the subject also originates in an AP-internal position. In addia tion, following our earlier discussion, the French AP must be associated with
Thus, as a functional projection to license the inflectional (agreement) features. structure in first approximation, (9a) and (9b) could be assigned the underlying
features of (9c). IP1 is the projection associated with the agreement and tense d with the inflected copula étre (‘be’); IP2 is the functional projection associate the adjectival agreement features:
(9)
c.
nt]]]]. [pr [ pres, 3pl] [ve étre lire [,- -es] [Ap [nn; toutes les filles} intellige
296
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
To derive (9a), the NP toutes les filles moves to the higher [Spec,IP1]. In order to respect the locality condition on movement, the NP moves through the intermediate subject positions: (i) the subject position associated with the functional projection of the adjective (IP2) which can host the subject of the small clause; (ii) the subject position of the VP headed by the copular verb. In addition, the copular verb moves to the finite I’, leaving a trace t,, and the adjectival inflection lowers onto the adjective, leaving a trace in the inflectional head (t,). (9)
dd.
[p: [xp toutes les filles] [;- sont,] [yp t,t, [2 t Lr ta) [ap Lyn 4] intelligent-
es,}]]]. At first sight, the only difference between the derivations of (9a) and (9b) is
where the NP les filles strands the quantifier toutes in the lower subject position in (9b). (Ye) is a first approximation: (9)
e.
[pr Evpi les filles] [;- sont,] [vp #; 4, [ipo & [r ta] [ar [xpi toutes ¢] intelligent-
es,}]]].
However, if (9e) were the correct structure, then the prediction would be that
the AP-adjoined degree adverb trés should precede the floating quantifier toutes, contrary to fact (9f). In French, as in English, the degree adverb follows the floating quantifier (9g): (9)
f.
*Les filles sont trés toutes intelligentes. the girls are very all intelligent
g.
Les filles sont toutes trés intelligentes.
We conclude, therefore, that the quantifier is stranded not in the thematic position of the subject in [Spec,AP], but rather in a higher A-position. At this point, two positions are available: (i) the specifier of the VP headed by @tre (‘be’), an
option which we developed in the previous section and represent in (9h), and (ii) the specifier position of the AP-related IP, shown in (9i): (9)
h.
i.
[rr [yp les filles] [;. sont,] [yp toutes ¢; t, [ipo t; [r ta] [ap [n; #] intelligent-
es, ]]]].
[i [wri les filles] [}- sont,] [yp ¢; t, [jp2 toutes #; [|- t,] [ap [np t] intelligent-
es, ]]]]. We will not try to choose between these two options. As was the case in English, the stranded quantifier does not signal the base-position of the subject, but j rather an intermediate landing site.
1.1.4.2
English
If we assume that the functional projections associated with adjectives in French are also available in English,’ and that English adjectival inflection is abstract, ‘An assumption which we already entertained in chapter 1, section 2.5.9.
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
297
that is, not morphologically realized, then we would be led to conclude that for English copular sentences too, the copula be takes as its complement a functional projection IP hosting the (abstract) inflectional features of the adjective. Thus we would replace the earlier representation (10a) by the analogue of (9b), (10b): (10)
a.
Derived structure of copular sentences (ii) lp All the students; [|. be, past, 3pl] [yp # [y- t,] [ap # sick]]].
b.
Derived structure of copular sentences (iii) lip: [xp All the students] [;- be, past, 3pl] [vp & t, [ipo # Lr ta] Lar [nei 4] sick-0,]]]].
Though the surface structure in (10b) may seem unduly complex, it does not complicate the system of grammar developed so far. The representation follows directly from the interaction of a number of principles which we have established on independent grounds in chapters 1 and 2: (i) (ii)
(iii) (iv) (v)
External arguments originate in the specifier of a lexical projection; Functional features such as agreement and tense are independently generated as heads of functional projections which dominate associated lexical projections; Specifiers of inflectional projections are potential subject positions; NPs must occupy case positions; Moved elements take the shortest step possible; therefore ‘long’ movement takes place via a series of ‘short’? movements to intermediate landing sites.
In 1.1.3.2, the relative positions of the floating quantifier and the degree adverb very led us to the conclusion that the floating quantifier must signal an NP position higher than the thematic subject position and lower than the canonical subject position. In the earlier discussion we postulated that this position was [Spec, VP] (see (6d)). Given the AP-related functional projection, there is also an alternative analysis in which the floating quantifier occupies [Spec,IP2]: (6)
f.
[i [xp The students] intelligent-0,]]]].
[} are,]
[ve tt
[iro all 4 Le t) Lap [nr 4]
On the basis of the position of the indefinite subject of the existential sentence with an AP-predicate and a degree adverb such as very, we were led to the conclusion that the indefinite subject of an existential sentence had to occupy an A-position lower than I but higher than AP. In our earlier discussion we
assumed this position to be [Spec, VP] (7c). Assuming an AP-related IP for the
English AP, there is, once again, an alternative analysis possible; the specifier of the AP-related IP could also host the indefinite subject (7d). (7)
d.
[p There [,- were,] [vp lv 4] [p three students; [4p very [ap 4; [a sick]]]]]]-
of In (7d) the AP headed by sick is dominated by the AP-related IP. The subject moves it ; [Spec,AP] position, subject the AP is base-generated in the AP-internal
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
298
to the specifier position of the AP-related IP. This analysis also leads to the correct prediction that the subject precedes the modifying adverb very. As before, we will not try to choose between (7c) and (7d) here, but we maintain that indefinite subjects of existential constructions with AP-predicates do not occupy [Spec,AP].
1.1.5
Beas a raising verb
We propose that in sentences in which copular be takes an AP complement, be is a raising verb which, like seem, lacks an external argument and fails to assign case to its complement. Copular be is thus also an unaccusative verb. The subject of the AP complement of be undergoes raising in order to reach a casemarked position. In other words, in sentences with copular be, the subject in [Spec,IP] occupies a derived position. It originates in its thematic position, the specifier of the AP. It is important to reflect for a moment on the kind of arguments used to support the hypothesis. In section 1.1.1 we introduced two types of arguments for the AP-internal subject hypothesis: (i) a theoretical argument, and (11) empirical arguments. The theoretical argument was based on the unification of thetarole assignment: by adopting the AP-internal subject hypothesis we unify the mode of thematic role assignment across VP and AP. The empirical arguments can be summarized by the data in (11): (11)
a. b.
The students are all sick. There are three students sick.
In section 1.1.1 we claimed that the floating quantifier in (11a) and the indefinite subject in (11b) occupy the AP-internal subject position. However, on the basis of the distribution of AP-adjoined adverbs we reached the conclusion that this cannot be so, and that the floating quantifier in (11a) and the indefinite subject in (11b) must occupy an intermediate NP position, either [Spec,VP] or the
specifier of the AP-related IP. This means that the empirical evidence which we originally used does indeed show that the thematic position of the subject of an AP-predicate is not the canonical subject position, [Spec,IP]. Although compatible with the AP-internal subject hypothesis, data such as the sentences in (11) do not force us to conclude that the subject originates in [Spec,AP]. However, since the AP-internal hypothesis is compatible with the data, we will maintain the hypothesis, in view of the theoretical argument. The internal subject hypothesis can be extended to sentences in which be takes a PP predicate or an NP predicate: (12)
a. b.
The girls are in doubt about the proposal. This woman is a student of English.
As before, the internal subject hypothesis has implications for the structure of the PP and the NP. Notably, if in (12a) the NP the girls were taken to originate
in [Spec,PP], then, as was the case with APs, we cannot claim that the degree specifier in (12c) is in [Spec,PP]:
;
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause (12)
c.
299
The girls are rather in doubt about the proposal.
Similarly, if the NP this woman in (12b) is supposed to originate in [Spec,NP], then the indefinite article cannot be said to occupy that position. The question can also be raised whether the predicate PP in (12a) and the
predicate NP in (12b) should also be associated with a functional projection. For PPs it is not so easy to decide as there is no overt evidence for P-inflection in English. Other languages, such as Arabic and the Celtic languages, do provide evidence that prepositions may inflect, but we won’t pursue this issue here. Postulating an inflectional projection associated with NPs seems quite natural, however, since nouns are inflected for number.'®
1.2
Progressive be
We have established that copula be is an unaccusative verb, that is, a verb which lacks an external argument and does not assign case to its complement. Copular be is a raising verb: it selects a small clause as its internal argument; the external argument of the predicate of its complement raises to the subject position. The question which arises immediately is whether auxiliary be can also be analysed as a raising verb. We turn to this point in this and the following sections. We start with sentences in which be is used as a progressive (or continuous) auxiliary followed by a present participle. Consider the following examples:
(13)
a. b.
The students were all waiting for the teacher. All the students were waiting for the teacher.
The quantifier all in (13a) has floated off the associated NP the students. If we continue to assume that-floating quantifiers mark an earlier landing site of the
associated NP,'” we conclude that the NP the students in (13a) must have transited via the position marked by the floating quantifier all. If we assume that (13a) and (13b) have the same underlying structure, then it follows that the NP all the students in (13b) also originates in a lower position. This conclusion is not unexpected, since we have already argued'* that [Spec,VP] is the thematic position of the subject. (14) is a first representation of the derived structure of (13b):
be (i) (14) Progressive
v9
fer [np All the students,] [;- be, past, 3pl] [vp t ty [ve [xp t] waiting]]].
(14) is a partial representation, though. The reader will have observed that the form waiting is not a morphologically unanalysable form. Waiting clearly con-
sists of two morphemes: the verb root wait and the inflectional ending -ing. This means that just as we postulated that APs are associated with a functional 16 We return to the internal structure of NPs in chapter 4. '7 See chapter 2, section 2, and section 1.1 of the present chapter.
'8 In chapter 2, section 2.
300
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
projection, we are led to propose that participles are also associated with functional structure. In (15), IP1 is the inflectional projection whose head hosts the inflectional material associated with the non-finite verb be, and IP2 is the functional projection whose head hosts the inflectional material associated with the verb wait. I2 represents the -ing ending of the verb. The underlying structure of (13b) is as in (15a), and the sentence is spelt out as in (15b). In (15b) the subject NP all the students has moved from its baseposition in [Spec,VP2] via the intermediate [Spec,IP2] and [Spec,VP1] to the subject position [Spec,IP1]. At the same time the morpheme -ing has lowered onto the verb wait. (15)
a.
[p: fy: past, 3pl] [ver be [we b- ing] [vp2 [np; all the students] [y- wait]]]]].
b.
[p: [ya All the students]
[, be, past,
3pl] [vei t t [ho t [Lr Fingl
[veo [xpi 4] [wait-ing]]]]]. The structure in (15b) implements a number of principles which we have established previously. Adopting the VP-internal subject hypothesis, we assume that the S-structure subject of progressive be originates in [Spec,VP] of the lower non-finite IP2 complement, consisting of a VP and the progressive functional structure. We assume that the specifier position of VP is not case-marked. As was the case for copular be, we assume that progressive be is an unaccusative verb: it lacks an external argument and it cannot assign case to the specifier of its IP2 complement. The NP all the students therefore cannot stop at the specifier position of IP2. It must raise to a position in which case is licensed, here the canonical subject position. Progressive be is a raising verb, just like copula be. In (15b) we propose that -ing lowers onto V. Like finite verbs (16a), participial forms can be shown not to move out of VP (16b): (16)
a. b.
*John meets often Mary. “John is meeting often Mary.
Even though representation (15b) may look highly elaborate, it follows directly from the principles established in chapters 1 and 2. Once again, we may end up with more elaborate representations for individual sentences, but we have not complicated the system that generates these representations. If the inflectional morphology on a lexical verb such as meets in (16a) allows us to postulate a separate functional projection, then we would have to complicate our grammar in order to rule out representations such as those in (15) which associate a functional representation with the inflectional ending of wait-ing. Pure internal consistency of the system forces us to adopt structures such as (15). In order to exclude derivations such as those in (15) we would need an additional principle: such a principle is unnecessary, hence uneconomical in the present framework. Let us return for a moment to the S-structure of (13a), in which the quantifier all has floated off the subject. We assume that the D-structure of (13a) is the
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
301
same as that of (13b), i.e. (15a). In the surface string, all is separated from the subject NP and occupies a lower NP position. Three such positions are available: [Spec,VP2], the base-position of the subject, [Spec,IP2] and [Spec,VP1]. In the discussion in section 1,1 we demonstrated that the floating quantifier associated with an AP subject does not surface in [Spec,AP]: the evidence we used was the distribution of AP-adjoined degree modifiers which appear to the right of the floating quantifier. The distribution of the pre-verbal VP-modifier respectfully suggests that the floating quantifier all cannot remain in the base-position of the subject: (16)
c. d.
*The students were respectfully all waiting in the corridor. The students were all respectfully waiting in the corridor.
For the particular judgement in (16c) the adjunct respectfully should be given a manner interpretation (‘the manner of their waiting was respectful’), not a reading in which respectfully qualifies the students’ attitudes (‘the students were respectful in waiting in the corridor’). If the manner adverb respectfully is VPadjoined, then all cannot be in [Spec,VP2]. This leaves us once again with two options: the floating quantifier is either in the specifier position of the lower IP or in that of the higher VP. Recall that the same options were found to be available for the distribution of the floating quantifier with AP predicates.’ As was the case in the preceding section, we will not try to decide between these options. By the analysis above, the availability of existential patterns with progressive be (16e) is expected: we have seen’ that existential constructions are restricted to sentences with unaccusative verbs. (16)
e.
There were three students waiting in the corridor.
The question arises as to which position the NP three students occupies in (16e). (16f) is the base structure, with the NP three students in [Spec,VP2]: (16)
f.
[ip: There
[}- past, 3pl] [vp: be [iz [r ing] [ver [nei three students]
[y- wait]]]]]. In an existential sentence such as (16g), the associate NP three students follows the auxiliary were and precedes the manner adverbial respectfully:
(16)
g.
There were three students respectfully waiting in the corridor.
We assume that the manner
adverbial is VP-adjoined. This means
that three
students cannot be in [Spec,VP2], for if it were, it would have to follow the ~ adjoined adverb (16h): Cf. section 1.1.4. 20 In chapter 2, section 3.
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
302
(16)
h.
*There were respectfully three students waiting in the corridor.
The NP three students occupies either [Spec,VP1] or [Spec,IP2].
1.3.
Passive be
If we pursue the argumentation developed in the preceding sections, we are inevitably led to propose that passive sentences also have a more complex structure than that proposed in the earlier discussion.”! In our discussion of a passive sentence such as (17a), we initially assumed a representation such as: (17b);:
(17)
a.
Louise will be invited.
b.
Derived structure IP
se aa
|
ee i Louise;
will
be
tah
|
However, just as the present participle is morphologically complex and can be decomposed into two parts, the verb root and the inflectional -ing ending, the passive participle (invited) is clearly also morphologically complex and can be analysed into two parts, a root (here invite) and an ending (here -ed). So a first emendation to the structure in (17b) must involve the decomposition of invited into a V-head and an I-head. In addition, we know that [Spec,VP] is a subject position. This means that if the NP Louise moves from the complement position of the projection of the verb invite to the higher [Spec,IP], it must transit via the intermediate subject positions, [Spec, VP] and the specifier position of the IP projected by the participial morphology. Pursuing this line of reasoning, representation (17b) will be replaced by the more complex pattern in (17c):
*! In chapter 2, section 1.3.
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause (LA)
wares
303
IP1 Spec
al
| past 3sg
VP1 Spec
v'1 eicad bases
v1
IP2 Spec
i
I2
VP2 Spec
Vez
v2 Louise,
was,
i;
t:
ie
i t, invite-ed, can Vaee
NP t;
As was the case for copular be and progressive be, passive be is a one-argument - verb. Passive be has only an internal argument and it fails to assign case to the subject of its complement. Like copula be and progressive be, passive be is a raising verb: the subject of its (passive participle) complement moves to the canonical subject position for case reasons. Since passive be fails to assign accusative case, it is an unaccusative verb. Predictably, passive be can also occur in the existential construction: (18)
a.
There were three students arrested last night.
On the basis of (17c) the indefinite subject NP potentially might occupy three NP positions: [Spec,VP2], [Spec,IP2] and [Spec, VP1]. As was the case for AP predicates, for PP predicates, for NP predicates (section 1.1), and for VP complements to progressive be (section 1.2), the first option seems unlikely in view of the distribution of the manner adjunct brutally: (18)
b.
c.
*There were brutally three students arrested last night.
There were three students brutally arrested last night.
We will not try to choose between the two remaining options, [Spec,IP2] or
[Spec,VP1]. The lower NP position occupied by the indefinite subject in an
existential structure may also host floating quantifiers:
(18)
d.
The students were all brutally arrested last night.
304
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
1.4
Some speculations on perfect have
Pursuing the argumentation we have developed also forces us to postulate more complex structures for sentences with perfect have. In (19a) the auxiliary have is followed by a past participle. In the first discussions of such sentences in chapter 1, we proposed a representation like (19b): WA
ewes b.
The students have invited Louise.
[tp [xp The students;] [,- have, pres, 3pl] [yp t¢, [yp invited Louise]]].
Clearly, given the various arguments developed in the course of the discussion, the structure of (19a) must be more complex. We must take into account at least the following considerations: ) ) (ii) )
the the the the
VP-internal subject hypothesis; morphological complexity of the perfect participle; idea that inflectional endings are associated with functional projections; locality conditions on movement.
Given these considerations, (19b) is replaced by (19c): (1c
Ph i raced Sh
Spec
et
| saan pres
3pl
Spec
aoe v1 an Spec
an
on
eo Spec
aN v2 the students; have,
ft,
hs
t;
Zs
t, ely
NP mis
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
305
The analysis in (19c) runs into further complications, which we will not pursue in detail here.
In the discussion of passive be we proposed that a passive sentence has the
schematic representation in (20a); for a sentence with perfect have we propose (20b) (T stands for tense; AGR stands for agreement): (20)
a.
b.
[ir [np NP2,] [}- be, T, AGR] [yp # t, [p> t; Lr teal [vp Le ti] [V -ed] ¢,]]]]-
[ip: [np NP1,] [- have, T, AGR] [yp ¢; t, [mo t [- teal [vp [np ti] [V -ed]
NP2]]]]. We proposed that the passive participle in (20a) has one internal argument (here NP2). In the passive structure, the passive participle fails to assign case to its complement (NP2) and the complement must move to a case position: the relevant position is [Spec, IP1]. For reasons of locality, NP2 will move to [Spec,IP1] via the
intermediate specifier of IP2, the inflectional projection associated with the -ed ending, i.e., the complement of passive be. Thus the object of the participle becomes the subject of the complement of be. Then the subject of IP2 raises to the subject position of IP1. Passive be is analysed as a raising verb: the subject of its complement raises to the subject position of be. On the other hand, in (20b) the -ed participle is formally identical to the passive participle. Yet the perfect participle has two arguments: NP1, the external argument of the participle, which moves to the canonical subject position, and NP2, the internal argument, which remains VP-internal. This means that in the perfect construction, case must be available for the internal argument NP2, - while it is unavailable in the passive construction. Let us propose an informal solution to this problem. Let us admit that in both (20a) and in (20b) the -ed participle as such does not assign (or license) accusative case. However, in (20a) the participle heads the complement of be, which is an unaccusative verb. On the other hand, in (20b) the participle is part of the complement of have, a verb which does license the case of its NP complement, as shown by (21): (21)
John has three children.
We may then propose that in sentences with perfect have, the presence of have restores the case-assigning capacity of the -ed participle, enabling NP2, the complement of the participle, to remain in its case position. NP1, the subject of the participial complement of have, on the other hand, must move to the matrix [Spec, IP1]. We will assume that if have has to license the accusative case of NP2, then it cannot at the same time license the case of NP1.
The distribution of floating quantifiers in sentences with perfect have confirms, once again, that the thematic position of the surface subject of have must be a lower position: (19)
d.
The students have all invited Louise.
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
306
1.5
Summary: be as a raising verb
In the discussion, we have elaborated a general format for sentences containing be. We propose that be should be analysed as a raising verb which selects an IP complement. The complement contains a lexical projection dominated by a functional projection. In the case of copula be, the complement may, for instance, be an AP dominated by the inflectional projection associated with adjectival agreement. Progressive be selects an IP complement whose head corresponds to the -ing ending of the present participle. Passive be selects an IP complement whose head corresponds to the -ed ending of the past participle. Be not being a case-assigner, the subject of its complement must move to a higher case position. If we assume that morphologically complex entities must be decomposed into distinct heads then we are led to conclude that perfect have also selects an IP complement whose inflectional head corresponds to the participial -ed ending. Unlike the situation in passive sentences, the perfect participle can assign case. We propose that this is due to the fact that auxiliary have restores the caseassigning capacities of the participle.
2
Functional projections and the Split-INFL hypothesis
In our earlier discussion of phrase structure,” we introduced the idea that S is a projection of I, S = IP. However, later on,”’ we hinted at some morphological arguments for the proposal that the single head I be decomposed into two separate functional heads, AGR and T, corresponding to the agreement and tense morphemes of the verb respectively. In this section, we provide empirical support for this suggestion based on considerations of word-order. The analysis we develop below has come to be known as the Split-INFL hypothesis. The evidence in this section is drawn mainly from the distribution of verbs and auxiliaries in French and in English. (This section is based on chapter 11 of Haegeman 1994.)
2.1
Finite clauses
First consider (22)-(24): we pair a French negated sentence (a) with its English counterpart (b). These examples serve to illustrate the relative positions of the inflected verb and the marker of sentential negation (not in English, pas in French): (22)
a.
b.
V-Neg Thelma n’est pas invitée. Thelma ze is not invited ‘Thelma is not invited.’ Thelma is not invited.
* In chapter 1, section 2.5.3. * In chapter 1, section 2.5.4.
Neg-V *Thelma ne pas est invitée.
*Thelma not is invited.
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause (23)
(24)
a.
Thelma n’a pas parle.
*Thelma ne pas a parlé.
b.
Thelma ne has not talked ‘Thelma has not talked.’ Thelma has not talked.
*Thelma not has talked.
a.
b.
Thelma ne parle pas. Thelma ze talks not ‘Thelma does not talk.’ *Thelma talks not.
307
*Thelma ne pas parle.
Thelma does not talk.
In (22) and (23), the auxiliaries étre/be and avoir/have precede the negative
elements pas/not. In both French and English, the order auxiliary—pas/not is the only option. In (24), however, the lexical verb parle (‘talk’) must appear to the
left of pas in French, while the lexical verb talks can only appear to the right of not in English. Adopting the clause structure elaborated in the first two chapters, we proposed that (i) in English finite clauses, only auxiliaries can move to I, while (ii) in French finite clauses V-to-I movement is generalized and applies to both auxiliaries and lexical verbs. On the basis of the difference between French and English, we proposed that the mobility of a verb depends on the strength of its inflection, which is associated with distinct forms in the verbal paradigm. In French, verbal inflection is strong and hence it attracts the verb. In English it is weak and it cannot attract the verb. If we were to say that weak inflection cannot attract the verb at all, then we would not be able to account for the fact that in English have, be and do move past the negative marker not. We must be able to distinguish between English lexical verbs, which do not move out of VP, and English auxiliary verbs such as _ have, be and do, which do move to I. Our hypothesis is that have and be are
semantically light;** the same applies to auxiliary do. Unlike lexical verbs, auxil-
iaries are not associated with thematic roles. Being lighter, auxiliaries are attracted even by the relatively weak inflection in English.
2.2
Non-finite clauses
So far we have essentially concentrated on the position of the finite verb. In this section we will extend our analysis to non-finite clauses, and we will discover a finite/non-finite asymmetry in French. Consider the French non-finite clauses in (25): (25) a.
V-Neg N’étre pas invité, c’est triste.
ne be not invited it is sad
. Neg-V Ne pas étre invité, c’est triste.
ne not be invited it is sad
‘It is sad not to be invited.’
b.
N’avoir pas recu de cadeaux, ne have not received presents c’est triste. it is sad
Ne pas avoir recu de cadeaux, ne not have received presents c’est triste. it is sad
24 We discussed this point in chapter 1, section 2.5.2.1.
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
308
c.
*Ne manger pas de chocolat,
Ne pas manger de chocolat, ne not eat chocolate C’est triste. it is sad
ne eat not chocolate c’est triste. it is sad
In French, two differences emerge between finite and non-finite clauses. (i) Al-
though auxiliaries must move to the left of the negative element pas in finite clauses (cf. 22a, 23a), they optionally remain to the right of pas in infinitival clauses (25a, 25b). (ii) Whereas lexical verbs always precede pas in finite clauses, they obligatorily remain to the right of the negation in infinitival clauses (25c). In English infinitival clauses, a similar situation obtains for many (though not all) speakers. The examples in (26) are taken from seminal work by Pollock (1989: 376, his (21-22) ). For the relevant group of speakers, English auxiliaries marginally may precede negation in non-finite clauses, while lexical verbs must remain to the right of negation, as was also the case in finite clauses.
(26)
V-Neg a.
b.
c.
Neg-V
?To be not invited _is sad.
Not to be invited is sad.
(?)To have not had a happy childhood is a prerequisite for writing novels.
Not to have had a happy childhood is a prerequisite for writing novels.
*To get not arrested
Not to get arrested
under such circumstances is a miracle.
under such circumstances is a miracle.
The finite/non-finite asymmetry in French and in English confirms our earlier hypothesis that the nature of the inflection determines V-to-I movement. The infinitival inflection is weaker than the finite inflection: even in French there is only one form for the infinitive. That auxiliaries may be attracted by the weaker
infinitival inflection is due to their relative lightness.” To summarize the discussion, in both French and English, auxiliaries move past the negation marker pas/not, obligatorily in finite clauses, optionally in infinitives. In English, lexical verbs never appear to the left of not. In French, finite lexical verbs move past pas, while non-finite lexical verbs remain to the right of pas. a
2.3
V-movement across adverbs
In the discussion above we showed that French and English differ with respect to the distribution of the verb in relation to the negation markers (pas/not). French and English also differ with respect to the relative order of verbs and adverbs such as often/souvent. We will now examine the distribution of the verb both in finite clauses and in non-finite clauses. ** As discussed above and in chapter 1, section 2.5.2.1.
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
2.3.1
V-movement
309
across adverbs in finite clauses
All French finite Vs, auxiliary or lexical, precede the negation marker pas. All finite verbs also appear to the left of adverbs such as souvent (‘often’) or toujours (‘always’). In English finite auxiliaries appear to the left of such adverbs, while finite lexical verbs appear to their right: (27)
V-Adv a.
(28)
__ Il arrive souvent en retard. he arrives often late
Adv-V *T] souvent arrive en retard.
b.
Il est souvent invité. he is often invited
*Il souvent est invité.
c.
Ila souvent mangé du chocolat.
*Il souvent a mangé du chocolat.
a. b. c.
*He arrives often late. He is often invited. He has often eaten chocolate.
He often arrives late. *He often is invited. *He often has eaten chocolate.
The pattern we find in the finite clauses with adverbs in (27) and (28) is parallel to that found for finite negative sentences. Whenever the inflected verb can precede negation it can precede the adverb, and whenever the inflected verb cannot precede negation it cannot precede the adverb either. When a sentence contains a negative marker and a VP-adjunct the negative marker precedes: (27) (28)
d. d.
Il n’a pas souvent mangé de chocolat. He has not often eaten chocolate.
As a first analysis we might propose that the negative marker and the adverb are both VP-adjoined. In (29a) we omit the intermediate traces of the subject as these are not relevant for the discussion.
(29) a.
[yp [NP] (, T/AGR] [yp NEG [yp VP adjunct [yp .- - HII]
This representation cannot be maintained, however, in view of the distribution of verbs and adverbs in non-finite sentences.
V-movement across adverbs in non-finite clauses
2.3.2.
latter, Consider (30). While (30a) is compatible with (29a), (30b) is not. In the advery frequenc the and not the verb intervenes between the negation marker bial souvent:
(30)
a.
Ne pas souvent arriver en retard, c’est important.
b.
Ne pas arriver souvent en retard, c’est important.
ne not often arrive late, it is important ‘It is important not to often arrive late.’
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
310
In the structure in (29b) there simply is no landing site between pas and souvent: both are VP-adjoined: (29)
..b;
VP3
pas
VEZ souvent
VP1
In order to deal with the distribution of the infinitive in (30), we
have to
postulate that there exist at least two landing sites distinct from V. One landing site precedes pas; this can coincide with the node I. A second landing site follows pas and precedes souvent. We define the nature of this position in the next section.
2.4
The Split-INFL hypothesis: I as AGR and T (it)
We have already pointed out that the clausal I node hosts two sets of features: those representing agreement (comprising person and number) and those representing Tense.*° Agreement features on the inflectional head match those of an NP, more particularly, those of the subject NP. Tense features do not have any obvious match in the NP. In this section we will show that there are good empirical arguments for splitting the clausal I node into two separate heads, AGR and T, each with its own projection, AGRP and TP, respectively.
2.4.1
Two landing sites of the verb
The French non-finite verb can end up between pas (‘not’) and souvent (‘often’). Verb movement is head-movement. In the structure proposed above in (29b), there is no head position available between the negative marker pas and the adverb souvent. If both pas and the adverb were VP-adjoined, then an intervening constituent would also have to be VP-adjoined. But only maximal projections can adjoin to maximal projections. In (31a) V, a head, would have to adjoin to VP, a maximal projection. (31)
a.
[p [NP] [; T/AGR]
[yp NEG
[vp ?v [vp Adv [vp --- }]]]]
If we admit that heads adjoin to maximal projections then we will obviously allow our system to over-generate: in such an approach a head would be able to undergo the same movement as a maximal projection. If this were the case, then we would have to introduce further constraints to ensure, for instance, that a head does not move to [Spec,CP] or to [Spec, IP]. Similarly, if heads could move to XP positions, we might further expect that XPs can move to head positions. Again, we would then have to introduce further constraints to prevent this. It would be desirable to retain the principle that, once created, a structure does not © In chapter 1, section 2.5.4.
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
3d
change dramatically, i.e. that maximal projections move to positions reserved for maximal projections and that heads move to head positions. Under such a
view, once a position is defined as a maximal projection or a head it will remain so in the course of the derivation. In order to maintain that heads move only to head positions, we need to postulate a head position, i.e. an X°, located between NEG and the adverb. The presence of a head, X°, implies the presence of an associated projection, XP:
(31)
b. [p [NP] I NEG [xp X° [yp Adv [yp . . - JI]
In French finite sentences, V moves to the highest functional head, represented as I in (31b); in French non-finite sentences, the lexical verb can only move as
high as X°, the lower functional head in the structure. As we have seen earlier, the verb inflection I contains two morphological components, tense and agreement. The node which we label I corresponds to one component of the verb inflection, and the node which we label X° corresponds to the second. Thus (31b) could be replaced by either (31c) or (31d): (31)
c.
[acre [NP] AGR NEG
[7
d.
[rp
[acre AGR
[NP] T
NEG
T
[vp Adv [yp.. - J]]] [vp Adv [yp .- - JI]
Before choosing between these two representations,~’ we will examine the role of negation in clause structure.
2.4.2
Negative sentences in French
As (32) shows, French sentential negation is bipartite: it is composed of an element ne and an element pas. Ne is attached to the finite verb with which it moves along to C:
(32)
a.
Elle n’a pas mangé she ne has not eaten ‘She has not eaten.’
b.
Nv’a-t-elle pas mangé? ne has she not eaten ‘Has she not eaten?’
c.
*A-t-elle ne pas mangé?
is a head Since ne moves to C together with the finite verb, we conclude that it by the affected not is pas hand, adjoined to V, another head. On the other propose We on. projecti maximal a movement of the verb, suggesting that it is pas. that ne heads a projection NegP whose specifier is occupied by insert a NegP to have we that in Structure (31) must thus be modified further, account the into Taking one. between the higher functional head and the lower 27 Which we will do in section 2.4.3.
312
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
assumption that there is a NegP constituent, a French negative clause has either the representation (33a), in which AGRP dominates TP, or (33b), in which TP
dominates AGRP: (33)
a. b.
[acre [NP] AGR [Negp pas [Neg’ ne] [rp T [yp Adv [vp.. [ap [NP] T LNegp pas [Neg ne] [acre AGR [yp Adv [yp
it WW
The question arises whether TP is the highest projection, or whether it is AGRP. Before answering this question, let us tackle the discrepancy between the sequencing of ne and pas in (33) and the surface ordering. In (33a—b) ne follows pas, while in the Spell-Out of the sentence this is never the case: (33)
c.
d.
*Elle pas ne mange de chocolat. she pas ne eats chocolate *Pas ne manger de chocolat, c’est triste. pas ne eat chocolate, it is sad
Consider (33d) first. It is an (ungrammatical) infinitival structure, whose grammatical counterpart is (33e):
(33)
e.
Ne pas manger de chocolat, c’est triste.
Here ve precedes pas. We propose that ne moves up and adjoins to the higher head of the I-system (AGR in (33a), or T in (33b)). We propose that ne is an affix and must adjoin to a higher head. (Son
te
AGR = es
ik
mt
ne
ae
AGR
tle
ne
45
The grammatical counterpart of finite (33c) is (33g):
(33)
g.
Elle ne mange pas de chocolat.
We assume that two instantiations of head-movement lead to this structure: (1) mange moves to the higher head to pick up the inflection, forming a complex head, and (ii) me adjoins to the newly formed complex head.
(33) h.
AGR ne
or AGR
T ne
at
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
313
For the sake of completeness, observe that the structures in (33) give the correct sequencing of pas with respect to VP-adjoined adjuncts: all VP-adjoined adjuncts will inevitably be lower than, hence follow, pas:
(3S)igas
NegP Spec
Neg’ ea,
Neg
VP2 eae
XP
2.4.3
VE2
Morphological evidence
The question remains to be settled whether it is T or AGR which is the higher head. Let us try to decide between (33a) and (33b). On the basis of a representation such as (33b), we would expect that the AGR inflection is more closely associated with V than the tense inflection. We have seen that movement is always local: a head will move to the first head position available. In (33b), V first moves to AGR and then to T. In (33a) the relation is reversed: V first moves to T and then to AGR. According to (33b) we would expect the AGR morphology to be closer to the verb stem than the tense morphology; (33a) leads to the opposite prediction. On the assumption that the ordering of the morphemes reflects the derivational process, there is empirical support for (33a). Within an inflected V, the T inflection is closer to the root than the person/number inflection. In (34a—c) the past T inflection -ai occurs between the root and the person/number inflection; in (35a—c) the future T inflection -er occurs between
the verb and the person/number inflection.
(34)
NP Anase tu on etl
V parl parl parl speak
T ai ai ai PAST
AGR S s t person + number
(35)
NPs aanie tu Craleil
71 VY, parl parl parl speak
{5 er er er FUT
AGR ai as a person + number
and TP. In representation (33a) IP is decomposed into two projections: AGRP ; they elements nal AGRP dominates TP. Both projections are headed by inflectio also clauses are functional projections. In addition, we assume that negative move , auxiliary or contain NegP. In French finite clauses all Vs, whether lexical as far as the to AGR, via T. In non-finite clauses, the lexical verbs can only move
314
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
lower functional head, T. French non-finite lexical verbs may also remain in VP. In non-finite clauses lexical verbs cannot move
to AGR,
whereas
auxiliaries
optionally move to T and to AGR. In the remainder of the book we endorse the Split-INFL hypothesis, i.e. the decomposition of I into AGR and T. However, following standard practice in the literature, we will often use the labels I and IP as a shorthand representation when we refer to the entire clause. According to the Split-INFL hypothesis, the canonical subject position may also be referred to as the specifier of AGRP or [Spec,AGRP].
2.5
Further considerations on the structure of English clauses
2.5.1
The Split-INFL in English
Having developed the Split-INFL hypothesis on the basis of French data, let us now apply it to English. Based on the discussion above, the D-structure for an English sentence such as (36a) is as in (36b):
(36)
a.
John will not eat any cheese.
b
CP
Pak Spec
ce
eter
CG
AGRP
peat
NP
AGR’
bedase AGR
NegP
—.. Spec
Neg’
raed Neg
IP
See Spec
14
eeSevP
‘le
[pres] Ne
Spec
Vv’
Vv
not
will John eat
NP
— any cheese
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
315
As modal auxiliaries do not have non-finite forms we proposed previously that they are base-generated in I. Modals do have tensed forms: will is a present
tense, would is a past tense. In the split-IP system, we propose that modals are inserted under T and move to AGR. Other auxiliaries, such as have and be, do have non-finite forms. They originate in VP and, when finite, they move to the functional heads T, Neg, and AGR. (36c) shows the partial derivation of a negative sentence containing an auxiliary. We also take into account (i) the VP-internal subject hypothesis, and (ii) the proposal developed in the first section of this chapter that the participial inflection is associated with a specialized inflectional head (I2).
(26),
¢,
AGRP
Cae
Neg
TP
an
sdirenieron AGR jay
l
PSE ‘lp
Sa VP Aa
3sg
past
Spec
Va
John
4
If the lexical verb of a non-negative sentence does not move to T or to AGR, the question obviously arises how it will ultimately get associated with the related tense and agreement morphology, located under T and AGR respectively. The proposal we have been entertaining so far is that the verb morphology in English is lowered onto the lexical V. Lowering processes raise problems in general because they leave traces which are not c-commanded by their antecedents. We can assume that AGR lowers onto T and that AGR and T jointly lower
onto V.** Negative sentences with lexical verbs are characterized by the presence of the auxiliary do: (37)
a.
John did not leave.
Let us propose that do is inserted precisely because the lexical verb does not move to T and to AGR. Do is inserted to support the T and AGR morphemes (hence the label ‘do-support’). We assume here that do is inserted under T and moves to AGR:
*8 We discuss two alternative approaches to lowering in chapter 5, section 3.5.
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause (37)eab:
317
AGRP ee NP
eon" AGR’ wwe
NegP
Spec
Neg’
nee
eliied »
Neg
TP.
l
fdas iT
ws. VP
v-sienigie
3sg
not
do+past
Spec
Vv’
John
ye
Do-insertion in English would arise in those cases in which the inflectional heads cannot lower to the verb. Apparently the negative marker not, associated with NegP, prevents lowering of the finite inflection, as in (38). We might say that the presence of the head of the projection NegP somehow blocks the lowering of the inflectional heads tothe verb. On the other hand, given that do-insertion is not needed in sentences with sentence-medial adverbs such as often, we have to conclude that the lowering of the inflection to the lexical V must be possible in spité of these intervening VP-adjoined adverbs, as in (39). VP-adjoined adverbs are maximal projections and thus do not hinder head-to-head movement. Interestingly, sentence-medial adverbs with a negative interpretation such as never, hardly, rarely behave like any other adverb, in that they fail to give rise to dosupport, as in (40). If we assume that mot is crucially associated with NegP, i.e. a projection with its own head, Neg, and that this head somehow blocks the lowering of the inflection, then the data in (40) suggest that adverbs such as never, hardly and rarely, though negative in interpretation, occupy the same position as the other sentence-medial adverbs, i.e. a VP-adjoined position lower
than NegP.””
We consider the 2° We return to the mechanism of do-insertion in chapter 5, section 2.2.3. In chapter 5, section 3.5, 3.4.2. section 5, chapter in clause the to do of ion contribut semantic of inflection and we outline we also reconsider the problems raised by the lowering analysis analysis. lowering a eliminate to us allow will which some alternative proposals
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
318 (38)
a. b.
*John not goes there. John does not go there.
(39)
a. b.
John often/always goes there. *John does often/always go there (does unstressed).
(40)
a. b.
John never/rarely/hardly goes there. *John does never/rarely/hardly go there.
In the next sections we briefly re-examine some aspects of the structure of English clauses. We briefly consider the role of [Spec,TP] in relation to subject movement (2.5.2), we consider the structure of negative sentences (2.5.3), and we will also speculate on the status of copula be and possessive have (2.5.4).
2.5.2
A note on subject movement
We have developed the VP-internal subject hypothesis,*’ the hypothesis that the subject NP originates VP-internally and that its surface position is [Spec,IP], the specifier of the highest functional projection of the clause. We maintain the idea that the subject occupies the specifier of the highest functionai projection of the clause. In our new formulation [Spec,IP] will be replaced by [Spec,AGRP]. Pursuing this hypothesis, recall that syntactic movement is local, i.e. that it is governed by a shortest move requirement: head-movement, for instance, does not skip intervening heads. In a Split-INFL framework we will continue to adopt the locality condition on head-movement and we propose that the subject moves from [Spec,VP] to [Spec,AGRP] via [Spec, TP].
2.5.3
NegP in English: not versus n’t
2.5.3.1
Not as a specifier of NegP
2.5.3.1.1 ADJUNCT EXTRACTION AND. NOT Let us return to the extraction data discussed previously which showed that negative constituents give rise to intervention effects for wh-extraction of adjuncts: (41)
a.
*Why;, did he not say [cp that he was fired t,]?
Wh-movement moves an element to an A’-position, specifically to [Spec,CP]. Wh-movement of adjuncts cannot skip an intervening [Spec,CP]: (41)
b.
*Why; do you wonder [cp when; he will do it ¢, ¢]?
In (41b) why cannot be extracted from the clause introduced by when. In (41a) we observe a similar effect, although why does not cross an interrogative [Spec,CP]. Given the representation of negation in terms of NegP, why in (41a) crosses [Spec,NegP]. We propose that [Spec,NegP] is also an A’-position: it is a position which is not typically associated with a grammatical function such as ‘subject’ or ‘object’. °° In chapter 2, section 2.
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
342
Negative constituents have certain properties in common with wh-phrases.*! Preposed negative constituents, for instance, give rise to subject-auxiliary inversion: (42)
Never in my life will I go there again.
If [Spec,NegP] is an A’-position and if mot is similar to a wh-constituent, then it is not surprising that an intervening negative constituent in [Spec,NegP] could have a blocking effect similar to that of [Spec,CP] filled by a wh-constituent.
2.5.3.1.2 WHETHER AND NOT In chapter 1 we discussed the realization of the C node. We proposed, as a first approximation, that whether and if both occupy the head C’. To distinguish them, we could say that their selectional properties differ: if selects finite clauses, whether selects either finite or non-finite clauses: (43)
a.
Iwonder
if I should go. whether
b.
I wonder *if to go. whether
In chapter 2,” we reconsidered the properties of if and whether and we tried to
account for the difference between them in terms of their respective positions in the CP domain. We proposed that whether is a maximal projection in [Spec,CP], and that if is a head in C’. In order to account for the difference in selection, it suffices to say that only heads can select their complement. If whether is not a head, it cannot select the sentence type of its complement. The assumption that whether is a maximal projection in [Spec,CP] and that if is a head in C’, combined with the proposal that not is a maximal projection, now also allows us to account for the contrast in (44): (44)
a.
b.
I wonder whether or not they will come.
*I wonder if or not they will come.
In (44a) whether and not are co-ordinated. On the not unreasonable assumption
that only constituents of the same type can be co-ordinated (notably, that heads co-ordinate with heads, and maximal projections co-ordinate with maximal
and projections), the contrast between (44a) and (44b) confirms that whether
not have the same status, while if and mot do not have the same status.
2.5.3.2
Not versus n’t
n’t in The question arises as to the status of the contracted negative marker (45a): (45)
a.
He didn’t leave.
31 As we saw in chapter 2, section 1.4.4.1.3. » In section 1.1.2.
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
320
In (45a) n’t is associated with the auxiliary verb do. N’t and the auxiliary move together to C, as shown by (45b): (45)
b.
Didn’t he leave?
Like French ne, English n’t is a head which attaches to — or incorporates to — another head. The partial underlying structure of (45a) and (45b) would be
(45c):
(45) c.
CP ec Spec
eS (Gi
Siti nett C AGRP rae NP
AGR’
UL pxGiecine AGR
NegP
aa Spec
Neg’ D Sains
Neg
)
T’ purge redline
it
WP
re
Spec
n’t
do+past
he
i
i
leave
We propose that the strong form of the negative marker, ot, is like French pas: it occupies [Spec,NegP]. The weak variant of not, n’t, is like French ne. It heads NegP. Because n't is a phonologically reduced element, it needs to be supported by another head. T (here do) moves to Neg; T picks up 7’t and they jointly move to AGR. The movement of ’t to AGR is head-to-head-movement. N’t moves along with the auxiliary in cases of subject—auxiliary inversion (45b). Consider now (46). The preposed wh-phrase why cannot be construed with the embedded clause: (46) cannot be interpreted as a question concerning the reason why he was fired. (46)
*Why; didn’t he say [.p that he was fired t,]?
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
321
We have seen” that not, the specifier of NegP, blocks wh-movement of an
adjunct. This can be accounted for under the not unreasonable assumption that not is an A’-element in [Spec,NegP]. How is it possible for 1’t, which we analyse as a head, to have the same intervention effect? Before we try to account for the parallelism between not and n’t, recall that we signalled a similar situation with respect to intervention effects of CPmaterial. Both whether and if block adjunct extraction: (47)
a.
*I ask [cp why; [jp they wonder [( if [)p Mary will resign #]]]].
b.
*I ask [cp why; [jp they wonder [¢p whether [,» Mary will resign ¢]]]].
We proposed that whether occupies [Spec,CP] and that if occupies C. When C is occupied by if, its specifier is not available for movement. Plausibly, the presence of if under C endows the specifier of CP with a [+wu] feature which prevents any other material from passing through it.
(47)
c.
They take scope %3 See also chapter 5, section 3.
342
Developments in the Analysis of the Clause
over the clause and influence the licensing of other constituents inside the clause, such as polarity items. Negative constituents are operators; topics are not operators.
4.3.2
Hungarian focalization
In English, SAI is triggered by wh-preposing in root clauses and by negative inversion in both root and embedded clauses. Topicalization fails to trigger inversion. In Hungarian, wh-preposing gives rise to inversion in embedded clauses. In (89a), the complementizer hogy (‘that’) precedes the preposed wh-constituent, which in turn precedes the inverted verb (/atta) and the subject (Janos): (89)
a.
Nem tudom hogy melyik filmet latta Janos tegnap este. not I-know that which film saw Janos yesterday evening ‘I don’t know which film Janos saw last night.’
Following our analysis of English negative inversion, we propose that the interrogative constituent melyik filmet occupies the specifier of XP and that the verb is dominated by X: (89)acbs
CP
l
Foe ait
G
XP vialserie anieren op
Spec
ae ie
Xx
eee
We
aS
hogy
melyik filmet latta >
ol st
that
which film
Janosep.
3 4 5
Chapter 1, Chapter 1, Chapter 1, Chapter 2, See chapter
section 1. section 3. section 3.7. section 1.3. 1, section 1.3.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
362
say extends to traces of other constituents. In section 3 we return to the role of functional projections in the structure of the nominal projection. We will discover that just as the lexical projection VP is dominated by a number of functional projections (cf. chapter 3), the lexical projection NP is dominated by NP-related functional layers.
1
Binding
We have already considered a number of situations in which grammatical relations are subject to locality conditions. The assignment of thematic roles is
subject to a locality condition;® so are selection’ and case-assignment.” A locality condition on movement was defined’ in terms of potential landing sites. NPmovement, for instance, must move an NP to the nearest landing site, a subject position; wh-movement must target the nearest [Spec,CP]. Locality relations in movement are illustrated in (1) and (2) below. (1)
a. b.
John, seems [jp ¢; to [yp ¢, like Mary]]. *John, seems [that [ he [yp ¢; likes Mary]]].
(1a) is grammatical: the moved NP John originates in the specifier of the VP of the lower clause.'° Sentence (1b) is ungrammatical: the moved constituent John has crossed a potential landing site, the subject position of the finite embedded
clause. In the representations below we will often use the labels IP’! and CP” as abbreviations for more complex clause structures. In (2a) why moves to the matrix [Spec,CP] via the intermediate [Spec,CP]; in (2b) one-step movement of why across what is ungrammatical. (2)
a. b.
Why; do you say [ ¢, that [p Nelson bought this book t,]]? *Why; did you say [cp what; [jp Nelson bought ¢; ¢]]?
Below we will see that locality conditions also play a role in the semantic relations which are established between the constituents of sentences.’’ In this section we turn to the interpretationof nominal constituents. We will examine three types of NPs, illustrated in (3): (3)
a. b.
John has contradicted himself. John has contradicted him.
In (3a) the NP John is a referential expression: it picks out a referent from the universe of discourse, the domain we are talking about. The NP himself is a reflexive element; as such it does not pick out an entity from the domain of ° ? * *
Chapter 1, section 1. Chapter 1, sections 1.2 and 2.5.8. Cf. chapter 1, section 3.7.4. In chapter 2, section 1.4.3. Cf. chapter 2, section 2 for arguments that the subject originates in [Spec,VP].
Discussed in chapter 3, section 2. Discussed in chapter 3, section 4. Further illustration of the role of locality in sentence interpretation will be provided in chapter 5, sections 1.6 and 2.3.3. :
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
363
discourse. Himself is referentially dependent on the subject NP John in that himself refers to the referent of the NP John. In (3b) the object NP him is a pronoun which, in this particular example, cannot refer to the referent of John.
1.1
The interpretation of reflexives
1.1.1
Antecedents
Consider the examples in (4): (4)
a. b.
John hurt himself. *Himself arrived on time.
c.
*Mary hurt himself.
Each of the sentences above contains the element himself, a reflexive. Himself is the third person masculine singular reflexive. In (4a) himself is referentially dependent on John: the referent of himself is the same as the referent of John. A reflexive element is referentially dependent on another NP, which is referred to as the antecedent. In (4a) the NP John is the antecedent of himself. The anteced-
ent matches the reflexive in terms of its grammatical features person, number, and gender: himself has the features [3rd person], [singular], and [masculine]. From the data in (4b) and (4c), we infer that the distribution of reflexives is not completely free; it is subject to constraints. By definition, a reflexive element depends on another NP in the sentence for its interpretation; hence it cannot
occur by itself. (4b) is ungrammatical because the reflexive lacks an antecedent. (4c) is also ungrammatical; the feminine singular NP Mary cannot serve as the antecedent for himself since himself is masculine. Therefore, as Mary cannot be the antecedent of himself, the reflexive in (4c) lacks an antecedent, just as in (4b), and the sentence is ungrammatical. Let us introduce some terminology to express the referential dependency of the reflexive and the antecedent. We will say that the antecedent binds the
reflexive. By their very nature, reflexives have to be bound. The antecedent of the reflexive is the binder of the reflexive. We encode the binding relation by means of co-indexation: (5)
a. b.
John, hurt himself,. *Mary; hurt himselfj.
In the next sections we examine additional constraints on the relation between the antecedent and the reflexive which it binds.
1.1.2
C-command and binding
As A reflexive has to have an antecedent with matching grammatical features. can sentence the in NP such any just not however, (6), in shown by the pair serve as an antecedent for a reflexive:
(6)
a. b.
John hurt himself. *Himself hurt John.
e it binds. The data in (6) suggest that the antecedent has to precede the reflexiv ship: relation binding a h establis to nt But precedence is not sufficie
364 (7)
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases a. b.
John’s sister enjoyed herself at the party. *John’s sister enjoyed himself at the party.
In (7a) the reflexive herself is bound by the subject NP1 John’s sister, which precedes it. In (7b) the reflexive cannot be bound by NP2 John, although NP2 also precedes the reflexive. The relevant part of the structure of the sentences is represented in diagram format in (8). This representation is provisional; we will return to the internal structure of the NP in section 3 below.
(8)
IP es
NP1
1
a
NP2
N’ Gen
i
VP I
’ ei
a.
John
eS
sister
-ed
oisnarls
V
NP
aoy
a *himself
Why is it that NP1 John’s sister can function as the antecedent for the reflexive herself in the object position of enjoy, while NP2 John cannot function as the antecedent for the reflexive himself in the same position? In the tree diagram (8) NP1 John’s sister c-commands the reflexive: the first branching node dominating John’s sister is IP and IP also dominates herself. NP2 John does not ccommand himself: the first branching node dominating NP2 John is NP1, which does not dominate himself. We conclude that in order to function as an antecedent an NP must c-command the reflexive. As shown by (7d), the c-command condition on binding will also rule out (7c) in which the reflexive is the subject and the antecedent is the object. (7)
c.
*Humself contradicted John.
d.
IP
cepa NP
l’
Bg Stach
I
VP
.
ip
nee V NP himself
-ed contradict
sais
* Cf. chapter 2, section 1.4.2, for the notion c-command.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
1.1.3
365
A-binding
We have seen that the antecedent of a reflexive must c-command the reflexive.
Consider now the following examples. (9)
a. — [p Mary says [cp that [jp John, contradicted himself,]]]. b. [opp John;, [jp Mary says [cp #; [¢; will never contradict himself.]]]]. C. *[ropp John;, [jp himself, says [cp [he; will never contradict Mary]]]].
In (9a) the reflexive is bound by the subject NP John, which occupies an Aposition, the canonical subject position of the sentence, [Spec,IP]. In (9b) John is the antecedent of himself, but it is topicalized, i.e. it occupies an A’-position. Let us say it is in [Spec,TopP]."° At first glance the grammaticality of (9b) suggests that an NP in an A’-position can also bind a reflexive, but this conclusion would be too rash as can be seen when we consider (9c). If an NP in an A’-position could bind a reflexive, we would expect (9c) to be grammatical: the NP John is also topicalized. In its S-structure position, John c-commands the reflexive himself in the matrix subject position, and yet the sentence is not grammatical. In order to rule out (9c) we propose that the antecedent of a reflexive MUST
occupy an A-position. This conclusion is not problematic for (9b), wherein John is topicalized. We assume it has moved from the lower subject position in which it leaves a co-indexed trace; the trace of the subject occupies an A-position and binds the reflexive.
1.1.4
Locality conditions on binding: the binding domain
Having established that the antecedent must occupy an A-position and that it must c-command the reflexive, let us now turn to the definition of the binding domain of the reflexive, that is, the domain in which the reflexive must be bound by an antecedent. (10a) is ungrammatical: (10)
a.
*John considers [cp that [jp Mary should not contradict himself]].
In contrast, (10b) is grammatical:
(10)
b.
John considers [cp that [jp Mary should not contradict herself ]].
As a first hypothesis, let us say that a reflexive must be bound within the first clause that dominates it. In (10a) himself cannot be bound by John because the NP is outside the dominating clause, while in (10b) herself can successfully be bound by Mary because Mary is the subject of the first clause dominating the reflexive. The antecedent of the reflexive must be contained in the first clause
dominating the reflexive; the antecedent and the reflexive must be clause-mates. The binding relation between a reflexive and its antecedent is thus subject toa locality condition. The clause-mate condition on the binding of reflexives is also illustrated by the contrast between ungrammatical (10c) and grammatical (10d): ‘5 Cf, chapter 3, sections 4.2 and 4.3.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
366 (10)
c. d.
*John asked Mary [cp whether [jp Bill could give some information about herself]]. John wondered [cp whether [jp Bill had asked Mary for some informa]]. tion about herself
Let us test the locality condition on the relation between the antecedent and the reflexive by applying it to further data. In our discussion above we said that the reflexive must be bound within the first dominating clause. The examples we used illustrated situations in which the reflexive was bound within the first dominating finite clause. We may now wonder whether the domain of binding should be defined in terms of the finite clause, or whether we should maintain a more general notion of clause, including non-finite clauses and small clauses. We will examine each of these two in turn. Consider the examples in (11) in which the reflexive is contained in a non-finite clause: (11)
a. b.
John considers [Mary; to be too proud of herselfi]. *John, considers [Mary to be too proud of himself,].
In (11a) consider selects a non-finite complement whose subject is Mary: “Mary is too proud of herself’. The domain in which the reflexive has to be bound is more restricted than the first finite clause containing the reflexive; the binding domain is restricted to the non-finite clause Mary to be too proud of herself. In (11b) the reflexive himself, which is contained in the non-finite clause, cannot be
bound by an antecedent outside it; John, the subject of the verb consider, cannot serve as an antecedent because it is not contained in the non-finite clause. Consider now the case of small clauses. (12)
a. b.
John considers [Mary; too proud of herself;]. *John, considers [Mary too proud of himself,].
In (12a) consider selects a small clause complement'® whose subject is Mary: ‘Mary is too proud of herself’. The domain in which the reflexive has to be bound is again more restricted than the first finite clause containing the reflexive; the binding domain is now restricted to the small clause Mary too proud of herself. In (12b) the reflexive himself, which is contained in the small clause, cannot be bound by an antecedent outside it; John, the subject of the verb consider, cannot serve as an antecedent because it is not contained in the small
clause. We conclude that all clause-types are binding domains. We might wish to reinterpret this observation in the light of the locality condition which we have repeatedly discussed. In (12), for example, the subject of the small clause is the
first potential binder for the reflexive and will intervene in other binding relations. Similarly, in (11), the subject of the non-finite clause is the first potential
binder for the reflexive and blocks binding relations outside the dominating clause. In (12c), IP1 is the finite clause, IP2 the small clause. "6 Cf. chapter 1, section 2.5.9.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases AD
enc.
367
IP1 Se-sohjet as NP 1 Me FE I1
ns
IP2 ee
NP
125 she
[2 John
Mary
MT ah
AP
toot
Mary c-commands the reflexive contained in the AP and it is a potential binder. Mary, the lower subject, is the closest potential binder. Binding by John is not possible because of the intervention of the lower subject, Mary, which is a potential antecedent. We can redefine the clause-mate condition on binding in terms of potential antecedents: the binding domain of a reflexive is delimited by the first c-commanding subject.
1.1.5
Reflexives as subjects
If the first c-commanding subject defines a binding domain for a reflexive, then the question arises as to what happens if the reflexive is itself a subject. Does a subject reflexive delimit its own binding domain or can the binding domain for reflexive subjects be extended upwards? Three situations arise. The reflexive may be the subject of a finite clause, it may be the subject of a non-finite clause, and it may be the subject of a small clause. We first examine finite clauses; then we will discuss non-finite clauses and small clauses together.
1.1.5.1
Reflexives as subjects of finite clauses
If the reflexive is the subject of a finite clause, the finite clause itself constitutes lack a the binding domain for the reflexive and the reflexive will inevitably as its reflexive a have cannot binder. This means that an English finite clause subject. (13)
a. b. c.
*John considers [cp that [ip himself is an excellent choice]]. rst. *I expect [cp that [jp myself should be invited]]. ]. invited] is f yoursel [ip when [cp reply *You should always
368
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
1.1.5.2.
Reflexives as subjects of non-finite clauses and small clauses
When the reflexive is the subject of another clausal constituent, a non-finite clause or a small clause, then the binding domain can be extended to include the next c-commanding subject. This is illustrated in (14): (14)
a. b.
John considers [} himself to be clever]. John considers [himself clever].
In (14a) the reflexive himself is the subject of a non-finite IP, and here it is
successfully bound by the outside subject John. In (14b) a binding relation is established between himself, the reflexive subject of the small clause, and John, the subject of the higher clause. The binding domain of a reflexive which is the subject of a non-finite clause or a small clause can thus be extended beyond the immediately containing (non-finite or small) clause. As shown by (14c) and (14d), the extension of the binding domain is not unrestricted. In (14c), for instance, himself is the subject of the non-finite IP3. While Bill, the subject of the next higher clause (IP2), can serve as binder for himself, John, the subject of the topmost clause, IP1, cannot bind the reflexive. Similarly, in (14d), Bill, the subject of the immediately dominating clause, IP2, can function as the binder of himself, but the higher subject John cannot. (14)
c. d.
*[p, John, expects [)p) Bill to consider [)p; himself; to be clever]]]. *[p, John; expects [,p, Bill to consider [,»; himself, clever]]].
When the reflexive is the subject of a non-finite clause or of a small clause, the binding domain is extended to the next higher clause up, that is, to the domain containing the first c-commanding subject. In our examples above, we have shown that finite clauses are always binding domains. If a reflexive is the subject of a finite clause, this will inevitably lead to ungrammaticality: (14)
e.
*John, expects [cp that [pp himself; will be selected]].
The question might arise why subjects of finite clauses have binding domains which are different from those of non-finite clauses and small clauses. The binding contrast between subjects of finite clauses and those of other clause-types is related to other differences between the subject of the finite clause and that of the non-finite clause. The subject of a finite clause has its case assigned or licensed within the finite clause, by the finite I; in contrast, the subject of a non-finite clause or a small clause is related to an outside element: its case is licensed by an outside governor.’ The fact that the subject of a non-finite clause or a small clause is governed and case-marked from outside its clause apparently leads to the extension of its binding domain.
1.1.6
Reflexives contained within subjects
A reflexive subject of a finite clause is ungrammatical. The finite clause constitutes the binding domain. Within the finite clause the subject is the highest '’ Chapter 1, section 3.7.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
369
A-position of the clause: this entails that there is no A-position available which
c-commands the subject and which could host the antecedent. Consider (15a), however: (15)
a.
John; expects [q that [} pictures of himself, will be shown next week]].
In (15a) the reflexive himself is contained WITHIN the subject of the finite clause. The example shows that such a reflexive can be bound from outside the finite clause. When a reflexive is contained inside the subject of a finite clause, the binding domain can be extended. Again, though, the extension of the binding domain is not unlimited, as shown by the contrast between (15b) and (15c). In (15b) himself is contained within the subject of the lower clause, IP3. It is correctly bound by John, the subject of the immediately dominating clause, IP2. As shown by the ungrammaticality of (15c), the subject of a still higher clause, here Bill, the subject of IP1, cannot bind the reflexive. (15)
b. — [)p; Bill expects [,p. John; to agree [cp that [,p; pictures of himself, will be shown next week]]]]. c.
*[,p, Bill; expects [jp. John to agree [, that [jp; pictures of himself, will be shown next week]]]].
We conclude that if a reflexive is contained within the subject of a finite clause, the binding domain is extended, but the extension is restricted to the first clause up. The binding domain for a subject-contained reflexive is not delimited by the containing subject itself but by the immediately higher subject. The same extension of binding domains is also observed when the reflexive is contained within the subject NP of a non-finite clause or a small clause. In (16a) John successfully binds himself, the reflexive contained within the subject NP of IP3. In (16b), on the other hand, binding of himself by Bill, a still higher subject, is ungrammatical.
a. — [p; Bill believes [p, John, to expect [jp; pictures of himself; to be on sale next week]]].
(16)
b.
1.1.7
*[jp, Bill, believes [p. John to expect [jp; pictures of himself; to be on sale next week]]].
Summary: reflexives and binding
Let us summarize the main points that have emerged from the discussion so far.
— — — — — —
Reflexives have to be locally A-bound. X is bound if X is co-indexed with a c-commanding antecedent. X is A-bound if X is bound by an antecedent in an A-position. X is locally bound if X is bound within its binding domain. The binding domain of X is the domain in which X has to be bound.
The binding domain of the reflexive is delimited by the first c-commanding subject.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
370 —
—
—
1.2
When the reflexive is the subject of a finite clause, this clause is the binding domain. When the reflexive is the subject of a non-finite clause, or of a small clause, the binding domain is extended and delimited by the immediately higher (QL > subject. When the reflexive is contained within a subject, the binding domain is extended and delimited by the immediately higher subject.
Anaphors: reflexives and reciprocals
The distribution of reciprocals such as each other is similar to that of reflexives, as the reader can verify in the following examples: (17)
Thelma and *The woman; *Thelma and *Thelma and *Thelma and eos,
Louise; trust each other,. trusts each other,;. Louise,’s lawyer trusts each other;. Louise; expect [p the book to please each other;]. Louise; expect [¢p that [ each other; will do the work]].
F
[p, Patsy and Edina think [. that [p, Thelma and Louise; expect [3 each other; to write the introduction]]]].
g.
[p, Patsy and Edina think [(» that [,p.) Thelma and Louise, consider [3 each other; the best candidate]]]].
h.
Thelma and Louise; expect [,p [yp recent pictures of each other;] to be
displayed at the exhibition]. Both reflexives and reciprocals are referentially dependent on another NP, their antecedent. The conditions which define the referential dependency between a reciprocal and its antecedent are identical to the conditions defining the relation between a reflexive and its antecedent. As was the case for reflexives, the antecedent of the reciprocal must match the features of the reciprocal (17b); the antecedent must c-command the reciprocal (17c), and it must be situated within the binding domain (17d). The binding domain for a reciprocal is determined in the same way as for a reflexive: it is delimited by the first c-commanding subject. When the reciprocal itself is the subject of a finite clause (17e), it delimits its binding domain and hence will be unable to satisfy the binding requirement. A reciprocal which is the subject of a non-finite clause (17f) or of a small clause (17g) has to be bound in the domain delimited by the next c-commanding subject: in (17f), for instance, Thelma and Louise can bind each other, but Patsy and Edina cannot. A reciprocal contained inside a subject (17h) has its binding domain determined by the nearest c-commanding subject. As a general label to designate referentially dependent elements such as
reciprocals and reflexives we sometimes use the term anaphors.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases 1.3.
ora
Pronouns
(18a) is a sentence with a reflexive object; in (18b) the object is realized as a pronoun. (18)
a. b.
John likes himself. John likes him.
The interpretation of (18a) is different from that of (18b). In (18a) himself must be bound by John. In (18b), however, the pronoun cannot be bound by John: it must be free. Him cannot refer to the same person as the subject NP John. Now consider the interpretation of the sentences in (19): (19)
a. b.
*John thinks [that [Mary likes himself]]. John thinks [that [Mary likes him]].
In (19a) the reflexive himself cannot be bound by John: the intervening subject Mary delimits the binding domain to the lower clause. (19b) is grammatical and has two interpretations. The pronoun him may lack an antecedent inside the clause, in which case it refers to a referent in the context or in the discourse; alternatively, him may be bound by John, the subject of the matrix clause. From the comparison between (18b) and (19b), it appears that although the pronoun him must not be bound inside the immediately containing clause, a pronoun need not be free in absolute terms. A pronoun such as him must be locally free: it must not be bound within its own binding domain, but it may be bound outside that domain. In section 1 above we identified a c-command condition on binding. A constituent can bind another constituent only if the former c-commands the latter. In (20a) John does not c-command himself, hence it cannot bind it: (20)
a.
*John;’s sister has invited himself.
The c-command condition is also relevant for pronominal interpretation:
(20)
b.
*[xpi: [xp2 John’s] sister] has invited her;.
In (20b) NP1 John’s sister c-commands the pronoun her. Since pronouns must
be free in the binding domain, and since NP1 is contained within the binding domain of the pronoun her, John’s sister cannot be co-indexed. On the other hand, John, NP2, can be co-indexed with an object pronoun in (20c):
(20)
c.
[wrx [px John’s] sister] has invited him;.
John and In (20c) NP2 John does not c-command the pronoun him, so even if
that him are co-indexed John does not bind him in the technical sense. Recall'® binding implies c-command. '8 From section 1.1.2.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
S72
(21)
IP ee NP1 Acad
NP2
eee I’
ee
N’ Gen
a I
Ve CB ipetite
V John
*s
sister
-S
alm
NP ie
From the examples in (18)—(20), we tentatively formulate the generalization that unlike a reflexive, which must be bound in a local domain, a pronoun must NOT be bound in its binding domain. Not being bound means not being coindexed with a c-commanding constituent. In (20c)/(21), for instance, the NP John does not c-command him. This means that even if we co-index the NP John and the pronoun him, to encode that they refer to the same person, the NP John will not technically bind the pronoun him. Hence the pronoun him can be said not to be locally bound, or to be locally free. On the other hand, if we co-index the NP John’s sister and the pronoun her in (20b), the sentence will violate the requirement that pronouns be free. Since the subject NP John’s sister c-commands the object pronoun, the subject NP will locally bind the pronoun. (22) shows that just as was the case for anaphor binding, the binding domain of a pronoun is delimited by a c-commanding subject:
(22)
a. b.
John; considers [Mary too fond of him]. John, considers [Mary to be too fond of him].
In (22a) the pronoun him is contained in a small clause, set off by square brackets. The subject of the small clause, Mary, delimits the binding domain for him, the pronoun. Within its binding domain, the pronoun him must be free. The sentence is grammatical. That John, the main clause subject, is co-indexed with him is unproblematic: John is outside the local domain. In (22a), the pronoun him is free in its binding domain. The reader can check that the analysis also extends to (22b), in which him is contained within a non-finite clause. ¥
Recall” that a reflexive subject of a finite clause delimits its own binding domain (23a). The same applies to the pronominal subject of a finite clause (23b):
(23)
a. b.
*John; thinks [cp that [p himself, should leave first]]. John, thinks [
N
N
One argument which favours (118g) over (118h) is the analogy with verb move-
verb ment. We have elaborated an account for (120)-(121) in terms of leftward movement:
(120) (121)
c. c.
—
English French
Subject Subject
V
Adv Adv
V
———_—————_.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
426
Let us pursue this intuition. Consider the distribution of the boldface head N in
(122):
(122)
a.
the first Italian invasion of Albania
b.
la prima invasione italiana dell’Albania the first invasion Italian of Albania
In both examples, the head noun invasion/invasione assigns two thematic roles: one is expressed by the adjective Italian/italiana, the other by the PP of Albania/ dell’Albania. Thematically speaking, the nominal projections in (122a) and (122b) are analogous to the sentence in (122c): (122)
c.
Italy first invaded Albania.
Let us assume that the assignment of thematic relations is uniform across categories, that is, that the thematic roles assigned within the NP are assigned in the same ways as those in the VP. Following the VP-internal subject hypothesis, we proposed that a verb assigns the external theta-role to the specifier of its VP and the internal thematic role to its complement:
(ioe
as
VP ea
ka
Spec
Vv’ oe
Italy
Se
Vv
complement
wo
Albania
By analogy, we assume that the same pattern appears in the NP:
(123) b.
NP net aiode ieFe
Spec
N’ fee eat
N
Italian es italiana invasione
ball
P
PP
a dell’ Albania
In English the head N remains in the NP; in Italian the head N moves leftward, out of the NP. The N which moves out of the NP undergoes head-movement; therefore, its landing site must be a head position. (123c) shows that the structure we have elaborated so far is insufficient. We need an additional head position to the right of the adjective prima and to the left of the adjective italiana:
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases (423)h
&
427
DP
I
ab
thet tharFac
D
NP2 Polis. tinigices AP
Fogligh NP1
Bak f
ae
Spec
N’
‘Soe N PP la
prima
invasione;
italiana
|
—,
We postulate an additional functional head (F) whose projection (FP) is domin-
ated by DP and which itself dominates NP. This proposal also entails that we cannot maintain that the adjective prima is NP-adjoined. If the AP is not NPadjoined then it must occupy a specifier position. Given the availability of the maximal projection FP, let us propose that the pre-nominal adjective prima in Italian occupies the specifier position of FP:
(123))!
d.
DP
i
Sa
Seatahaes
D
FP
a
ma
Spec
F’ nba
sna
F
NP SF
ieee
Spec
Pa
N’ (SPT
N
la
prima
invasione;
italiana
|
PP
dell’ Albania
As before, head-movement of the noun leaves a trace.
We assume that English (122a) and Italian (122b) do not differ in terms of - adjectival syntax, but rather in terms of the position of the head N (invasion/ the invasione). We propose that the structure of (122a) is like that of (122b),
only difference being that English N does not move to F;
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
428
(12.3,
aene:
DP
I
pret
et Rescce
D
FP woe alee aESE
Spec
EG vse
TART
F
NP Mh
Aes
Spec
N’ en
the
first
Italian
ae
N
PP
mle
vaNe
A number of questions arise which we address here and in section 3.7. (i) How shall we characterize the head F, the landing site of N-movement in Italian? (ii) Why is there a contrast between Italian and French on the one hand and English and German on the other with respect to N-to-F-movement? (iii) A third question concerns the syntax of adjectival phrases. (122b) has forced us to abandon the adjunction analysis for the pre-nominal adjective prima in Italian:
should we maintain the NP-adjunction analysis for other APs?°* In (123d) and (123e) we propose that the specifier of F is filled by the adjective. One element that throws light on the nature of F and on the contrast in Nto-F-movement between Romance and Germanic languages is the observation that in Italian and French, articles and adjectives are inflected for number and gender, while they are invariant in English: (124)
a.
Italian il primo capitolo the first chapter
French masculine singular le premier chapitre
b.
la prima descrizione feminine singular the first description
la premiére description
c.
i primi capitoli the first chapters
les premiers chapitres
d.
le prime descrizioni feminine plural —_ les premiéres descriptions the first descriptions
masculine plural
We might wish to say that the difference in the overt agreement morphology on articles and adjectives suggests that nominal agreement is stronger in Italian and °° We address the last question in section 3.7 below.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
429
French than it is in English. As can be seen from the paradigms in (124) each number-gender combination has a different form: primo, for instance, is the Italian masculine singular form, and contrasts with the masculine plural form primi and with the feminine forms, prima and prime. Pursuing this line of rea-
soning, we might say that the functional projection (FP) whose head (F) attracts the verb has a head containing agreement features, and that this head attracts the noun in French and Italian, though not in English. Tentatively, we label this projection as a nominal AGRP.
(125)
DP
|
patter a0C
D
vee
AGRP eT
ee
Spec
AGR’ PG
nla
2
AGR
NP eet
der
Spec
N’ _
the la
first prima
invasione;
Italian italiana
ie
ee
N
PP
ea ft;
aN dell'Albania
In English, the AGR node in the DP is weak — witness the absence of morphological agreement of the noun with the article and the adjective; hence the head noun is not attracted by the AGR head. Further comparative data show that the link between the presence of overt agreement morphology and N-movement is less direct than it might be thought. The trigger for the movement of N cannot be expressed in terms of the mere presence versus absence of agreement morphology on adjectives. Observe, for instance, that in German, adjectives also have agreement endings, as shown by the following examples:
(126)
a.
das frische Brot the fresh bread
neuter singular
b.
die frischen Brote the fresh loaves
neuter plural
c.
die frische Blume the fresh flower
feminine singular
d.
die frischen Blumen the fresh flowers
feminine plural
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
430 e.
der frische Kuchen the fresh cake
masculine singular
f.
die frischen Kuchen the fresh cakes
masculine plural
In spite of the overt agreement inflection on the pre-nominal adjective frisch, which takes the form frische in (126a, c, e) and frischen (126b, d, f), N-movement across the adjective does not take place in German. We could say that agreement in the German adjectives in (126) is ‘weaker’ than that in Romance in that agreement does not differentiate exhaustively the various elements of the paradigm. For instance, the form frischen is used for all forms of the plural: neuter plural (126b), feminine plural (126d) and masculine plural (126f). French and Italian adjectival AGR is strong enough to attract the head N, while nominal AGR is not strong in English or German. That the trigger for N-movement cannot be fully defined in terms of the overt agreement morphology specifically associated with adjectives is also shown by data such as Italian (122d). In this example, the noun invasione has moved to the left of the adjective italiana; hence, the AGR head which we postulated before and which hosts the moved N must be available. (122d) is assigned the structure in (122e). The presence of AGRP does not depend on the presence of an adjective: in (122e) AGRP is projected in spite of the fact that [Spec,AGRP] is not filled by an adjective. (122)
d.
Vinvasione italiana dell’Albania the invasion Italian of Albania
e.
[pp [p 1’) [acrp [acer invasione;] [xp italiana ¢, dell’Albania]]]
The data illustrated in (122d) suggest that unlike the agreement phrase which we postulate in the clause, and whose specifier must be obligatorily filled in order to satisfy the subject requirement, the functional projection in the DP domain whose head hosts the moved N does not impose the analogue of the subject requirement: the adjective phrase which we associated with its specifier does not
have to be present.”
3.5.2.2
Possessor phrases, subjects and [Spec,AGRP]
The pre-nominal possessor phrases (i.e. the possessive pronoun and the English Saxon genitive) function as the subject of the DP. One of the arguments that the possessor phrase in the nominal projection acts like a subject is that it is relevant for binding: (i) it serves as a binder, and (ii) it delimits a binding domain. The possessor phrase may receive a thematic role from the head noun. Recall that we proposed that the AP Italian in (127a) and italiana in (127b) occupy the specifier position of NP: ® For further differences between the DP and the clause we refer to section 3.5.2.4. For
more discussion of the syntax of APs see also section 3.7.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases (E27
eta
431
ate. the [acre [xp Italian invasion of Albania]]] [pp [acrp invasione, [\» italiana t, dell’Albania]]]
One might wish to propose that the possessor phrases in (128) occupy the same position: (128)
a.
Italy’s invasion of Albania
b.
la sua invasione dell’Albania
However, this cannot be the correct analysis. First, consider the distribution of the possessor phrases and the pre-nominal adjectives in the examples in (129): (129)
a. b.
Mary’s frequent criticism of John her frequent criticism of John
In (129a) the genitive DP Mary’s realizes the external argument of the N criticism. If we assume that the modifying AP frequent is NP-adjoined, then Mary’s cannot be in [Spec,NP] for [Spec,NP] follows the modifying AP. Since Mary receives its theta-role from the head-N criticism, we assume that it is basegenerated in [Spec,NP] and has moved leftward, leaving a co-indexed trace in its base-position. The same conclusion is valid for the position of her in (129b). (129c) is a partial representation in which we omit the DP level.
e209):
alpeer bh ?
AP
NP1 ree
Weteas
ere ne Mary’s,; her;
frequent
#
N
PP
criticism
of John
We might propose that the possessor phrase is NP-adjoined, but this cannot be correct either in view of (130):
(130)
a.
Italy’s first invasion of Albania
b. c.
its first invasion of Albania la sua prima invasione dell’Albania the her first invasion of Albania
e first, In English, the genitive possessor phrase in (130a) precedes the adjectiv AGRP. labelled on, projecti al function a of which we situated in the specifier sua in rpart counte Italian its and (130b) in éts - Similarly, the possessive pronoun its receives which phrase, r possesso the that (130c) precede the AP. This means ng precedi site landing a to leftward moved have thematic role in [Spec,NP], must
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
432
[Spec,AGRP]. Moreover, (130c) shows that, at least in Italian, the possessor follows D. (130d) is a partial representation for the Italian nominal projection:
(130)
d.
DP D’
D
?
AGRP Spec
AGR’
AGR
hc
ee
Spec
la
sua;
prima
ce
nya
invasione; _ ¢,
A eA
N
PP
t
dell’ Albania
Either the possessor sua is AGRP-adjoined, or it must be occupying the specifier position of an as yet unidentified functional projection. The case properties of the Hungarian possessor phrase provide evidence for the latter option. In Hungarian, the pre-nominal possessor which follows the determiner has nominative case. It overtly agrees with the head noun, as we saw in (108), repeated here as (1314:
(131)
7a,
war een the I-NoM ‘my hat’
kalap-om hat-1sg
Dahh.d savas the you-NoM ‘your hat’
kalap-od _hat-2sg
Cera beter the Peter-Nom ‘Peter’s hat’
kalap-ja __hat-3sg
In the clausal projection, the nominative DP occupies the specifier position of the highest functional projection of the inflectional domain, AGRP. Given the similarity in case between the possessor phrase in the Hungarian DP and the subject in the finite clause, it is tempting to propose that the pre-nominal possessor must also occupy the specifier position of an inflectional head. On the basis of the Hungarian data in (131) we tentatively postulate a second AGRP in the nominal projection, which we label AGRP1 in representation (132). AGRP1 is distinct from the agreement projection whose head receives the N and which we label AGRP2. AGRP1 dominates AGRP2, since the specifier of AGRP1, the possessor phrase, precedes the adjectival projection which occupies the specifier -
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
433
of AGRP2. For ease of identification, we often refer to AGRP1 as the ‘possessor
AGRP’, and we refer to the constituent in the specifier of AGRP1 as the ‘possessor phrase’.
(132)
DP Db’
D
pe Spec
[possessor AGRP] AGR’‘1
AGR1
AGRP2
Spec
AGR’2 AGR2
NP
Spec
N’ N
aed b. , d. a the
sua; their; Italy’s; Peter Peter-NoM
prima first first
invasione;
¢, i t,
Pp
dell’ Albania t of Albania invasion of Albania invasion kalap-ja hat-NOM-3sg
In representations (132a—c) we assume that the external argument of invasione/
invasion originates NP-internally, and undergoes leftward movement. Representation (132) leads to many further questions. We cannot do full justice to the complexity of the problem here for two reasons. First, a complete discussion of the details of the structure of the nominal projection would quickly lead us to highly technical issues whose resolution often depends on theoretical
choices rather than empirical considerations. This would not be within the scope agreeof this introduction. Second, even if there is at least some trend towards
there are ment in the research bearing on the functional structure of the clause, the still many uncertainties as to the functional structure of the DP. Hopefully, be may that discussion above gives the reader an idea of the type of arguments study. advanced and also of the need for a comparative basis for of representaaspects specific two discuss we 3.5 section of In the remainder , possessive pronouns tion (132). One concerns the observation that in English ners. Remember “and genitives are in complementary distribution with determi l analysis of NPs. The that this observation was the starting point of our origina
does not follow from complementary distribution of determiners and possessors
434
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
the representation in (132) in which the possessor phrase occupies a position distinct from D. The second -issue we will deal with concerns the differences between nominal projections (DPs) and clauses (CPs).”°
3.5.2.3
D and possessors
The nominal projection is an extended projection of N. NP is dominated by functional projections, DP and AGRP. The head D is filled by an article, either definite or indefinite. We have proposed that the indefinite article may be nonovert (133b, c): (133)
a. b.
Ineed a book. I need 0 clothes.
c.
I need 0 money.
Since a nominal projection is always interpreted as being either definite or indefinite, we assume that the DP is always projected. Minimally, the NP is reinterpreted as a projection of D dominating a projection of N. Let us now return to nominal projections containing a possessor argument in the specifier of the (higher) possessor AGRP, such as those represented in (132), repeated here as (134):
(134)
DP Db’
D
AGRP1
Spec
AGR’‘1 AGR1
AGRP2
Spec
AGR’2
AGR2
NP Spec
N’ )
ave ta b. o sbi the 7
sua; their, Italy’s, Peter Peter-NoMm
prima first first
invasione,
t, t, t
PP
t dell’ Albania invasion of Albania invasion of Albania kalap-ja hat-NOM-3sg
: a : ; ; In section 3.6 we turn to the position of demonstratives, and in section 3.7 we conclude the discussion of the nominal projection with a reconsideration of the position of APs.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
250
There is some degree of cross-linguistic variation in the co-occurrence of the specifier of AGRP1, realized as the possessor, and the definite article. In Italian
(134a) the definite article is followed by a possessive pronoun sua which agrees with the head noun; in Hungarian (134d) the definite article a co-occurs with the nominative possessor in the specifier of AGRP1 and the possessor agrees in person
and number
with the head noun.
The possessive pronoun
(their) in
English (134b) is incompatible with the overt article; similarly in (134c) the prenominal Saxon genitive (Italy’s) cannot co-occur with the overt article. (135)
a.
*the their first invasion *their the first invasion
b.
*the Italy’s first invasion *Ttaly’s the first invasion
As mentioned above, regardless of the overt realization of the determiner an English nominal projection is always either definite or indefinite. If definiteness is encoded on D, we assume that all nominal projections in English, including those without overt determiner, contain the head D and are hence dominated by DP. On this assumption English nominal projections which contain a prenominal possessor phrase and which lack an overt determiner must also be characterized as projections of D. Evidence that English nominal projections with a pre-nominal possessive pronoun or a genitive must be characterized as definite or indefinite can be obtained from a consideration of the so-called existential construction, with
expletive there. This construction is only compatible with indefinite DPs. (136a)
and (136b), in which the post-verbal subject is a definite DP, are ungrammatical; (136c) and (136d), in which the post-verbal subject is an indefinite DP, are ‘grammatical.
(136)
a. b. c. d.
*There *There There There
is is is is
[she/her] waiting in your office. [the teacher] waiting in your office. [a student] waiting in your office. [someone] waiting in your office.
Consider now (137):
(137)
a. b. c. d.
*There *There There’ There
is is is is
[pp [pp [pp [pp
her notebook] lying on the floor. [pp the teacher’s] notebook] lying on the floor. [pp a student’s] notebook] lying on the floor. [pp someone’s] notebook] lying on the floor.
possessive pronoun In (137a) the specifier of the possessor AGRP1 contains the the existential with her, and the DP her notebook as a whole is incompatible s the gencontain construction; in (137b) the specifier of the possessor AGRP1 ction is constru ial existent itive of a definite DP (the teacher’s) and again the then the definite is or - ungrammatical. Apparently, when the pre-nominal possess te indefini an is or possess entire DP is considered definite. In (135c) and (135d) the e someon and student DPs a DP (a student, someone): witness the fact that the
436
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
are themselves compatible with the existential construction (136c, 136d). Hence,
a DP whose possessor phrase is indefinite qualifies as indefinite. If we assume that the definiteness of a nominal projection is encoded on D, then it follows that even in the absence of an overt determiner, constructions with possessor phrases are dominated by DP. As a first approximation, let us say that the definiteness feature on the possessor phrase in [Spec,AGRP1] matches that of the head D (but see below for a different proposal for English (134b) and (134c)). If the relevant DPs in (135) have a feature [+definite], the question arises why the
overt determiner is incompatible with the pre-nominal possessor phrase. However we account for the complementary distribution of determiners and possessors in English, it cannot be based on a principle which is fixed universally. In Italian (and in Hungarian), if not in English, possessors ARE compatible with the definite article. In (138a) the definite article cannot be omitted, as in (138b): (138)
a.
b.
La sua descrizione era sbagliata. the his description was wrong
*Sua descrizione era sbagliata.
The question arises why there should be cross-linguistic variation between English and Italian (and Hungarian) with respect to the distribution of the definite article. In the presence of a possessor phrase, D can be overt in Italian (and Hungarian), but.it must be non-overt in English. It would be desirable to relate the different distribution of determiner and possessor in English and Italian to another difference between these languages. One such difference concerns the form of the pre-nominal possessor. In Italian, the form of the possessive pronoun is determined by the grammatical features of the head noun: the possessive pronoun agrees in gender and number with the head N. (139)
a.
il suo commento
the his/her-masc-sg comment b.
i suoi commenti the his/her-masc-pl comments
c.
la sua descrizione the his/her-fem-sg description
d.
le sue descrizione the his/her-fem-pl descriptions
In English, the choice of the pronominal form his or her depends on the referent of the possessor itself and varies independently of the grammatical features of the head noun:
(140)
a. b. c. d.
Her Her His His
description was awful. descriptions were awful. description was awful. descriptions were awful.
Let us speculate on the relation between the agreement morphology on the
possessor and the availability of the article. We assume that Italian possessor
~
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
450
phrases such as mio/mia/miei/mie (‘my’) are the genitive forms of the pronoun, just like their English counterparts. Exploring the role of agreement, let us say
that in the Italian DP, the head of the possessor AGRP1-is strong and is licensed by an overtly agreeing possessor phrase, the pronominal genitive. Non-pronominal Saxon-type genitives are not licensed in Italian as they lack the visible agreement morphology required by the AGR head. (141)
a. b.
la mia/sua/tua/nostra descrizione *la Gianni descrizione
In English, we assume that the possessor AGR1 is weak: that is, it does not require an agreeing phrase in its specifier. In English, the Saxon genitive or the possessive pronoun does not match the number or gender of the head noun, as we have just seen. Pursuing this proposal further, we could postulate that the Italian possessor phrase (i.e. the possessive pronoun in [Spec,AGRP1]) has its case licensed by virtue of a specifier—head relation with the strong AGR1 head. In English, on the other hand, the possessor AGR1 is not strong. Exploring the weakness of possessor AGR1 in English, let us say that possessive AGR1 cannot license the case of the possessor on its own and needs some support. In English the non-overt D node provides that support and contributes to the licensing of the case of the possessor phrase. There are a number of alternative implementations of the hypothesis that D contributes to the case-licensing of the possessor phrase: we will illustrate three of them here. In each proposal, D is held to be partly responsible for the licensing of the possessor, and each proposal accounts for the complementary distribution of the overt determiner (i.e. the article) and the possessor phrase.
3.5.2.3.1
HYPOTHESIS 1: D AS A CASE LICENSER
“One line to pursue is that the null variant of D, which governs the specifier of its AGRP complement, directly licenses the genitive case of the possessor in the specifier of the possessor AGRP1. In (142a), AGR1 does not play any role in the
case-licensing of the possessor phrase.
(142) a.
DP D’
D
AGRP1
Spec
AGR1
[CASE]
— 0
AGR’1
John’s his
NP
|
hat
hat
to the possessor. The assumption is that only the null D can assign case
438
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
3.5.2.3.2. HYPOTHESIS 2: AGR-TO-D MOVEMENT If we wish to try to maintain a parallelism with the Italian and Hungarian data in which we ascribe a crucial role to AGR1 in the licensing of the case of the prenominal possessor phrase, we could pursue an alternative line of reasoning. Maintaining the idea that possessive AGR1 in English is insufficient to check the case of the possessor phrase in its specifier, and exploring the intuition that the null determiner contributes to the case-licensing of the possessor phrase, we could propose that the possessor AGR1 and D jointly license the case of the possessor phrase in [Spec,AGRP1]. To make this precise, we could say that the head of the possessor AGR1 in English raises and incorporates to D. In this proposal the non-overt determiner spells out a D node which has incorporated AGRI: (142)._.b.
DP
iF
ye
GMAT
AGR,; + D
BEAL
AGRP1 LWatieg Spree
Spec
AGRI’ ae
[CASE]
0
3.5.2.3.3.
a
AGR1
NP
|
John’s his
es
|
i
hat hat
HYPOTHESIS 3: AGR-TO-D MOVEMENT AND POSSESSOR RAISING
TO [SPEC,DP]
As a third variant of the analysis, we might propose that not only does incorporate to D, as in (142b), but that, as is the case in Hungarian and the possessor phrase must have a strict specifier-head relation with the head. Under this view, we could postulate that AGR raises to D and the sor phrase itself moves to the specifier of DP: (142)
c.
DP Spec
D’
D + AGR,
AGRP Spec
AGR’
AGR John’s,
his;
t
t;
t;
t
NP hat
hat
AGR1 Italian, AGR1 posses-
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
439
Each of the three proposals above is descriptively adequate. All three analyses account for the complementary distribution of the determiner and the possessor phrase: in none of the three proposals does the determiner have the same baseposition as the possessor phrase. In each of them, the possessor phrase origin-
ates in a specifier position and the determiner originates in a head position; determiners are heads while possessors are maximal projections. The data we have examined do not offer any indication as to which of the three proposals is _ preferable. The choice between the three might be made on theoretical grounds, the question being which of the three analyses is most compatible with the grammatical system in general. We shall not pursue this point here.
3.5.2.4
Some differences between the clause and the DP
Although there are striking parallelisms between the nominal projection and the clause, there are also some differences. We turn to them here.
3.5.2.4.1 THE SUBJECT REQUIREMENT AND ARGUMENTS IN THE NOMINAL PROJECTION Since a nominal argument is always interpreted as being either definite or indefinite, we postulate that DP is always projected. While all NPs are dominated by DP, it is not so clear whether the AGR projections which we postulated above must also always be present in the DP. In the preceding discussion we used data such as (122d), repeated here as (143a), present the N moved
as a basis for saying that the AGR host for N-movement is always in the DP, regardless of the presence of adjectives. In (143a) we see that invasione is separated from its complement, so we deduce that it has leftward:
(143)
a.
Vinvasione italiana dell’Albania the invasion Italian of Albania
b.
[pp [p 1’) Lacrr [acr invasione;][Np italiana ¢; dell’ Albania]]]
adjectives: The question arises of what happens when a DP does not contain any (143)
c.
Vinvasione the invasion
y between headIn order to deal with this question we will explore the analog In the discussion of Vmovement in the clause and head-movement in the DP. we postulated that movement to the inflectional heads of the clausal system among other things, that AGRP and TP are always projected. This implies,
there are no adverbs. In AGRP and TP are projected even in a sentence in which adverbs
of sentence-medial French (144a) V moves to AGR, but in the absence any visible effect on the have not will ent or of the negation marker, the movem lexical
s. In English (144b), the * string, since it does not cross any overt element assume that AGRP and TP are still we but verb does not move to T or AGR,
ion lowers onto V. projected. In (144b) we assume that the inflect
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
440 (144)
a.
[acrp Jean; mange, [7p ¢ ty [vp 4 4 du pain]]].
Jean eats bread b.
[acrp John; [ace til [re & Lr 4] lve & eat-s; bread]]].
Pursuing this line of reasoning, let us tentatively assume that the lower AGRP2 is projected in the DP even if there are no adjectives. Thus (143c) has the structure in (143d): (143)
dd.
[pp [b V'] Lacrr2 Lacr2 invasione|] [xp 4]
Likewise, even in English DPs in which N seems not to leave NP, the lower AGRP2 is available. (143e) has the structure (1436): (143)
e.
the invasion
f.
[pp [p the] [acrr2 [acr2] [Np invasion]]]
As the examples above show, not all DPs contain a possessor phrase. One option is that the specifier of the possessor AGRP1 remains empty in the DP. Again, there would be no analogue to the subject requirement for AGRP1. But this is problematic if we assume that AGR1 is strong in Romance. Alternatively, AGRP1 need not be projected. We shall not examine the consequences of these options; the choice between one alternative or the other largely depends on theoretical questions. In the following sections we list additional differences between the nominal projection and the clause. We shall consider some cases in which the DP seems to allow for fewer configurations than the clause. This section essentially concerns the complementation system of the noun in comparison with that of the verb. After that, we will turn to data which show that DP does not exhibit the same range of transformations as the clause.
3.5.2.4.2
MISSING STRUCTURE
Verbs take a wide range of complements, including finite clauses, non-finite clauses, small clauses, prepositional phrases and particle constructions. We provide a brief description in this section of some of the observed restrictions on the complementation of nominal heads. We will offer a tentative and highly speculative account which rests on the assumption that nouns have a lesser impact on their complements than verbs. Specifically, we will postulate that nouns cannot case-mark the specifier of their complement and that they cannot incorporate the head of the complement. “ The examples in (145)-(146) provide a first set of data which allows us to compare VP-complementation and NP-complementation. From the examples in (145)-(146) we conclude that, just like verbs, nouns can select finite clauses as their complements. Notice that for many speakers the indicative CP complements of the NP cannot be introduced by the null variant of that, as shown by the contrast between (146a) and (146b).”’ We return to the non-availability of the null complementizer in the CP complement of the noun later in this section. ” For subjunctive complements see chapter 3, section 2.6.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases (145)
I propose [cp that [,» Mary should be invited]]. I propose [cp [jp Mary should be invited]].
ine
(146)
a.
441
lop The proposal [cp that [;» Mary should be invited]]] is preposterous. [bp The proposal [cp [;» Mary should be invited]]] is preposterous.
(147) shows that, like verbs, nouns may take infinitival complements with non-
overt subjects: (147)
a. b.
I attempted [c [jp PRO to make Mary leave]]. [pp My attempt [cp [jp PRO to make Mary leave]]] failed.
In contrast with verbs, however, nouns do not select infinitival complements with overt subjects: (148)
a. b.
Iconsider [,» Mary to be a good friend]. *[pp Your consideration [,» Mary to be a good friend]] is preposterous.
Similarly, Vs may take small clause complements, while Ns cannot take small clause complements: (149)
a. b.
Iconsider [Thelma a great friend]. *[pp My consideration [Thelma a great friend]] remains unaltered.
The contrasts in (148) and (149) are related. In (148a) and (149a) the verb assigns accusative case to the specifier of its complement, namely the subject of the infinitival clause or of the small clause. Apparently, while V can case-mark
the specifier (149a), this complement complement above), but sentence: (148)
c.
(149)
c.
of its IP complement (148a) and of its small clause complement is not possible for a noun. Somehow, the impact of a verb on its is stronger than that of N. The reader will recall that in the NP the is usually introduced by the preposition of (see examples (134b, c) insertion of of in (148c) and (149c) does not alter the status of the
is *[pp Your consideration of [» Mary to be a good friend]] preposterous. ed. *[pp My consideration of [Thelma a great friend]] remains unalter
in English. VerbIn chapter 2, we discussed the verb-particle construction ated in (150). The particle constructions appear in two configurations, illustr of (150b) in (151b): partial structure of (150a) is given in (151a), that
(150)
a. b.
Louise gave the book away. Louise gave away the book.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
442
(151)
a
VP
oS iearent asEldar
Vv
PrtP
NP
a
Pi
% give
the book;
b
NP
is
|
VP
scaioee Vv
Pre
Prt’ 2
Ret
|
give away;
i
oi
a
NP
WARS the book
The particle construction is unavailable in the DP, regardless of the pattern chosen and regardless of the insertion of the preposition of:
(152)
a. b.
*The gift (of) the.book away was unexpected. *The gift away (of) the book was unexpected.
How can we account for these data? The ungrammaticality of (152a) can be related to that of (148b) and (149b). In (151a) the verb give case-marks the DP
the book, which occupies the specifier of its complement, the particle projection. If we assume that nominal heads cannot case-mark into their complements, then (152a) will be predicted to be ungramimatical. (152b) is parallel to (151b) in which the verb incorporates the particle, i.e. the head of its complement. What we might do to account for the ungrammaticality of (152b) is to extend the hypothesis formulated above that the impact of a noun on its complement is more restricted than that of a verb, and postulate that in the same way that a noun cannot case-mark the specifier of its complement, it cannot incorporate the head of its complement. If gift cannot incorporate away then the noun-particle construction is unavailable. We continue to assume that a particle in the head position of the particle projection cannot casemark a complement to its right.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
443
We have already briefly discussed passivization with preposition stranding:” (153)
a. b.
They talked about the boy. The boy was talked about.
In (153a) the active verb talk’ selects a PP complement. The DP the boy is casemarked by the preposition about. The passivization of this sentence is rather surprising. In the passive (153b), the DP complement of the P, the boy, undergoes NP-movement; it moves to the subject position, stranding the preposition.
The movement of the DP seems to be identical to other instances of passivization.
In our discussion of passivization,”’ we proposed that passive verbs fail to assign case to their complements and that the complement moves to the subject position to receive nominative case. But passivization in (153b) ought not, at first sight, to affect the case properties of the DP the boy. The boy is the complement of the preposition; its case is determined by the preposition, not by the verb. In order to account for this structure, we proposed tentatively that in (153b) the preposition is intimately related to the verb and that passivization affects the verb and the preposition together. The suggestion we made was that the preposition about incorporates to the verb.
We illustrated passivization in the DP by means of examples such as (154):
(154)
a.
Rembrandt’s picture of Saskia
b.
Saskia’s picture by Rembrandt
In (154a) the complement of the N picture is realized as a post-nominal genitive phrase, a PP introduced by of. We have seen that nouns cannot assign accusative case but they can license a post-nominal of-phrase. In (154b) the DP exhibits a passivization pattern: the internal argument of the head picture is realized by the _ possessor phrase, the subject of the DP. The possessor phrase has become available for the internal argument of the head noun because the external argument of the N is realized by a by-phrase. Passivization-cum-preposition stranding as illustrated in (153) above is not available within the DP: (154)
c. — [pp The talk about the boy] was disheartening. d. *[pp The boy’s, talk about ¢;] was disheartening.
d to derive the Our preceding discussion provides us with the elements require in chapter 2, ted postula We DP. the in ng strandi unavailability of preposition ationpassiviz and ction constru rticle verb-pa the sections 4.2 and 4.3, that both verb. the to particle the of ration incorpo the on cum-preposition stranding depend V— the to e analogu ction constru cle N-parti an To account for the absence of cannot incorporate the particle construction, we proposed above that a noun that passivizationfollows it ion, assumpt this head of its complement. From will be ruled ration, incorpo on depends also cum-preposition stranding, which out in the NP.
7 In chapter 2, section 4.3.2. 73 In chapter 2, section 1.3.4. 7 Tn section 3.4.2.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
444
We can now return to the clausal complements of the NP. While finite complements introduced by that are possible, those with the null variant of that are ungrammatical for many speakers: (155)
a. b.
I propose [cp 0 [jp Mary should be invited]]. *[pp The proposal [cp 0 [;p Mary should be invited]]] is preposterous.
Let us formulate the hypothesis that in clausal structures such as (155a) the null complementizer (0) is incorporated by the governing verb, propose. That this hypothesis may be on the right track is shown by the contrast between (155c) and (155d): (155)
c. d.
[cp That [,;» Mary should be invited]] is surprising. *[cp 0 [jp Mary should be invited]] is surprising.
In (155c) the complementizer is overt and the sentence is grammatical; in (155d)
the complementizer is null and the sentence is ungrammatical. An incorporation analysis for the null complementizer derives the ungrammaticality of (155d). For a head X to incorporate a head Y, X and Y must be in a local relation; notably, X must govern Y. Clearly in (155d) the null complementizer is not governed by the verb. The question arises as to why the null complementizer, 0, should be incorporated. We postulate that as a non-overt constituent, the null complementizer is subject to the Empty Category Principle.” This principle requires that empty categories be identified. We applied the principle to non-overt NPs; it is plausible that the principle must be extended to all non-overt categories, including, for instance, null complementizers and non-overt modals [M]. In the case of the null declarative C, the CP which it introduces is selected by the governing verb, in our example (155a) propose. This means that the verb propose has some property which relates it to the declarative CP complement. Syntactic structure is endocentric: that is, structure is projected on the basis of a head and the properties of the head percolate to the projection. This means that if CP is declarative ([-wH]), then its declarative nature will have to be encoded on its head, C. We postulate a [-wH] feature on the complementizer. In other words, if a verb selects a declarative CP, it selects a declarative C. By virtue of their selectional relation, the verb and the complementizer have something in common. We propose that the verb can incorporate the null complementizer because of this selectional relation. The zero variant of that incorporates to the higher verb in order to be identified, to satisfy the Empty Category Principle. If complementizer-incorporation by the governing verb is at the heart of the phenomenon in (155a), then the ungrammaticality of (155b) is expected. We have already provided two types of evidence that a head N cannot incorporate the head of a complement: (i) DPs lack particle constructions, and (ii) DPs lack passivization with preposition stranding. If N cannot incorporate the null C, then the null C remains unidentified, and the structure is ungrammatical. Let us summarize this section. Our account for the missing structures in the DP rests on the hypothesis that the noun has a lesser impact on its complement 7> Introduced in section 2.4.2.3.
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
=a)
than the verb. Specifically, a noun cannot case-mark the specifier of its comple-
ment and cannot incorporate the head of the complement. From this it follows that DPs lack the following complements: (i) infinitival’complements with overt subjects, (ii) small clause complements, (iii) particle constructions, (iv) passivization with P-stranding, and (v) declarative complements with null complementizer.
3.5.2.4.3. MISSING TRANSFORMATIONS In addition to the absence of some patterns which are found in the clause, we also find that the application of certain transformations is more restricted in the DP. We consider just some cases here. Although the DP provides evidence for a passive-like transformation (156), it is not the case that all kinds of A-movement are freely available DP-internally. DP-internal A-movement is subject to lexical constraints which do not apply to passivization in the clause. For example, certain classes of verbs, such as psychological verbs (love, hate) or stative verbs (know), allow passivization in the clause, while the related nouns do not allow passivization-like patterns in the DP. (156)
a b.
(157)
a. b.
(158)
a.
(459) :
The city was destroyed by the enemy. the city’s destruction by the enemy
Thelma is feared by John. *Thelma’s fear by John Thelma is envied by John.
b.
*Thelma’s envy by John
Sra b.
This fact is known by everyone. *this fact’s knowledge by everyone
It is difficult to pin down the exact nature of the restriction displayed by the
examples in (157)-(159). One component that seems to play a part is semantic; it concerns the relation between the action expressed by the head noun and the
internal argument. It seems to be the case that DP-internal passivization can only target internal arguments which are affected by the process (or state) expressed a by the noun. An argument is affected by a process (or state) if it undergoes For state). (or physical or psychological modification as a result of the process instance, in (156) it can be argued that the argument the city is necessarily hand, the affected by the action expressed by the verb destroyed. On the other of being result a complement of fear in (157b) does not undergo a change as the state by feared. Similarly, the internal argument of envy (158) is not affected unaffected is of envying, and the internal argument of know/knowledge (159) by the state of knowing. which the subject Raising, a clause-internal instantiation of A-movement by in (160), is not as clause of a lower non-finite clause is moved to the matrix available in the DP:
(160)
a. b.
John; was believed [,p #; to be intelligent]. *John’s; belief [jp # to be intelligent]
446
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
It is not obvious how to account for the ungrammaticality of (160b). It cannot be argued that the complement of a noun head may not contain an empty category as its subject. Recall from the previous section that finite clauses with non-overt PRO subjects may function as complements to Ns: (160)
c.
Jane’s; attempt [cp [jp PRO, to rescue the situation]]
It is also clear that a dependency can be established between the possessor subject of a DP and a subject position within the clausal complement of the nominal head. In (160c), for instance, the subject of the DP, Jane’s, controls the interpretation of the non-overt subject PRO of the infinitival IP. One component of an explanation for the ungrammaticality of (160b) that comes to mind is that in this example the noun takes an IP complement. Recall that nouns cannot take IP complements with overt subjects: (160)
d.
*Jane’s belief [Mary to be intelligent]
In our previous discussion we proposed that this construction is excluded because the subject of the IP complement, Mary, cannot be assigned case by the N belief. As a tentative partial account let us say that passivization of belief fails in (160b) because the basis for the passivization, the ‘active’ counterpart (160d), is also unavailable. If we pursue an explanation along these lines, we correctly predict that just as small clauses are illicit in DPs, as shown by the contrast between (161a) and (161b), raising structures based on small-clause patterns are grammatical in the clause (161c) but ungrammatical in the DP (161d): (161)
Ao op 3.6
3.6.1
I consider Mary intelligent. *My consideration Mary intelligent Marty is generally considered intelligent. *Mary’s general consideration intelligent
Demonstratives and DP
Demonstratives in [Spec,DP]
Let us return to the demonstrative pronoun, another component which is often grouped with the article: (162)
a.
This book is interesting.
b.
That book is boring.
of the DP
The words this and that, and their plurals these and those, are referred to as
demonstrative pronouns. They are in complementary distribution with the article:
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
(162)
AAT
*This the book is interesting. *The this book is interesting. *That the book is boring. noon *The that book is boring.
At first glance one might wish to group the demonstratives with the determiner and locate them under D. However, there are a number of objections to such an analysis. Consider the data in (163): (163)
a. b.
I did not expect this reaction. I did not expect such a reaction.
Interpretively, there is a similarity in meaning between such and this, in that both seem to point to some known element in the discourse context: such a reaction means, roughly, ‘a reaction of this kind’. The demonstrative that itself is also used as a degree modifier for an adjective or an adverb: (164)
a. b. c. d.
I I I I
did did did did
not not not not
expect expect expect expect
it to happen [,gyp that quickly]. it to happen [,qyp so quickly]. [pp [,p that big] an audience]. [pp [,p so big] an audience].
In (164c) the AP that big moves to [Spec,DP], similarly to the AP so big in
(164d). In example (163b) above such immediately precedes the article in D. We _ proposed earlier that such occupies the specifier of DP. If we wish to pursue the intuition that such, so and the demonstrative have something in common,
we might then formulate the hypothesis that the demonstrative this in (163a) also occupies the specifier of DP: (163)
c.
DP
Spec
such this that
eae D
NP
a
reaction reaction
iner occupy different In representation (163c) the demonstrative and the determ some languages, the in t: suppor ic ‘ positions. This analysis receives cross-linguist distribution. (165a) ary ement compl in demonstrative and the determiner are not Javanese. in one ates illustr illustrates such a case in Hungarian, (165b)
Aspects of the Syntax of Noun Phrases
448 (165)
a.
Hungarian
ez this
a _ haz the house
b.
Javanese
ika this
n the
anak baby
If the determiner and the demonstrative do not occupy the same slot, then we still have to account for the fact that the demonstrative and the determiner do not co-occur in English. In order to account for the complementary distribution of the determiner and the demonstrative we can exploit the observed parallelism between the clause and the nominal projection, in particular the proposed parallelism between CP and DP. In Modern English, there is a well-known restriction on the elements in CP: when the specifier of CP is occupied by a wh-phrase, the head cannot be filled by a complementizer: (166)
I wonder I wonder *T wonder ows *T wonder ao
[¢ [-p [
[vp t; criticize himself;,-;.];
that [,crr2 Louise, would 4]]]]].
But, in (104b) John; is co-indexed with two VP-internal traces. This means that
it is part of two chains, the chain ending in the specifier of the VP headed by thought, and the chain ending in the specifier position of criticize. Hence John
From Structure to Interpretation
S57
will be interpreted as an argument of both thought and criticize. Moreover, in (104b) the DP Louise fails to be connected to a VP-internal trace so it is not
related to the argument structure of any lexical head in the sentence. The sentence is therefore uninterpretable. Among other things, the sentence contains a symbol, the DP Louise, which cannot be connected to the interpretation; again, (104b) violates the Principle of Full Interpretation. We conclude that although reconstruction may restore a moved phrase to an intermediate landing site, this option is always excluded for fronted VPs. Because a VP contains the trace of the moved subject it is obliged to reconstruct to its base-position, i.e. a position where it can be c-commanded by the subject. This is also illustrated in (105): (105)
[yp; ¢; Criticize himself,,.,] John, never [yp t, thought [cp would ¢]]].
that [acrp Bill;
In (105) the fronted VP criticize himself contains an anaphor, himself. In spite of the fact that there are two masculine singular potential antecedents, John, and Bill,, the antecedent of himself must be Bill. In order to satisfy the binding requirement on the VP-internal subject trace 4, we must reconstruct the fronted VP into its base-position (t)).
3.4 3.4.1
Expletive replacement and Full Interpretation Existential sentences and there
In our earlier discussion we raised the problem of how to account for the ‘occurrence of expletives such as there in (106a). Expletives, by assumption, lack the a thematic role; they do not seem to contribute directly to the semantics of sentence. (106)
a.
There arrived three more candidates at the office.
chain with the In section 1.4.4 we proposed that an expletive subject forms a the DP three ; position case a post-verbal subject. The expletive there occupies ents form a constitu two These more candidates occupies the thematic position. case, hence with ted associa is t chain, thus guaranteeing that the DP argumen visible for theta-role assignment.
(106)
b.
There; arrived [pp three more candidates] at the office. nominative
case
thematic role
the clause, albeit indirectly. Expletives do contribute to the interpretation of ic role but assigned a themat Expletives enter into a chain with a DP which is occupies a caseless position.
558
From Structure to Interpretation
In the literature it is proposed that in the semantic representation of the sentence, the DP associated with the expletive undergoes abstract movement and covers up or replaces the related expletive. This operation is referred to as expletive replacement. (106)
c.
[,crp [xp; three more candidates] arrived ¢j]
Derivation (106c) illustrates another application of movement which derives representations at an interpretive level. The movement of the associated DP to the expletive is an instance of A-movement, i.e. movement to [Spec,AGRP]. Again, it is covert movement without overt spell-out.
3.4.2
Do-insertion
A further extension of the expletive replacement strategy adopted above is sometimes proposed to derive the Logical Form of sentences with do-insertion. We proposed” that in root questions the [+wH] feature is base-generated on T and raised to Foc by an auxiliary. (107)
a.
[rocp Whom, have; [acrp you [acr 4] [rp [+ &] [ve invited ¢]]]]?
When there is no auxiliary in the structure, the Tense affix alone moves to Foc. The Tense affix is a bound morpheme: it cannot remain unattached and it must be associated to a stem. The auxiliary do is inserted in Foc in order to support the bound Tense morpheme. (107)
b.
[koce Whom; do + ed; [acre you [acr &] Le [+ t\) [vp invite £;]]]]? = [roce Whom; did; [acre you [cr 4] Lp [+ 4] [ve invite t]]]]?
In our earlier discussion we proposed that do is like an expletive: it does not contribute to the interpretation of the sentence. Though do itself may not mean anything, it nevertheless has a function in the interpretation of the sentence: it makes it possible to achieve the relevant specifier—head relation between the interrogative feature on T and the wh-phrase. Thus the symbol do plays an indirect role in the interpretation of the sentence. On the other hand, the question arises how the verb invite in (107b) is associated with the Tense inflection. This issue is important since we proposed that actions or events must be assigned a temporal reading and that this is achieved via the interpretation of T. One proposal would be to say that do and the verb invite are co-indexed: in other words, they form a chain. Let us first examine how co-indexation of do and the associated verb could be motivated. Consider (107b). In this example the subject you originates VP-internally. For simplicity of presentation, we did not indicate the VP-internal trace of the °° Tn section 2.2.2 above.
From Structure to Interpretation Agee in the earlier discussion. ¢). (LO7)
“€:
A more
389
careful representation of (107b) is
FocP Spec
whom,
Foc’
\
do+ed,
AGRP DP
ee
you,
AGR’
agra AGR
TP
aa DP sie oe ty Ty:
i.
VE
pee te
DP
Vv’
ih, ONS
soit ty
invite
t;
In this representation we indicate the chain formed by NP-movement of the subject you. NP-movement is local: the subject DP moves from the specifier of the VP to the specifier of TP and then to the specifier of AGRP. We assume further that both [Spec,AGRP] and [Spec,TP] are A-positions. Let us make the of a specifier the assumption that when a maximal projection moves through d. co-indexe are head, then the head and the maximal projection in its specifier the in DP same the V; The DP you in the specifier of VP is co-indexed with
[Spec,AGRP] is cospecifier of TP is co-indexed with T. Finally, the DP you in d by virtue of co-indexe indexed with AGR. Thus AGR, T, and V end up being
V are co-indexed, each sharing the index of you. If this is the case, then T and and the verb can be related to the Tense node.
traces which are also Moreover, when T moves to Foc, it creates intermediate
the Tense morpheme co-indexed with T, hence with V. When do combines with n of V. ositio base-p it becomes the head of a chain which ends in the
n ‘expletive do’ and In some approaches to do-insertion, the analogy betwee is proposed that just It tial clauses is explored further.
expletive there in existen ive at LE, so the associate V as the associate DP of there is moved to the explet speculate for a moment on the is moved to do at LE In the next section we
should not be underestimated. “consequences of this proposal, whose importance ce under discussion would have ~ Given a do-replacement hypothesis, the senten the LF representation (107d):
From Structure to Interpretation
560
(d07nod!
FocP Spec
Foc’
ae
Foc
invite + ed,
AGRP “f
you,
AGR’
AGR
‘LE
hin Goel 5 Men eel.es VP io pala Weerise ae poe
fi 7 DE
Vv’
i
te
3.5 3.5.1.
hae fi
f
Consequences for language typology V-movement revisited
As a consequence of the expletive replacement analysis of do-insertion, the LF representation (107d) of an English sentence with a lexical verb corresponds to the S-structure representation of a parallel French sentence (108): (108)
Qui invitais-tu toujours aux repas? whom invited-you always to the meals ‘Who did you always invite to meals?’
Pursuing the theoretical implications of this hypothesis, one could say that in both French and English, lexical verbs undergo movement. The only difference is the timing. While lexical verbs move at S-structure in French, they move at the level of Logical Form in English. The proposal makes French and English less different than they at first appear. At first we proposed that French has movement of lexical verbs and that English lacks such movement; in the do-replacement proposal outlined here, BOTH languages have V-movement. The difference resides in the point in the derivation at which V-movement takes place.
From Structure to Interpretation
561
We can extend the LF-movement hypothesis for verbs to examples without do-insertion: (109)
a.
Jean mange souvent du fromage. Jean eats often cheese
b.
John often eats cheese.
~ For (109a) we propose that the lexical verb mange (‘eats’) moves to AGR at Sstructure. For (109b) we proposed*! that the English finite lexical verb (eats) remains in V and that the inflection lowers onto the verb. We have signalled already that lowering of the inflectional head has the rather undesirable result that its trace is not identified by a c-commanding antecedent: (109)
c.
S-structure
AGRP
6
ee
Spec
AGR’
oe
AGR
EP
noes Spec
th
Woe Re av
vP
pee kes
AdvP
VP
ttn Spec
Vv’
seae
V
DP
weGatS;
cheese
|
John;
i,
t;
Fe
woien
te
that at LF (109d) the verb We can now overcome this problem by suggesting offensive trace under AGR the eat-s moves up to T and to AGR, thus replacing em of the lowering of the probl and creating a chain headed by eat-s. Thus the
inflection is solved.
section 2S 20h 51 A first discussion is found in chapter 1,
52 Chapter 2, section 1.4.2.
From Structure to Interpretation
562
(109)
d.
Logical Form
AGRP
Pdi Spec
AGR’
ee.
AGR
a
GOS. Spec
a4
rabies
T
VP
AE a
AdvP
VPsaat
Aion Spec
Ve
Be OS
V John;
eat-s,
t,
often
t;
|
DP
aL
The analysis which we have sketched here entails that French and English are not different with respect to the presence or absence of movement of the verb to inflectional heads. Rather, they are differentiated in terms of the level of representation at which V moves: in French it moves at S-structure, in English it moves at LE In the next section we look at another approach to V-movement which allows us to get rid of the problem of lowering inflectional heads entirely.
3.5.2
Checking Theory
In this book we have been assuming a derivational approach to inflectional morphology. We have assumed that verbs are base-generated as stems under the lexical head, V, and that their inflectional morphological endings, person, number and Tense, are base-generated separately under inflectional heads. French (110a) would have the rough D-structure (110b); English (111a) would have the rough D-structure (111b). We assume that the thematic position of the subject NP is VP-internal: (110)
a.
b. (111)
a. b.
Thelma embrassait Louise. Thelma kissed Louise
[acrr Lacr -t] [rp [ -ai] [vp Thelma embrass Louise]]] Thelma kissed Louise. [acre [acr -0] [rp [r -ed] [yp Thelma kiss Louise]]]
In French finite clauses
V moves to AGR via T, picking up inflectional endings
on its way up. We thus derive representation (112a):
From Structure to Interpretation (112)
a.
[acre Thelma; [acr Lr [v embrassy]-ai]-t]
563
[+ t; [> ty] [vp £, ty Louise]]]
In English, lexical verbs do not leave the VP at S-structure. The inflectional endings AGR and T lower onto the V: (112)
b.
[acrp Thelma; [scx t] [rp t; [+ fi] [ve #, kiss-ed; Louise]]]
As we have seen, this analysis leads to a violation of the Empty Category Principle:*’ the trace in AGR is not identified by a c-commanding antecedent. One analysis which we developed above is that at the abstract interpretive level, LE, the verb kissed moves up to AGR via T and undoes the violation. In an alternative approach to the morpho-syntax of verbs, the derivational approach is abandoned. It is proposed that verbs are base-generated with their inflectional endings. Verbs are inserted under V fully inflected. The functional heads AGR and T do not dominate inflectional morphemes; rather, they dominate bundles of abstract features. These features are symbols in the representation, hence they must contribute to interpretation. Assuming that functional features must be licensed to be interpretable, it follows that functional features have to be licensed or checked in the course of the derivation. Unchecked features are not interpretable, and a representation containing uninterpretable features violates the Principle of Full Interpretation. Feature checking is achieved by a matching of the abstract features on a functional head (say AGR) and a feature in another constituent, the checker. Two types of feature are distinguished: specifier features and head features. We have already briefly alluded to the role of the specifier feature when trying to account for the subject requirement. We proposed” that the head AGR contains a strong nominal specifier feature which must be checked by a constituent with a matching feature, here the subject DP. Abstract head features are checked by a _matching head: specifically, the head features of AGR and T are checked by a verb with a matching verbal inflection. Head-feature checking is attained by adjoining a lexical head to the relevant functional head. the In all languages AGR and T have to be checked. How do we account for make and AGR difference between French and English? Let us concentrate on feature of our assumptions more precise. As before, we assume that the head head weak a and AGR may be strong or weak. The distinction between a strong the of timing the feature of AGR determines the timing of the checking, Le. to has AGR’ attraction of a head (V). A strong head feature of AGR or ‘strong Strong re. S-structu at be checked at S-structure: strong AGR attracts the finite V . A weak head features left unchecked at S-structure lead to ungrammaticality by procrasdelayed, be feature need not be checked at S-structure; checking may tination, until LE ng approach, (110a) Consider again examples (110a) and (111a). In the checki . (114a) The features of the has the structure (113a) and (111a) has the structure Fm and Fn respectively. We heads AGR and T are represented by the symbols features must be checked at have used bold face for strong AGR features. These es. Spell-Out by adjoining a V with matching featur 53 See chapter 4, section 2.4.2. 54 Chapter 3, section 2.5.1.
564 (113) (114)
From Structure to Interpretation a. a.
[acrp [acr Fm] [1p [7 Fn] [yp Thelma embrassait Louise]]] [xerp [ace Fm] [rp [+ Fn] [vp Thelma kissed Louise]]]
The verbal AGR features in French, represented here informally as Fm, are strong. In order to check strong AGR embrassait has to move to AGR. Recall that two options are possible: overt movement, which is movement at S-structure, or covert movement, which is movement at LE. If V-movement in French were postponed to the level of LF, i.e. if it were covert, the structure would
be spelt out as in (113a). This would mean that strong AGR would remain unchecked at S-structure and the sentence would be ungrammatical. The verb embrassait is thus forced to move so that AGR can check its agreement morphology. This derives the representation (113b):
(113)
b.
[scrp Thelma; [cr [+ [v embrass)Jai]t] [rp ¢; [r ti] [ve 4 & Louise]]]
For the sake of completeness, note that the subject must also move to [Spec,AGRP] in French; this implies that AGR also has a strong nominal specifier feature. In English, the specifier feature of AGR is strong, forcing the subject to move to [Spec,AGRP]. The head features of AGR have to be checked by the verb
kissed. In English the head feature of AGR is weak, or, to put it differently, English has weak AGR. Weak AGR does not have to be checked at S-structure, so AGR will not attract the verb at that level. Since the verb need not move before Spell-Out it won’t move before Spell-Out, by the Economy Principle. AGR will be checked later: The principle of procrastination will delay movement until the level of Logical Form. (114)
b.
[acre Thelma; [,cx Fm] [rp # [7 Fn] [vp #; kissed Louise]]]
Kissed will move to AGR
to check its features at the level which we refer to
as LF:
(114)
c.
[acrp Thelma; [ace [+ kiss] [rp & [+ #] [ve ¢ t, Louise]]]
Obviously the brief discussion above does not do justice to the theoretical implications of Checking Theory. As already mentioned, though, Checking Theory has one important theoretical consequence. If we assume that verbs are basegenerated WITH their inflections then the problem of lowering the inflection in English vanishes. Checking Theory maintains that V-to-AGR movement is universal: it applies to all languages. Cross-linguistic variation follows from the timing of V-to-AGR movement. In French V-movement is overt; in English it is covert.
3.5.3
Movement and language typology
Pursuing the line of discussion above, we can set up typologies of languages, not in terms of whether they exhibit certain types of movement or not, but in terms of the point at which movement takes place. In the diagram in (115) we suggest some comparisons in these terms.
From Structure to Interpretation (115)
565
Timing of movement and language typology Movement
a. b. c.
S-structure
Lexical verb Wh-phrase Multiple wh-phrases
French English | Hungarian
Logical Form
English Chinese English
When movement takes place at S-structure it has a perceptible reflex in the structure; it is overt. When movement takes place at Logical Form, it has no overt reflex; it is abstract or covert movement. We can reformulate the typology in (115) as follows:
(116)
Timing of movement and language typology Movement
a. c.
overt
Lexical verb Wh-phrase Multiple wh-phrases
covert
French English | Hungarian
English Chinese English
Comparison along the lines summarized in the tables in (115) and (116) can be extended to other material discussed in this book. To mention but one example, we proposed to account for the difference in the distribution of the constituents of the DP in (117) in terms of the presence or absence of N-movement to AGR: (117)
a.
Tinvasion italienne de |’Albanie the invasion Italian of Albania
b.
the Italian invasion of Albania
We need no longer oppose French and English in terms of the presence versus the absence of N-movement. Instead, we can say that French N-to-AGR move) ment takes place at S-structure, while in English (and other Germanic languages it takes place at the level of Logical Form.
(115)
d.
Timing of N-movement and language typology Movement
S-structure
Logical Form
N-to-AGR
French
English
French and covert in Or, putting it differently, N-to-AGR movement is overt in English: (116)
d.
Timing of N-movement and language typology Movement
N-to-AGR
overt
covert
French
English
is that we can develop a The advantage of the typologies introduced above rm or, to put it differently, in » theory in which languages are maximally unifo tic structures contain lexical which languages are minimally different. Syntac es. These abstract features must heads and functional heads with abstract featur
566
From Structure to Interpretation
be checked. Checking is achieved by movement: either a head with matching morphology moves to the functional head to check its abstract features, or else a maximal projection with the relevant features raises and derives a specifier— head relation with the head in question. All features must be checked. Crosslinguistic variation concerns the timing of movement: checking takes place either at S-structure or at LE Strong features must be checked at S-structure; weak features are checked at LF. Cross-linguistic variation reduces to the opposition between weak and strong features. This is ultimately a morphological opposition.
3.6
Conclusion
The introduction of the level of representation Logical Form (LF) as a syntactic representation enables us to do (at least) two things. On the one hand, it enables us to account for a number of interpretive properties of the sentence which cannot be read off from the S-structure representation. We postulate movements at LF which provide us with appropriate representations for the scope of quantifiers and in situ wh-elements. On the other hand, postulating a level of Logical Form and proposing that movement may be either overt or covert makes it possible to unify certain aspects of cross-linguistic variation: we can propose that while certain constituents undergo movement at S-structure in one language they undergo the same kind of movement at LF in another language.
3.7
Summary
This section introduces the concept of Logical Form, a level of representation which encodes the semantic properties of structures. Logical Form is based on Sstructure, but it is not isomorphic to it. The mapping of S-structure onto Logical Form may necessitate a number of abstract or covert movements which ensure that the constituents of the clause satisfy the Principle of Full Interpretation. For instance, the covert movement which relates S-structure and Logical Form ensures that quantificational elements occupy a scope position from which they bind a variable. In order to derive the appropriate structure, quantifiers undergo quantifier raising, a covert movement operation. The concept of Logical Form, a level at which covert movement takes place, also allows us to unify the syntax of moved wh-constituents and wh-phrases which remain im situ. We propose that in languages like Chinese which do not exhibit overt wh-movement, wh-phrases undergo covert movement at the level of Logical Form. Similarly, wh-phrases in situ in English undergo wh-movement at the level of Logical Form, at which point they merge with moved wh-phrases. Cross-linguistic variation in question formation can be defined in terms of the timing of wh-movement. Chinese lacks overt wh-movement; all movement is covert and takes place at the level of Logical Form. In English one wh-phrase moves at S-structure; the others remain in situ and undergo covert movement at the level of Logical Form. In Hungarian, all wh-phrases move at S-structure. Exploring the covert movement approach further, we have elaborated an
analysis of existential structures in which a DP associated with the expletive
there moves covertly and replaces the expletive at the level of Logical Form. This proposal solves the problem of the role of expletives in the interpretation of
From Structure to Interpretation
567
clauses: at Logical Form, the level relevant for interpretation, expletives have been eliminated and replaced by their associates. We then broadened our proposal concerning the replacement of ‘meaningless’ elements. We proposed that do-insertion in English negative and interrogative
sentences is also followed by a form of expletive replacement at the level of Logical Form. The lexical verb heading the complement of do undergoes covert movement and replaces do. On the basis of this hypothesis the distinction between languages such as English without S-structure movement of lexical verbs and French with movement of the verb can be reinterpreted in terms of the timing of the movement. The verb moves to T and to AGR in both languages: in French it moves at S-structure, while in English it moves at LE Covert Vmovement in English also solves the problem of unidentified traces characteristic of the lowering analysis. In the final section of the chapter, we briefly introduced Checking Theory. According to this theory, lexical items are inserted in the structure with their inflectional morphology. Functional heads contain abstract features which may be strong or weak and which must be checked by a matching lexical element (a head or a phrase). All movement is aimed at the checking of abstract features on functional heads. Strong features must be checked by overt movement; weak features are checked by covert movement. The checking approach led to the proposal that cross-linguistic variation is defined in terms of covert versus overt
movement.
Summary ee
This chapter explores aspects of the relation between the form of the sentence and its interpretation.
Section 1 syntactic The Principle of Full Interpretation stipulates that each symbol of the mapThe tation. interpre the onto mapped be representation of a sentence must c syntacti other like and tional, composi is ping of structure onto interpretation CatEmpty the that show will We ns. processes it is subject to locality conditio egory Principle derives from the Principle of Full Interpretation. concerning the interThe Principle of Full Interpretation gives rise to questions as the contribuwell as case, and AGR as pretive role of abstract symbols such the functional that d propose is It s. tion of expletives to the meaning of sentence by licensing clause the of tation interpre head AGR indirectly contributes to the c case also Syntacti DPs. of gender) the grammatical features (person, number, visibility visible; DPs renders it that in indirectly contributes to interpretation e proexpletiv The DP. a to role thematic is a condition for the assignment of a tation interpre the to tes contribu ly noun in the existential construction indirect expletthe DP; ed associat the with of the structure by virtue of its chain relation eeing the visibility of the ive pronoun occupies a case position, thus guarant associated DP.
568
From Structure to Interpretation
Section 2 The functional projections of the articulated CP link the proposition expressed by the IP which they dominate to the linguistic or non-linguistic context. The illocutionary force or the clause type of an embedded clause is encoded at the CP level. C hosts the feature [+wu]; this feature has to be licensed, either by the insertion of the overt interrogative complementizer if or by a specifier— head relation with a wh-phrase in [Spec,CP]. In root questions the [+wH] feature is base-generated in T and is moved to Foc, a functional head in the CP domain. TopP and FocP also take part in the informational organization of the clause. The specifier of TopP, which hosts topicalized constituents (including scenesetting adverbials), contains thematic (old) information. The complement of Top contains rhematic (new) information. The specifier of FocP hosts wh-constituents in root clauses; it also hosts focalized constituents. The temporal interpretation of the clause is calculated on the basis of the properties of the functional head Tense. Three points must be taken into account in the temporal calculus: the Speech time (S), set by the time of the utterance, the Reference time (R) located in C, and the Event time (E) located in T.
In embedded clauses, the Reference time is determined by the Event time of the immediately dominating clause. The sequence of tense, i.e. the dependency between the embedded Reference time and the Event time of the dominating clause, is thus mediated by the CP layer. The Reference time and the Event time may be specified by time adverbials. Diagram (1) is a partial summary of the mapping between the structure of the sentence and its interpretation. (1)
Survey: mapping of structure onto interpretation
Lexical projection
Functional layer IP
Functional layer
Structure VP [Spec, VP]
Interpretation event (action, state) participants in the event
Section 163
ol
temporal interpretation relation E-R-S specification of Event time
2.3
licensing of agreement features ofDPs visibility of DPs (i) theme: old information
1.4.3.2
[XP,VP]
temporal adverbials AGR case [Spec, TopP]
:
243
1.4.3.1 26142,
(11) scene-setting adverb:
CP [XP,Top’] [Spec, FocP] G C [tw]
Reference time/Event time rheme: new information _ focalized constituent
embedded R illocutionary force
2ete2 Dali2 2:32 23308 On,
From Structure to Interpretation
569
Section 3 The level of representation Logical Form (LF) encodes the interpretive properties of structures. It enables us to account for a number of interpretive properties of the sentence which cannot be read off the S-structure. Logical Form is based on S-structure, but it is not isomorphic to it. The mapping of S-structure onto Logical Form
may necessitate
a number
of abstract or covert movements
in
order to ensure that all the constituents of the clause satisfy the Principle of Full Interpretation. For instance, the covert movement which relates S-structure and Logical Form must ensure that quantificational elements (operators) occupy a
left-peripheral scope position from which they bind a variable. In order to derive the appropriate structure, therefore, quantifiers undergo quantifier raising, a covert movement operation. (2)
a. b.
Thelma checked every chapter. [,p every chapter; [, Thelma checked x,]]
Covert movement (movement at Logical Form) allows the unification of the syntax of moved wh-constituents and that of wh-phrases which remain in situ. In languages such as Chinese, which do not exhibit overt wh-movement, whphrases undergo wh-raising, covert movement at Logical Form. Similarly, English in situ wh-phrases (e.g. to whom Logical Form.
(3)
in (3)) undergo wh-raising at the level of
What did you give to whom?
Cross-linguistic variation in question formation is reinterpreted in terms of the ‘timing of wh-movement. In Chinese, all movement is covert and takes place at the level of Logical Form. In English, one wh-phrase moves at S-structure; the others remain in situ and undergo covert movement at Logical Form. In Hungarian, all wh-phrases move at S-structure. In existential structures such as (4), the indefinite DP (three women) associ-
Logical ated with expletive there moves covertly and replaces the expletive at d and eliminate are s expletive ation, interpret for relevant Form. At LE, the level replaced by their associates.
(4)
There are three women waiting in the office.
expletive subjects, By analogy with the analysis of existential sentences with e and interrogatnegativ English in we explore the analysis in which do-insertion The associate Form. Logical at ive sentences is followed by expletive replacement oes covert underg te associa The of do is the lexical verb heading its complement. ze the minimi to us enables esis movement and replaces do at LF. This hypoth moveGR V-to-A ture S-struc t difference between languages such as English withou nce differe the ement: GR-mov ment of lexical verbs, and French, with V-to-A in AGR to and T to moves V is defined in terms of the timing of V-movement. Sat AGR and T to moves V both types of languages; in French, however, ment V-move Covert LE at AGR structure, while in English, V moves to T and
570
From Structure to Interpretation
in English solves the problem of the unidentified traces created by the lowering analysis advocated previously. The discussion also briefly introduced Checking Theory, an alternative to the derivational approach to inflectional morphology adopted in this book. According to Checking Theory, lexical items are inserted in the structure WITH their inflectional morphology. Functional heads dominate bundles of abstract grammatical features (such as person, number, gender, tense) which may be strong or
weak and which must be checked by a matching lexical element. All movement is motivated by the checking of abstract head features or specifier features of functional heads. A head feature must be checked by head-movement; a specifier feature must be checked by a maximal projection in a specifier—head relation. Strong features must be checked by overt movement (S-structure); weak features must be checked by covert movement (Logical Form). Reconstruction at LF retraces the path of a moved constituent. It restores (part
of) a constituent either in its base-position or in an intermediate landing site. This accounts for interpretive relations which cannot be read off from S-structure. Reconstruction is invoked, for instance, to account for the interpretation of the reflexive himself in (5): himself may be bound either by Bill or by John. (5)
Which pictures of himself, did Bill; think that John; would prefer?
Reconstruction interacts with the VP-internal subject hypothesis to restrict the reading of the reflexive himself in (6): (6)
Criticize himself,,.;, Bill; never thought that John; would.
Exercises Section 1
Exercise
1.
AGRoP
Discuss the structure of the following sentences, constituents of the non-finite clauses. (1) (2)
paying particular attention to the
Over time Mary would show herself to be a real friend. | sincerely consider Bill to be my best friend.
Now consider the structure of the sentences in (3) and (4). What problems do they raise for our analysis of non-finite clauses? (3) (4)
Mary would show herself over time to be a real friend. | consider Bill sincerely to be my best friend.
In (3) and (4) it seems as if the subject of the non-finite clause has moved into the matrix domain, bypassing the adjunct over time in (3) and the adjunct sincerely in (4). In the literature, it has been proposed that the subject of the non-finite clause moves to the specifier position of the matrix AGRoP. Basing your argument on the clause structure developed in section 1.4.3.2, discuss the consequences of such a view for the position of the verb show in (3). (For a (highly technical) discussion, see Branigan 1992, Lasnik and Saito 1991, Koizumi 1995.)
From Structure to Interpretation
yA
Section 2
Exercise 2.
Tense interpretation
Discuss the interpretation of the tenses in the following examples. (1) (2) (3)
John promised that he would finish the proofs the next day. John promised that he would have finished the proofs the next day. John promised that he will finish the proofs tomorrow.
Morphologically speaking, English has only two tenses: a present tense with only the -s ending for the third person (e.g. finishes), and a past tense, with the -ed ending (finished). English has no future tense in the sense that there is no ending to express future time in English; future time is expressed by the combination of an auxiliary, shall or will, and an infinitive. The auxiliary itself is inflected for either present tense (shall/ will) or past tense (should/would). The time of the event expressed in the embedded clauses in (1)-(3), i.e. the time of ‘finishing’, is future with respect to the event of the matrix clause, i.e. ‘promising’. In (1) and (2) above, the past tense on the matrix verbs (promised) determines the past tense form of the auxiliary (would) in the embedded clause. In example (3) the tense of the embedded clause is present. This is unexpected if we assume that the matrix past tense determines the temporal calculus in the embedded clause. If the Event time of promised sets the Reference time of the embedded clause, then the embedded Referit is ence time is past and we would expect to find a past tense. We see then that and tenses embedded and tenses matrix possible to overrule the dependency between such of effect interpretive The S. to clause embedded the in time reset the Reference and a resetting is that the embedded tense is now related directly to the time of Speech that the proposition it contains is evaluated in the present. pair: Consider the appropriateness of temporal resetting in the following (4) (5)
Columbus discovered that the earth is round. In the Middle Ages it was proposed that the earth is flat.
Exercise 3.
Do-insertion and the location of [-w]
T and is carried to C by the In the text we proposed that the [+w] feature is located on the [-wH] feature is also basemovement of the auxiliary. Should we assume that generated on Tense?
Section 3
Exercise 4.
Quantifier interpretation
in the following sentences. Discuss the interpretation of the boldface constituents . (1) Every student has to read three books student. every by read be to have books (2) Three three books. read to (3) Every student says that Mary has three books. read to has Mary (4) Every student wonders why read. to has nt stude (5) Three books, every (6)
(7) (8) (9) (10)
can compete with every student. A woman who has read three books .
Every Three Three Every
read three books student thinks that his colleague should much to read. too be to nt stude books seems to every t. studen every books worried student is worried about three books.
72,
From Structure to Interpretation
In (1) the DP three books may be interpreted outside the scope of the universally quantified DP every student. In this interpretation, it is used to pick out three specific books which have to be read by every student. The DP three books may also be interpreted as being within the scope of the universal quantifier every, in which case there will still be three books for every student, but the books won’t necessarily be the same ones. Consider to what extent these interpretations are also available in (2)—(10).
Exercise 5.
Preposing and the VP-internal subject hypothesis
Discuss the interpretation of the reflexive herself in the preposed constituents: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Pictures of herself Jane never wanted Mary to show. Proud of herself, Jane does not think that Mary will be. Enjoy herself, Jane does not feel that Mary could. Criticize herself, Jane does not imagine that Mary would. A description of herself, Jane did not think that Mary could give.
In some of the sentences above herself may take either Jane or Mary as an antecedent; in other cases only Mary can be interpreted as the antecedent. Can you see any reason for the difference?
Exercise 6.
Preposing and the interpretation of reflexives
Discuss the interpretation of the pronouns in the following examples:
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
On John’s birthday, he got a car. On John’s desk, he put a book. To John’s wife, he gave a computer. To John’s wife, he wouldn’t talk. In John’s home town, he is very popular.
You will no doubt observe that in some of the examples above the R-expression John in the preposed PP cannot be co-referential with the pronoun he and in others it can. This suggests that principle C of the Binding Theory must rule out some of the examples but not others. Can you see any difference between the PPs in which John can be co-referential with he and those in which it cannot? If we consider the discussion in section 3, we might propose that in the examples in which John and the pronoun cannot be co-referential the PP must be reconstructed to an IP-internal position. In that position the PP (and the R-expression John which is contained in it) is c-commanded by the pronoun he in the subject position.
General exercises
Exercise 7.
Lowering and the structure of the small clause
In the discussion of small clauses, we extended the database to include small clauses in French.’ We observed there that French adjectives are associated with inflectional morphology. This led us to postulate that a small clause complement such as that in (1a) must contain an inflectional projection to host the agreement features associated with the predicate:
' Cf. chapter 1, section 2.5.9.
From Structure to Interpretation (1)
a.
573
Je considére [Thelma trés intelligente]. | consider Thelma very intelligent
b.
IP NP | [number]
AP Spec
A’
[gender]
| A
Thelma
-e
trés
intelligent
We concluded in the discussion that the adjectival agreement must lower onto A. If intelligent were to raise to |, then it ought to precede the adverb tres: (1)
c.
*Je considére [jp Thelma [, intelligent-e] [,p tres —]].
How could we reformulate the lowering hypothesis in the light of the discussion in section 3.5 of this chapter?
Exercise 8.
Agreement projections
In the text we propose that specifier position of AGRP. _ in the specifier position of below. How do the DPs get that arise.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
the subject DP has its agreement features checked in the We postulate that the object DP has its features checked the object agreement projection. Consider the examples their agreement features checked? Discuss any problems
The girls have invited the boys. The girls have given the boys a present. The girls did not talk to the boys. | consider the girls quite smart. | expect the girls in my office after lunch.
Exercise 9.
\VP-fronting
Discuss the derivation of the italicized strings: (1) (2)
| will. | promised to clean the car and clean the car did. | car the clean and car the clean | promised to
in (2)? What could be the motivation for do-insertion
Exercise 10.
Preposing
been elaborating throughout this book, Using the concepts and terminology we have (a)- and (b)-sentences. describe the difference between the paired
574
From Structure to Interpretation
(1)
a. b.
Sue will buy herself a brand new car. Buy herself a brand new car, Sue will.
(2)
a. b.
They have arrested three suspects. Arrested three suspects, they have.
(3)
a. b.
Sue is quite likely to come to the party. How likely to come to the party is Sue?
Each of the above examples illustrates preposing of a projection whose overt subject is stranded. The following data show that stranding the subject is apparently not always possible. (4)
a. b.
There is likely to be a riot. *How likely to be a riot is there? (Browning 1996: 223)
(5)
a. b.
Advantage is likely to be taken of John. *How likely to be taken of John is advantage? (Browning 1996: 215, her (34a))
(6)
a. b.
Tabs have never been kept on Jane Fonda. *Kept on Jane Fonda, tabs have never been. (Browning 1996: 215, her (34b))
On the basis of a comparison of the (b)-examples, identify the factors which prevent subject stranding by preposing of the lexical projection. For discussion see Browning (1996).
Exercise 11.
Pronoun interpretation and VP-deletion
Consider the interpretation of the possessive pronouns in (1). (1)
a.
John gives his wife his paycheck on Mondays.
In (1a) the pronoun his is interpreted as being co-referential with John. This interpretation raises problems for the formulation of the condition on the interpretation of pronouns.’ In English, possessive pronouns can be bound by the first potential binder: (1)
b.
John; gives his, wife his, paycheck on Mondays.
Now consider (2a): (2)
a.
John will give his wife his paycheck on Monday and so will Bill.
(2) illustrates VP-ellipsis: in the second conjunct the VP has been deleted. For the interpretation of (2a) we need its full propositional form. We must restore the deleted VP in the second conjunct:
* Discussed in chapter 4, section 1.3.
From Structure to Interpretation (2)
b.
fe)
John will give his wife his paycheck on Monday and Bill will [give his wife his paycheck on Monday] too.
In (2b) we copy the VP of the first conjunct, give his wife his paycheck on Monday, into the second conjunct. Consider now the interpretation of (2a) in its reconstituted version, (2b). What is the antecedent of the two possessive pronouns his in the second conjunct? As the reader can discover for him/herself, the most likely interpretation of (2b) is (2c), in which the possessive pronouns in the second conjunct are co-indexed with the subject of the second conjunct, Bill. The interpretation in which the possessives are coindexed with John, though possible, is less likely.
(2)
c.
John, will give his, wife his, paycheck on Monday
and Bill, will give his; wife his, paycheck on Monday too. d.
John, will give his, wife his, paycheck on Monday and Bill, will give his, wife his; paycheck on Monday too.
We conclude that when copying the elided VP onto the second conjunct to restore its full propositional form, we may, but need not, preserve the indices of the first conjunct. When the indices of the first conjunct are not preserved, that is, when his is interpreted
as being bound by Bill rather than by John, we can call this an interpretation with incomplete or sloppy identity or sloppy construal of the elided VP; when the indices are preserved (as in (2d)) we call this an interpretation with strict identity or strict construal of the elided VP. Consider the interpretation of the possessive pronoun its in the following examples in the light of the discussion of (1)—(2) above. Is the sloppy construal available in both examples?
(3)
(4)
Los Angeles is adored by its residents and so is New York.
born in The people who were born in Los Angeles adore its beaches, but those New York don't. (Examples from May 1986: 68)
adored by Los Angeles As was the case in (2), both strict construal (‘New York is York residents’) are New by adored is York (‘New construal sloppy residents’) and (‘People born in available is available in (3). However, in (4), only the strict construal born in (‘People construal sloppy the ); New York don’t adore Los Angeles beaches’ could factor l structura What le. unavailab is ) beaches’ New York don’t adore New York’s question you this answer to order In (4)? of construal sloppy the ng play a role in disallowi Los Angeles with respect to the must identify the configurational relationship of the DP May 1986 and Lasnik 1976. see on, discussi clause in both sentences. For(technical)
Exercise 12.
Bound variable readings of pronouns
ns in the following examples. Consider the interpretation of the boldfaced pronou
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
rt him. Each politician is loyal to the people who suppo to his neighbours. off it Every man who owns a Car wants to show a present. given be to s On his birthday, every child expect ork. homew | gave every student his | gave his homework to every student.
576
From Structure to Interpretation
(6) (7) (8) (9) 10)
Every professor of the Faculty invited her husband to the party. Her husband invited every professor of the Faculty to the party. | talked to each candidate after his interview. | talked to him after each candidate’s interview. After each candidate’s interview, | talked to him.
Can we maintain quantifier?
that bound
Exercise
VP-deletion and dialectal variation
13.
pronouns
are always
c-commanded
by the relevant
The following sentences are judged acceptable by some speakers and unacceptable by others. What could be the reason for this kind of variation in judgements? (1) (2)
%Mary lost her temper yesterday, and John will today. %First every girl lost her temper, and then every boy did. (From Cormack and Smith, 1997: 2, their (3))
Exercise 14. Bound pronouns and the double object construction In the discussion of ditransitive verbs such as give we want to develop a structure for the VP which can accommodate three arguments. For a sentence such as (1) we might propose either (2) or (3): (1)
John gave Mary a picture
(2)
VP pees
aE eae
DP
WP
gene DP
| grammar of L1
Universal grammar has to capture both the properties of language which may vary cross-linguistically, to which we return in section 2 below, and the general properties of human language which do not vary cross-linguistically. We propose that Universal Grammar contains two types of components: (i) rigidly fixed principles, which are common to all human languages, and (ii) parameters, choices that have to be set for each language. Principles are predetermined. They are given at birth; they are part of the cognitive capacity enabling us to acquire language and they themselves do not have to be acquired. Parameters, the choices left open by Universal Grammar, concern properties of language which
The New Comparative Syntax
585
are subject to cross-linguistic variation. For example, in all human languages, sentences are extended projections of V, i.e. projections of V augmented with projections of inflectional heads. However, languages vary with respect to whether or not the finite verb moves out of the VP to the heads of the dominating functional projections at S-structure: (10)
a.
— [ep [acrp John always eats chocolate]].
b.
*[cp [acre John eats always chocolate]].
c.
[cp [acrp Jean mange toujours du chocolat]]. Jean eats always chocolate
d.
*[cp [acrp Jean toujours mange du chocolat]].
In English, the finite lexical verb does not leave the VP at S-structure, while in French the finite lexical verb moves to AGR, a functional head. The difference between the two languages can be acquired on the basis of linguistic experience. The child is exposed to sentences such as (10a), for instance, enabling him or her to conclude that the verb does not move in English. Data such as (10c) will enable him or her to conclude that the French finite verb
does move. Thus the child will be able to fix the choice for the V-movement parameter one way or the other on the basis of exposure. Acquisition of language consists of fixing the choices or setting the parameters which vary over . languages. We will return to the notion of parameter and parametric variation in the next sections. (11) summarizes our conception of Universal Grammar.
-(11)
Variation and invariance
Invariance
—
Principles
Variation
—
Parameters
Universal Grammar
We have illustrated parametric variation and the role of experience in setting
of the parameters, i.e. in language acquisition. Let us also try to show the role and fixed rigidly principles in the process of language acquisition. Principles are the child do not have to be acquired. They supplement the knowledge that
making obtains simply from his or her experience, and prevent him or her from
the false generalizations that simple exposure might lead to. declarative Let us illustrate this on the basis of the distribution of the aticality complementizer in English. We provided’ an account for the ungramm repeated here in (12): of complementizer deletion in examples (8b) and (9b),
(12)
a. b.
*[cp 0 [i Mary should be invited] is surprising.
is preposterous. *[pp The proposal [cp 0 lip Mary should be invited]]]
3 In chapter 4, section 3.5.2.4.2.
586
The New Comparative Syntax
To account for the ungrammaticality of these examples we first formulated the hypothesis that the null declarative complementizer (0) has to be incorporated by the governing verb. In (12a) the complementizer is null and the sentence 1s ungrammatical. An incorporation analysis for the null complementizer accounts for its ungrammaticality. For a head X to incorporate a head Y, X and Y must be in a local relation, notably, X must govern Y. In (12a) the null complementizer is not governed by the verb. Similarly, we proposed in chapter 4 that while verbs can incorporate elements contained in their complements, nouns cannot do so. In (12b) the head noun proposal cannot incorporate the null complementizer. Observe that this analysis implies that incorporation of the null complementizer is obligatory; if it were not obligatory, (12a) and (12b) would be grammatical. The next question is why the null complementizer must be incorporated while the overt complementizer does not have to be incorporated. In an earlier discussion* we provided an explanation for the obligatory incorporation of the null complementizer in terms of the Empty Category Principle, which requires that empty categories be identified. In the case of the null declarative complementizer selected by the governing verb in (12c), we proposed that the selecting verb has a property which relates it to the [-wH] feature of the complementizer: (12)
c.
We propose [cp 0 [jp Mary should be invited]].
We speculated that it is the selectional feature of the verb which identifies the null complementizer. The null variant of that incorporates to the higher verb in order to be identified and hence satisfy the Empty Category Principle. Once again, we may wonder why there is such a principle as the Empty Category Principle in human language. We related the Empty Category Principle to the more general Principle of Full Interpretation, which requires that each symbol in the syntactic representation of a sentence be integrated into the interpretation.’ In the ungrammatical sentences (12a) and (12b), the null complementizer is not incorporated by a governing head. This means that it violates the Empty Category Principle: it remains unidentified. Being unidentified, the null complementizer is uninterpretable; it constitutes a symbol which cannot be mapped onto the interpretation. Ultimately, (12a) and (12b) violate the Principle of Full Interpretation: unidentified null complementizers are uninterpretable. The Empty Category Principle and the more over-arching Principle of Full Interpretation are not English-specific. They are general principles of language which are part of the principles of Universal Grammar: they do not vary crosslinguistically and they do not have to be acquired. When confronted with sentences such as (4)—(6) the language learner is able to figure out that the complementizer in English may be non-overt. This conclusion will have to remain compatible with the predetermined general principles of Universal Grammar. The descriptive generalization formulated on the basis of experience could be informally summarized as in (13): * Chapter 4, section 2.4.2.3. ° In chapter 5, section 1.4.1.
The New Comparative Syntax (13)
587
Generalization on the basis of (4)-(6): The complementizer that may be non-overt in English, provided the general principles of the grammar-are respected.
In order to determine how English is acquired, and how language in general is acquired, we have to determine to what extent the properties of languages can
be inferred solely from the data in linguistic experience, and to what extent they cannot emerge on the subject Italian
be deduced from such experience. Language-specific properties which from the data will plausibly be identified by the speaker of this language basis of exposure to the specific language. The fact that Italian allows the pronoun to be absent, for instance, can be acquired through exposure to sentences like (2b), which clearly shows that Italian has this option.
On the other hand, it is hard to see which kind of data would count as
positive evidence that the null complementizer cannot occur in certain positions in English. A grammatical sentence with an overt complementizer, such as (8a), shows nothing about the obligatory nature of the complementizer. Being
ungrammatical, sentence (8b) is by definition not part of the linguistic data the child will come across. Properties which cannot be inferred from the linguistic data must be determined by the innate linguistic competence. The hypothesis is that such properties do not have to be acquired. For instance, the restrictions on the occurrence of the null complementizer in English do not have to be acquired: they follow from the universal principles, the Empty Category Principle and the Principle of Full Interpretation. Comparative studies of languages can help us to answer the question of what is language-specific and what is universal: in other words, what is variable from one language to the next and what is invariant across languages. Comparative studies give important insights into the grammar of an individual language: they allow us to identify which aspects are characteristic of a particular language and _ which are universal.
2
Parameters and word-order variation
i
ne
EEE EEE EEE
In this section we show how the principles and parameter model can account for word-order variation in language.
2.1
Verb movement to AGR
We have already discussed in great detail the difference between French and
English illustrated in (14) and (15):° (14)
a. b. c. d.
John *John John *John
does not eat chocolate. eats not chocolate. often eats chocolate. eats often chocolate.
3 (sections 2.3, 2.5 and 6 We discussed these data in chapter 1 (section 2.5.2.1), in chapter 3.5). (section 5 4.1) and in chapter
588 (15)
The New Comparative Syntax a. b. c. d.
Jean “Jean Jean *Jean
ne mange pas de chocolat. ne pas mange de chocolat. mange souvent du chocolat. souvent mange du chocolat.
Basing ourselves on the distribution of the verb with respect to negative elements (ot/pas) and adverbs (often/souvent), we proposed that finite lexical verbs move to AGR at S-structure in French, while they don’t move at Sstructure in English. We explored the hypothesis that in both French and English the verb does in fact move to AGR;’ the difference between the two languages is not to be stated in terms of the presence or absence of movement as such, but rather in terms of overt movement — movement at S-structure — and covert movement — movement at the level of LE French has overt V-to-AGR movement; English has covert V-to-AGR movement. This contrast is summarized in
the following table:* (16)
a.
Timing of movement and language typology
movement lexical verb
overt French
covert English
As mentioned in the previous section, the child acquiring English can infer from data such as those in (14a) and (14c) that V does not move at S-structure in English. The French child can use data such as (15a) and (15c) to infer that the V does move in French.
Throughout the discussion, we have related the possibility of V-movement to the nature of AGR. The head feature of AGR is strong in French, while it is weak in English. (16)
b.
Strength of verbal AGR
AGR
strong French
weak English
The strength of AGR and the possibility of verb movement are related. The two properties summarized in (16a) and (16b) are not independent properties of French and English: they cluster. We may say that the strength of AGR is subject to parametric variation: AGR is strong in French and weak in English. Thus lexical verbs move to AGR at S-structure in French, precisely because AGR is strong and attracts them; lexical verbs don’t move at S-structure in English because AGR is weak and does not attract them. (16)
c.
Verbal agreement parameter ..
AGR V-to-AGR
French strong overt
English weak covert
A further consequence of this variation is that in French the verb may move to C at S-structure, while in English it cannot move to C: ’ In chapter 5, section 3.5. * Taken from chapter 5, section 3.5.3 (116).
The New Comparative Syntax
(14)
e.
(15)
e.
589
Ne mange-t-elle pas de chocolat? ne eats-she not chocolate *Eats she not chocolate?
Because V cannot move to AGR at S-structure in English, it cannot move still further to C. V-to-C movement in (15e) would have to skip the intervening heads T and AGR, thus violating the locality conditions on (head)-movement. Therefore, (15e) is ungrammatical. Once it is clear that the lexical verb cannot move to the [P-internal inflectional heads in English, it follows automatically
that the verb cannot move to C (15e). The learner does not have to work out that (14b) is ungrammatical on the basis of negative evidence: its ungrammaticality follows from (i) the fact that AGR is weak, and (ii) the locality conditions on movement. We assume that locality conditions on movement comprise a general principle which is invariant cross-linguistically.
2.2
N-to-AGR
movement
We have already considered the difference between the position of the noun in English (17a) and in French (17b):’ (17)
a.
the first Italian invasion of Albania
b.
la premiére invasion italienne de |’Albanie the first invasion Italian of Albania
This contrast can also be accounted for in terms of the principles and parameters approach. In the earlier discussion we interpreted the difference between (17a) and (17b) in terms of DP-internal N-movement. The relevant structures are given in (17c):
7)
c
DP D’ D
AGRP Bc
eee
Spec
AGR’
Oe
ee ae
AGR
NP So
Spec
the
first
la
premiére
° In chapter 4, section 3.5.2.1.
invasion;
N’
Italian
ns
Bein
italienne
t
de |’Albanie
590
The New Comparative Syntax d.
Timing of movement and language typology movement
S-structure
LF
noun-to-AGR
French
English
We accounted for the word-order variation in the French and English DP in terms of the relative strength of the DP-internal AGR node. We proposed that in English the AGR node in DP is weak, hence the head noun is not attracted to AGR; in French, nominal AGR is strong, hence it attracts the head noun.
(17)
e.
Nominal agreement parameter
French strong
AGR N-to-AGR
English weak covert
overt
The structure of the DP as such is invariant, but the strength of the AGR feature in the DP is subject to parametric variation. It is this variation which accounts for word-order differences.
2.3
SOV languages versus SVO languages
In typological studies of languages, much attention has been paid to word-order variation. We may identify SVO languages (such as English, French and Italian) and SOV languages (such as German). In the former, the verb precedes its complements; in the latter, the verb follows its complements: (18)
that que che So dass
John reads a book Jean lit un livre Gianni legge un libro Hans ein Buch liest
We have seen that the sentence is built up on the basis of more elementary units of structure, phrases. Each phrase is constructed according to the X’-schema in
(19), where X is the head of a phrase.'? A phrase is a projection of a head. X combines with a complement, YP, itself a phrase, and forms X’, a projection; X’ combines in turn with another phrase, the specifier, to form the maximal projection, the phrase. a
(19)
XP
Spec
x’
xX
complement
'° For a discussion of the X-bar framework see chapter 1, section 2.
The New Comparative Syntax
S91
VP, for instance, has the following structure: (20)
VP Spec
Ne
V
complement
We assume that the X-bar format for phrase structure is another universal principle which does not vary from one language to the next. All linguistic structure is endocentric. All phrases are projections of a head. When discussing the X-bar format and the structure of clauses and of phrases in chapter 1 we dealt exclusively with English. (20) is adequate for English. Without further modification, (20) leads to verb—object ordering. In order to account for the entire distribution of verbs and their objects we need to be able to distinguish VO orders from OV orders. There are two ways of expressing the variation between VO languages and OV languages in terms of the principles and parameters model of Universal Grammar: we briefly sketch them here.
2.3.1
The head parameter
The first way to express the variation between VO languages and OV languages is to maintain the proposal that a head X selects a complement YP, forming X’, and to allow for two instantiations of the structure of X’:
(21) a.
b.
ee
wat
X
YP
YP
x c. XP — Spec - X’ Cok > ee Le
In (21d) the semi-colon is used to indicate that the order of the head X and the complement YP is variable: the structure of the phrase can be head-initial (21a) or head-final (21b). (21d) is a universal principle of UG: the respective order of
head and complement varies parametrically. For the structure of VP, this means that there are two possible orders for the verb and its complement:
(22)
a.
b.
ach ae
‘ptr
V
| read
tie
a
DP
wine the book
tensa se
DP
V
das Buch
lies-
YESS
|
592
The New Comparative Syntax
English picks the order in (22a), German that in (22b). In terms of language acquisition we imagine the following scenario. X-bar theory (19) is a universal principle, innately given by UG and therefore available to all human beings. An English sentence with the sequence verb—object will constitute the adequate trigger for the child to realize that in the language he/she is exposed to he/she must select the structure in (22a). The triggering experience will enable the child to set the head parameter. The head parameter analysis of the difference between SOV and SVO languages implies that there is cross-linguistic variation in the base structures of languages. In the discussion of the structure of the nominal projection, we examined a similar proposal which relates the difference in word-order between French (or Romance) DPs and their English (or Germanic) counterparts to the difference in the direction of NP-adjunction of modifying APs.'' In chapter 4 we did not retain the hypothesis that French and English differ in terms of the direction
of NP-adjunction of adjectival modifiers: we replaced it by a hypothesis in which the structure of the DP is invariant and the observed differences in wordorder are derived by movement. In the next section we will explore an alternative approach to account for the word-order variation of the verb and its complement in which we also adopt a universal base hypothesis.
2.3.2.
The universal base and object shift
In the preceding section we expressed the variation between guages in terms of the phrase structure of the language. An which has been gaining prominence recently is the proposal OV languages have the same basic order. (23a) would be
VO and OV lanalternative option that both VO and the universal base
pattern, instantiated for the VP as (23b):
(23)
aa:
XP tJean?Geet Spec
x’
Sea Xx b
YP,
VP ree) Spec Va V
XP
In order to generate structures in which the object precedes V, proponents of the universal base hypothesis are led to argue that the complement of the verb, YP in (23b), is moved leftward across V. Analyses adopting this approach argue that the leftward movement of the object is analogous to the leftward movement of the subject DP, which originates in [Spec,VP] and moves to the left for '' Chapter 4, section 3.5.2.1.
The New Comparative Syntax
573
reasons of case and agreement.'* We refer to the leftward movement object as object shift. (24)
a.
of the
Object shift language object shift
German yes
English no
Pursuing the analogy between subject movement
French no
Italian no
to [Spec,AGRP]
and object
shift, it is proposed that the object in OV languages must attain a specifier—head agreement relation with a functional head to the left of V. Let us propose that the relevant head is the head which licenses the agreement features of the direct
object DP, AGRo." (23F
"Cc:
AGRoP
Spec
AGRo’
ot AGRo
ESS vP ieee Spec Mig pene We DP
DP,
We have already seen that the presence or absence of movement gives rise to cross-linguistic variation. In English wh-questions, one wh-phrase must move to a specifier position in the CP domain, while in Chinese all wh-phrases remain in situ and in Hungarian all wh-phrases undergo leftward movement.'* We proposed that the difference between English, Chinese and Hungarian does not reside in the availability of wh-movement in the grammar, but rather in the timing of wh-movement. In English one wh-phrase moves to the CP-domain at S-structure and the remaining wh-phrases (if any) undergo covert movement at LF; in Chinese all wh-phrases undergo covert wh-movement; in Hungarian, finally, all wh-phrases undergo overt wh-movement. In the same way, we related the difference in the position of verbs in English and French to the timing of VFrench it to-AGR movement: in English V-to-AGR movement is covert, while in in terms N of distribution the in differences the for ‘5 overt. We also accounted we can reasoning, of line this Pursuing movement. of the timing of N-to-AGR
to the also reinterpret the difference in the distribution of the object with respect
verb in terms of the timing of object shift:
2, section 2. 12 For the VP-internal subject hypothesis see chapter nt. agreeme object on 1.4.3.2 13 Cf. chapter 5, section
14 Cf. chapter 5, section 3.2.2.
The New Comparative Syntax
594 (24)
b.
Timing of object shift object shift language
2.3.3.
S-structure German
Logical Form English French Italian
Diachronic developments
The principles and parameters model also offers us a tool for describing language change. We will discuss this point in the light of variation between wordorder patterns, specifically the VO-OV variation. While present-day English can undoubtedly be characterized as a VO language, this is not the case for earlier stages of the language, as shown by the examples in (25): (25)
a.
and heora an sona his swurd ateah (ASL, XXXI, 468)
and of them one immediately his sword drew ‘and one of them instantly drew his sword’ b.
gif hie him pes rices upon (Parker 755) if they him the kingdom granted ‘if they would grant him the kingdom’ (examples from van Kemenade 1987: 16, her (2c) and (2e))
The word-order of Old English was much closer to that of present-day German, in that the object tended to precede the verb. We analyse these data in terms of the hypothesis developed above. We propose that Old English also displays overt object shift. What could account for the difference between Old English and German on the one hand, and Modern English (and French and Italian) on the other? Object shift is movement of the object DP to the specifier of AGRoP.
One difference between the older stages of English and Modern English is that in the earlier stage of the language, case morphology was more prominent. Case was visible on nouns and determiners, as well as on pronouns. In present-day English, case is visible only on pronouns. Modern German also has:visible case morphology on determiners and on some nouns. We might propose that AGRo contains a case feature and that this feature licenses the case of the object. In Old English and in German the case feature on AGRo is strong, hence the object must move to check the feature. In the course of the development of English the object shift parameter has been reset. The resetting of this parameter can be
related to the fact that the strength of the case feature associated with AGRo has changed: the case feature on AGRo was strong in Old English and it has become weak in Modern English. We summarize the variation in (25c). For the sake of completeness we add French and Italian in the diagram: they also do not have morphological case. (25)
c.
Object shift
AGRo-Case object shift
German strong overt
Old English strong overt
English weak covert
French weak covert
Italian weak covert
The New Comparative Syntax
2.4
S25
Summary: principles and parameters
2.4.1
Principles
In our discussion of cross-linguistic variation and cross-linguistic invariance we presented UG as containing two types of information: principles and parameters. The principles are rigid: they define what does not vary cross-linguistically. They determine invariance. In table (26a) we list some of the principles which we established in the discussion: (26)
a.
Principles of Universal Grammar
Principle
Reference
Structure is endocentric (X-bar theory)
Chapter 1 (2)
Locality conditions: (i) selection/theta-role (ii) case
(iii) movement (iv) interpretation (v) interpretation: binding Principle of Full Interpretation Empty Category Principle Economy
Chapter Chapter Chapters Chapter Chapter
1"(1-2;°2.5°8) 1 (3.7) 2-4 5°01 :63°2-5°3) 4 (1)
Chapter 5 (1.4.1) Chapter 4 (2), chapter 5 (1.4.5) Throughout the book
Among the rigid principles which we list above, some can be related to others. For instance, the Empty Category Principle is related to the Principle of Full Interpretation; the Principle of Full Interpretation and the Locality Condition relate to the over-arching concept of Economy, which we have repeatedly invoked throughout the book.
2.4,JF Paraineters areas of The parameters account for cross-linguistic variation: they define the is an UG s. propertie c -specifi language e determin and n cross-linguistic variatio specifies It ’. language human ‘possible notion the of abstract characterization our example, the what can vary and what remains constant across languages. In on the other principle that phrases are organized around heads is rigidly fixed; English has instance, For vary. may heads al function hand, the strength of the the strength of its weak AGRs, while French has strong AGRs. Depending on
to AGRs: thus the AGRs head, a language will or will not have V-movement and adverbs such as strength of AGRs determines the relative order of the verb , the strength of the often/souvent or negative markers such as not/pas. Similarly es the relative posinominal AGR head varies cross-linguistically and determin of the case feature of tion of the noun and the adjectives in the DP; the strength DP. By way of illustraAGRo varies and determines the position of the object ic variation which we parametr of elements tion, (26b) summarizes some of the have discussed in this and previous chapters:
The New Comparative Syntax
596 (26)
b.
Parameters
AGRs AGRs V-to-AGRs
English weak covert
French strong overt
AGRo-Case
English weak
Old English strong
German strong
French weak
Italian weak
object shift
covert
overt
overt
covert
covert
Nominal
English
German’
French
AGR parameter nominal AGR N-to-AGR
weak ~~ weak covert covert
strong overt
The acquisition of a language does not necessitate acquiring the rigid principles of UG; these are fixed and given at birth. Language acquisition consists in fixing the parameters left open by UG. To acquire English we must select, among others, the weak setting for AGRs, for AGRo and for nominal AGR. This can be achieved on the basis of experience, that is, exposure to linguistic data. Parametric variation is itself predetermined; the values which we can assign to a parameter are selections made within a restricted class of possibilities. The purpose of comparative research is to identify the parameters which have to be set by the learner and what kinds of settings there are.
2.4.3
The interaction of parameters and principles
The values assigned to a parameter constitute the elementary differences between grammatical systems. These elementary differences interact with the invariant principles of UG and with other parameters, determining many further differences. In this way we can derive observable differences between languages (or between different diachronic stages of one language) from one elementary contrast, the assignment of a different value to a parameter. We have illustrated this interaction in connection with the movement of the lexical verb. Weak AGRs in English implies that V does not move to AGRs. The interaction of the AGRs parameter with the universal locality condition on movement entails that V also does not move to C, hence that the verb does not invert with the subject in questions. The absence of V-to-C movement in English does not have to be stated as a separate parameter: it follows from the setting of the AGRs parameter coupled with the locality condition on movement. The observable properties with respect to which languages vary are thus not autonomous; rather, they tend to organize themselves into clusters of properties which are fairly stable across languages. We typically find that if a language has property X, it will also have property Y and property Z. For instance, a language with strong AGRs will have V-movement to AGR and V-movement to C. 'S Cf. chapter 4, section 3.5.2.1.
The New Comparative Syntax
597.
One parameter accounts for a number of differences; the concept of parametric variation does not therefore mean that a specific parameter has to be invoked to account for each observable difference between two languages. In sec-
tion 3 we illustrate the clustering of properties which accompany the availability of a non-overt subject in finite sentences in Italian.
3 Parametric variation between languages: the pro-drop parameter 3.1
Non-overt subjects in finite clauses
In this section we discuss the difference between finite clauses in Italian and English illustrated in (27) and (28) respectively. Unlike English, Italian allows the subject of a finite clause to remain non-overt. The structure of (27a) is (27c): the subject of compro is pro, a non-overt variant of the overt pronoun io, which could also occupy the subject position (27b): (27)
a.
Compro un gelato. buy an ice cream
b.
Io compro un gelato. I buy an ice cream.
Cc.
[acrr PTO; [acr compr,-O] [rp.-- [ve & £, un gelato]]].
(28) ne
*Buy an ice cream.’® I buy an ice cream.
In earlier discussions, we defended the existence of non-overt arguments.'’ The non-overt pronominal subject of a finite clause in Italian is represented as a nonovert pronoun, pro. Languages which allow the pronominal subject of a finite the clause to be non-overt are called pro-drop languages. Pro in (27c) realizes Like theta-role. AGENT the with associated external argument of compro; it is P], other external arguments, pro originates in [Spec, VP] and moves to [Spec,AGR features agreement nominal its where and where it is assigned nominative case verb moves to match the agreement features of AGR. Note in passing that the AGR in Italian, AGR being strong. more generally the The parameter distinguishing Italian from English, or pronoun in finite subject the which in ges parameter which distinguishes langua rt, is called non-ove be cannot it which clauses may be non-overt from those in it allows the e: languag op pro-dr a be to the pro-drop parameter. Italian is said subject pronoun to be dropped. ties with respect to We have already shown in section 2.4.3 that the proper language has strong a if e, instanc which languages vary are not isolated. For 16 See section 4.1, though.
nts in chapter 4, section 2. 17 We discuss the nature of non-overt argume
598
The New Comparative Syntax
AGR then the verb moves; thus strong agreement and V-movement are related.
Similarly, in English AGR
is weak, hence V does not move
to AGR.
As a
consequence of the absence of V-movement to AGR in combination with the locality condition on movement, V cannot move to Foc in the CP domain either. A further consequence of the inability of V to move to C is that in root questions in which there is no auxiliary, do-insertion becomes obligatory.'* We see that the following are related: (i) weak agreement inflection, (ii) absence of Vmovement to AGR, (ili) absence of V-movement to C, (iv) do-insertion. Syntac-
tic properties organize themselves into clusters which are relatively stable across languages. A cluster of properties can be reduced to one elementary contrast, the assignment of a different value to a single parameter. We now examine the clustering of properties in relation to the pro-drop parameter in English and Italian. Four syntactic properties seem to coincide and to reflect the setting of the pro-drop parameter. Property 1 Italian allows an empty category pro in the subject position of tensed clauses with the interpretation of a definite pronoun, but English does not. This property is illustrated by the contrast between (27a) and (28a) above. Property 2 In Italian an overt definite subject can occupy a post-verbal position. This option is not available in English:
(29)
a. b.
Ha telefonato sua moglie. *There/it has telephoned your wife.
Property 3 In Italian, the subject of an embedded clause can move from [Spec, AGRP] across the overt complementizer che corresponding to English that. In English, this is not possible: if a subject is extracted from [Spec,AGRP] the complementizer introducing the clause from which the subject is extracted cannot be overt.” (30)
a.
Chi credi che abbia telefonato? who you believe that have (subjunctive) telephoned ‘Who do you think has telephoned?’
b.
*Who do you think that has telephoned?
c.
|Who do you think has telephoned?
Property 4
In English the subject of a weather verb must be realized by an
overt pronoun (31a). In Italian, the subject of a weather verb is necessarily non-
overt; an overt pronoun is excluded (31b). Similarly, where English uses the explet-
ive it in construction with an extraposed clause (32a), the grammar of Italian imposes the use of the non-overt variant (32b): '* Chapter 5, section 2.2.2. " Cf. chapter 2, section 1.1.4.
The New Comparative Syntax (31)
a.
329
“*(It) is raining.
b. — pro/*Cio piove. (*it) rains ‘It is raining.’
(32)
a.
*(It) is clear that Gianni will go home.
b.
pro/*Cio & chiaro che Gianni tornera a casa. (*it) is clear that Gianni will return to home
This comparison of English and Italian highlights four properties of English (and of Italian). We will show in the next section that these four properties are not independent features of the grammar of English and Italian. The fact that they co-occur is not accidental: all four properties are consequences of the setting of the pro-drop parameter.
3.2 3.2.1
Relating the properties The identification of pro and rich AGRs
Recall2” that the subject requirement demands that the subject position is always structurally projected. Italian sentences lacking an overt subject have a nonovert filler for the subject position, represented as pro. English does not have such an element. We have argued that the availability of the non-overt subject in finite clauses correlates with another property of the languages examined and which is particularly obvious when we compare English with Italian.*' There is a contrast in the relative richness of the agreement inflection on the verb in these - languages:
(33) 1sg 2sg 38g 1pl 2pl 3pl
English speak I speak you speaks she speak we speak you they speak 2 forms
Italian parlo i0 __—parili tu lei — parla _parliamo noi voi __ parlate loro parlano 6 forms
t forms and every The Italian inflectional system is rich. There are six distinc the inflectional paradigm number/person combination has a different ending: the English present tense distinguishes all six persons uniquely. In contrast, in -s for the third person paradigm has only two distinct forms, the form ending ~ other persons. singular and the bare stem of the verb used for all mines the availability of the The inflectional paradigm of the language deter is at the basis of the setting of non-overt subject pro. The inflection of the verb 2” Chapter 1, section 3.6, 2"! Cf. chapter 4, section 2.
600
The New Comparative Syntax
the pro-drop parameter. Non-overt elements (such as the pro subject in pro-drop languages”*) are symbols in the structure and must be interpreted. In order to be interpreted, a symbol must be interpretable. Non-overt categories are subject to an identification requirement, the Empty Category Principle.” Rich finite inflection in Italian identifies the non-overt subject in the finite clause: thus the non-overt subject is interpretable. In English, the insertion of pro in a subject position will lead to ungrammaticality: in the absence of rich AGRs, pro cannot be identified. Thus pro remains uninterpretable and uninterpreted. English and Italian vary with respect to the possibility of having a non-overt subject, and they also differ with respect to the richness of AGR-morphology. Because we are concerned with verbal agreement with the subject we use the label AGRs. We conclude that only rich AGRs can identify pro. In Italian, overt realization of the subject pronoun has a semantic or pragmatic effect: it signals contrast or focus on the subject: (34)
LEI parte e LUI arriva. she leaves and he arrives ‘SHE leaves and HE arrives.’
When no contrast or special focus on the subject is required the pronoun remains non-overt. This follows from considerations of economy, a general principle which constrains linguistic representations (cf. section 2.4.1). The overt expression of the subject is less economical than leaving it non-overt: in the former case phonetic material (‘sound’) is needed, but in the latter it is not. In Italian, an overt subject will be inserted in the structure only when the added cost of the overt expression has some interpretive yield.
3.2.2
Expletives
The ungrammaticality of the overt pronoun as the subject of a weather verb in Italian (31b) can be derived from the interaction of the positive setting of the pro-drop parameter with the Principle of Economy. The subject of a weather verb cannot be contrastively stressed or focused; this means that, in Italian, there will never be a reason to prefer the less economical overt expletive to its more economical non-overt variant. Similarly, the expletive subject in (32b) does not have semantic content; hence it cannot be focused or used contrastively. In English, expletive pronouns are overt ((31a)-(32a)) because there are no more economical non-overt counterparts. In dtalian, expletives remain non-overt be-
cause there is no motivation for inserting the phonetic material. The obligatory absence of subjects of weather verbs and of overt expletives in Italian, Property 4, derives from Property 1 and its interaction with the general Principle of Economy. Being associated with phonetic material, the overt pronoun is less economical than its non-overt alternative. The Italian non-overt pronoun pro is used as an expletive. * Cf. chapter 4, section 2.2. *> Chapter 4, section 2.4.2.
The New Comparative Syntax
3.2.3
601
Post-verbal subjects and non-overt expletives
Let us turn to Property 2: the possibility of having post-verbal definite subject DPs (29) in Italian. We have proposed that all sentences must project a subject position; this is the so-called subject requirement. The subject requirement does not imply that the subject position must be occupied by a referential expression, as the following example illustrates: (35)
a.
There arose a number of problems.
In (35a) the subject is the pronoun there, which functions as an expletive, an element without referential value. Expletive there is associated with the postverbal indefinite subject DP, a number of problems. The expletive and the associated DP form a chain. In Italian (29a) there is a post-verbal subject. Following the discussion in the preceding section, it is quite plausible that in these examples the canonical subject position [Spec,AGRsP] is filled by a non-overt expletive. Property 2 is related to Property 1 and to Property 4. Sentences with post-verbal subjects have a nonovert expletive in the subject position: (35)
b.
pro, ha telefonato sua moglie, has telephoned your wife
3.2.4 Extraction of the subject across an overt declarative complementizer Property 3, illustrated by the data in (30), repeated here for the reader’s convenience as (36), is at first sight less obviously related to one or more of the
_ preceding properties: (36)
a.
b. c.
Chi credi che abbia telefonato? who you believe that have (subjunctive) telephoned ‘Who do you think has telephoned?’
*Who do you think that has telephoned? Who do you think has telephoned?
e Recall24 that we cannot extract a subject from the position to the immediat
r-word right of the complementizer that in English; (36a) seems like a word-fo cal, grammati is (36a) Yet (36b). English Italian translation of the ungrammatical
in Italian. which suggests that the relevant type of subject extraction is possible base our cannot We needed. is caution In the analysis of linguistic data, s of sentence two in l materia overt the of n judgements on a superficial equatio symrt non-ove contain also es structur c the two languages examined. Syntacti postappear also can Italian in DP bols. (29a) has shown that the subject expletive pro (35b). verbally. In this case, the subject position is occupied by an s, as shown in ntation represe possible two This means that sentence (36a) has in the sentence. s element rt non-ove the of | (37). The representations differ in terms 24 From chapter 2, section 1.1.4.
602
The New Comparative Syntax
(37a) is an ungrammatical representation, but (37b) does not violate any principles of the grammar: (37)
a. *Chi, credi che ¢, abbia telefonato? b. | Chi; credi che pro; abbia telefonato ¢;?
In (37a) the subject, chi (‘who’), is extracted from the position to the immediate right of che. In (37b), it is extracted from the post-verbal subject position. In Italian, as in English, nothing bans the extraction of post-verbal material across a complementizer:
(38)
a. b.
Who, do you think that John will invite ¢,? Chi, credi che Gianni invitera t,?
In view of the considerations above, the ban on extracting the subject from a position to the immediate right of a complementizer (che/that) can be maintained for both English and Italian. In the Italian examples in which the ban is apparently violated, the language uses the alternative option of placing the subject post-verbally. The post-verbal position of the subject is itself possible because Italian has a non-overt pronominal filler for the subject position (Property 2). English does not have the option of placing the subject in a post-verbal position (29b), hence when the subject moves it must do so from the canonical subject position.
3.2.5
The clustering of properties
Languages with non-overt subject pronouns have the following properties in common: (i) rich AGRs; (ii) non-overt pronoun subject; (iii) no overt expletives; (iv) post-verbal definite subjects; (v) extraction from [Spec,AGRsP] across overt
material in the adjacent CP domain. French is like English in that it lacks all the properties associated with pro-drop. AGRs morphology is relatively poor in French: (39)
a.
Present tense: French parler (‘speak’) 1sg je parle 2sg tu parles
38g 1pl 2pl 3pl
elle parle nous parlons vous parlez elles parlent
There are only four forms which are clearly phonetically distinct. The contrast between parle/parles and parlent becomes clear only in contexts of liaison. French cannot have non-overt subjects: (39)
b.
*Parle bien. speaks well
French has overt expletives:
(39)
c.
Il pleut. it rains
The New Comparative Syntax
603
In the normal case French does not have post-verbal subjects: (39)
d.
*A téléphoné votre femme. has telephoned your wife
Finally, extraction from [Spec,AGRsP] across que (‘that’) is not possible: (39)
e.
*Qui crois-tu que t viendra? who think-you that will come
3.3
Syntax is driven by morphology
In table (40a) we summarize the properties that distinguish pro-drop languages from non-pro-drop languages:
(40)
a.
The pro-drop parameter Rich AGRs null subject overt expletive post-verbal subject subject extraction
Italian yes yes no yes yes
English no no yes no no
French no no yes no no
across overt C [—wH]
Once we know that a language has rich AGRs, then the other properties follow. The availability of a null subject will follow from the fact that AGRs can identify
it2° From the availability of pro in conjunction with considerations of economy it follows that there will not be any overt expletives. The availability of the post-verbal subject is related to the availability of non-overt expletives. Finally, the subject can move across a complementizer because it can be extracted from a post-verbal position. In section 2.4.2 we listed the following instances of parametric variation: (40)
b.
Parameters
English weak covert
AGRs AGRs V-to-AGRs
French strong overt
AGRo-case object shift
Old English German strong _ strong overt overt
English weak covert
— English
Nominal AGR parameter
French
German
nominal AGR_
strong
weak
weak
overt
covert
covert
N-to-AGR
25 Cf. the discussion in section 3.2.1.
26 Cf. chapter 4, section 3.5.2.1.
French weak covert
Italian weak covert
604
The New Comparative Syntax
An interesting generalization emerges from a survey of the parameters above. Each of the parameters is dependent on a morphological property associated with a functional head. An appealing hypothesis would be that ALL crosslinguistic variation is related to morphological properties of the language. If this view can be substantiated by further research then we could establish another general principle: (40)
c.
3.4
Speculations on post-verbal non-overt pronouns
3.4.1.
Syntax is driven by morphology.
The parameter
In our discussion of the non-overt pronoun (pro) we concentrated on its function as the subject of finite clauses. In this section we speculate on the availability of non-overt object pronouns. The data which we will examine suggest that the empty category pro is also possible (i) as a direct object, and (ii) as the subject of a small clause. We will see that Italian apparently allows pro in these positions, and English does not. Interestingly, however, French now patterns with Italian in allowing a post-verbal pro, while we have just seen in (40a) that it patterns with English with respect to the non-availability of subject pro. This contrast between French and English accounts for the contrasts between the English (a) and (c) examples and the French (b) and (d) examples in (41) and (42):7’
(41)
a.
The agreement allowed one to work independently.
b.
Laccord nous permettait de travailler de maniére indépendente. the agreement us allowed to work of fashion independent “The agreement allowed us to work independently.’
©
(42)
*The agreement allowed to work independently.
d.
accord permettait de travailler de maniére indépendente. the agreement allowed to work in manner independent ‘The agreement allowed one to work independently.’
a.
Thelma thought it likely that Louise would call.
b.
Thelma trouvait ¢a bizarre que Louise ait téléphoné. Thelma found it strange that Louise had telephoned
c. d.
*Thelma thought likely that Louise would call. Thelma trouvait bizarre que Louise ait téléphoné.
*7 See also chapter 1, section 0.1.
The New Comparative Syntax
605
In English, the object of the verb allow has to be overt: (41c) is ungrammatical. Similarly, in English, the subject of the small clause must be overt: (42c) is ungrammatical. In French (41d), the object of permettre (‘allow’) may be omitted, and in (42d), the subject of the small clause may be omitted. In the following discussion we will conclude that in (41d) the direct object is realized as a non-overt category. For (42d) we will conclude that the subject of a small clause may also be non-overt.
3.4.2
The non-overt object is syntactically active
Consider the following examples: (43)
This This This *This © oom
leads leads leads leads
people to the following conclusion. — to the following conclusion. people to conclude the following. — to conclude the following.
In (43a) the verb lead is followed by an overt direct object DP people and by a PP to the following conclusion. In this example the direct object can be omitted. The internal argument is implicit and has an arbitrary reading: (43b) means roughly ‘this leads people in general to the following conclusion’. In (43c) the verb selects a direct object and an infinitival clause whose subject is non-overt. The non-overt subject of the infinitival clause, PRO, is controlled by the direct object DP people, a relation represented by co-indexation in (43e): (43)
e.
This leads people; [cp [jp PRO, to [yp #; conclude the following]]].
As can be seen from the ungrammaticality of (43d), the internal argument of lead cannot remain implicit when it controls the subject of an infinitival clause. For the grammar of English we conclude that an understood object argument in English is syntactically inert. Even though it may sometimes be understood (43b), an implicit object cannot interact with the overt constituents of the sentence. Now consider the Italian data in (44) and the French data in (45): (44)
(45)
a.
Questo conduce la gente alla seguente conclusione. this leads the people to the following conclusion
b.
Questo conduce — alla seguente conclusione.
c.
Questo conduce la gente a concludere quanto segue. this leads the people to conclude what follows
d.
Questo conduce — a concludere quanto segue.
>
Ceci améne les gens a la conclusion suivante. this leads the people to the conclusion following
b.
Ceci améne — 4 la conclusion suivante.
606
The New Comparative Syntax c.
Ceci améne les gens a conclure ce qui suit.
this leads the people to conclude what follows d.
Ceci améne — a conclure ce qui suit.
As in English, the Italian verb condurre (‘lead’) selects a direct object DP, la gente, and a PP, alla seguente conclusione, in (44a). The object DP can be omitted (44b) and is implicit: When condurre is followed by an infinitival clause, the non-finite clause has a non-overt subject, PRO, as in English (44c). Again the direct object DP controls the non-overt subject of the infinitive. However, in Italian the implicit direct object in (44d) is also syntactically active: it controls the non-overt subject of the infinitival clause. The French data in (45) are parallel to the Italian data. (46) contains a further example of how implicit objects in Italian interact syntactically with other constituents in the sentence. (46)
a.
b.
La buona musica riconcilia le donne con se stesse. the good music reconciles the women with themselves ‘Good music reconciles women with themselves.’ La buona musica riconcilia —
con se stessi.
the good music reconciles with themselves ‘Good music reconciles one with oneself.’
In (46a) riconciliare (‘reconcile’) takes a direct object DP, le donne (‘the women’), and a PP, con se stesse (‘with themselves’). Se stesse is a reflexive: it must be bound by a local binder, a DP, which agrees with the reflexive in its relevant
features. In (46a) se stesse is feminine plural; it is bound by le donne. (46b) poses two problems. It contains the verb riconciliare. On the basis of the interpretation of (46a) we expect the verb riconciliare to have the same argument structure as in (46a), hence to take a direct object. There is no overt direct object in (46b). We also find the reflexive se stessi in this example. We
need a binder for the reflexive, with which it will agree in its relevant features. Se stessi is masculine plural. How can se stessi possibly be bound by a masculine plural DP? The option which we pursue here is to say that se stessi is bound by a non-overt DP which corresponds to the direct object DP in (46a), resulting in representation (46c). Since reflexives agree with their antecedents this means that the non-overt object in (46c) must also be masculine plural. (46)
c.
La buona musica riconcilia ec; con se stessi,.
Using the non-overt object hypothesis we can also account for the control pattern in Italian (44). Italian (44d) would be assigned representation (44e) with a non-overt object: (44)
e.
Questo conduce ec; [¢» [ip PRO; a concludere quanto segue]].
this leads
to conclude what follows
The New Comparative Syntax
607
The non-overt object is also available in French, as shown by (47):
(47)
a.
La bonne musique réconcilie avec soi-méme.
the good music reconciles with oneself ‘Good music reconciles one with oneself.’
b.
La bonne musique réconcilie ec, avec soi;-méme.
And, once again, the non-overt object can identify the non-overt subject of an infinitival clause: (45)
e.
Ceci ameéne ec, [¢p [jp PRO; a conclure ce qui suit]]. this leads to conclude what follows
In English the non-overt object option is not available, as in (48):
(48)
a. b. c.
Good music reconciles women with themselves. *Good music reconciles — with oneself. *Good music reconciles ec, with oneself,.
The grammar of Italian and that of French dispose of a syntactically active non-overt object which is not available in the grammar of English. Implicit objects can be structurally represented in Italian and in French; in English they cannot. Two questions arise: what kind of empty category is the non-overt object in Italian, and how can it be identified? Recall our classification of non-overt elements** repeated here as (49):
(49)
PRO
pro
A’-trace wh, topic, focus heavy DP shift
A-trace subject in VP passive raising
no
no
yes
yes
no (or minimal)
yes
yes
no
unaccusative
Antecedent obligatory Case-marked
overt The Italian or French non-overt object postulated above alternates with an object t non-over The position. case a in occurs it that object DP; this suggests
the does not have an overt antecedent. These considerations lead us to equate finite of position subject the in found pronoun t non-over non-overt object to the allows pro as clauses in Italian and represented as pro. Italian, but not English, a direct object.
must be Recall2? that by the Empty Category Principle, non-overt elements e of Full :dentified. We derived the Empty Category Principle from the Principl is identified Interpretation.*’ The question arises how the non-overt object pronoun 28 Chapter 4, section 2, (83). 2° Chapter 4, section 2.4.2. 0 Chapter 5, section 1.4.5.
The New Comparative Syntax
608
in Italian and French. Italian subject pro is identified by the features of the rich AGR node. By analogy, we might propose that the non-overt object is identified
by object agreement (AGRo). Thus tentatively we might say that the null object pronoun in Italian or in French moves to the specifier of AGRoP:
(50)
AGRoP Spec
AGRo’
SER AGRo
#TRAD vP
Pitts Spec Vi a V
ee DP
Object pro undergoes object shift (cf. section 2.3.2 above). That the non-overt object pronoun should undergo movement is not surprising. In Italian and French, in general, object pronouns do not remain in their base-position: (51) a.
Italian Maria ha visto Gianni. Maria has seen Gianni
(52) ae
French varie a Vu yeail:
b.
*Maria ha visto lo. Maria has seen him
b.
*Marie a vu le.
c.
Maria lo ha visto. Maria him has seen
c.
Marie I’a vu.
However, the non-overt object in Italian or French does not have the same range of interpretations as its overt pronominal counterpart. In the same vein, the non-overt object is more restricted in interpretation than the non-overt subject. In the examples examined so far the non-overt object systematically has an arbitrary reading, meaning ‘people in general’. This may be related to the fact that while the verb morphology shows rich inflection for subjects, there is no overt object agreement morphology ori the verb. We suggest that the identification of the non-overt element is guaranteed precisely via its arbitrary interpretation. Arb can associate with AGRo and identify the non-overt object pro in [Spec,AGRoP].
It is clear from the data above that the availability of object pro cannot be reduced to the positive setting of the pro-drop parameter for subjects. There is no direct correlation between the availability of subject pro and that of object
pro. French does not have subject pro*’ but it does have object pro. This suggests 31 See sections 3.2.5 and 3.3 above.
The New Comparative Syntax
609
that there are two independent parameters, one related to the non-overt subject pronoun and the richness of AGRs, the other related to the non-overt object pronoun and to the role of AGRo in licensing non-overt object pronouns. Nonovert object pronouns are syntactically active in French and Italian. We propose
that they are structurally represented as pro, non-overt pronouns. In English, an implicit object is syntactically inert. We propose that it is not structurally repre-
sented. Pursuing this line of reasoning, we will say that the grammar of English does not have a non-overt pronoun, the element pro, to fill the object position, while French and Italian do.
3.4.3
Non-overt subjects in small clauses
In addition to admitting a non-overt object pro with arbitrary interpretation (‘people in general’), Italian and French also have a post-verbal non-overt expletive. The following contrasts between English (53) on the one hand and Italian (54) and French (55) on the other can be reduced to the availability of expletive pro as a small clause subject: (53)
a. b.
I consider [it likely that he will come]. *I consider likely that he will come.
(54)
a.
*Lo considero probabile che verra. It consider-1sg probable that will come-3sg ‘I consider it likely that he will come.’
b. | Considero probabile che verra. ‘I consider it likely that he will come.’ c.
(55)
Considero pro probabile che verra.
a.
*Je le considére probable qu’il vienne. I it consider likely that he come (subj)
b.
Je considére probable qu’il vienne. I consider likely that he come (subj) ‘I consider it likely that he will come.’
c.
Je considére pro probable qu’il vienne.
e is likely. In (53a) consider selects a small clause complement whose predicat e pronoun expletiv an it, by d occupie is clause small the The subject position of subject that Recall come. will he that clause sed extrapo ‘n construction with an a having of option the lacks English that and d positions are always projecte overt. non-overt pronoun. The expletive subject must therefore be overt expletive is the t: differen is on situati the (55) In Italian (54) and French n as an expletive. ungrammatical. In (54a) the object pronoun /o cannot functio
610
The New Comparative Syntax
We propose that the grammatical example (54b) has representation (54c). Similarly, the French object pronoun /e is ungrammatical in (55a). Following the reasoning developed so far, we assume that a non-overt expletive pro occupies the subject position of the small clause in (55b), as shown in (55c). The contrast between (54a)/(55a) and (54b)/(55b) is similar to the by now familiar contrast between (56a) and (56b): (56)
a.
b.
*Cio é chiaro che verra. it is clear that he will come
pro E chiaro che verra.
In pro-drop languages the overt subject pronoun is chosen only if the subject is focused upon or contrasted. An expletive subject cannot be contrasted or focused: hence in Italian (54) or in French (55) we must choose the non-overt option (pro).
Given the availability of a post-verbal non-overt pronoun, the overt pronouns lo and /e cannot function as expletives and are excluded in Italian (54) and in French (55) respectively. While Italian and French allow for expletive subjects of small clauses, referential subjects of small clauses cannot be non-overt: (S7)
a.
b. (58)
a.
b.
Ritengo questa proposta interessante. I consider this proposal interesting.
*Ritengo interessante. Je considére cette proposition intéressante. I consider this proposal interesting.
*Je considéré intéressante.
Even arbitrary subjects of small clauses cannot be non-overt: (S57)
c.
*Quando fanno cosi, ritengo stupidi. when they act like this, I consider stupid
(58)
c.
*Quand les gens disent cela, je considére stupides. when people say that, I consider stupid
Interpretively, the non-overt subject of the small clause is not identical to a nonovert subject pronoun, nor can it be equated to a non-overt object. In the small clause, only expletive pro is available. Sentences with small clause complements have the partial structure in (59a). The AP predicate of the small clause is dominated by an inflectional projection.
The New Comparative Syntax (59)
a.
611
VP
ae Ny
IP aay
DP
It. Fr, Eng.
ritengo considére consider
ite
/\
|
‘
_le ragazze les filles the girls
“1 -€S
intelligent intelligent intelligent
We motivated the existence of the functional projection on the basis of the overt re features in French. We may thus propose that the small clause IP is GRP:
(9)
VP
4b.
Wk
Vv
AGRP AGR’
DP AGR It. ioe Eng.
ritengo considére consider
_le ragazze les filles the girls
-{ -eS pl fem
AP intelligent intelligent intelligent
If small clauses contain an AGR projection, then the AGR head could plausibly be held responsible for licensing the non-overt expletive subject. How do we account for the difference between French and Italian, in which the non-overt subject is available in the small clause, and English, in which it is can not? Following the reasoning we have developed throughout this book, we clause. small the of head AGR the of s propertie the to e try to relate the differenc Consider the following paradigms for adjectives in Italian, French and English:
(60)
a.
Le gargon est beau. Les garcons sont beaux.
La fille est belle. Les filles sont belles.
b.
Il ragazzo é bello. I ragazzi sono belli.
La ragazza é bella. Le ragazze sono belle.
c.
The boy is beautiful. The boys are beautiful.
The girl is beautiful. The girls are beautiful.
The New Comparative Syntax
612
In English, adjectives have no overt AGR morphology; in French and Italian they do. Its morphology enables the small clause AGR to identify pro in Italian and French, but not in English.
(59)
VP
.,¢.
Wr
V
AGRP DP
considero considére *consider
pro pro pro
AGR’ AGR
AP
masc sg masc sg
probabile probable likely
Still, in spite of its richness, AGR in French and Italian small clauses can only license a non-referential expletive subject. Why should this be? Our answer is speculative. In finite clauses in Italian, referential subject pro is licensed by the rich AGRs inflection of the verb, which encodes person and number. In small clauses, adjectival AGR only encodes number and gender. Perhaps the person feature is required to license referential pro. Person features are associated with verbal agreement. We can relate the availability of person features in AGRo to the fact that the AGRo projection which licenses object pro is an extended projection” of the verb. The projection AGRP of the small clause is an extended projection of A. Person is a feature of V, not of A.
3.4.4
Two types of post-verbal pro
In our discussion above, the arbitrary object pro illustrated for French in (61a) and the expletive pro subject of the small clause illustrated for French in (61b) are both instantiations of pro, but they are licensed differently. (61)
a.
Ceci ameéne a conclure que... this leads to conclude that
b.
Je crois probable qu’il partira. I think likely that he will go
Object pro is licensed by AGRo; it has arb features, including person. The expletive pro in small clauses is identified by the AGR head of the small clause and has only number and gender features. * Cf. chapter 3, section 3 for the notion of extended projection.
The New Comparative Syntax
613
If the two non-overt categories are licensed by different heads, then we expect that languages may have one of them but not the other. This prediction is borne out. In German, the subject of a small clause must be overt, but arbitrary object pro is licit: (62)
a.
b.
Das schones Wetter regt an zu bleiben. the nice weather induces to stay *Ich finde wahrscheinlich dass er nicht kommen wird.
I find likely that he not come will In German AGRo can apparently identify pro,,, but the agreement head of the small clause does not license expletive pro. We will not further examine this point here as the discussion of the German data would take us too far afield.
3.4.5
Object pro and diachronic development
While the non-overt object pronoun is not available in Modern English it was available in earlier stages of the language. The following examples are taken from Rizzi (1986):
(63)
a.
When he commaunded to receiue the man... into the churche again when he ordered to receive the man into the church again
b.
in what church commaunded he to receive him? in what church commanded he to receive him (a-b: 1532-3: St Thomas More, Works (1557), 826 E7; Rizzi 1986: 532, his (63d))
c.
He had not otherwise forbid to molest them he has not otherwise forbidden to molest them (1649, Milton, Tenure of Kings (ed. Garnett), p. 72; Rizzi 1986: 532, his (63e))
d.
I then advised to fly (1725, Pope, Odyssey (World Classics IX), p. 133; Rizzi 1986: 532, his (63f))
e.
all the gods... that teach to tame the soil and rule the crook (1748, James Thompson, Castel of Indolence Il, VIII, 7; Rizzi 1986: 532, his (63g))
: Like French and Italian, earlier English also has the non-overt expletive pronoun (64)
a.
Isee very clerely proved that it can be done none otherwise
1986: $32, (1534, St Thomas More Works (1557), 1244 H15; Rizzi his (64c))
The New Comparative Syntax
614 b.
This is what I thought convenient to write by way of preface to “The Maiden Queen’ (1668, Dryden, Secret Love, Pref. 421; Rizzi 1986: 532, his (64d))
c.
I can make my boast to have found a better Maecenas (1673, Dryden, The Assignation, Dedic. 372; Rizzi 1986: 532, his (64e))
4 4.1 4 le
Register variation Non-overt subjects in abbreviated English teehe- data
During our discussion of non-overt subjects in English and Italian, the reader may have thought of certain uses of English which allow the omission of a referential subject. (65)-(67) provide some attested examples. (65) contains data from diaries; in (66) we provide data from informal written notes; and (67)
contains data from spoken English. The latter examples are drawn from fictional prose. (65)
Diaries
ae
A very sensible day yesterday. Saw no one. Took the bus to Southwark Bridge. Walked along Thames Street; saw a flight of steps down to the river....
Found
the strand of-the Thames,
under the warehouses...
Thought of the refugees from Barcelona walking 40 miles, one with a baby in a parcel.... Made a circuit: discovered St Olave’s Hart Street. (Diaries of Virginia Woolf, vol. 5, 1936-41; Penguin edn 1985, 203-4) b.
The poor little boy wont say whats the matter. He takes no interest in anything. Wont turn and wave to her. . . drudges on at Latin. (Woolf, 117)
ro
Dinner rather strained — Jane under a cloud — Susan in a fog — me charitable on account of being able to look forward to the immediate future. Made a few valiant sallies - O noble womankind!
Went to Wigmore Hall but found the concert was at the Grotian walked there — feeling light and airy. (Necessary Secrets, Diaries of Elizabeth Smart; London, 1992, vol. 1, 15) d.
Katharine Goodson came up to say they would be late. Kissed me. Asked after me and everybody. (Smart, vol. 1, 16)
The New Comparative Syntax
615
Short notes Wish you were here! Brilliant could have stayed all day Brill — must come again Could see everything from wheelchair (Visitors’ book ’91, The Green, Beaumaris, Anglesey, North Wales)
Contains carotene (Carrot Facial Oil, The Body Shop) Spoken English His hands full of keys, he said, ‘Does the name Farriner mean anything to you?’ ‘Can’t say it does.’... Her habit of omitting pronouns from her otherwise not particularly economical speech irritated him. ‘... Couldn’t get herself a man, so she was always showing what she could get. Wonder who’ll get her money? Won’t be me, though, not so likely.’ (Ruth Rendell, A Sleeping Life: An Inspector Wexford Mystery; Arrow Books, 1994, 87-8) ‘Can’t understand you newspaper chaps.’ Mr. Corby roasted his big behind in front of the fire. ‘Fill up the papers with all kinds of stuff nobody wants to read, and often miss what’s right under your noses. The Gazette, now, that’s a local paper — (Julian Symons, The Progress of a Crime; London: The Crime Club, 1967, 12)
‘Chap as always wears an old duffle coat, long-faced chap looks as if he needs a shave. Yes, he lives up the road a couple of mile, Pebwater Farm, can’t mistake it...’ (Julian Symons, The Progress of a Crime; London: The Crime Club, 1967, 130)
‘No, it wouldn’t do for me. Sharing everything with your neighbours, haven't even got a bit of garden to call your own except for that pocket handkerchief out there. .. .’ (Julian Symons, The End of Solomon Grundy; London: The Crime Club, 1967, 30)
In the examples above the referential subject of the boldface verb is absent. Subjects of all three grammatical persons can be omitted. In the written registers
we (predictably) find instances of first and third person omission; in the spoken register second person subjects are also omitted (cf. (67b)). in the The various kinds of non-referential or expletive subjects which occur example an is canonical subject position in English may also be missing. (68a)
from from a diary source in which weather it is omitted; (68b-f) are taken
and (68c) the nonsecondary linguistic literature on subject omission. In (68b) clause is absent; in referential it which is in construction with a sentence-final (68d-f) existential there is absent.
616
The New Comparative Syntax
Rained in the night, wind, rain and hail. (Elizabeth Smart, On the Side of
a.
the Angels; Flamingo/HarperCollins, 1995, 27; 19 January 1945)
Won't be too difficult to reconstruct his argument. (Thrasher 1977; 44) Turns out you can’t do that in Texas. (Schmerling 1973: 582) Isn’t much we can do about it. (Thrasher 1977: 44) Aren’t enough left to worry about. (Thrasher 1977: 44) lew ey Lon (Gh a
Might be an accident up ahead. (Schmerling 1973: 582)
Subjectless sentences such as those above are relatively easy to come by in certain uses of English. We could roughly characterize the relevant usage as either informal speech (represented by the examples in (67) and (68) or as belonging to abbreviated styles of writing such as the diary (65) or informal notes (66). In order to characterize different types of usage of one particular language, we use the traditional term register. Section 4.1.2 provides arguments that the subject of the sentence, although not overtly realized, is syntactically active, and that it is structurally represented.” In section 4.1.3 we will see that ellipsis of subjects in the relevant register is liable to specific syntactic constraints. In section 4.1.4 we will argue against an analysis which equates the non-overt subject which we postulate for the English examples in (65)-(68) with the non-overt pronoun pro found in finite sentences
in Italian. In section 4.1.5 we speculate on the nature of the non-overt subject in (65)-(68).
4.1.2 Arguments for non-overt subjects Consider (69), a fragment of the diary passage (65a):
(69)
Saw no one. Took the bus to Southwark Bridge. Walked along Thames Street. AS iS oie Saw a flight of steps down to the river.
Theta theory provides a first rationale for postulating a non-overt external argument for the boldface verbs in this passage. The verb see in (69a) usually takes two arguments, and in this particular example we have only one overt argument. This is not a problem if the second argument of see is non-overt. Related evidence derives from the fact that we can paraphrase the subjectless sentences above by means of sentences with an overt subject: (70)
I saw no one.
I took the bus to Southwark Bridge. I walked along Thames Street. ao TP I saw a flight of steps down to the river.
Let us propose that the sentences in (69) do not lack a subject. Rather, the subject 1s non-overt; it is a category without phonetic content, an empty category. *> The arguments we use will be analogous to those developed in chapter 4, section 2.3.4.
The New Comparative Syntax
617
Following the reasoning developed so far, let us assume that ec is the external argument of V. It is base-generated in [Spec,VP] and moves to [Spec,AGRP] in order to satisfy the subject requirement at S-structure. (71)
ec; ec; ec; Si ec;
[yp [yp [yp [yp
t; Saw no one]. t; Took the bus to Southwark Bridge]. t, Walked along Thames Street]. t, Saw a flight of steps down to the river].
A further argument for assuming that there is a non-overt subject is provided by examples such as the following sentence from (65c) above: (72)
a.
Walked there — feeling light and airy.
In (72) the non-finite verb feeling has a non-overt subject, represented as PRO. Interpretively, PRO is referentially dependent on the subject of walked. Postulating a null subject in the matrix clause in (72a) allows us to represent the control relation: (72)
b.
ec, Walked there - PRO, feeling light and airy.
Let us tentatively conclude that the registers we are considering allow for nonovert subjects in finite clauses. The next question is what type of non-overt subject we are dealing with.
4.1.3.
Constraints on non-overt subjects
All the attested examples with non-overt subjects which we are considering here are located in root clauses, that is, clauses which are not dominated by another clause. We have given no examples of non-overt subjects in finite embedded clauses. Even in the colloquial or abbreviated register, the following constructed examples with a non-overt subject in an embedded clause are usually felt to be ungrammatical by native speakers of English. The examples in (73) are variants of attested examples with overt subjects in Virginia Woolf’s diary: (73)
*T think must read Dante of a morning. (Woolf 37)
*I must work, as told Sally G. (Woolf 38) *I don’t think need lie quaking at night. (Woolf 38) *I find this morning that interrupted the crisis of that London Group aooe meeting. (Woolf 9)
The non-overt subjects in our attested examples occur only in declarative root sentences. They never occur in questions, neither in direct yes/no questions nor in direct constituent questions. If we remove the subject from some of the root questions in the Woolf diary, for instance, the questions become unacceptable:
(74)
Ought *(I) to resign? (Woolf 17) But can *(I) do this in time? (Woolf 5) Am *(I) jealous? (Woolf 35) And what could *(we) do? (Woolf 19) What can *(I) say? (Woolf 3) Now who is *(she)? (Woolf 15) What will *(I) write? (Woolf 40)
emoeaore
618
The New Comparative Syntax
The absence of non-overt subjects in embedded questions is expected if omission of the subject is a root phenomenon: (74)
h.
*I don’t know when will come back.
The subject of root clauses is never non-overt when an argument (7Sa—b) or a predicate (75c-d) has been topicalized.* Again, the examples in (75) are based on actual examples in the Woolf diary: (75)
a.
. c.
d.
The next book *(I) think of calling Answers to Correspondents. (Woolf 3) This story *(I) repeated to Duncan last night. (Woolf 9) And there *(I) was in the rush of an end. (Woolf 11) Such twilight gossip *(it) seemed. (Woolf 8)
When a negative constituent is preposed in a root clause, resulting in subject—
auxiliary inversion,» the subject cannot be non-overt either: (76)
a.
Seldom have *(I) been more completely miserable than I was about 6.30 last night. (Woolf 8) .
c.
Never have *(I) worked so hard at any book. (Woolf 16) Nor do *(I) wish even to write about it here. (Woolf 44)
Only subjects are non-overt; objects are always overt. We do not find a single example in Woolf’s diary of the omission of an object. Deletion of me in the attested example (77) leads to ungrammaticality: (77)
This led *(me) to imagine any number of catastrophes. (Woolf 9)
There are also no instances of null subjects of small clauses, whether these be referential or non-referential: (78)
4.1.4
a.
“*I consider uninteresting.
b.
*I consider important that they should be invited.
Arguments against the pro-drop analysis
If we allow for a non-overt subject in abbreviated registers such as diaries, informal notes and informal speech, the question is how to characterize this particular instantiation of the empty category. We have distinguished four types of empty categories: PRO, the non-overt subject of non-finite clauses; pro, the nonovert subject of finite clauses in Italian; the trace of A-movement; the trace of A’-movement (cf. the survey in (49) above). Here we are dealing with the omission of the subject of finite clauses. It is therefore not very likely that the non-overt subject in the subjectless sentences of ** For topicalization cf. chapter 3, section 4.2. *’ See chapter 3, section 4.2.3.
The New Comparative Syntax
619
the special registers can be assimilated to PRO, the non-overt subject in nonfinite clauses in English. Similarly, it would appear at first sight that we are not dealing with traces: there is no obvious indication that a constituent has been moved. The non-overt referential subject in the abbreviated register seems to correspond most closely to the non-overt subject in Italian finite clauses. However, two types of arguments militate strongly against this proposal: (i) the registers which display the non-overt subject phenomenon do not display any of the other properties associated with the positive setting of the pro-drop parameter;*° (ii) the non-overt subject in the special registers is subject to constraints which
do not apply to pro.*’
4.1.4.1
Absence of other pro-drop properties
The pro-drop parameter correlates with the richness of verbal inflection and with a number of other syntactic properties.** From this perspective, the data of the abbreviated register and of colloquial style are problematic: none of the other syntactic properties of pro-drop languages are instantiated in these registers. Table (79) summarizes the situation: (79)
Special registers and pro-drop properties Rich AGRs null subject overt expletive post-verbal subject subject extraction across C [—wH]
Italian yes yes no yes
English no no yes no
English special registers no yes yes (80) no (81)
yes
no
no (82)
~ The verbal inflection in the registers of English which allow non-overt subjects is just as poor as that of ordinary English. This means that the identification of non-overt subjects, and especially of referential non-overt subjects, is expected to be impossible. Contrary to what is the case in pro-drop languages, the subject of weather verbs is not systematically omitted in these registers. The examples in (80) are attested examples of weather verbs with overt pronominal subjects. In pro-drop languages, the subject of such sentences is non-overt:
(80)
a. b. c.
It is a foggy cold morning. (Woolf 40) It pours. (Woolf 51) It is a very fine cold day. (Woolf 549)
We do not find any of the other syntactic properties associated with pro-drop languages either. A definite subject cannot freely occur post-verbally:
(81)
a. b.
*Has telephoned Louise. *Was arrested Louise.
36 Section 4.1.4.1. 37 Section 4.1.4.2. 38 Cf. sections 3.1 and 3.2 above.
620
The New Comparative Syntax
In the data examined, there are no examples of extraction of a subject across the complementizer that, a property common to pro-drop languages. We conclude that such extractions are as ungrammatical in the abbreviated register as they are in ordinary English. (82)
a. b.
4.1.4.2
*This audience;, I think that ¢, will like the book. *Which readers, should I expect that ¢, will like my book?
Special restrictions on the non-overt subject
The restricted distribution of the non-overt subject discussed in section 4.1.3 above sets this type of non-overt subject quite apart from the non-overt subject of pro-drop languages. (83)
Restrictions on the distribution of null subjects
Distribution of null subjects
Italian pro
embedded clauses root interrogatives embedded interrogatives with topicalized argument with topicalized predicate
yes yes yes yes yes
(84) (85) (86) (87a) (87b)
ae o o o o o
special registers
(73) (74a-g) (74h) (75a-b) (75c—d)
In pro-drop languages we find the non-overt subject systematically in contexts in which the null subject in the special registers of English leads to ungrammaticality.” The Italian null subject pro appears in subordinate clauses (84), in root interrogatives (85), in embedded interrogatives (86), with topicalized arguments
(87a) and with topicalized predicates (87b): (84)
(85)
(86)
Credo che sia gia partita. I believe that be-3sg (subj) already left-fem ‘I think that she is already gone.’ a.
Sei contento? are-2sg happy ‘Are you happy?’
b.
Che vuoi? what want-2sg ‘What do you want?’
a.
Sai se é contento?
know-2sg if be-3sg happy ‘Do you know if he is happy?’
b.
Sai che vuoi? know-2sg what want-2sg ‘Do you know what you want?’
* See section 4.1.3 for examples.
The New Comparative Syntax (87)
a.
Questo libro, non lo voglio. this book non it want-I ‘This book, I don’t want.’
b.
Intelligente, non é. Intelligent, non be-3sg ‘Intelligent, he isn’t.’
621
We conclude that the distribution of the non-overt subject in the special registers of English is unlike that of the non-overt subject in pro-drop languages and does not justify a pro-drop analysis for the English data. The question arises how we can account for this particular type of non-overt subject. This is a double question: (i) what is the type of the non-overt subject in the register we are looking at, and (ii) what is the distinctive property of these registers which allows for such non-overt subjects?
4.1.5
The CP level and the identification of non-overt subjects
4.1.5.1
CP and null subjects
Recall that the non-overt subject in the abbreviated register appears only in a restricted set of root environments. The following examples summarize the constraints: (88)
I think *(I) must read Dante of a morning. (Woolf 37) But can *(I) do this in time? (Woolf 5) And what could *(we) do? (Woolf 19) I don’t know when *(I) will come back.
eno oP The
next book (Woolf 3)
baa)
*(I) think of calling Answers
to Correspondents.
Such twilight gossip *(it) seemed. (Woolf 8)
There are no null subjects in embedded clauses (88a), in root interrogatives (88b—c), in embedded interrogatives (88d), with topicalized arguments (88e) and
with topicalized predicates (88f). A descriptive generalization that emerges from the data in (88) is that nonovert subjects are the leftmost elements in the structure. They are excluded as soon as one of the components of the CP layer of the clause is occupied by some overt element.
4.1.5.2
Identification of empty categories
Recall that non-overt elements must be identified. The non-overt pronoun pro in Italian is identified by rich verbal inflection. Traces are identified by their antecedents, as illustrated in (89): (89)
a. b. c.
Whom; do you think they will invite 4? Who, do you think ¢, will invite them? This book;, I don’t think they will like 4.
622
The New Comparative Syntax
Traces of A’-movement in (89) occur in positions which are case-marked. In (89a) and (89c) the trace is in the object position, i.e. inside VP; in (89b) it is in
the canonical subject position, i.e. the specifier of AGRP. The trace is identified by a c-commanding constituent.
The identification requirement on non-overt elements was formulated as in (90a):*°
(90)
a.
Empty Category Principle (1) Non-overt elements must be identified.
(90a) is assumed to be a universal constraint on the distribution of non-overt
elements. As discussed above, it follows from the Principle of Full Interpretation. If we create a gap in the object position of sentencés such as (91) and we do not provide a constituent to identify it, the sentence is ungrammatical:
(91)
*They think that Mary will invite ec.
We might, however, reformulate (90a) slightly, without any effect on the sentences discussed so far:
(20)
teed:
Empty Category Principle (1) (Rizzi 1994) Non-overt elements must be identified if they can be.
(90b) applies to traces, as well as to other non-overt elements. We concentrate
on traces. Traces are identified by a co-indexed c-commanding antecedent, the moved constituent. (90b) says that traces must be identified ‘if they can be’. As
long as there is a c-commanding position which can host an antecedent for the trace, the trace can potentially be identified. In such situations, by (90b) the trace must be identified. Consider the ungrammatical (91), where the empty category is in the object position of the embedded clause. In (91) there are a number of c-commanding maximal projections (the DPs they and Mary and also the specifier of the embedded CP) in the correct configurational relation to identify ec. In other words, the empty category in (91) can potentially be identified. But in (91) it is not identified, since neither they nor Mary can function as an antecedent. Not being identified, the empty category violates the Empty Category Principle (90b); it is illegitimate and the sentence is ungrammatical. Our reformulation (90b) correctly rules out unidentified traces in object position. 4.1.5.3.
Truncation
Consider again the reformulation of the Empty Category Principle in (90b). (90a) imposes that all non-overt elements be identified. For traces, this means that they must have an antecedent; traces without antecedents are ruled out entirely, regardless of their position. In formulation (90b) this blanket ban on unidentified traces is no longer valid. The reformulation of the identification constraint allows traces to occur in One position without being identified by an antecedent: the one exempted position is the highest position in the clause. If we could generate “" In chapter 4, section 2.4.2.
The New Comparative Syntax
623
clauses without the CP layer and which have a trace in their subject position, such traces could escape the identification requirement. Why is that so? Consider
(92a) (IP represents both AGRP and TP since the separate projections are not relevant for the discussion): (92)
ra!
IP. DP t
I’ I
VP
The trace in the subject position of (92a) is not connected to an antecedent. According to formulation (90b) of the Empty Category Principle, this is not a problem, because in (92a) the trace cannot be connected to an antecedent. There is no c-commanding XP position which could identify the trace. Crucially, we adopt a CP-less structure in (92a). If we add the CP level to our representation, as in (92b), then the trace in the subject position [Spec,IP] can be identified and must be connected to a maximal projection in [Spec,CP]. If a trace can be identified at all, it must be; hence (92b) is ruled out by (90b).
cP ideal0
ayers Spec
~ gee
DP t
he I
vP
Let us return to the restrictions on non-overt subjects in (88), repeated here in (93). (93g) is a grammatical occurrence.
(93)
I think *(I) must read Dante of a morning. (Woolf 37) But can *(I) do this in time? (Woolf 5) And what could *(we) do? (Woolf 19) I don’t know when *(I) will come back. aes The next book *(I) think of calling Answers to Correspondents. Siren (Woolf 3) Such twilight gossip *(it) seemed. (Woolf 8) Saw no one. Es gs
The non-overt subjects in the registers we are looking at alternate with overt material. In (93g) we could insert a pronoun in the subject position. From this point of view the non-overt subjects are like traces of A’-movement. What we seem to have here is a marked phenomenon, in which a trace is antecedentless. The notion of an antecedentless trace seems to be a contradiction in terms, but it is not. We mean that the empty category has the properties of
624
The New Comparative Syntax
an A’-trace, in that it is a non-overt category in a position to which case is assigned. The data in (93a—g) show that as soon as the CP level is needed, the non-overt subject is excluded. It would appear, then, that the existence of these non-overt subjects crucially depends on the availability of a CP-less structure (92a). The legitimate non-overt subjects in our abbreviated registers occur in the highest DP position of the clause: [Spec,AGRP]. If a root IP with non-overt subject is NOT dominated by CP in the relevant examples, then there will be no c-commanding position available which could host a constituent to identify the empty category in the root subject position. We propose that the non-overt subject in the abbreviated registers is an empty category with the properties of a trace of A’-movement. Notably, it has case. Only if it is in the subject position of a root IP without a dominating CP will such an empty category obey the identification constraint in (90b) in spite of the absence of an identifier. Our account in terms of CP-less root clauses correctly excludes non-overt
objects. Non-overt objects occur VP-internally. This means that whether CP is available or not, there will always be one DP which c-commands the object position, [Spec,AGRP]. Hence non-overt objects can always be identified. If they can be identified, they must be, by (90b). Non-overt objects will only be possible to the extent that they are identified, for instance as genuine traces with an antecedent. We correctly exclude non-overt subjects from root clauses whose cP level is activated. As soon as CP is available we must adopt structure (92b). If the specifier of CP becomes available, this position can host an antecedent for the trace in the subject position. If such a position is available, identification of the non-overt subject is possible in the structure, and reformulation (90b) of the identification condition requires that there must be an identifier. Our hypothesis is that root sentences with non-overt subjects in the special registers have one distinctive property: their CP level is not activated. These sentences are structures like (92a). One could say that in the registers of abbreviated and colloquial English a root sentence does not necessarily have to be expanded as a full-blown CP (92b), but can be cut down (‘abbreviated’), or truncated, to IP (92a). To contrast the special registers with the unmarked variety of English we can say that in the latter variety, the CP level is always projected, i.e. every root clause is projected as in (92b). The question needs to be addressed why abbreviated registers allow for truncation of CP. In the unmarked variety of English a finite clause must always be dominated by CP. CP, as we have seen, provides the interface between the sentence and the discourse.*' In abbreviated registers this requirement can be overruled. One way of conceiving the structural truncation in (92a) is to interpret it in terms of the requirement of economy: structure should be minimized. While in the standard registers the requirement that the root CP be projected is inviolable, and ranks higher than the economy requirement, in abbreviated registers economy prevails and the requirement that structure be minimal ranks higher than the requirement that the root CP be projected. Whenever we have to activate the CP level in the special registers for independent reasons, the option of the non-overt subject automatically disappears. *" See chapter 5, section 2.2.
The New Comparative Syntax
625
The non-overt subject is interpreted by being related to a referent accessible in the discourse. For first person subjects it is natural to assume that the diary register presupposes a first person narrator who identifies the non-overt subject
as a sort of default option. It seems intuitively reasonable to argue that the link
between a clause and its context, or the discourse, is made at the level of the matrix or root clause.
If we assume that the CP layer is absent in the specialized registers, then the
question arises how such truncated clauses (‘bare IPs’) are integrated into the discourse. An assumption which we could make is that the discourse connection
is established by some direct procedure. We can compare the situation with the interpretation of pronouns.” (94)
a. b.
John; says he;,, is tired. He is tired.
In (94a) the pronoun he can be co-indexed with the matrix subject DP John. It receives an anaphoric reading. The reference of the pronoun he is established via the mediating DP. In (94b) the referent of the pronoun he is established directly,
or indexically. There is no mediating DP. We could say that in (94b) we have unmediated reference. By analogy we could say that when a bare IP is used as a root clause the discourse connection is established indexically.
4.1.6
Summary
We have examined the status of non-overt subjects in the register of what we _can label informally ‘abbreviated English’. We have shown that the phenomenon cannot be captured by appealing to a positive setting of the pro-drop parameter. On the one hand, the register lacks the syntactic properties of pro-drop languages; on the other hand, the constraints on non-overt subjects found in these special registers are absent in pro-drop languages. We propose that what characterizes the abbreviated register is the option of omitting the CP level of the root clause. This truncated (IP)-root clause allows us to generate a trace in the specifier of the root I. In this particular position the non-overt subject can remain without an identifying antecedent because there is no structural position available to host the identifier. As soon as the root CP is needed independently, the non-overt subject is excluded.
4.1.7
Some further data
English is not a pro-drop language. In spite of this, non-overt subjects are possible in finite root clauses of certain special abbreviated registers. The same observation applies to French, another non-pro-drop language. In French too, diaries allow non-overt subjects in finite sentences, as shown by the following examples: 42 Recall the discussion in chapter 5, section 3.1.3.
626
(95)
The New Comparative Syntax
Aprés-midi a discuter, puis agréable. M’accompagne au Mercure, puis a la gare. Afternoon to discuss, then agreeable. Me accompanies to the Mercure, then to the station.
s'est donné souvent l’illusion de l'amour 4 P...en pensant a moi... refl. is given often the illusion of the love to P... while thinking of me Revient a l’affaire Alb... Me demande si... je lui eus montré mes notes demon) sts returns to the business Alb... Me asks if...I her would have shown my notes of my J... (Paul Léautaud, Le Fléau: Journal particulier, 1917-1939;
Paris, 1989,
69-70, 20.3) Register variation may lead to some amount of deviation from what we might call the core grammar of the language. In informal ‘abbreviated’ registers subjects may be omitted from finite clauses, an option not available in less informal spoken or written English. We conclude that special registers may have specialized grammars.
4.2.
The delimitation of movement and complex styles
In this section we describe another register-related deviation from the core grammar. In certain types of English, the locality conditions on A’-movement are slightly relaxed. This time, however, the registers in question seem to belong to the more formal scale.
4.2.1
Recapitulation: movement and locality
We have already discussed examples such as those in (96): (96)
I wonder whom, they think that they will meet ¢,. ??1 asked whom, they wonder whether they will meet ¢,.
221 asked *I asked *I asked moan oD *IT asked
whom; they wonder when, they will meet f; t,. why, they wonder whether they will meet Mary ¢,. why, they wonder, whom; they will meet ¢; t,. who, they wonder whether ¢, will meet them.
Wh-movement is subject to locality conditions. While a wh-phrase can be separated from its base-position by intervening occurrences of the complementizer that, the intervention of if or of whether or of other wh-phrases such as whom or when renders the sentence at best marginal, or even genuinely ungrammatical.
* In chapter 2, sections 1.1.3 and 1.4.3.
The New Comparative Syntax
627
That occupies the head position of the clause, C. If its specifier position ([Spec,CP]) is unoccupied, this position will be available for a wh-phrase to move through (96a). In examples (96b-f) the specifier position of the lower CP is occupied. (97a) is a partial representation of the structure of (96a); (97b) represents (96b):
(97)
a.
LTasked whom, they think [¢» #; [. that] [jp they will meet ¢)].
ate ee ee ee | b.
es
eee
??L asked whom, they wonder [cp whether [.][,p they will meet #;]]. XXX
Movement
is local.
A wh-phrase has to move to the nearest c-commanding
landing site, [Spec,CP]. The moved constituent leaves a co-indexed trace. In
(96b) whether occupies the nearest c-commanding specifier position. The dependency between an antecedent and its trace is bounded. The locality condition on movement also suffices to account for the reduced acceptability of (98a):
(98)
a.
??I ask [.p whom, [, they wonder [.p whether [,» Mary thinks [cp t¢, that [,» she will meet ¢,]]]]]].
In (98a), the first step of the movement of whom is licit: whom moves into the
specifier position of the complementizer that. But the second step is illegitimate. Whether occupies the specifier position of the clause; hence the wh-phrase cannot move to the closest landing site. In sentences like (98b), the complementizer if introduces the indirect question. When C is occupied by if, we assume that its
specifier is not available for movement:** (98)
b. c. d.
221 ask whom, they wonder if Louise thinks ¢, that she will meet t,. *I ask why; they wonder if Louise will meet Mary ¢. *I ask who, they wonder if ¢, will marry John.
There is an asymmetry
between objects on the one hand and subjects and
adjuncts on the other. Extraction of an object (96b, 96c, 98b) across the whconstituent is more acceptable than extraction of a subject (96f, 98d) or of an adjunct (96d, 96e, 98c). We remind the reader that sentences (96d), (96e) and (98c) are ungrammatical if why modifies the lower clause. These sentences are,
of course, grammatical if why modifies the higher clause.
Extraction from adjunct clauses
4.2.2
In the examples discussed above extraction takes place from a complement clause. In this section we consider extraction from non-argument clauses, particularly clauses which function as adjuncts of time, reason, condition, and so on. This type of clause is illustrated by the bold face clauses in (99): (99)
a. b. c. d.
Iwas excited when I met her for the first time. Iwas excited because I was going to meet her. I would be excited if I could meet her. I-won’t go unless she asks me.
44 See also chapter 2, section 1.1.3.
628
The New Comparative Syntax
Extraction of a wh-phrase out of adjunct clauses usually leads to a degradation of the grammaticality of the sentence. The examples in (100) have about the same status as the examples in (96). (100)
a. a
??I asked whom, they will be excited when they meet ¢.
221 wonder whom; they will have a meeting with before they interview t,.
*I asked *I asked *I asked *I asked 0Paro.
why; why, who, who,
they they they they
will will will will
be satisfied when they fire him ¢. have a meeting with before they fire him 7. be excited when f¢; is fired. have a meeting with before ¢, is fired.
In (100a) an object (whom) is extracted across the conjunction when. Given its morphological identity to the interrogative adjunct when, let us assume that when occupies [Spec,CP]. The ungrammaticality of (100a) is due to another violation of the locality condition on wh-movement. (100c) is ungrammatical with the interpretation in which why modifies the lower clause (i.e. where why questions the reason for the firing). The sentence is grammatical if why modifies the higher clause (i.e. if it questions the reason for being satisfied). (100b), (100d) and (100f) have the same grammaticality status as (100a), (100c) and (100e) respectively. Here the extracted element is moved across the conjunction before. For the sake of the discussion, let us assume that before is like when and also occupies [Spec,CP], and let us extend this analysis to all subordinating conjunctions. All the sentences in (100) are violations of the locality condition on movement, with objects giving rise to weaker violations than subjects and adjuncts. The examples above illustrate extraction of interrogative elements. The same judgements hold for relative clauses, as illustrated in (101):
(101)
a. b. c. d. e. f.
??This is the woman whom, they will be excited when they meet t,. ??This is the woman whom; they will have a meeting with before they interview ¢,. *This is the reason why; they will be satisfied when they fire him t,. *This is the reason why; they will have a meeting with before they fire him t¢,. *This is the woman who, they will be excited when {, is fired. *This is the woman who; they will have a meeting with before ¢, is fired.
In the next section we turn to some attested sentences which are deviant with
respect to the locality constraint.
4.2.3
Complex sentences
Consider the following sentences. They are all drawn from written works and were cited in traditional grammars of English: (102)
a.
It was really complicated with emotion and excitement in a way I don’t know whether I can describe. (Cotes, Cinderella, ch. 3; in Kruisinga 1925: 206)
The New Comparative Syntax
629
basras - discovering that he was a serious youngster, she worried him by saying sharp and cutting things that he was never sure whether she meant or not. (Upton Sinclair, Oil, ch. 8, 193; in Kruisinga 1932: 427)
faa
iB especially as there was so much that Lady Tanner wanted to ask Lord Lippington if he remembered (Cotes, Cinderella, ch. 8; in Kruisinga 1925: 313)
(103)
d.
her monstrous breast, which I cannot tell what to compare with (Swift; in Jespersen 1932: 188-9)
a.
the details and the whole, which an artist cannot be great unless he reconciles (Ru; in Jespersen 1932: 202)
b.
a quarrel which I am always vexed when I think of (W. Scott, Waverley, 379 (1814); in Visser 1963: 495)
c.
a stranger, from that remote and barbarian Isle which the Imperial Roman shivered when he named, paused... (Lytton, Pomp, v, ch. xi, 153b; in Poutsma 1926: 645)
In the sentences in (102) and (103) a constituent has been extracted, resulting in
what should be a violation of the locality condition on movement. In the first three examples of (102), we have a relative clause with non-overt relative pronoun. Consider the representation of (102a) in (104a):
(104)
a.
It was really complicated with emotion and excitement in a way [cp [ec]; [ip 1 don’t know [cp whether [jp I can describe ¢}]]].
The non-overt relative pronoun, represented here as [ec], is moved from the
object position of describe to a higher [Spec,CP], crossing the intervening whether.
This type of movement gives rise to degraded acceptability. And yet, the ex-
amples in (102) and (103) are attested and cited in traditional grammar books. It is interesting to consider the comments which the traditional grammarians from whose books we have drawn these examples provide. The first point is that most grammarians refer to these examples as somewhat exceptional or marked in nature. They use terms such as ‘less natural’ (Jespersen 1932: 183), ‘harsh’ (Jespersen 1932: 187), or ‘peculiar’ (Kruisinga 1925: 206). The grammarians offer an informal explanation for the marginal status of the examples. Most authors refer to such sentences as being complex. Poutsma uses the term ‘involved’ (1926: 645), while Kruisinga calls such patterns ‘complicated’ (1932: 379). The authors also suggest a syntactic explanation for the complexity of the constructions. Jespersen speaks of ‘concatenated’ clauses (1932: 201), and Kruisinga talks about ‘Latin ‘interwoven’ clauses (1932: 425). Jespersen alludes to the influence of syntax’ (1932: 201).
the option of a non45 Cf. chapter 2, section 1.2 for a discussion of relative clauses and overt relative pronoun.
630
The New Comparative Syntax
Let us consider such examples in the light of our analysis of movement. There is an asymmetry between object extraction across wh-elements and conjunctions on the one hand, and extraction of subjects and adjuncts on the other hand. The former gives rise to marginal sentences, the latter to straightforward ungrammaticality. In all the examples cited above an object is extracted. This is not accidental: the only attested examples of what we could call locality violations which are cited in the literature concern object extraction. There are no instances cited of adjunct or subject extraction from a clause of which the specifier is filled:
(104)
b.
*It was really complicated with emotion and excitement in a way [ec], I don’t know whether ¢, will move anyone.
c.
*It was really complicated with emotion and excitement for the reason [why, [I don’t know [whether [I can abandon her ¢j]]]].
Compare now the following pair. (105a) is the earlier example (104a), and (105b) is a constructed variant of (105a).
(105)
a.
It was really complicated with emotion and excitement in a way [cp [ec]; [p I don’t know whether I can describe t,]].
b.
It was really complicated with emotion and excitement in a way [cp [ec]; I guess [cp t¢, that I don’t know [cp whether I can describe ¢,]]].
In (105a), the non-overt relative pronoun originates as the object of describe and is moved across whether, to reach a higher [Spec,CP]. In (105b) we introduce another layer of movement: the non-overt pronoun crosses whether, then it moves up to the specifier position associated with that, and finally it moves up to the next higher [Spec,CP]. The status of (105b) is like that of (10Sa). (105b) might lead us to think that the intervening wh-constituent might occupy any one of the c-commanding [Spec,CP] positions. (105c) shows that this is not correct. In (105c), we have introduced an extra layer of embedding
lower than whether. The non-overt relative pronoun has to move first through the specifier position of the lower that; then it moves across whether to an even higher [Spec,CP]. Examples such as (105c) sound worse to our ear than do those like (105b). Moreover, such examples are unattested. We have not found any such examples in the works cited. (105)
c.
*It was really complicated with emotion and excitement in a way [cp [ec], I don’t know [ @ whether Thelma believes [cp ¢, that [,p I can describe ¢,]]]].
In (105d) we introduce another variant, and again the sentence is degraded. In this example, we have extracted the relative pronoun across both whether and if. Once again, examples like this are not found in the literature. (105)
d.
*It was really complicated with emotion and excitement in a way [cp [ec]; lip Inever wondered [
whether [p I can describe £;]]]].
b.
It was really complicated with emotion and excitement in a way [cp [ec]; [wp 1 guess [cp ¢, that [,» I don’t know [cp whether [, I can describe ¢,]]]]]].
c.
*It was really complicated with emotion and excitement in a way [cp [ec]; [yp I don’t know [cp whether [,» Thelma believes [cp ¢, that [ip I can describe ¢,]]]]]]-
d.
*It was really complicated with emotion and excitement in a way [cp [ec]; [p I never wondered [ p whether [}p he will ask [¢ if [p I can describe ¢,]]]]]].
Stylistic variation and parametric variation
In the ‘Latinate’ style we have found examples of sentences which would be deviant in everyday English. The deviation of these sentences from the core grammar of English is not unrestricted. One way of accounting for their occurrence is to argue that in such sentences the writer does not use the English type of measure for movement (expressed in IPs) but the Italian type, expressed in CPs. If we consider the structure of the clause, we see that the latter measure will allow a slightly longer move: (109)
a.
CP1
IP1
CP2
IP2
K
In (109a) x is a constituent of IP2. When x moves out of its clause, it will cross
IP2. In English, where movement is measured in terms of IPs, this means that the moved element must stop in the specifier of CP2. This way the first move crosses only one IP. For the next move, x can cross IP1 and land in the specifier of CPI,
The New Comparative Syntax
633
In Italian, on the other hand, the movement of x can first cross IP2 and CP2 and land in the specifier of CP1 directly. Observe that the span of movement in a sen style (109b) is shorter than that of the Italian-style movement c):
(TOO? ames
CPt lh
[Pal IP1
CPZ GP2
IP1 IP2
in
x x
An effect of the Italian-style movement, as schematically presented in (109c), is
that two clauses are spanned by wh-movement:
IP1 and IP2. This effect of
combining clauses may account for the intuition behind the terms ‘interwoven’ or ‘concatenated’ used by the traditional grammarians and referred to above. English-style movement (109b) always spans just one IP. The fact that the Italian-
style movement illustrated in this section spans more than one clause might also account for our impression that such Italian-style sentences are more complex. The processing of such sentences involves bigger stretches; hence it requires a greater processing effort. In the examples discussed above, parametric variation does not only apply cross-linguistically. It is sometimes observed language-internally, where it is at the basis of stylistic variation. Once again, language-internal variation leads to slightly distinct grammars.
4.3.
Summary: core grammars and peripheral grammars
In this section we have discussed attested examples of English sentences which belong to particular registers or styles and are considered ‘deviant’ according to the norm of the core grammar. The occurrence of such deviant examples in certain registers or styles cannot be taken to mean that the grammar has broken down. On closer inspection, it becomes clear that although there may be some deviation, the deviation remains restricted. We proposed to account for the attested examples by suggesting that register variation or stylistic variation may be governed by a slightly different system of grammar. We can distinguish between the ‘core grammar’ of a language, which governs the unmarked variety of the language, and ‘peripheral grammars’, which govern special registers or styles. To account for the non-overt subject attested in abbreviated registers we proposed that in such registers the CP layer may be truncated, resulting in bare IP clauses. Such clauses are related to the discourse indexically, without the mediating function of CP. We proposed in addition that the Empty Category Principle be reformulated as in (90b), repeated here in (110):
(110)
Empty Category Principle Non-overt elements must be identified if they can be.
root IP may Given CP truncation in conjunction with (110), the specifier of a have an not need host a non-overt category which has case. Such a ‘trace’ e. discours the antecedent in the clause; it can be identified directly from
634
The New Comparative Syntax
In Latinate styles we found examples of long wh-extraction in which an object wh-phrase crosses the specifier of the clause from which it is extracted. We interpret this variation in terms of a resetting of the Subjacency Parameter, which regulates the distance of wh-movement. To account for long extraction of wh-phrases in Latinate styles and the observed constraints on such long extractions, we proposed that while locality conditions on wh-extraction in the core grammar of English are calculated on the basis of IP boundaries, locality conditions on wh-movement in these styles are calculated on the basis of CP boundaries. The non-core variety of English would adopt the Italian definition of locality. Our proposal to distinguish the ‘core grammar’ of a language from registerand style-related ‘peripheral grammars’ implies that even monolingual speakers of English have more than one grammar.
Summary This chapter broadens the scope of our book by integrating the study of English syntax with a comparative approach to syntax. The aim of present-day comparative research is to explore what constitutes knowledge of language and how this knowledge is acquired over a number of languages. In addition to examining cross-linguistic variation, the chapter also examines the nature of diachronic variation and of register variation. Section 1 The logical problem of language acquisition centres around the question of negative evidence. How do we come to know that a structure is ungrammatical in a given language? For instance, how does the speaker of English acquire the knowledge that the omission of the complementizer that is ungrammatical in (1)? (1)
[cp *(That) [jp Mary resigned from her job]] was totally unexpected.
In the linguistic exposure of the child, there is no overt (positive) evidence reise will enable him or her to acquire this type of knowledge. In order to overcome the problem of negative evidence, a model of rsd acquisition has been elaborated which contains two interacting components: (i) the linguistic exposure which constitutes the triggering experience, and (ii) the language acquisition device or Universal Grammar, an innate cognitive capacity of the human species. “ (2)
Language acquisition and Universal Grammar exposure to language L1 ani ore PB eea triggering experience
Universal Grammar
—>|
grammar of L1
Universal Grammar contains two types of information: (i) rigidly fixed principles, and (ii) parameters. Principles are universal, innate and predetermined, and they do not have to be acquired. Parameters, which determine cross-linguistic variation, are the choices left open by lnsteerdl Grammar.
The New Comparative Syntax
635
In the acquisition process, universal principles supplement the knowledge
available from experience. Principles prevent the learner from making the false
generalizations that simple exposure might suggest to him or her. One example of these principles is the Empty Category Principle, which accounts for the ungrammaticality of the non-overt complementizer in (1).
Among the parameters, we cite as an example the parametrization of the
strength of verbal inflection. Weak AGR in English entails that the lexical verb fails to undergo overt movement to AGR (3a); strong AGR in French entails overt V-to-AGR movement (3c):
(3)
a.
[cp [Acre John always eats chocolate]].
b.
*[cp [acrp John eats always chocolate]].
c.
[cp [acrp Jean mange toujours du chocolat]. Jean eats always chocolate
d.
*[cp [acrp Jean toujours mange du chocolat]].
The setting of the parameters is achieved on the basis of linguistic experience. Sentences such as (3a) provide overt evidence that the verb does not move to AGR in English, while sentences such as (3c) provide the evidence for V-to-AGR
movement in French. Comparative research on language acquisition aims at determining to what extent the properties of languages can be inferred purely from linguistic experience, and to what extent they cannot be so inferred. Language-specific properties which emerge from the data are plausibly identified by the speaker of this language on the basis of his or her exposure to the specific language. Properties which cannot be inferred from the linguistic data must be part of the predetermined linguistic competence of the human mind.
Section 2 Table (4) is a survey of some of the principles of Universal Grammar developed in this book.
(4)
Principles of Universal Grammar
Principle Structure is endocentric (X-bar theory)
Locality conditions: (i) selection/theta-role (ii) case
(iii) movement (iv) interpretation (v) interpretation: binding Principle of Full Interpretation Empty Category Principle
Economy
Reference Chapter 1 (2)
Chapter 1(1.2; 2.5.8) Chapter 1 (3.7)
Chapters 2-4 Chapter s50(ds6; 22333) Chapter 4 (1)
Chapter 5 (1.4.1) Chapter 4 (2), chapter 5 (1.4.5) Throughout the book
636
The New Comparative Syntax
The above principles can be ranked with respect to their order of generality. For instance, the Empty Category Principle derives from the Principle of Full Interpretation; the Principle of Full Interpretation and the locality conditions both derive from the over-arching Principle of Economy. The parameters define the areas of cross-linguistic variation and determine language-specific properties: (5)
Parameters
Subject AGR AGRs V-to-AGRs
French strong overt
English weak covert
Object AGR AGRo-case object shift
French weak covert
English weak covert
Old English. strong overt
Nominal AGRnominal AGR N-to-AGR
French’ strong overt
English weak covert
German weak covert
German _ Italian strong weak overt covert
Parametric variation is predetermined; the values which we can assign to a parameter belong to a restricted set of possibilities. Comparative research aims at identifying the parameters of cross-linguistic variation and their settings. The values assigned to a parameter constitute the elementary differences between grammatical systems. These parameters interact with the principles of UG and with other parameters to determine a number of superficial differences between languages. Several observable differences between languages (or between different diachronic stages of one language) thus derive from one elementary difference, the assignment of a different value to a parameter. The observable properties with respect to which languages vary are not autonomous; they organize themselves into clusters of properties which are fairly stable across languages. We typically find that if a language has property X, it will also have property Y and property Z.
Section 3 Table (6) summarizes the properties that distinguish pro-drop languages from non-pro-drop languages. Languages with non-overt subject pronouns in finite sentences share the following properties: (i) rich AGRs; (ii) non-overt pronoun subject, (iii) no overt expletives, (iv) post-verbal definite subjects, (v) extraction from [Spec,AGRsP] across overt material in the adjacent CP domain. Italian has
all of the above properties; it is a pro-drop language. English lacks these properties; it is not a pro-drop language.
(6)
The pro-drop parameter rich AGRs
Italian yes
English no
non-overt subject overt expletive
yes no
no yes
post-verbal subject subject extraction across C [-wH]
yes yes
no no
The New Comparative Syntax
637
The pro-drop parameter as well as the other parameters listed in (5) derive from
morphological properties associated with functional heads. A hypothesis which is being elaborated in current work in comparative syntax is that ALL crosslinguistic variation derives from morphological properties. This hypothesis leads to the formulation of the following universal principle: (7)
Syntax is driven by morphology.
Section 4
Some attested sentences drawn from particular English registers or styles would be considered ‘deviant’ according to the norm of the core grammar of English. The occurrence of such deviant examples does not entail a total breakdown of the grammar in these registers or styles. Register- or style-related deviation is confined to certain areas and it is governed by a slightly different grammatical system. This has led us to distinguish between the ‘core grammar’ of a language, which governs the unmarked registers of the language, and ‘peripheral grammars’ which govern special registers or styles. Two illustrations of languageinternal variation in English are discussed: (i) non-overt subjects in finite clauses in the so-called abbreviated registers, and (ii) long wh-extraction in Latinate styles. The distinction between the ‘core grammar’ of a language and register- or style-related ‘peripheral grammars’ entails that even a monolingual English speaker has more than one internal grammar.
1
Non-overt subjects in finite clauses
In contrast with formal spoken and written English, the register of what we informally label ‘abbreviated English’ allows non-overt subjects: (8)
a.
ec Finished the book this morning.
For two reasons, this phenomenon cannot be captured in terms of a positive setting of the pro-drop parameter: (i) the relevant register lacks the syntactic properties of pro-drop languages listed in table (6); (1) the non-overt subject in the special registers is subject to a number of constraints which are absent in pro-drop languages. Notably, the null subject is a root phenomenon (8b) and it is incompatible with SAI as found, for instance, in yes/no questions (8c) and in wh-questions (8d):
(8)
b. c. d.
I think that *(I) will finish the book this morning. Can *(I) finish the book this morning? At what time will *(I) be able to finish the book?
of What characterizes the abbreviated register is the truncation of the CP layer the root clause. The ECP is reformulated as in (9):
Empty Category Principle (ii) Non-overt elements must be identified if they can be. subject can legitiIn the specifier position of the (truncated) root-IP, a non-overt n available to mately remain antecedentless because there is no structural positio (9)
host the identifier.
638
2
The New Comparative Syntax
Long wh-extraction in Latinate styles
Certain ‘Latinate’ styles contain sentences which are deviant in everyday English: (10)
%lIt was really complicated with emotion and excitement in a way I don’t know whether I can describe. (Cotes, Cinderella, ch. 3; in Kruisinga 1925: 206)
Once again, the deviation of such sentences from the core grammar of English is not unrestricted. One way of accounting for their occurrence is to argue that in such sentences, the writer does not use the English type of measure for movement, expressed in terms of the crossing of IPs, but the Italian-type measure, expressed in terms of the crossing of CPs. The Italian-type measure allows a slightly longer move: Cet
eee
IP1
CP
1P2
x
In this particular type of example, parametric variation does not only apply cross-linguistically, it may even be observed language-internally. It forms a basis for stylistic variation. Once again, language-internal variation leads to a slightly distinct grammar.
Exercises Exercise 1.
Non-overt subjects in specialized registers
Discuss the problems raised for the analysis in section 4.1 by the following examples. (1) (2) (3)
Under cross-examination admitted a string of bungles... After Cochran’s blistering closing argument, declared. . . Last week denounced Johnnie Cochran, ... ((1)—(3) from the Guardian, 4.10.1995, ‘Cast of Characters’, p. 2, cols 1-2, p. 3, cols 7-8)
(4)
Naturally, ignored all this grooviness in favour of wrinkle-reducing Prescriptives, until | realised, on a recent trip to Peter Jones, that Lush makes a range of... After kids finally went to bed, rushed into bathroom to find that After 8.30 had disappeared. Unable to face rummaging through bin (nappies, husband’s nose clippings), drove to 7-11 and bought real thing. ((4)—(6) from Observer Colour Supplement, 31.3.1997, ‘Chock-a-block’, p. 35, col. 3)
(5)
(6)
Exercise 2.
Wh-movement
Discuss the problems raised for the locality theory developed in section 4.2.6 above by the examples of wh-movement below.
The New Comparative Syntax (1) (2)
639
Which student, do you expect [Mary to invite t]? Which candidates, do you consider [t, the best choice]?
Exercise 3.
CP-truncation
Discuss the problems that the truncation theory developed in this chapter (section 4.1.5.3) raises for the approach to tense interpretation developed in chapter 5, section 2.3.
Exercise 4.
Register variation and syntax
Using an English newspaper of your choice, discuss some of the syntactic properties of newspaper headlines using the concepts and the terminology developed in this book. If you have access to newspapers in other languages, compare their headlines with the English newspaper headlines.
Exercise 5.
Register variation and syntax
Consider the following recipe text: identify the syntactic properties that set it off from everyday spoken English. Moules escargot Ingredients per serving 1 mussel platter
100g/3+4 oz butter 2 garlic cloves, crushed 1 tablespoon chopped fresh parsley splash of Pernod salt and pepper wedge of lemon, to serve
Cut the butter into small pieces, place in a bowl and leave at room 30 minutes. Add the garlic, parsley, Pernod and seasoning and mix fork. Take the mussel platter from the refrigerator and dot with the then lace under a hot grill for three minutes. Serve at once, with
temperature for together using a flavoured butter, a lemon wedge.
(From Denis Blais and André Plisnier (1996), Belgo Cookbook, London: Weidenfeld and Nicolson; reproduced in Observer Sunday Review, ‘Close-up with the Mussel Men’, 2.3.1997, p. 45, col. 3) Massam For some discussion of the language of recipes we refer to Haegeman (1987), (1989). and Roberge (1989), and Massam
Exercise 6.
Survey question
tation in which the Make a survey of all the areas of sentence structure and interpre notion of locality was shown to play a role.
640
The New Comparative Syntax
Exercise 7.
Traditional grammar and generative grammar
Consider the following quotation from the Danish linguist Otto Jespersen:
This, then, is the conclusion | arrive at, that a simplification of grammatical structure, abolition of case distinctions, and so forth, always go hand-in-hand with the development of a fixed word-order. This cannot be accidental, but there must exist
a relation of cause and effect between the two. (Jespersen 1922: 361; see also the discussion in Haeberli 1995: 1) How could this conclusion be related to the discussion in this chapter?
Exercise 8.
/f and that
In the discussion in section 4.2.1 we accounted for the examples in (1) by the statement reproduced in (2).
(1)
a. b. Cc
??1l ask whom, they wonder if Louise thinks f that she will meet t. *| ask why, they wonder if Louise will meet Mary t. *l ask who, they wonder if f, will marry John.
(2)
When C is occupied
by if we
assume
that its specifier is not available
for
movement. ' Could we generalize (2) and replace it by (3)? (3)
When C is occupied its specifier is not available for movement.
Provide examples which show that the generalization in (3) is too powerful in that it will rule out grammatical sentences.
Exercise 9.
Diachronic variation
Consider the following poem by Christopher Marlowe (1564-1593). Using the concepts and terminology developed in this book, discuss in what ways its syntax differs from that of present-day English, paying particular attention to the distribution of direct objects. The Passionate Shepherd to his Love Come live with me, and be my love, And we will all the pleasures prove That hills and valleys, dales and fields, And all the craggy mountains yields. There we will sit upon the rocks, Seeing the shepherds feed their flocks By shallow rivers, to whose falls Melodious birds sing madrigals.
' See also chapter 2, section 1.1.3.
a
The New Comparative Syntax
641
And | will make thee beds of roses With a thousand fragrant posies, A cap of flowers and a kirtle Embroider’d all with leaves of myrtle.
A gown made of the finest wool Which from our pretty lambs we pull, Fair lined slippers for the cold,
With buckles of the purest gold; A belt of straw and ivy buds, With coral clasps and amber studs, And if these pleasures may thee move,
Come live with me, and be my love. The shepherd swains shall dance and sing For thy delight each May-morning: If these delights thy mind may move, Then live with me, and be my love.
(From The London Book of English Verse, selected by Herbert Read and Bonamy Dobrée, London: Eyre Methuen, first published 1949, 2nd revision 1952, reissued
1977: 151-2) See also exercise 18. For discussion see Roberts (1995), van der Wurff (1997).
Exercise 10. Syntax and register variation (see also exercise 36 of chapter 1) The following text was presented in chapter 1, exercise 36: you were invited to de- scribe the properties that set it apart from everyday English. We return to the text here. Using the concepts developed in this book, provide a more precise and explicit description of the properties of the text.
Body Scrub exfoliating This fragrant body scrub has been specially formulated to help refine the skin’s texture and appearance. Exfoliating beads will help remove surface impurities and dead skin cells while seaweed extracts help tone. Leaves the skin feeling soft, smooth and revitalised.
Directions Massage over your body in the shower or bath concentrating on problem areas. Rinse well. Avoid contact with eyes. (The Boots Company plc, Nottingham, England)
Exercise 11.
Register variation and diaries
diary register. Describe Subject omission is not the only syntactic property typical of the
on the basis of the the syntactic properties that distinguish diaries from formal English Secrets: ry Necessa Smart's h following extract from Elizabet
642
The New Comparative Syntax
Dinner rather strained — Jane under a cloud — Susan in a fog — me charitable on account of being able to look forward to the immediate future. Made a few valiant sallies - O noble womankind! Went to Wigmore Hall but found the concert was at the Grotian — walked there — feeling light and airy. Jane and | occasionally walked so fast that S. got left behind. Seats in the very back row — but it is a small cosy hall. Not terribly full. Watched the critics. . . Went home and put on red dress and black velvet puff-sleeve little coat and rushed to Quaglinos feeling like a devil. (Elizabeth Smart, Necessary Secrets, 7 March; Paladin edn 1992: 15)
Exercise 12.
Word-order variation and the history of English
Using the concepts and terminology developed in this book, discuss the word-order in the following extract from Milton’s Paradise Lost, paying specific attention to the discrepancies between the extract and present-day English. Now came still Evening on, and Twilight gray Had in her sober Liverie all things clad; Silence accompanied, for Beast and Bird, They to thir grassie Couch, these thir Nests Were slunk, all but the wakeful Nightingale; She all night long her amourous descant sung; Silence was pleas’d: now glow’d the Firmament With living Saphirs: Hesperus that led The starrie Host, rode brightest, till the Moon Rising in clouded Majestie, at length And o’er the dark her Silver Mantle threw. (From The London Book of English Verse, selected by Herbert Read and Bonamy Dobrée, first published 1949; London: Eyre Methuen, 1977: 538) For discussion of some of the syntactic properties of Paradise Lost see Banfield (1984).
Exercise 13.
The subject of infinitival complements of believe
In the discussion we assign to sentences in which a matrix verb selects an infinitival complement a structure like (1): (1)
| believe [,- John to be the best candidate].
In (1) the subject of the infinitival clause is inside the IP complement of believe. Consider the following examples from exercise 23 in chapter 1. They are accepted by many, though not all, native speakers. In the sentences in (2) the subject of the embedded clause is followed by an adjunct with matrix scope. In (2a), for instance, recently may modify found, in (2b) strongly modifies suspect, and so on. To account for this pattern, Postal (1974) proposes that in the sentences in (2), the subject of the embedded non-finite clause moves into the object position of the matrix verb. This movement is called ‘Subject-to-Object Raising’. If the subject of a lower clause were to move into the NP position dominated by V’, then this would raise a problem for the thematic structure of the sentence. We would have to assume that at D-structure the object position, [NP,V’], is projected but remains unfilled. But if this is so then the position would lack a theta role; hence, for reasons of economy, it would not be projected in the first place.
The New Comparative Syntax (2)
643
| have found Bob recently to be morose. | suspect him strongly to be a liar. Amber believes Becky sincerely to be intelligent. | have wanted Mary for a long time to finish that chapter. Jane proved Bob unfortunately to be a werewolf. | believed Nixon incorrectly to be interested in ending the war. | can prove Bob easily to have outweighed Martha’s goat. a-ogoaoop
in chapters 5 and 6 we proposed a more articulated clause structure, with two positions that may host the object: the position [NP,V’], and the specifier of AGRoP. In what way could this proposal be used to account for the sentences in (2)? For discussion see also Kayne (1985), Wyngaerd (1987), Johnson (1991), Branigan (1992), Koizumi (1993).
Exercise 14. Register variation: empirical problems for the analysis of null subjects In the text we discussed the phenomenon of null subjects in written and spoken English. The varieties we described, diary style and informal English, were said to allow a null subject only in matrix clauses. The discussion was based on a survey of a number of published diaries and also on the description of the phenomenon in Thrasher (1977). Discuss why the following examples from Helen Fielding’s Bridget Jones’s Diary are problematic for the analysis:
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
Think might wear short black skirt tomorrow (p. 19) Delighted by, well, anything — as always am if is not work — | quickly pressed RMS Execute and nearly jumped out of my skin when | saw Cleave at the bottom of the passage. (p. 22) This is what sent (p. 23) : Think will cross last bit out as contains mild accusation of sexual harassment
(p. 25)
(5)
Just managed to press Alt Screen in nick of time but big mistake as merely put CV back up on screen. (p. 25) (Helen Fielding (1997), Bridget Jones’s Diary, London: Picador)
Examples such as (1)—(5) can be found with some frequency, diary style illustrated above. More extensive corpus work will data are a recent development, if they generalize to all current are found in variants of spoken English. Clearly, the analysis cannot account for the data above. For some discussion see Koutsandréou (1998).
Exercise 15.
especially in the mock have to reveal if these diary writing, and if they adopted in the chapter Haegeman, Ihsane and
Code-switching
(or codeThe following examples illustrate the phenomenon known as code-switching switch The another. to language one from switch speakers mixing), in which (bilingual) below, examples the In . sentences within even or sentences between may take place is sentence-internal. all taken from Mahootian and Santorini 1996 (M&S), the switch
at which point Using the concepts and the terminology developed in this book, describe place. in the structure the switch takes
644
The New Comparative Syntax | seen everything ’cause no cogi na. not | took nothing (Spanish) ‘| saw everything because | didn’t take anything’ (M&S 1996: 465 (2a); Sankoff and Poplack 1981: 6) I'll take some naemaek salt (Farsi) (M&S 1996: 466 (6a); Mahootian
1993: 121 (67))
those ahoo-ga iru kara idiots-nominative be from (Japanese) ‘since those idiots are around’ (M&S 1996: 466 (6b); Nishimura 1985: 202)
sorekara, his wife ni yattara in addition, to give-conditional (Japanese) ‘in addition, if we give it to his wife’
(M&S 1996: 468 (11); Nishimura 1986: 129 (5)) Ten dollars dade. gave (Farsi) ‘She has given ten dollars’ (M&S 1996: 469 (12a); Mahootian 1993: 102 (21)) Only small prizes moratta ne. got you know (Japanese) ‘We only got small prizes, you know.’ (M&S 1996: 469 (12b); Nishimura 1986: 128 (3)) | got a lotta blanquito friends whitey (Spanish) (M&S 1996: 469 (13a); Poplack 1980: 600 (16b))
He presented a paper exceptionnel exceptional (French) (M&S 1996: 469 (13d); Bokamba 1989: 282 (16a))
(9)
(10)
You'll buy xune-ye-jaedid house-poss-new (Farsi) ‘You'll buy a new house.’ (M&S 1996: 471 (17a); Mahootian 1993: 152 (106)) Where are they, /os language things? those (Spanish) (M&S 1996: 476 (24c); Popiack 19841: 175)
For discussion of code-switching we refer to the following works, among others: Belazi, Rubin and Almeida Torribio (1994), Bokamba (1989), DiSciullo, Muysken and Singh (1986), Mahootian (1993), Mahootian and Santorini (1996), Poplack (1980, 1981), Sankoff and Poplack (1981).
Exercise 16.
Regional variation: Hiberno-English
The following sentences are grammatical in Hiberno-English, though not in standard British or American English:
The New Comparative Syntax (1) (2) (3)
645
Go you away. Open you that door. Eat you your dinner.
What is the feature that distinguishes Hiberno-English imperatives from those in standard English? On the basis of the following data try to identify the position of the subject you in Hiberno-English imperatives:
(4)
Read you quickly that book.
(5)
a. b.
Throw us you that rope. Throw you us that rope.
Henry (1995) proposes that in the sentences in which the subject appears to the right of the object pronoun, the subject in fact has remained within VP. How do the data below support this claim? (6)
a. b.
Bring them you over here to me. Bring you them over here to me.
(7)
a. b.
(8)
Be picked yous (plural you) for that team or I'll be furious.
(9)
Have gone you out before | get back.
Tell them always you the truth. *Tell them you always the truth.
For discussion see Harris (1984), Henry (1995), McCloskey (1997).
Exercise 17.
The non-overt complementizer
In the text we have repeatedly discussed the distribution of the non-overt declarative - complementizer:
(1)
a. b.
I think that John will come back soon. | think 0 John will:come back soon.
On the basis of the examples in (2), discuss whether the constraints on the non-overt variant of that also apply to the non-overt infinitival complementizer: (2)
a. b. c. d.
To err is human, to forgive divine. | expect to see you here soon. To rehouse a nine-year-old cat is a very delicate operation. To give your children a good education, you should give them
a lot of
freedom. © =
The plan to rehouse the cat was postponed till later. | need some help to solve these exercises.
Exercise 18.
Diachronic syntax
Discuss the properties that set the following sentences apart from Modern English. (1)
And yet they mowe hir lusttes nat amende and yet they can their pleasures not improve ‘And yet they cannot raise their spirits’ (Chaucer, Knight's Tale, 3066)
646
The New Comparative Syntax
(2)
| may the beautee of hem not sustene | can the beauty of them not endure ‘| cannot endure their beauty’ (Chaucer, Merciless Beautee, 2)
(3)
so slyly that the preest it nat espide so slyly that the priest it not saw ‘So slyly that the priest did not see it’ (Chaucer, Canon’s Yeoman’s Tale, 1230)
(4)
And though | nat the same wordes seye and though | not the same words say ‘And though | do not say the same words’ (Chaucer, Tale of Thopas, 959)
(5)
Though that the feend noght in oure sighte him shewe though that the devil not in our sight him shows ‘Although the devil does not show himself in our sight’ (Chaucer, Canon’s Yeoman’s Tale, 916)
(Examples taken from Van der Wurff (1997))
The examples above are drawn from Middle English. One difference from Modern English which is systematically illustrated by these examples concerns the position of the direct object. Though by and large Middle English is a language is which the complement follows the verb, the order OV is attested, as shown in the above examples. Following the discussion in the chapter, we could propose that instances of OV order are derived by the leftward movement of the object. For discussion of object—verb patterns in Middle English we refer to Roberts (1995) and Van der Wurff (1997).
Bibliographical notes Introductory texts The following textbooks offer more detailed discussion of the Principles and Parameters approach to comparative syntax. » “a
Haegeman, Liliane (1994) Introduction to Government and Binding Theory, Oxford: Blackwell. Ouhalla, Jamal (1994) Transformational Grammar, London: Arnold. Radford, Andrew (1988) Transformational Grammar, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Radford, Andrew (1997) Syntactic Theory and the Structure of English, A Minimalist Approach, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Riemsdijk, Henk Van and Edwin Williams (1986) Introduction to the Theory of Grammar, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Roberts, Ian (1997) Comparative Syntax, London: Arnold.
The New Comparative Syntax
647
Spectalized articles and sources of examples Authier, Jean-Marc (1989) ‘Arbitrary null objects and unselective binding’, in Oswaldo Jaeggli and Ken Safir (eds) The Null Subject Parameter, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 45-67. Authier, Jean-Marc (1992) ‘A parametric account of V-governed arbitrary null arguments’,
Natural Language and Linguistic Theory, 10, 345-74. Banfield, Ann M. (1984) Stylistic Transformations: A Study Based on the Syntax of
‘Paradise Lost’, Ann Arbor, Michigan: University Microfilms International. Bean, Marian (1983) The Development of Word-Order Patterns in Old English, London: Croom Helm. Belazi, Hedi M., Edward J. Rubin and Jacqueline Almeida Torribio (1994) ‘Code pe: and X-bar theory: the functional head constraint’, Linguistic Inquiry, 25, 221-37.
Bokamba, Eyamba G. (1989) ‘Are there syntactic constraints on code-mixing?’ World Englishes, 8, 277-93. Branigan, Philip (1992) ‘Subjects and Complementizers’, Cambridge, MA: MIT dissertation. Cinque, Guglielmo (1996) ‘The “antisymmetric” programme: theoretical and typological implications’, review article, Journal of Linguistics, 32, 447-64. DiSciullo, Anne-Marie, Pieter Muysken and Rajendar Singh (1986) ‘Government and code-switching’, Journal of Linguistics, 22, 1-24. Haeberli, Eric (1995) ‘On Word Order Freedom in the Germanic Languages’, MS, Univer-
sity of Geneva. Haegeman, Liliane (1987) ‘Register variation in English: some theoretical observations’, Journal of English Linguistics, 20, 230-48. Haegeman, Liliane (1991) Adverbial Positions and Second Language Acquisition, technical report, Faculty of Letters, University of Geneva. Haegeman, Liliane (ed.) (1997a) The New Comparative Syntax, Harlow: Addison Wesley Longman. Haegeman, Liliane (1997b) ‘Register variation, truncation and subject omission in English and in French’, Journal of English Language and Linguistics, 1, 233-70. Haegeman, Liliane, T. Ihsane and T. Koutsandréou (1998) ‘Embedded null subjects in English diaries’, in Eric Haeberli and Michal Starke (eds) Geneva Generative Papers, Department of Linguistics, University of Geneva, 6.
Harris, John (1984) ‘Syntactic variation and dialect divergence’, Journal of Linguistics, 20, 303-29. Henry, Alison (1995) Belfast English and Standard English: Dialect Variation and Parameter Setting, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Hornstein, Norbert and David Lightfoot (1981) The Logical Problem of Language Acquisition, London: Longman.
& Jespersen, Otto (1922) Language, Its Nature, Development and Origin, London: Allen Unwin. 2. Jespersen, Otto (1932) A Modern English Grammar on Historical Principles, Il, London: Allen & Unwin. c Theory, 9, Johnson, Kyle (1991) ‘Object positions’, Natural Language and Linguisti ) 577-636. Foris. t: Dordrech Kayne, Richard (1984) Connectedness and Binary Branching, ne Guéron, HansJacqueli in tions’, construc particle of es ‘Principl (1985) Richard Kayne, tation, Dordrecht: Georg Obenauer and Jean-Yves Pollock (eds) Grammatical Represen Foris, 101-40. ge, MA: MIT Press. Kayne, Richard (1994) The Antisymmetry of Syntax, Cambrid
Case in the History of Kemenade, Ans van (1987) Syntactic Case and Morphological English, Dordrecht: Foris.
648
The New Comparative Syntax
Koizumi, Masatoshi (1993) ‘Object agreement and the split VP hypothesis’, in Jonathan David Bobaljik and Colin Phillips (eds) MIT Working Papers in Linguistics 18. Papers on Case and Agreement 1, Cambridge, MA: MIT, 99-148.
Kruisinga, Etsko Syntax 3, 4th Kruisinga, Etsko Syntax 3, Sth Lightfoot, David
(1925) A Handbook of Present-Day English II. English Accidence and edition, Utrecht: Kemink en Zoon, over den Dom. (1932) A Handbook of Present-Day English II. English Accidence and edition, Groningen: Noordhoff. (1979) Principles of Diachronic Syntax, Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press.
Lightfoot, David (1983) The Language Lottery, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Mahootian, Shahrzad (1993) ‘A null theory of code-switching’, doctoral dissertation, Northwestern University, Evanston, IL.
Mahootian, Shahrzad and Beatrice Santorini (1996) ‘Code switching and the complement/adjunct distinction’, Linguistic Inquiry, 27, 464-79. Massam, Diane (1989) ‘Null objects and non-thematic subjects’, Journal of Linguistics, 28, 115-37.
Massam, Diane and Yves Roberge-(1989) ‘Recipe context null objects’, Linguistic Inquiry, 20, 134-9. McCloskey, James (1997) ‘Subjecthood and subject positions’, in Liliane Haegeman (ed.) Elements of Grammar.
A Handbook
of Generative Syntax, Dordrecht: Kluwer,
197-235. Nishimura, Miwa (1985) ‘Intrasentential Code-switching in Japanese and English’, doctoral dissertation, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia. Nishimura, Miwa (1986) ‘Intrasentential code-switching: The case of language assignment’, in Jyotsna Vaid (ed.) Language Processing in Bilinguals: Psycholinguistic and Neuropsychological Perspectives, Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum, 123-43. Perlmutter, David (1971) Deep and Surface Structure Constraints in Syntax, New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. Poplack, Shana (1980) ‘Sometimes I’ll start a sentence in Spanish y termino en espanol: toward a typology of code-switching’, Linguistics, 18, 581-618.
Poplack, Shana (1981) ‘Syntactic structure and social function of code-switching’, in Richard P. Duran (ed.) Latino Language and Communicative Behavior, Norwood, NJ: Ablex, 169-84. Postal, Paul (1974) On Raising, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Poutsma, Harold (1926) A Grammar of Late Modern English, Part I: The Sentence. Second Half, Groningen: Noordhoff. Rizzi, Luigi (1982) ‘Violations of the wh-island constraint and the subjacency condition’,
in Luigi Rizzi, Issues in Italian Syntax, Dordrecht: Foris, 117-84. Rizzi, Luigi (1986) “Null objects in Italian and the theory of pro’, Linguistic Inquiry, 17, 501-57. Rizzi, Luigi (1994) ‘Early null subjects and root null subjects’, in Teun Hoekstra and Bonnie Schwartz (eds) Language Acquisition Studies in Generative Grammar, Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 151-77. . Roberts, Ian (1993) Verbs and Diachronic Syntax: A Comparative Study of English and French, Dordrecht: Kluwer: Roberts, Ian (1995) ‘Object movement and verb movement in early Modern English’, in Hubert Haider, Susan Olsen and Sten Vikner (eds) Studies in Comparative Germanic Syntax, Dordrecht: Kluwer. Sankoff, David and Shana Poplack (1981) ‘A formal grammar for code-switching’, Papers in Linguistics, 14, 3-45. Schmerling, Susan (1973) ‘Subjectless sentences and the notion of surface structure’, FORE of the Chicago Linguistic Society, 9, Chicago: University of Chicago, 7-86.
The New Comparative Syntax
649
Thrasher, Randolph (1977) One Way to Say More by Saying Less. A Study of So-called Subjectless Sentences, Kwansei Gakuin University Monograph Series vol. 11. Tokyo: The Eihosha Ltd. Van der Wurff, Wim (1997) ‘Deriving object-verb order in late Middle English’, Journal of Linguistics, 33, 485-509. Visser, Frederic Theodor (1963) An Historical Syntax of the English Language, Leiden: Brill. White, Lydia (1989) Universal Grammar and Second Language Acquisition, Amsterdam: Benjamins. Wyngaerd, Guido van den (1987) ‘Object shift as an A-movement rule’, MIT Working Papers in Linguistics 11, Cambridge, MA: MIT. © Zwart, Jan-Wouter (1997) ‘The Germanic languages and the universal base hypothesis’, in Liliane Haegeman (ed.) The New Comparative Syntax, Harlow: Addison Wesley Longman.
References
Aarts, Bas (1992) Small Clauses in English, Amsterdam: De Gruyter. Abney, Steven (1987) ‘The English Noun Phrase in its Sentential Aspect’, Cambridge, MA: MIT dissertation. Akmajian, Adrian (1977) ‘The complement structure of perception verbs in an autonomous syntax framework’, in Peter Culicover, Tom Wasow and Adrian Akmajian (eds) Formal Syntax, New York: Academic Press, 427-60. Aoun, Joseph and David Lightfoot (1984) ‘Government and contraction’, Linguistic Inquiry, 15, 465-74. i Aoun, Joseph and Audrey Li (1989) ‘Scope and constituency’, Linguistic Inquiry, 20, 141-72.
Ariel, Mira (1988) ‘Referring and accessibility’, Journal of Linguistics, 24, 65-87. Authier, Jean-Marc (1989) ‘Arbitrary null objects and unselective binding’, in Oswaldo Jaeggli and Ken Safir (eds) The Null Subject Parameter, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 45-67. Authier, Jean-Marc (1992) ‘A parametric account of V-governed arbitrary null arguments’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory, 10, 345-74. Baker, Carl L. (1971) ‘Stress level and auxiliary behavior in English’, Linguistic Inquiry,
2, 167-81. Baker, Carl L. (1991) ‘The syntax of English not: the limits of core grammar’, Linguistic Inquiry, 22, 387-429.
Baker, Mark (1997) ‘Thematic roles and syntactic structure’, in Liliane Haegeman (ed.)
Elements of Grammar. 138.
A Handbook of Generative Syntax, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 73-
Baker, Mark, Kyle Johnson and Ian Roberts (1989) ‘Passive arguments raised’, Linguistic Inquiry, 20, 219-51. Baltin, Mark (1982) ‘A landing-site theory of movement rules’, Linguistic Inquiry, 13,
1-38.
,
Baltin, Mark (1984) ‘Extraposition rules and discontinuous constituents’, Linguistic Inquiry, 15, 157-63. Baltin, Mark (1995) ‘Floating quantifiers, PRO and predication’, Linguistic Inquiry, 26,
199-248. Baltin, Mark and Paul Postal (1996) ‘More on reanalysis hypotheses’, Linguistic Inquiry, 27, 127-45.
Banfield, Ann M. (1984) Stylistic Transformations: A Study Based on the Syntax of ‘Paradise Lost’, Ann Arbor, Michigan: University Microfilms International. Bean, Marian (1983) The Development of Word-Order Patterns in Old English, London: Croom Helm.
References Belazi, Hedi M., Edward
ee
J. Rubin
and Jacqueline
651 Almeida
Torribio
(1994)
‘Code
and X-bar theory: the functional head constraint’, Linguistic Inquiry, 25,
Befetei, Adriana and Luigi Rizzi (1991) ‘Notes on psych-verbs, theta theory, and binding’, in Robert Freidin (ed.) Principles and Parameters in Comparative Grammar, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 132-61. Bernstein, Judy (1993) ‘Topics in the Syntax of Nominal
Structure across Romance’,
New York: CUNY dissertation. Beukema, Frits and Peter Coopmans (1989) ‘A Government-Binding perspective on the imperative in English’, Journal of Linguistics, 25, 417-36. Bobaljik, Jonathan David (1995) ‘Morphosyntax: The Syntax of Verbal Inflection’, Cambridge, MA: MIT dissertation.
Bokamba, Eyamba G. (1989) ‘Are there syntactic constraints on code-mixing?’ World Englishes, 8, 277-93.
Branigan, Philip (1992) ‘Subjects and Complementizers’, Cambridge, MA: MIT dissertation. Bresnan, Joan (1970) ‘On complementizers: toward a syntactic theory of complement types’, Foundations of Language, 6, 297-321. Bresnan, Joan (1994) ‘Locative inversion and the architecture of universal grammar’, Language, 70, 72-131.
Browning, Maggie A. (1996) ‘Comments on relativized minimality’, in Robert Freidin (ed.) Current Issues in Comparative Grammar, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 203-25. Burzio, Luigi (1996) ‘The role of the antecedent in anaphoric relations’, in Robert Freidin (ed.) Current Issues in Comparative Grammar, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 1-45. Campbell, Richard (1991) ‘Tense and agreement in different tenses’, Linguistic Review, 8, 159-84. Chao, Wynn (1996) On Ellipsis, New York: Garland. Chomsky, Noam (1970) ‘Remarks on nominalizations’, in Roderick Jacobs and Peter Rosenbaum (eds) Readings in English Transformational Grammar, Waltham, MA: Ginn. (Also in Noam Chomsky (1972) Studies on Semantics in Generative Grammar, The Hague: Mouton.) Chomsky, Noam (1995) The Minimalist Program, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Cinque, Guglielmo (1994) ‘On the evidence for partial N-movement in the Romance noun phrase’, in Guglielmo Cinque, Jan Koster, Jean-Yves Pollock, Luigi Rizzi and Raffaella Zanuttini (eds) Paths toward Universal Grammar, Washington DC: Georgetown University Press, 85-110. Cinque, Guglielmo (1996) ‘The “antisymmetric” programme: theoretical and typological implications’, review article, Journal of Linguistics, 32, 447-64.
Cinque, Guglielmo (1997) ‘Adverbs and Functional Heads. A Cross-Linguistic Perspect-
ive’, MS, University of Venice. (To be published by Oxford University Press.) Coopmans, Peter and Irene Roovers (1986) ‘Reconsidering some syntactic properties of PP extraposition’, in Peter Coopmans, Yvonne Bordelois and B. Dotson Smith (eds) Formal Parameters of Generative Grammar, Going Romance 1986, Department
of Linguistics, University of Utrecht, 21-35. MS, Cormack, Annabel and Neil V. Smith (1997) ‘Checking Features and Split Signs’, University College London. c Theory Crisma, Paola (1996) ‘The Use of the Article in Old English Prose: A Parametri Venezia. di e Padova di a Universit MS, of Null Articles’, in English’, in Culicover, Peter (1991) ‘Topicalization, inversion, and complementizers OTS Working (eds) n Stuurma Frits Denis Delfitto, Martin Everaert, Arnold Evers and
1-43. 00 Papers: Going Romance and Beyond, Utrecht: University of Utrecht, Linguistic effect’, that-t the of accounts ECP against e Culicover, Peter (1993) ‘Evidenc Inquiry, 24, 557-61.
652
References
Culicover, Peter (1996) ‘On distinguishing A’-movements’, Linguistic Inquiry, 27, 445-63. DiSciullo, Anne-Marie, Pieter Muysken and Rajendar Sirah (1986) ‘Government and code-switching’, Journal of Linguistics, 22, 1-24. Emonds, Joseph (1970) ‘Root and Structure Preserving Transformations’, Cambridge, MA: MIT dissertation, distributed by Indiana University Linguistics Club. Emonds, Joseph (1976) A Transformational Approach to English Syntax, New York: Academic Press. Emonds, Joseph (1978) ‘The verbal complex V’-V in French’, Linguistic Inquiry, 9, 151a3: Enc, Murvet (1986) ‘Towards a referential analysis of temporal expressions’, Linguistics and Philosophy, 9, 405-26. Enc, Murvet (1987) ‘Anchoring conditions for Tense’, Linguistic Inquiry, 18, 4. Ernst, Thomas (1992) ‘The phrase structure of English negation’, Linguistic Review, 9, 109-44.
Felser, Claudia (1995) ‘The Syntax of Verbal Complements. A Study of Perception Verbs in English’, University of Gottingen: dissertation. Giorgi, Alessandra and Giuseppe Longobardi (1991) The Syntax of Noun Phrases: Configuration, Parameters and Empty Categories, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Giusti, Giuliana (1993) La sintassi dei determinanti, Padova: Unipress. Giusti, Giuliana (1997) ‘The categorial status of determiners’, in Liliane Haegeman (ed.) The New Comparative Syntax, Harlow: Addison Wesley Longman, 95-123. Guéron, Jacqueline (1980) ‘On the syntax and semantics of PP extraposition’, Linguistic Inquiry, 11, 637-78. Guéron, Jacqueline (1982) ‘Logical operators, complete constituents, and extraction transformations’, in Robert May and Jan Koster (eds) Levels of Syntactic Representation, Dordrecht: Foris, 65-141. Guéron, Jacqueline (1990) ‘Particles, prepositions and verbs’, in Joan Mascar6 and Marina Nespor (eds) Grammar in Progress, Dordrecht: Foris, 153-66. Guéron, Jacqueline (1993) ‘Sur la syntaxe du temps’, Langue francaise, 100, 102-24. Guéron, Jacqueline and Robert May (1984) ‘Extraposition and Logical Form’, Linguistic Inquiry, 15, 1-31. Guéron, Jacqueline and Teun Hoekstra (1988) ‘T-chains and the constituent structure of auxiliaries’, in Anna Cardinaletti, Guglielmo Cinque and Giuliana Giusti (eds) Constituent Structure, Dordrecht: Foris, 35-99. Guéron, Jacqueline and Teun Hoekstra (1992) ‘Chaines temporelles et phrases réduites’,
in Hans-Georg Obenauer and Anne Zribi-Hertz (eds) Structure de la phrase et tetoka du liage, Vincennes: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes. Haeberli, Eric (1995) ‘On Word Order Freedom in the Germanic Languages’, MS, University of Geneva. Haegeman, Liliane (1987) ‘Register variation in English: some theoretical observations’;
Journal of English Linguistics, 20, 230-48. Haegeman, Liliane (1991a) “The get passive and Burzio’s generalisation’, Lingua, 66,
53-77. Haegeman, Liliane (1991b) Adverbial Positions and Second Language Acquisition, technical report, Faculty of Letters, University of Geneva. Haegeman, Liliane (1994) Introduction to Government and Binding Theory, Oxford: Blackwell. Haegeman, Liliane (1996) ‘Negative inversion, the NEG criterion and the structure of CP’, in Michal Starke (ed.) Geneva Generative Papers, Department of Linguistics, University of Geneva, 4, 93-119.
Haegeman, Liliane (1997a) The New Comparative Syntax, Harlow: Addison Wesley Longman.
References
653
Haegeman, Liliane (1997b) ‘Register variation, truncation and subject omission in English and in French’, Journal of English Language and Linguistics, 1, 233-70.
Haegeman, Liliane, T. Ihsane and T. Koutsandréou (1998) ‘Embedded null subjects in English diaries’, in Eric Haeberli and Michal Starke (eds) Geneva Generative Papers, Department of Linguistics, University of Geneva, 6.
Haik, Isabelle (1984) ‘Indirect binding’, Linguistic Inquiry, 15, 185-223. Harris, John (1984) ‘Syntactic variation and dialect divergence’, Journal of Linguistics, 20, 303-29. Henry, Alison (1995a) ‘Infinitives in a for to dialect’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory, 10, 279-301. Henry, Alison (1995b) Belfast English and Standard English: Dialect Variation and Para-
meter Setting, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Hoekstra, Teun and René Mulder (1990) ‘Unergatives as copular verbs: locational and existential predication’, Linguistic Review, 7, 1-79. Hornstein, Norbert (1990) As Time Goes By, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Hornstein, Norbert and David Lightfoot (1981) The Logical Problem of Language Acquisition, London: Longman. Horrocks, Geoffrey and Melita Stavrou (1987) ‘Bounding theory and Greek syntax: evidence for wh-movement in NP’, Journal of Linguistics, 23, 79-108. Huang, James (1993) ‘Reconstruction and the structure of VP: some theoretical consequences’, Linguistic Inquiry, 24, 69-102. Iatridou, Sabine (1990) ‘About Agr(P)’, Linguistic Inquiry, 21, 551-77. Jackendoff, Ray (1971) ‘Gapping and related rules’, Linguistic Inquiry, 2, 21-35. Jackendoff, Ray (1974) Introduction to the X’-Convention, Mimeo, distributed by the Indiana University Linguistics Club. Jackendoff, Ray (1977) X’ Syntax: A Study of Phrase Structure, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Jaworska, Ewa (1986) ‘Prepositional phrases as subjects and objects’, Journal of Linguistics, 22, 355-75. Jayaseelan, K. A. (1997) ‘Anaphors as pronouns’, Studia Linguistica, 51, 186-234. Jespersen, Otto (1922) Language, Its Nature, Development and Origin, London: Allen & Unwin. Jespersen, Otto (1932) A Modern English Grammar on Historical Principles, Ul, 2. London: Allen & Unwin. Johnson, Kyle (1991) ‘Object positions’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory, 9, 577-636. Kayne, Richard (1984) Connectedness and Binary Branching, Dordrecht: Foris. Kayne, Richard (1985) ‘Principles of particle constructions’, in Jacqueline Guéron, HansGeorg Obenauer and Jean-Yves Pollock (eds) Grammatical Representation, Dordrecht: Foris, 101-40.
Kayne, Richard (1994) The Antisymmetry of Syntax, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Kemenade, Ans van (1987) Syntactic Case and Morphological Case in the History of English, Dordrecht: Foris. Kester, Ellen-Petra (1996) ‘The Nature of Adjectival Inflection’, University of Utrecht: PhD dissertation. (eds) The Klima, Joseph (1964) ‘Negation in English’, in Jerry Fodor and Jerold Katz
; Structure of Language, Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 246-323. Jonathan in s’, hypothesi VP split the and t agreemen ‘Object Koizumi, Masatoshi (1993) Papers 18. cs Linguisti in Papers Working MIT (eds) Phillips Colin and David Bobaljik
on Case and Agreement 1, Cambridge, MA: MIT, 99-148. Cambridge, MA: Koizumi, Masatoshi (1995) ‘Phrase Structure in Minimalist Syntax’,
Ain es MIT dissertation. , Lingua, 85, subjects’ of position ‘The (1991) e Sportich ue Dominiq Koopman, Hilda and 211-58.
654
References
Koster, Jan and Eric Reuland (eds) (1991) Long-Distance Anaphora, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Kruisinga, Etsko (1925) A Handbook of Present Day English II. English Accidence and Syntax 3, 4th edition, Utrecht: Kemink en Zoon, over den Dom. Kruisinga, Etsko (1932) A Handbook of Present-Day English II. English Accidence and
Syntax 3, Sth edition, Groningen: Noordhoff. Kuno, Susumo (1976) ‘Gapping: a functional analysis’, Linguistic Inquiry, 7, 300-9. Kuroda, Shige-Yuki (1986) ‘Whether we agree or not: a comparative syntax of English and Japanese’, Linguisticae Investigationes, 12, 1-47. Ladusaw, William (1980) ‘On the notion “affective” in the analysis of negative polarity items’, Journal of Linguistic Research, 1, 1-16. Larson, Richard (1988) ‘On the double object construction’, Linguistic Inquiry, 19, 335-91. Larson, Richard (1990) ‘Double objects revisited: reply to Jackendoff’, Linguistic Inquiry, 21, 589-632. Lasnik, Howard (1974) ‘Analyses of Negation in English’, Cambridge, MA: MIT dis-
sertation (Indiana University Linguistics Club mimeograph). Lasnik, Howard (1976) ‘Remarks on coreference’, Linguistic Analysis, 2, 1-22. Lasnik, Howard and Mamoro Saito (1991) ‘On the subject of infinitives’, Papers of the Chicago Linguistics Society, 27. Lightfoot, David (1979) Principles of Diachronic Syntax, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Lightfoot, David (1983) The Language Lottery, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Lobeck, Anne (1995) Ellipsis: Functional Heads, Licensing, and Identification, Oxford: Oxford University Press. Longobardi, Giuseppe (1994) ‘Reference and proper names:-a theory of N-movement in syntax and logical form’, Linguistic Inquiry, 25, 609-65. Longobardi, Giuseppe (1996) “The syntax of N-raising: a minimalist theory’, OTS Publications, Utrecht University, Research Institute for Language and Speech, OTS-WP-
TL-96-005. Lyons, Chris (1986) “The syntax of English genitive constructions’, Journal of Linguistics, 22, 124-44. Mahootian, Shahrzad (1993) ‘A null theory of code-switching’, doctoral dissertation, Northwestern University, Evanston, IL. Mahootian, Shahrzad and Beatrice Santorini (1996) ‘Code switching and the complement/adjunct distinction’, Linguistic Inquiry, 27, 464-79. Massam, Diane (1989) ‘Null objects and non-thematic subjects’, Journal of Linguistics, 28, 115-37. Massam, Diane and Yves Roberge (1989) ‘Recipe context null objects’, Linguistic Inquiry, 20, 134-9. May, Robert (1986) Logical Form. Its Structure and Derivation, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
McCloskey, James (1994) ‘Adjunction, Selection and Embedded Verb Second’, MS, Uni“ versity of California at Santa Cruz. McCloskey, James (1997a) ‘Quantifier float and wh-movement in Irish English’, Working Paper, Linguistics Research Center, Stevenson College, University of California at Santa Cruz, Linguistics Research Center, 97-02.
McCloskey, James (1997b) ‘Subjecthood and subject positions’, in Liliane Haegeman (ed.) Elements of Grammar. A Handbook of Generative Syntax, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 197-235. Mitchell, Bruce (1985) Old English Syntax, Oxford: Clarendon Press. Muysken, Pieter (1981) ‘Parametrizing the notion head’, Journal of Linguistic Research, 2, 57-75. Nakajima, Heizo (1996) ‘Complementizer selection’, Linguistic Review, 13, 143-64.
References
655
Napoli, Donna J. (1985) ‘Verb phrase deletion in English: a base-generated approach’,
Journal of Linguistics, 21, 281-320. Nishimura, Miwa (1985) ‘Intrasentential Code-switching in Japanese and English’, doctoral dissertation, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia. Nishimura, Miwa (1986) ‘Intrasentential code-switching: The case of language assignment’, in Jyotsna Vaid (ed.) Language Processing in Bilinguals: Psycholinguistic and Neuropsychological Perspectives, Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum, 123-43. a oe. (1981) ‘Semantic interpretation of NPs containing no’, Sophia Linguistica, 7, -28. Ouhalla, Jamal (1994) Transformational Grammar, London: Arnold. Partee, Barbara (1973) ‘Some structural analogies between tenses and pronouns in Eng-
lish’, Journal of Philosophy, 70, 601-9. Perlmutter, David (1971) Deep and Surface Structure Constraints in Syntax, New York:
Holt, Rinehart and Winston. Pollock, Jean-Yves (1989) ‘Verb movement, UG and the structure of IP’, Linguistic Inquiry, 20, 365-425. Pollock, Jean-Yves (1997) ‘Notes on clause structure’, in Liliane Haegeman (ed.) Elements of Grammar, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 237-80. Poplack, Shana (1980) ‘Sometimes I’ll start a sentence in Spanish y termino en espanol: toward a typology of code-switching’, Linguistics, 18, 581-618. Poplack, Shana (1981) ‘Syntactic structure and social function of code-switching’, in Richard P. Duran (ed.) Latino Language and Communicative Behavior, Norwood, NJ: Ablex, 169-84. Postal, Paul (1974) On Raising, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Potsdam, Eric (1997) ‘NegP and subjunctive complements in English’, Linguistic Inquiry,
28, 533-41. Poutsma, Harold
(1926) A Grammar
of Late Modern English, Part I: The Sentence.
Second Half, Groningen: Noordhoff. Puskas, Genoveva (1992) ‘The wh-criterion in Hungarian’, Rivista di Grammatica Generativa, 141-86. Puskas, Genoveva (1997) ‘Focus and the CP domain’, in Liliane Haegeman (ed.) The New Comparative Syntax, Harlow: Addison Wesley Longman. Quirk, Randolph and Charles Leslie Wrenn (1955) An Old English Grammar, London: Methuen.
Radford, Andrew (1988) Transformational Grammar, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Radford, Andrew (1997) Syntactic Theory and the Structure of English. A Minimalist Approach, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Reichenbach, Hans (1947) Elements of Symbolic Logic, New York: Free Press. Linguistic Reinhart, Tanya (1981) ‘Definite NP anaphora and C-command domains’, Inquiry, 12, 605-36. Reuland, Eric (1983) ‘Governing ing’, Linguistic Inquiry, 14, 101-36. of GramRiemsdijk, Henk Van and Edwin Williams (1986) Introduction to the Theory Press. MIT MA: e, mar, Cambridg state noun phrases’, Ritter, Elisabeth (1988) ‘A Head-Movement approach to construct an Linguistics, 26, 909-29. n’, conditio cy subjacen the and nt constrai d wh-islan the Rizzi, Luigi (1982) ‘Violations of Is 117-84. Foris, t: Dordrech Syntax, Italian in in Luigi Rizzi, Issues pro’, Linguistic Inquiry, 17, Rizzi, Luigi (1986) ‘Null objects in Italian and the theory of é 501-57. ’, in Teun Hoekstra and Rizzi, Luigi (1994) ‘Early null subjects and root null subjects ive Grammar, AmsterBonnie Schwartz (eds) Language Acquisition Studies in Generat . 151-77 ins, Benjam dam: John
656
References
Rizzi, Luigi (1996) ‘Residual V-second and the wh-criterion’, in Adriana Belletti and Luigi Rizzi (eds) Parameters and Functional Heads. Essays in Comparative Syntax, New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 63-90.
Rizzi, Luigi (1997) ‘The fine structure of the left periphery’, in Liliane Haegeman (ed.) Elements of Grammar, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 289-330. Roberts, Ian (1985) ‘Agreement parameters and the development of English modal auxiliaries’, Natural Language and Linguistic Theory, 3, 21-58. Roberts, Ian (1993) Verbs and Diachronic Syntax: A Comparative Study of English and French, Dordrecht: Kluwer. Roberts, Ian (1995) ‘Object movement and verb movement in early Modern English’, in Hubert Haider, Susan Olsen and Sten Vikner (eds) Studies in Comparative Germanic Syntax, Dordrecht: Kluwer. Roberts, Ian (1997) Comparative Syntax, London: Arnold. Ross, John (1970) ‘Gapping and the order of constituents’, in Manfred Bierwisch and Kurt Heidolph (eds) Progress in Linguistics, The Hague: Mouton, 249-59.
Rudanko, Jan (1980) ‘Towards a description of negatively conditioned subject operator inversion in English’, English Studies, 58, 348-59. Safir, Ken (1983) ‘On small clauses as constituents’, Linguistic Inquiry, 14, 730-5. Sag, Ivan (1980) Deletion and Logical Form, New York: Garland. Sankoff, David and Shana Poplack (1981) ‘A formal grammar for code-switching’, Papers in Linguistics, 14, 3-45. Schmerling, Susan (1973) ‘Subjectless sentences and the notion of surface structure’, Pro-
ceedings of the Chicago Linguistic Society, 9, Chicago: University of Chicago, 577-86. Smith, Carlota S. (1981) ‘Semantic and syntactic constraints on temporal interpretation’,
in Philip J. Tedeschi and Annie Zaenen (eds) Syntax and Semantics, 14. Tense and Aspect, New York: Academic Press, 213-37. Sportiche, Dominique (1988) ‘A theory of floating quantifiers and its corollaries for phrase structure’, Linguistic Inquiry, 19, 425-40. Stowell, Tim (1981) ‘Origins of Phrase Structure’, Cambridge, MA: MIT dissertation. Stowell, Tim (1982) ‘Subjects across categories’, Linguistic Review, 2, 285-312. Stuurman, Frits (1985) X-bar and X-Plain. A Study of X-bar Theories of the Phrase Structure Component, Dordrecht: Foris. Stuurman, Frits (1991) ‘If and whether: questions and conditions’, Lingua, 83, 1-41. Szabolcsi, Anna (1983) ‘The possessor that ran away from home’, Linguistic Review, 1, 89-102. Szabolcsi, Anna (1994) ‘The noun phrase’, Syntax and Semantics, 27. The Syntactic Structure of Hungarian, New York: Academic Press, 179-274. Tedeschi, Philip J. and Annie Zaenen (eds) (1981) Syntax and Semantics, 14. Tense and Aspect, New York: Academic Press. Thrasher, Randolph (1977) One Way to Say More by Saying Less. A Study of So-called Subjectless Sentences, Kwansei Gakuin University Monograph Series vol. 11. Tokyo: The Eihosha Ltd. Traugott, Elisabeth Closs (1972) A History of English Syntax, New York, Chicago: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. Tsimpli, Ianthi-Maria (in press) ‘Null operators, clitics and identification: a comparison between Greek and English’, in Artemis Alexiadou, Geoffrey Horrocks and Melita Stavrou (eds) Studies in Greek Syntax, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 241-63. Valois, Daniel (1991) “The internal syntax of DP and adjective placement in French and
English’, Proceedings of NELS 15, 367-82. Van der Wurff, Wim (1997) ‘Deriving object-verb order in late Middle English’, Journal of Linguistics, 33, 485-509. sae Frederic Theodor (1963-73) An Historical Syntax of the English Language, Leiden: rill.
References
657
White, Lydia (1989) Universal Grammar and Second Language Acquisiti on, Amsterdam: Benjamins. Williams, Edwin (1983) ‘Against small clauses’, Linguistic Inquiry, 14, 287-308.
Wyngaerd, Guido van den (1987) ‘Object shift as an A-movement rule’, MIT Working Papers in Linguistics 11, Cambridge, MA: MIT. Zribi-Hertz, Anne (1989) “Anaphor binding and narrative point of view: English reflexive
pronouns in sentence and discourse’, Language, 65, 695-727.
Zribi-Hertz, Anne
(1997) ‘On the dual nature of the “possessive” marker in Modern
English’, Journal of Linguistics, 33, 511-61. Zwart, Jan-Wouter (1997) ‘The Germanic languages and the universal base hypothesis’, in Liliane Haegeman (ed.) The New Comparative Syntax, Harlow: Addison Wesley Longman.
Index
A-bar (A’) movement, 218, 223, 226, 268, 384,
420, 512, 543 position, 217, 218, 223, 268, 341, 384, 542 trace, 405, 466
abbreviated registers, 614, 637 Abney, S., 480 aboutness, 494 abstract case, 144
feature, 96, 563, 565, 567, 570 head, 529 head feature, 563 movement, 543, 550, 558, 564-9, 588,
593 representation, 34, 84 symbol, 567 verb, 125 acceptability, 14, 18 accusative case, 94, 128-32, 144, 202, 206, 441 pronoun, 131 acest(a), 449, 451-2, 455 A-chain, 220 acquisition, 583-5, 596, 634 and exposure, 583, 596, 634 innate language acquisition device, 584, 634 internalized grammar, 582 negative evidence, 583-4, 589, 634 triggering experience, 583-4, 592, 634 activity verb, 534-6 adjacency, 15):53,259,° 261, 267 adjective, 56, 422, 427, 453 agreement, 111, 295, 306, 429 AP, 70
colour adjectives, 459 Colour Projection (ColP), 459, 470 comparative form, 56 evaluating adjectives, 459 Evaluation Projection (EvP), 459, 470 inflection, 296 phrase, 70 post-nominal, 424 pre-adjectival modifiers, 292 predicate, 290 pre-nominal, 418, 428, 453-6, 464, 467, 470 projection, 327 sequence, 459 Size Projection (SiP), 459, 470 superlative form, 56 adjunct, 29, 41, 49, 75, 184, 218, 536 adverbial, 425 extraction, 157, 182-4, 188, 190, 318,
621 manner, 29
place, 29 pre-verbal, 417-18, 460 rationale adjunct, 200, 414 reason, 29 scene-setter, 522-3, 537-8
sentence-medial, 84-90, 139, 317, 425 souvent, 90, 309 time, 532, 568 toujours, 90
adjunct/object asymmetry, 183 adjunction, 80, 139, 187, 292, 338, 464, 486, 542 direction of, 423 left-, 80, 424 mixed, 424, 550 multiple, 102
659
Index
pre-nominal adjective, 428, 456, 464 pre-verbal adverbial modifier, 293, 415, 461 quantifier movement, 543 segment, 80-1, 139
site, 424 topicalization, 338 adverb, 57, 58, 70-1, 309 adjunction, 293, 415, 461 phrase, 71, 79 sentence-medial, 84-90, 139, 317, 425 time, 532, 568 affectedness, 445, 481 affix, 83-4, 527-8 AGENT, 25-6, 199
AGR, 83, 91, 95-7, 306, 310
-position, 218 quasi-, 41, 44, 122, 144 structure, 21, 25, 34, 392 arguments for non-overt subjects, 616 arrive, 236 article, 54, 59, 408, 410-11, 417, 435;
see also determiner articulate structure, 74-6, 524 CP, 524, 536 see also Split-CP, Split-INFL assignment, 129; see also case associate, 43, 121, 301, 511, 559, 569; see also existential construction, expletive (pronoun), logical subject atmospheric it, 122 A-trace, 405, 466
AGR-to-D movement, 438, 468-9
attraction, 563-4
AGRo, 508-9, 570, 593, 608 AGRP, 97, 310-13, 432, 509 AGRs, 508-9 rich, 400, 499, 602, 636
auxiliary, 38, 62, 90, 138, 308, 315, 322 copula be, 90, 299, 303, 322, 323 modal, 56, 85, 88, 90, 246, 315, 357 abstract modal, 328
agreement, 56, 66, 83, 91, 96, 137, 144,
262, 295, 306, 310 features, 508-11, 537-8 morphology, 96, 430, 437 object, 508 possessor, 451
rich, 400, 499, 602, 636 all, 228; see also quantifier, floating ambiguity, 17, 554, 577 A-movernent, 218, 233, 241-2, 268-9,
377, 385, 445, 512, 543 anaphor, 370, 382, 465, 551
anaphoric use of pronoun, 375 antecedent, 172, 187, 189, 220, 229, 363-5, 370, 382, 384, 386, 394, 466, 512, 552, 555 split antecedents, 477 anticipatory subject, 42 anyone, 219, 341
anything, 219 Aoun, J. and A. Li, 549 AP adjoined modifier, 301 internal subject hypothesis, 288-91, 294-8 A-position, 217, 218, 268, 385 arbitrary interpretation, 127, 395-7, 401, 503, 605, 608 arbitrary reference, 36, 395 argument argument/non-argument asymmetry, 157
~
movement, 86-93, 316-18, 322
passive be, 246, 302-6 perfect have, 164, 304 possessive have, 89, 90, 164, 322, 323 progressive be, 247, 299, 300, 303, 306 see also be, have ban on stray affixes, 83-4, 527-8 base-generated non-overt argument, 390, 395-6, 400, 512 in finite clause, 397 base-position, 84, 170, 186, 189, 200-1, 203, 207, 384 of the subject, 227-8, 231-4, 244-6, 270, 292, 300, 304, 318, 326, 379-80, 389, 556 be, 88, 91, 121, 244, 246, 247, 298-9, 315, 323, 348 copula, 90, 299, 303, 322, 323 passive, 306 progressive, 247, 299, 300, 303, 306
see also auxiliary, copula, passivization Bean, M., 157
Belfast English, 283; see also HibernoEnglish belief, 446 believe, 101, 126, 136, 202 BENEFACTIVE/BENEFICIARY, 26
Beukema, FE. and P. Coopmans, 478 binary branching, 52, 73, 78, 93, 95, BIfe)
Index
660 binding, 362-5, 376-80, 394, 415, 430 A’-binding, 383 A-binding, 365, 382, 465 binder, 363 clause-mate condition, 365 closest binder, 367, 552 conditions, 364 domain, 365-7, 376-83, 416, 430, 465, 543 extension of, 368-9 reconstruction, 551 Theory, 376, 465, 551 and VP-internal subject hypothesis, 379-80
both, 228; see also quantifier, floating bound morpheme, 83-4, 527 bound pronoun, 376, 543, 545 branch, 51
branching binary.t5 2.673.275, 935,955 139. ternary, 52, 95 break the ice, 496; see also idiom Burzio, L., 473 by-phrase, 201-2, 443; see also passivization
Gao, canonical position object, 221, 235, 270 subject, 113, 123-9, 143, 199, 201-11, 227, 235-6, 242, 266, 288, 388, 411, 505-7, 556 case, 112, 127-8, 206, 402, 409, 437, 449-503, 518 abstract, 144 accusative, 94, 128-32, 144, 202, 206, 441 on AGRo, 594 assigner, 130-6, 504 assignment, 129-33, 207 case-driven, 205, 209, 220, 225, 242,
269, 502 checking, 129 dative, 129-30 filter, 132-3, 137, 144, 208-11, 243, 260, 385, 503, 507, 520 genitive, 54, 408-9, 412-14, 415, 443 licensing, 437 marking, 466 minimal case, 403, 505 nominative, 94, 128-9, 144, 206, 416-17, 421, 432, 501
null case, 403, 505 syncretism, 128 theory, 207, 210, 403, 504 and visibility, 133, 502-5, 520, 567 zero case, 403, 505 casual spoken English, 484 Catalan, 411 category, 54 causative verb, 164 have, 164 c-command, 212, 214, 229, 268, 363-4, B738R 55153 condition, 371 domain, 542, 545, 553 subject, 372 chain, 220, 233, 243, 506-7, 510, 557-9, 567, 601 A-chain, 220 CHAIN, 507 Chaucer, G., 645 checking, 129, 563, 566 theory, 562, 567, 570 Chinese, 47, 48, 549-50, 565 Cinque, G., 462 clause, 22
complements of NP, 444 modifier, 101 object, 125 subject, 114, 209 see also CP, IP clause-mate condition, 365 cleft sentence, 49, 253 closed class, 61-2, 406, 410, 418; see
also open class closest c-commanding subject, 382 ‘cluster of properties and parametric variation, 588, 596, 598
code-switching, 653 co-indexation, 34, 116, 120-1, 135,
172,186, 194, 202, 222,262 506, 510 «combien, 554 comma intonation, 522 comment, 339 comparative form, 56 comparative syntax, 581 complement, 21, 79, 124 complementary distribution, 59, 60, 98,
403, 408, 409, 417, 436, 439, 447-50, 453, 469, 504 complementation of nominal head, 440
661
Index
complementizer, 97, 98, 175, 512 deletion, 180-1, 191, 440-1, 585 hogy, 342 if, 179 null, 99-100, 440, 444, 512, 513, 586 and subject extraction, 180+1, 191, 598, 601, 620 that, 97-9, 180-1, 193 see also whether complex head, 248, 254
compositionality, 491, 494, 497, 513, 519 exception to, 497 see also idiom
compound, 256 conceptual arguments, 20 conjunct, 162 consider, 108 constant, 540 constituent, 17, 45, 63 immediate constituent, 51, 82 test, 45-6 question, 170-1, 547 constraint, 190 construction
in — with, 42-3, 202, 511 see also associate, existential construction, expletive (pronoun), extraposition contraction of article, 62
of auxiliary, 63 to-, 281 wanna-, 281
control, 34, 127, 200, 397, 401, 415-16, 503, 606, 617 locality, 35, 478 split antecedent, 477 co-ordination, 27 and gapping, 162, 251-3, 259 copula 40, 71, 88, 119, 165, 288, 290, 297; see also be copying of Event time, 536 core grammar, 626, 633, 637 Cormack, A. and N. Smith, 576 countable, 55, 59 covert movement, 543, 550, 558, 564-9, 588, 593 CP, 98):139922663337532 adjunction to, 227, 334, 350 Crisma, P., 483-4 cross-linguistic variation, 564-6, 585, 595 in the base structure 592
dative case, 129-30 possessor, 421 see also double object construction de-adjectival nouns, 411 declarative clause, 99 decomposition Of CPH287
of IP, 287 deduction, 60 default identification, 397 definite article, 59; see also determiner definiteness, 436; see also existential construction degree adverb, 56-8, 70, 291-2, 447 deixis, 61 delimitation of movement, 626 demonstrative pronoun, 59, 408, 417, 446, 450-3, 469 as maximal projection, 448 derivational approach to inflectional morphology, 562 derivational history, 384 derived position, 84, 201 of the subject, 228, 231, 233, 270, 556 structure, 171, 384 descriptive adequacy, 439 determiner (Det), 60-5, 417-18, 435, 453, 467-8 de-verbal nouns, 411, 481 diagnostic tests for constituency, 45 diary register, 484, 616 direct object, 21, 75, 124; see also AGR(o), grammatical function, object (shift) direct question, 169, 173, 546 direction, of adjunction, 423 discontinuous constituent, 53, 159, 228, 282 discourse, 330, 521, 530 connections, 536
world, 489 see also illocutionary force distance of movement, 626, 632; see also locality, Subjacency Parameter distribution, 54 of that, 584-5 ditransitive verb, 23; see also argument (structure), double object construction, thematic (role) do so, 50, 74 do-insertion, 50, 59, 90, 93, 317, 325, 529, 558, 569
Index
662 dominance, 51
do-replacement hypothesis, 559 do-support, 316 double movement, 194-8, 223-4 double object construction, 123-4, 474, 482, 576 DP, 418, 434, 467 DP-internal A-movement, 445 DP-internal head-movement, 427, 439
DP-internal landing site, 420 DP-internal movement, 419-20, 424,
445 DP-internal passivization, 445 DP-internal wh-movement, 419 D-structure, 84, 170, 200, 384, 387,
538 _dummy subject, 42; see also associate,
existential construction, expletive (pronoun) durative, 534
Dutch, 116, 553-4 Early Modern English, 156 echo-question, 47, 171 economy, 78, 208, 497, 503, 518, 528,
595, 600
Principle, 209, 564, 636 ellipsis, 166, 616 embedded clause, 22, 97, 99, 521, 533 questions, 176, 351, 526 subject—auxiliary inversion (SAI), 355 tense, 532 verb, 22 empirical evidence, 20, 60, 298, 423,
451 empty category (ec), 34, 94, 138, 383,
388, 499, 542, 582 Empty Category Principle, 398, 406, 444, 466, 499, 511-13, 520, 563, 586, 595, 600, 607 endocentricity, 20, 73, 81, 93, 109, 406, 444, 591, 595 en-extraction, 238-9
English-specific, 24, 237 entailment, 490 ergative verb, 242 event, 534
existential construction, 121, 144, 236-9, 294, 301-3, 410, 435, 501, 507, 55 7S STASOS existential there, 121; see also expletive (pronoun), expletive (there), existential construction exocentricity, 109; see also endocentricity EXPERIENCER, 26, 208
expletive do, 559; see also do-insertion il, 238, 242 tt4 1153 20253919599; 619 atmospheric it, 122, 599, 619 non-overt, 601, 602, 610 pro, 610, 612 pronoun, 41-3, 116, 127, 203, 205,
208, 502, 507, 510, 528, 566-7, 598-602 and case, 506 non-overt, 401, 601, 609, 613
in pro-drop languages, 589-602 replacement, 558, 569 and do-insertion, 559-60 and Full Interpretation, 557 and licensing of negative polarity items, 579
and quantifier scope, 578 subject, 120, 144, 391 there, 42, 121, 236, 435, 501, 559 see also existential construction extended projection, 287, 326-30, 349,
407, 409, 411, 422, 612 of A, 327 of N, 434, 467 external argument, 75, 122, 123, 199, 202-8, 412, 433 external thematic role, 232 extraction, 32
from adjunct clauses, 627 site, 32, 184, 217, 268 of the subject, 601 extraposition, 52, 53, 115-16, 120, 282,
424 from subjects, 282
feature, 135 _ abstract, 96, 563, 565, 567, 570
Event time (E), 523, 530-7, 568
agreement, 508-11, 537-8
ever, 219, 341 every, 544
checking, 563
everyone, 540 evidence, negative, 583-4, 589, 634 exclamative, 521
[interpretable], 518 [+WH], 104, 173, 180, 321, 524, 527, 547, 548, 553, 558 Fielding, H., 643
Index finite clause, 34, 94, 99
finite/non-finite asymmetry, 308 floating quantifier, 159, 228, 270, 288, 292-3, 299, 301 focalization, 343, 522 Focus Phrase (FocP), 343, 347-9,
526-7, 545, 568 stress, 522
for, 97499 -134s-1322206)504 formal logic, 539 free, 371-2 A-free, 382 everywhere, 375 locally free, 371-2
see also binding free morpheme, 83; see also affix, bound
morpheme French, 48, 61, 90, 91, 96, 105, 172-5, 237, 241-3, 294, 306-13, 322-4, 339, 348, 356, 392, 422-8, 456-61, 509, 550-4, 564-S, 587-90, 602-7 frequency adverbial, 309, 425 Frequency Phrase (FreqP), 471 Full Interpretation, 497, 504, 508 Functional
category, 20, 58, 60-2, 104, 138 head, 406 projection, 81, 104, 300, 304, 313,
326, 348 future time, 62, 571
gapping, 162, 251-3, 259 gender, 327, 612 GenP, 327-8
generalization, 72 generate, 18, 582 genitive
of, 54, 408-9, 412-14, 415, 443 Saxon, 324, 409, 411-17, 430, 435, 451, 468 German, 129-30, 422, 428-30, 590,
613 Germanic languages, 422, 565
gerund, 56, 481 get, 165 given information, 522; see also information structure GOAL, 262): government, 79, 105, 132-9, 144 grammar, 16, 18, 582 core grammar, 626, 633, 637
grammaticality, 18
663 internal consistency, 300, 461
peripheral grammar, 633 grammatical function, 16, 25, 112, 218, 2275385 grammatical subject, 42, 120; see also existential construction, expletive (pronoun) Grimshaw, J., 326
have, 38, 88, 164, 244, 247, 304-5, 315 perfect, 164, 304 possessive, 89, 90, 164, 322, 323
see also auxiliary head, 65-6, 74, 78, 95, 138, 220 head feature, 563-4 Head-Movement Constraint (HMC), 332, 345, 351, 456 movement, 245-9, 312, 318-20, 331,
340, 425-6, 448 I-to-C movement, 170, 173, 246,
466 in the NP, 427, 439 parameter, 591-2 heavy NP shift, 53, 221-2, 229, 269, 285 Henry, A., 283 Hiberno-English, 283, 355, 644 himself, 362, 363, 415, 551-2; see also binding, reflexive hogy, 342 Hungarian CP, 342-4 DP, 417, 421, 432-6, 447-50, 565-6 I-to-C movement, 170, 173, 246, 466 identification condition, 396-8, 406, 512,
556, 619 idiom, 494-7; see also compositionality idiom chunk, 497 if, 9D, AZ3=SPI7OPAS2NSL9; 321 illocutionary force, 521, 537, 568 immediate constituents, 51, 82 imperative, 521 implicit argument, 33, 99, 200; see also
empty category in situ, 48, 547, 549, 550, 566 incorporation, 125, 248, 258, 284,
443-4, 513 of the null complementizer, 513, 586 indefinite article, 59 indefinite subject, 292-4; see also existential construction indexical, 544
664
Index
indirect object, 124; see also double object construction indirect question, 72-4, 179, 186, 546 induction, 60 infinitival clause, 30, 34 relative, 191 Inflection, 82, 304, 582
INFL, 82, 85, 94 morphology, 56, 300 paradigm, 599 strength, 91, 307, 392 information structure, 517, 568
Italian, 37, 156, 390, 395-7, 411, 422-36, 448, 456, 512, 590, 597, 604-6 Javanese, 447-8 Jespersen, O., 629, 640 judgement, 14
Kayne, R., 464, 472 kick the bucket, 496; see also compositionality, idiom Kinship names, 449 knowledge of language, 582; see also
given information, 522 new information, 339, 517, 522, 527, 537, 568 old information, 339, 517, 537, 568
acquisition, grammar Kruisinga, E., 628
rheme, 517, 522, 537 theme, 517, 522, 537
landing site, 32, 184, 198, 205, 214, 217, 222, 268, 463
see also focalization, topicalization innateness hypothesis, 584; see also acquisition inner island, 184 input, 543 inquire, 137 intermediate projection, 74, 77, 79, 139 intermediate trace, 212, 268, 384 internal argument, 75, 122, 199, 412; see also external argument interrogative force, 99, 169, 220, 383, 548; see also inversion interval (time), 531, 533-4 intervener, 217-18, 380 intervention, 177 intransitive, 22, 242-4; see also argument (structure), one-argument verb, unaccusative verb intuitions, 14 invariance, 585, 595; see also parameter inversion, 92, 219, 341 negative, 224, 334 SAL, 19354152119617191 2401854203, 210, 224, 246, 258, 334, 420, 526 ©
IP, 94-5, 139 adjunction, 117 Irish English, 282; see also Hiberno-English irregular verb, 56 island, 183 inner islands, 184
it, 41, 195, 120; 163,02028205,398 atmospheric it, 122 see also expletive (pronoun), extraposition
label, 51, 63
of N-movement, 428 of V-movement, 310 language acquisition, 634; see also acquisition language acquisition device, 584, 634 language capacity, 582 language-internal variation, 637 language-specific, 25, 582 language typology, 539, 560, 564 OV languages, 591 VO languages, 590
see also parameter last resort, 90, 208, 209, 528, 632,
637 launching site, 217, 220; see also landing site
layering, 73-6; see also X-bar theory left-adjunction, 80, 424 leftward movement, 220, 433
of the object, 592 of the subject, 233 of the verb, 425 levels of representation, 538; see also D-structure, Logical Form, S-structure lexical category, 20, 54-8, 61, 104, 138 head, 406
projection, 326 restriction, 259 rule, 147
verb, 90, 138 see also auxiliary LE, see Logical Form
Index
licensing, 129-33 of agreement features, 538 of grammatical features, 567 Lightfoot, D., 357 linear order, 54, 543 literal interpretation, 495; sée also idiom Lobeck, A., 166
locality, 31, 35, 79, 104-7, 130-4, 138, 169, 176-8, 181-4, 191, 198, 205, 215-18, 234, 260, 268, 298, 3053°328;, 331; 362,396, 450; $18, 595, 626 antecedent, 394 argument selection, 383 binding, 365, 380 control, 35, 478 domain, 415, 465 head-movement, 340, 518 interpretation, 517 movement, 290-6, 332, 338-40, 351,
381, 386, 525, 596 NP-movement, 218 wh-movement, 218
principle, 217 relation, 79, 95, 139, 444 selection, 328 Subjacency Parameter, 631 tense interpretation, 535 violation, 630
see also binding, head (HeadMovement Constraint), island, minimality LOCATION, 26 logic, 542 Logical Form, 489, 539, 543-5, 548,
665
matching grammatical features, 563 head, 563 lexical element, 570 matrix clause, 22, 101
CP, 99 subject, 22 verb, 22, 99 maximal projection, 74, 78 minimal maximal projection, 80 segment, 80-1, 139 VP-shell, 125, 475 see also adjunction, extended projection, head, intermediate projection, projection
May, R., 575
McCloskey, J., 282, 355 measure phrase, 154, 279 merger, 194
Middle English, 646 middle-formation, 481 minimal case, 403, 505 minimality, 31, 105, 134, 179; see also locality modal adjunct, 29 modal auxiliaries abstract modal and subjunctive, 328 auxiliary, 56, 85, 88, 90, 246, 315 mood, 99; see also subjunctive morphological case, 127, 594; see also case movement, 32, 46, 138, 169, 176, 518,
main clause, 22 manner adverb, 301 mapping
543 A-, 218, 233, 241-2, 268-9, 377, 385, 445, 512, 543 A’, 218, 223, 226, 268, 384, 420, 512, 543 abstract, 543, 550, 558, 564-9, 588, 593 AGR-to-D, 438, 468-9 quantifier, 543 auxiliary, 86-93, 316-18, 322 covert, 543, 550, 558, 564-9, 588, 593 delimitation of, 626 distance of, 632 double, 194-8, 223-4 DP-internal, 419-20, 424, 455
marked, 629 Marlowe, C., 640 mass nouns, 55, 59
head-movement, 427, 439 wh-movement, 419 expletive replacement, 558, 569 head, 245-9, 312, 318-20, 331, 340, 424-5, 439, 448
566, 569 logical subject, 42, 391; see also associate, existential construction,
expletive (pronoun), grammatical subject Longobardi, G., 411
lowering, 84, 87, 90, 215, 229, 316, 317, 561-2, 570
between form and interpretation, 501, 519, 536-8, 567, 568 of S-structure onto Logical Form, 566
A-movement, 445
Index
666
332, 345, 351, 456 heavy NP shift, 53, 221-2, 229, 269, 285 I-to-C, 170, 173, 246, 466
new information, 339, 517, 522, 527, 537, 568; see also information structure node, 51 nominal agreement, 428 parameter, 590
landing site of, 32, 184, 198, 205, 214,
nominative case, 94, 128-9, 144, 206,
movement (cont’d) Head-Movement Constraint (HMC),
217, 222, 268, 463 leftward, of the of the of the
220, 433 object, 592 subject, 233 verb, 425
LE, 543-5, 569 locality, 290-6, 332, 338-40, 351, 381, 386, 525, 596 multiple wh-, 178, 333 of N, 428, 459, 480, 565, 589 to AGR, 565, 589 to D, 449, 455 object shift, 593-4, 608 quantifier, 547 raising, 543, 547, 566, 569 raising
NP-, 84, 199, 202-10, 225, 291, 323, 445-6, 543 quantifier (QR), 543, 547, 566, 569 verb, 290, 298-306, 348 wh-, 547
rightward, 53, 221, 228, 282 step-by-step, 381 Subjacency, 631 of subject, 181-4, 188, 190 of verb, 86-93, 310-13, 316-18, 425, 564, 569 VP-fronting and reconstruction, 555 wh-, 47-8, 170-84, 198, 212, 268, 318, 383, 512, 547, 550, 566, 593 narrow scope, 541 negation, 89, 219, 306, 311, 315 ne, 320 Neg, 311, 313-20 NegP, 311, 313-20, 529 not, 89, 307, 308, 317-20, 529 n't, 318-20, 529 pas, 90, 307-8, 311, 320 negative constituent, 224, 269, 333-9, 350, 354 island, 184 negative, 224, 334
polarity items, 341 preposing, 224, 334
416-17, 421, 432, 501 non-branching, 75 non-finite, 34, 94, 99, 308-9, 366 non-local selection, 105 non-NP objects, 125 non-overt, 34, 127, 511 antecedent, 189, 395 argument, 388, 394, 597 complementizer, 99-100, 440, 444,
512-13, 645 expletive, 401, 598-9, 601, 609, 613 external argument, 94, 397, 399 infinitival complementizer, 645 modal, 325, 328, 513 object, 604-8, 613 pronoun, 400, 597
relative pronoun, 190-3, 629 subject, 35, 94, 113, 127, 133, 145, 192, 299, 383, 388-91, 398, 503, 602, 636 in abbreviated register, 619 in finite clauses, 597 in imperatives, 478 in smali clauses, 609 wh-constituent, 526 see also empty category noun category, 21, 54 de-adjectival, 411 de-verbal, 411, 481 Ni877 N-movement, 428, 459, 480, 565, 589
to AGR, 565, 589 to D, 449, 455 projection (NP), 21, 64-5, 361, 419, 464
see also NP NP, 21
adjunction to, 422, 453, 454, 458
internal specifier, 457 movement, 204-9, 226, 268, 377, 385, pul2)
see also A-movement, DP, noun null case, 403
complementizer, 100, 440, 444, 512, 513, 586
667
Index
determiner, 437
subject, 390, 499 see also base-generated non-overt argument, empty category, PRO,
pro number, 327, 612
feature, 508 NumP, 327-8 object, 16,725; 122,227 agreement, 510, 608 OV, 646 position, 238 pronoun, 608 shift, 593-4, 608 parameter, 594 see also grammatical function
particle, 252, 257-8, 442 incorporation, 258-60 projection (PrtP), 258-62, 267, 271
Prt, 258 pas, 90, 307-8, 311, 320
passivization, 123-6, 165, 199, 202-7, 225, 414, 443-5 auxiliary, 246 be, 302-6 by-phrase, 201-2, 443 in DP, 443 morphology, 200-2, 516 in NP, 414 participle, 207, 305 past participle, 56, 306 past tense, 533
of, 137, 144, 207, 409, 442
PATIENT, 25, 26, 199
genitive, 54, 408-9, 412-14, 415, 443 Old English, 157, 244, 354, 450, 483,
percolation, 329-30 perfect
594 old information, 339, 517, 537 one, 77, 402 one-argument verb, 235-6, 290 open class, 61, 406, 409; see also closed class operator, 341, 540-8, 569 quantificational, 546-7 OV languages, 591 overlapping predication, 516
aspect, 244 auxiliary, 247 have, 164, 304 participle, 305 peripheral grammar, 633 person, 612 phonetic content, 396 reduction of article, 62
overt argument, 34 movement, 564, 588 wh-movement, 550, 566, 593 see also non-overt
of auxiliary, 63 of n’t, 320 phrase, 46, 51, 63 place-holder, 510; see also associate, expletive (pronoun), logical
paradigm, 91, 95-6, 397 parameter 584-5, 595, 636
subject, subject (requirement) plural morphology, 55 point of Reference, 530
object shift, 594 pro-drop, 597, 603, 637
point of Speech, 530 polarity item, 219
resetting, 594 Subjacency, 631
Pollock, J.-Y., 308 possessive
parametric variation, 588
have, 89, 90, 164, 322-4
paraphrases, 394, 490
pronoun, 54, 60, 408-9, 415-17, 430,
parasitic gap, 194-8, 223-4 participant roles, 25
participle, 300-4, 510 morphology, 302
passive, 207, 305 past, 56, 306 perfect, 305
present, 56, 306 progressive, 535
435—6, 451,'468
possessive pronoun, 54, 60, 408-9,
415-17, 430, 435-6, 451, 468
possessor, 324, 453
phrase, 409, 411, 415-17, 421, 430, 432, 440-50, 467
raising, 438, 469 Postal, P., 154, 642
668
Index
post-nominal adjectives, 424 post-verbal subject, 237-8, 557, 601-2, 636 definite, 601-2, 636 indefinite, 243, 507 see also associate, existential construction, logical subject potential antecedent, 367 binder, 552
landing site, 205, 217-18, 290, 381, 384, 518, 525
Poutsma, H., 629
PP, see prepositional phrase precedence, 363 predicate, 22, 40, 71, 77, 88 predication, 22, 515 overlapping, 516 preposing adjuncts, 530 time adjunct, 522 see also focalization, topicalization, wh-(movement) preposition, 21, 58, 67, 250
complementizer, 131; see also for phrase (PP), see prepositional phrase stranding, 266, 443 see also particle prepositional phrase (PP), 21, 67 as object, 126 as subject, 119, 210 present participle, 56, 306 present perfect, 38, 531 primitive, 112, 143, 227 Principle, 423, 584-5, 595, 635
A, 552; see also binding B, 552; see also binding C, 552; see also binding compositionality, 498; see also idiom Economy, 209, 498, 600 Full Interpretation, 498, 499, 502-6,
510, 518-20, 540, 547, 557, 563, 566-7, 586, 595 and parameters, 582 PRO, 401-5, 466, 503-4, 512 pro, 400-5, 466, 499, 504, 512, 582, 597, processing, 19 procrastination, 563-4 pro-drop language, 37, 597, 636 parameter, 597, 603, 637
productive process, 147
progressive auxiliary auxiliary, 247, 299, 300, 303, 306 participle, 535 projection, 65, 74, 78, 138 maximal, 74, 78 minimal maximal, 80 promise, 35 pronoun, 127, 263, 363, 371-2, 415,
465, 544 accusative, 131
arbitrary, 395 binding, 371-3 bound, 376, 543, 545 demonstrative, 59, 408, 417, 446, 450-3, 469 expletive, 41-3, 116, 127, 203, 205, 208, 502, 507, 510, 528, 566-7, 600-2 and case, 506 non-overt, 401, 601, 609, 613 interpretation and VP-deletion, 574 possessive, 54, 60, 415-17, 430,
435-6, 451, 468 relative, 186-7, 269, 351 non-overt, 190-3, 629 weak, 264 proper names, 449 proposition, 489 Prt, see particle pseudo-cleft sentence, 50, 69, 82 psychological verb, 445, 515 QR, see quantifier (raising) quantified DP, 544 quantifier, 228, 489, 539, 540-2 floating, 159 interpretation, 539 movement, 547
raising (QR), 543, 547, 566, 569 scope, 341, 540-5 domain, 547 position, 541-7, 566-9
» quasi-argument, 41, 44, 122, 144 raising
adjective, 279 NP-movement, 84, 199, 202-10, 225,
291, 323, 445-6, 543 quantifier (QR), 543, 547, 566, 569 verb, 290, 298-306, 348 wh-, 547 range, 540 rationale adjunct, 200, 414
669
Index real subject, 42; see also associate, existential construction, logical subject recipe text, 161, 639; see also register
reciprocals, 370; see also binding reconstruction, 551-3, 556-70 R-expression, 373, 376, 382, 465
reference, 65
point (R), 523, 530-3
RIZZI ee Ol oOo Roberts, I., 646 Romance languages, 422, 448, 449-54, 456 Romanian, 449 root clausen22-96, 101,°170,-521,-617 interrogatives, 351 question, 173, 176, 526
time, 523, 530-6, 568
referent, 42, 66, 362, 539 referential expression (R-expression), 362, 373-6, 382, 465, 540 NP, 373-6
pro, 612
referentially dependent, 362-3, 370 reflexive, 362-5, 370, 380, 415, 465, 512, 551-2, 606
contained within subjects, 368 as subjects, 367-8 regional variation, 644; see also HibernoEnglish, Irish English register, 59, 160, 484, 614-17, 626, 637, 641 abbreviated, 614, 637 diary, 484, 616
formal English, 323 informal! English, 160, 172
informal speech, 616 informal written notes, 614 recipe, 161, 639 spoken English, 614 regular verb, 56 relational argument, 413 relative clause, 186-94, 269, 346, 629 pronoun, 186-7, 269, 351 representation, 1, 384, 582, 601
resetting of parameter, 594 restrictive theory, 20 rheme, 517, 522, 537; see also information structure, theme rich AGR, 602 agreement, 400, 499
AGRs, 636
inflection, 511 Right Hand Head Rule, 256-7
Right Node Raising (RNR), 52, 77, 162, 253 right-adjunction, 80
rightward movement, 53, 221, 228, 282
SAVE11
3911511951171) 1749.1857.203,
210, 224, 246, 258, 334, 420, 526 Saxon genitive, 324, 409, 411-17, 430,
435, 451, 468
scene-setter, 522-3, 537-8
Schmerling, S., 616 scope, 341, 540-7 domain, 547 narrow, 541
position, 541-7, 566-9 wide, 541
see also quantifier, reconstruction seem, 323 segment, 80-1, 139; see also adjunction selection, 22—4, 104, 107, 518, 526 restrictions, 24 semantics, 489, 539 semi-colon, 591 sentence, 23 sentence-medial, 84-90, 139, 317, 425
sentential negation, see negation sequence of tense, 532, 568 Shakespeare, W., 578 shell, 125, 475; see also double object construction shortest move, 290, 318 shortest steps, 217, 384, 552; see also locality SIH, 213 SiP, 459, 470 size projection, 470 small clause, 108-9, 131, 142, 294, 366, 441, 446, 515, 540 subject 120 SOURCE, 26 souvent, 90, 309
SOV languages, 590 specifier, 79, 95, 98, 139, 261, 564 agreement with head, 95, 135, 508 of CR 79 of DP, 420, 447 features, 563 of IP, 2284251
Index
670 specifier (cont’d) of NegP, 318, 529 of NP, 408 Speech time (S), 523, 530-5, 568 Spell-Out, 171, 201, 384, 538-9, 543,
563-4; see also S-structure split antecedent, 477; see also antecedent, control Split-CP hypothesis, 349
Split-INFL hypothesis, 97, 306-10, 348 S-structure, 84, 171, 200, 205, 384, 538-9 standard logic, 541 state, 531-5 stipulation, 423-4, 459
stranding, 267 stray affix, 83-4, 527-8
strength of of of of of
case feature, 594 DP-internal AGR, 590 functional heads, 595 head-feature, 563 inflection; 91, 307, 392
of of of of
nominal specifier feature, 563-4 pronouns, 264 specifier feature, 392 verbal AGR, 563-6, 588
stress, 528
styles, 632, 637 subcategorization, 24-8 Subjacency Parameter, 631
subject, 16, 22, 25, 43, 112, 227 auxiliary-inversion (SAI), 71, 113, 115, 119, 171, 174, 185, 203, 210, 224, 246, 258, 334, 420, 526 of DP, 430, 443 extraction, 181-4, 188, 190 forms, 557 intermediate position, 205, 302, 381
internal hypothesis (SIH), 231 movement, 318
of NP, 416, 417 position, 129, 291 of predication, 22, 515-17 pronoun, 37, 94 relatives, 193 requirement, 126-7, 144, 205, 208,
388, 391, 397-401, 430, 439, 563, 599, 601, 617 to-Object Raising, 155, 642 trace, 193
VP-internal subject hypothesis, 227, 231-4, 246, 270, 300, 304, 318, 326, 379-80, 389, 556
subject/object asymmetry, 182 subjectless clauses, 394, 616; see also empty category, non-overt (pronoun), pro subjunctive, 105-6, 324, 513, 521 selection, 328 subordinate clauses, 22, 97, 99 subordinating conjunction, 97; see also
complementizer, if, that, whether subscript, 34 substitution, 46 test, 73, 76 suit, 119
superlative form of adjective, 56 surface structure, see S-structure SVO languages, 590 symbol in the representation, 501-2, 518-19, 540 syncretism (case), 128
syntax, driven by morphology, 603 telephone, 236 temporal calculus, 571 computations, 531-8 interpretation, 531-8, 568 reference, 523
tense (T), 56, 95-6, 172, 306, 310, 527, 536 inflection, 82 interpretation, see temporal (interpretation)
morphemes, 96, 306 projection (TP), 97, 310-13 tenseless clauses, 109, 142 terminal nodes, 63 ternary branching, 52, 95 that POT p99 Rigs thematic position, 211 of the subject, 235, 244, 270, 288 relations, 387 rolep25;:92123 137 structure, 21 THEME, 26 theme, 517, 522, 537; see also information structure, rheme
theoretical argument, 298 there, 121, 205, 243, 407, 557; see also existential construction, expletive (pronoun), subject (requirement) theta-assigner, 32 theta-criterion, 25-8, 49, 137, 390, 503 theta-role, 25, 133, 137
Index Thrasher, R., 616 time adjunct, 532 adverbials, 568 of Event, 530-6 future, 62, 571 interval, 531 of Reference, 523, 530-6, 568 of Speech, 523, 530-6, 568 timing
checking, 563 language typology, 565 of movement, 546, 560, 566-7, 588, $90,.593 N-movement, 565 N-to-AGR movement,
593
671
unbounded, underlying position, structure, understood
177 84 84 object argument, 605
ungrammatical representation, 602 ungrammaticality, 18 uninterpretable symbol, 499 universal, 25, 582 universal base hypothesis, 592 Universal Grammar (UG), 584, 586, 595,
634 universal quantifier, 540-1 up, 250; see also particle, preposition
V, 74
object shift, 593-4
movement, 86-93, 310-13, 316-18,
V-movement, 569 V-to-AGR movement, 564, 593 wh-movement, 566, 569
425, 569 V-to-AGR, 564, 569
ta, 132
V-to-C movement, 589, 596 V-to-I movement, 307-8
to-contraction, 281
Nod Does
Top, 339 topic, 517 feature, 339-40
Valois, D., 461 Van der Wurff, W., 646 van Kemenade, A. van, 157, 594 variable, 540-7, 566, 569 verb, 56, 270 abstract, 125 activity, 534-6 causative, 164 de-verbal nouns, 411, 481 ditransitive, 23 embedded, 22 ergative, 242 incorporation, 125 and inflection, 84 irregular, 56 lexical, 90, 138 matrix, 22, 99 movement, 86-93, 310-13, 316-18, 425, 569 one-argument, 235-6, 290 projection, 68 ellipsis, 353 fronting and reconstruction, 555 psychological, 445, 515 raising, 290, 298-306, 348 regular, 56 unaccusative verb, 242-5, 270, 290, 298 see also agreement, argument (structure), auxiliary, be, copula, have, tense,
Phrase (TopP), 339, 349, 516, 523,
526, 568 topicalization, 225-6, 269, 336-7, 350,
421, 464, 522 toujours, 90 TP, 97,.310=13 trace, 172, 184, 186, 189, 203-4, 212, 220, 229, 233, 268, 383-4, 402, 427, 5125635 A-bar (A’), 405, 466 A-trace, 405, 466
traditional grammar, 640 transformation, 185, 445 transitive, 21, 235, 241 transparency, 132, 135, 258-60 tree diagram, 51, 138 trigger for N-movement, 429-30
triggering experience, 583-4, 592, 634 truth conditions, 490 truth value, 521
typology
of empty categories, 383, 395, 405,
466, 512 of NP, 362 ultimate constituents, 46 unaccusative verb, 242-5, 270, 290, 298;
see also one-argument verb
transitive, verb phrase
Index
672 verb phrase (VP), 68 adjoined adverbial, 293, 415, 461 base-position of the subject, 227-8,
231-4, 244-6, 270, 292, 300, 304, 318, 326, 379-80, 389, 556 deletion, 574 do so, 50, 74 ellipsis, 353 fronting and reconstruction, 555 -internal subject hypothesis, 227,
231-4, 246, 270, 300, 304, 318, 326, 379-80, 389, 556 consequences for A-movement, 380 consequences for binding, 379-80 layering, 74-5 pseudo-cleft, 50 shell, 125 verbal agreement, 612 parameter, 588 verbal inflection, 398 verbless clauses, 109, 142; see also small clause
weather verb, 43, 122, 391 and pro-drop languages, 598-9 well-formed, 14 West Ulster English, 282; see also Hiberno-English whabsorption, 548 constituent, 170 in situ, 47-8, 173, 547 island, 184, 195 movement, 47-8, 170-84, 198, 212,
268, 318,383, Si2,0547 95505 56632593 operator, 547 phrase, 47, 170, 269 as operator, 545 question, 170-3, 182, 383 raising, 547
whether, 99, 133, 173, 175, 283, 319, 321 White, L., 583 wide scope, 541
verb-particle combination, 255, 258, 259,
will, 62
visibility, 133, 502-5, 520, 567
word-order, 53 variation, 587, 590
265-1,.27eaAd
and movement, 505 Visser, FE. T., 629
VO languages, 591 VP, see verb phrase wanna-contraction, 281 wat, 554 weak AGR, 564 inflection, 91, 307, 437, 563, 566
pronoun, 264 weather it, 122, 144, 598-9
with, 109
X’, see X-bar X-bar (X’) format, 78, 93, 139, 464, 472, 590-1 X-bar schema, 406, 590 X-bar theory, 78, 98, 109
yes/no question, 170, 173 zero case, 403, 505; see also minimal case, null (case)
‘a
a.
i
.
ss
yr>
Ss”
,
$04
as if
.
=
he
>
th
wire »
VO bangwpgen. 294
p ver pease
,
:
are 045
, et
&.
ee
Xe OE) owt,
&
=
—-) ¥
SF, PR, ee, ara,
,
= . = 4
at oD
if
———
@
‘A stunning achievement and certainly the definitive generative work on English syntax.’ William Rutherford, University of Southern California ‘This is a book that university departments of English have long needed. Haegeman and Guéron offer a compendious treatment of the idiosyncrasies of English and do so with the coherence and lucidity provided by a general theory of grammar. Students will learn much about English and much about grammatical theory.’ David Lightfoot, University of Maryland
Intended primarily for undergraduate students of English, this book will also be useful for undergraduates in linguistics focusing on English. It shows how a restricted set of principles can account for a wide Be of the phenomena of English syntax.
While the main focus of the book is empirical, it introduces important theoretical concepts: theta theory, X-bar theory, case theory, locality, binding theory, economy, full interpretation and functional projections. In so doing it prepares the student for more advanced theoretical work. The authors integrate many recent insights into the nature of syntactic structure into their discussion. They present information in a gradual way: hypotheses developed in early chapters are reviewed and modified in subsequent ones. Attention is also paid to the relation between structure and interpretation and to language variation, particularly register variation. A wide range of diverse exercises are included, giving the student an opportunity for creative individual work on English. Liliane Haegeman and Jacqueline Guéron Liliane Haegeman is Professor of English Linguistics at the University of Geneva. Her previous books include Introduction to Government and Binding Theory, Second Edition (Blackwell 1994), |
;
Jacqueline Guéron is Professor of Linguistics at Université de Paris [II - Sorbonne ‘ Nouvelle. Cover illustration: Paul Rie Vorhaben / Intention, 1938, 126 (J 6), coloured paste on paper on burlap, . 75 x 112 cm. Kunstmusetim Bern, Paul-Klee-Stiftung, Inv. Nr. B 26.
© DACS
1998.
Cover design by Designers and Partners
Printed in Great Britain Visit our website at http://www.blackwellpublishers.co.uk
Visit our abstracting service, Linguistics Abstracts Online, at http://www.blackwellpublishers.co.uk.labs ~ ISBN 0-631-18839-8
BLACKWELL | Publishers
| |
19 "780631'188391
|;